Mitsubishi Electronics Inverter Fr F700 Na Users Manual INSTRUCTION

FR-F700-NA to the manual f2797614-ffe4-4818-8cb7-2a5d7ce7bcd2

: Mitsubishi-Electronics Mitsubishi-Electronics-Inverter-Fr-F700-Na-Users-Manual-556735 mitsubishi-electronics-inverter-fr-f700-na-users-manual-556735 mitsubishi-electronics pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 416

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

F700_ouyouhen_NA_COVER.fm

1 ページ

２０１０年６月１６日　水曜日　午後２時３３分

INVERTER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INVERTER

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-G (1006)MEE Printed in Japan

Specifications subject to change without notice.

FR-F700-NA INSTRUCTION MANUAL

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

G

FR-F720-00046 to 04750-NA
FR-F740-00023 to 12120-NA
OUTLINE

1

WIRING

2

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
OF THE INVERTER

3

PARAMETERS

4

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

5

PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

6

SPECIFICATIONS

7

Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual provides instructions for advanced use of the FR-F700 series inverters.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always read this Instruction Manual and the Installation
Guideline [IB-0600218ENG] packed with the product carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.

Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the inverter
until you have read through Installation Guideline and appended
documents carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not
use the inverter until you have a full knowledge of the equipment,
safety information and instructions. In this Instruction Manual, the
safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and
"CAUTION".

WARNING

Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in death or severe
injury.

CAUTION

Incorrect handling may cause hazardous
conditions, resulting in medium or slight
injury, or may cause only material damage.

CAUTION level may even lead to a serious consequence
The
according to conditions. Both instruction levels must be followed
because these are important to personal safety.

1. Electric Shock Prevention

WARNING

• While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open
the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover
removed.
Otherwise you may access the exposed high-voltage terminals
or the charging part of the circuitry and get an electric shock.
• Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for
wiring or periodic inspection. You may accidentally touch the
charged inverter circuits and get an electric shock.
• Before wiring, inspection or switching EMC filter ON/OFF
connector, power must be switched OFF. To confirm that, LED
indication of the operation panel must be checked. (It must be
OFF.) Any person who is involved in wiring, inspection or
switching EMC filter ON/OFF connector shall wait for at least
10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF and
check that there are no residual voltage using a tester or the
like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time
after power OFF, and it is dangerous.
• This inverter must be grounded. Grounding must conform to
the requirements of national and local safety regulations and
electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other
applicable standards).
A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V
class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
• Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this
equipment shall be fully competent to do the work.
• The inverter must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you
may get an electric shock or be injured.
• Setting dial and key operations must be performed with dry
hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you may get an
electric shock.
• Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress,
heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an electric
shock.
• Do not replace the cooling fan while power is ON. It is
dangerous to replace the cooling fan while power is ON.
• Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with
wet hands. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259
Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC voltage is
applied to the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the
motor terminal, etc. right after powering OFF to prevent an
electric shock.

2. Fire Prevention

CAUTION
• Inverter must be installed on a nonflammable wall without holes
(so that nobody touches the inverter heatsink on the rear side,
etc.). Mounting it to or near flammable material can cause a fire.
• If the inverter has become faulty, the inverter power must be
switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current could cause a fire.
• Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and
N/-. Doing so could cause a fire.
3. Injury Prevention

CAUTION
• The voltage applied to each terminal must be the ones
specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise burst, damage,
etc. may occur.
• The cables must be connected to the correct terminals.
Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
• Polarity must be correct. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may
occur.
• While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not
touch the inverter since the inverter will be extremely hot.
Doing so can cause burns.
4. Additional Instructions
Also the following points must be noted to prevent an accidental failure,
injury, electric shock, etc.

(1) Transportation and installation

CAUTION

• The product must be transported in correct method that
corresponds to the weight. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
• Do not stack the boxes containing inverters higher than the
number recommended.
• The product must be installed to the position where withstands
the weight of the product according to the information in the
Instruction Manual.
• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or has
parts missing. This can result in breakdowns.
• When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front cover or
setting dial; it may fall off or fail.
• Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
• The inverter mounting orientation must be correct.
• Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering
the inverter. That includes screws and metal fragments or
other flammable substance such as oil.
• As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject
it to impact.
• The inverter must be used under the following environment:
Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.

Environment

This section is specifically about safety matters

LD
Surrounding air
SLD
temperature
(initial
setting)
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature
Atmosphere

Altitude, vibration

-10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F)
(non-freezing)
-10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F)
(non-freezing)
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C *1 (-4°F to 149°F)
Indoors (free from corrosive gas,
flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Maximum 1000m (3280.80feet) above
sea level for standard operation. After
that derate by 3% for every extra 500m
(1640.40feet) up to 2500m (8202feet)
(91%). 5.9m/s2 or less *2 at 10 to 55Hz
(directions of X, Y, Z axes)

*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
*2 2.9m/s2 or less for the FR-F740-04320 or more.

A-1

(2) Wiring

CAUTION

• Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge
suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side.
These devices on the inverter output side may be overheated
or burn out.
• The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the
motor affects the rotation direction of the motor.
(3) Test operation and adjustment

CAUTION

• Before starting operation, each parameter must be confirmed
and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause some machines to
make unexpected motions.
(4) Operation

WARNING

• Any person must stay away from the equipment when the retry
function is set as it will restart suddenly after trip.
• Since pressing

•

•

•
•

key may not stop output depending on

the function setting status, separate circuit and switch that
make an emergency stop (power OFF, mechanical brake
operation for emergency stop, etc.) must be provided.
OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before
resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter alarm with the
start signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.
The inverter must be used for three-phase induction motors.
Connection of any other electrical equipment to the inverter
output may damage the equipment.
Do not modify the equipment.
Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this
manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the inverter.

CAUTION
• The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee
protection of the motor from overheating. It is recommended to
install both an external thermal and PTC thermistor for
overheat protection.
• Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for
frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise the life of
the inverter decreases.
• The effect of electromagnetic interference must be reduced by
using a noise filter or by other means. Otherwise nearby
electronic equipment may be affected.
• Appropriate measures must be taken to suppress harmonics.
Otherwise power supply harmonics from the inverter may heat/
damage the power factor correction capacitor and generator.
• When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, the motor
must be an insulation-enhanced motor or measures must be
taken to suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage attributable to
the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals,
deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
• When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed, the
required parameters must be set again before starting
operations because all parameters return to the initial value.
• The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation. Before
changing its setting, the performances of the motor and
machine must be fully examined.
• Stop status cannot be hold by the inverter's brake function. In
addition to the inverter's brake function, a holding device must
be installed to ensure safety.
• Before running an inverter which had been stored for a long
period, inspection and test operation must be performed.
• For prevention of damage due to static electricity, nearby metal
must be touched before touching this product to eliminate
static electricity from your body.

A-2

(5) Emergency stop

CAUTION

• A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be
provided to prevent hazardous condition to the machine and
equipment in case of inverter failure.
• When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, the wiring
must be checked for fault (short circuit), and internal parts of
the inverter for a damage, etc. The cause of the trip must be
identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.
• When any protective function is activated, appropriate
corrective action must be taken, and the inverter must be reset
before resuming operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

CAUTION

• Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the
control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
(7) Disposing of the inverter

CAUTION

• The inverter must be treated as industrial waste.
General instructions

Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction Manual
show the inverter without a cover or partially open for
explanation. Never operate the inverter in this manner. The
cover must be always reinstalled and the instruction in this
Instruction Manual must be followed when operating the inverter.

CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1.1

Product checking and parts identification ........................................................ 2

1.2

Inverter and peripheral devices.......................................................................... 3

1.2.1

2

Peripheral devices ..................................................................................................................... 4

1.3

Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover ................................. 6

1.4

Installation of the inverter and enclosure design............................................. 8

1.4.1

Inverter installation environment................................................................................................ 8

1.4.2

Cooling system types for inverter enclosure............................................................................ 10

1.4.3

Inverter placement................................................................................................................... 10

WIRING
2.1

13

Wiring.................................................................................................................. 14

2.1.1

Terminal connection diagram .................................................................................................. 14

2.1.2

EMC filter................................................................................................................................. 15

2.2

Main circuit terminal specifications................................................................. 16

2.2.1

Specification of main circuit terminal ....................................................................................... 16

2.2.2

Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring ......... 16

2.2.3

Cables and wiring length ......................................................................................................... 21

2.2.4

When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the power supply....... 25

2.3

Control circuit specifications ........................................................................... 27

2.3.1

Control circuit terminals ........................................................................................................... 27

2.3.2

Changing the control logic ....................................................................................................... 30

2.3.3

Control circuit terminal layout .................................................................................................. 32

2.3.4

Wiring instructions ................................................................................................................... 33

2.3.5

Mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07) on the enclosure surface ....................................... 34

2.3.6

RS-485 terminal block ............................................................................................................. 35

2.3.7

Communication operation........................................................................................................ 35

2.4

3

1

Connection of stand-alone option units.......................................................... 36

2.4.1

Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ................................................................................... 36

2.4.2

Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)....................................................................... 38

2.4.3

Connection of the brake unit (BU type) ................................................................................... 40

2.4.4

Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC/MT-HC)............................................. 40

2.4.5

Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
(FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less) ............................................................................ 42

2.4.6

Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
(FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)........................................................................... 43

2.4.7

Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL) ............................................ 44

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

45

I

CONTENTS

1

3.1

EMC and leakage currents ................................................................................46

3.1.1

Leakage currents and countermeasures ................................................................................. 46

3.1.2

EMC measures ........................................................................................................................ 48

3.1.3

Power supply harmonics.......................................................................................................... 50

3.2

Installation of a reactor......................................................................................51

3.3

Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)........................................................51

3.4

Inverter-driven 400V class motor......................................................................52

3.5

Precautions for use of the inverter...................................................................53

3.6

Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter...............................................55

4

PARAMETERS
4.1

Operation panel (FR-DU07) ...............................................................................58

4.1.1

Component of the operation panel (FR-DU07)........................................................................ 58

4.1.2

Basic operation (factory setting) .............................................................................................. 59

4.1.3

Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)................................................................... 60

4.1.4

Changing the parameter setting value..................................................................................... 61

4.1.5

Displaying the set frequency.................................................................................................... 61

4.2

Parameter list......................................................................................................62

4.2.1

4.3

Parameter list........................................................................................................................... 62

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor................................ 78

4.3.1

Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) ........................................................................................ 78

4.3.2

Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr.80, Pr.90) ................................................................. 79

4.3.3

Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)................................................................................... 80

4.3.4

Stall prevention operation
(Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157) ................. 81

4.3.5

Multiple rating (Pr. 570) .......................................................................................................... 86

4.4

Limiting the output frequency.......................................................................... 87

4.4.1

Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)................................................................ 87

4.4.2

Avoiding mechanical resonance points (Frequency jump) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36).......................... 88

4.5

V/F pattern.......................................................................................................... 89

4.5.1

Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ....................................................................... 89

4.5.2

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ............................................................................................... 91

4.5.3

Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109)................................................................ 92

4.6

II

57

Frequency setting by external terminals ........................................................ 93

4.6.1

Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239).................. 93

4.6.2

Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ................................................................................................. 95

4.6.3

Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting (Pr. 28) ............................................. 97

4.6.4

Remote setting function (Pr. 59) ............................................................................................. 98

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and
acceleration/deceleration pattern ................................................................ 101

4.7.1

Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147) ............................................................. 101

4.7.2

Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571) ......................................... 104

4.7.3

Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143).............................................. 105

4.8

Selection and protection of a motor ............................................................. 107

4.8.1

Motor protection from overheat (Electronic thermal relay function) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51) ............... 107

4.8.2

Applied motor (Pr. 71) .......................................................................................................... 111

4.9

Motor brake and stop operation.................................................................... 112

4.9.1

DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)..................................................................................... 112

4.9.2

Selection of a regenerative brake and DC feeding (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) ...................................... 114

4.9.3

Stop selection (Pr. 250) ........................................................................................................ 119

4.9.4

Output stop function (Pr. 522) .............................................................................................. 120

4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control ............................... 122
4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189) ........................................................... 122
4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)............................................................... 124
4.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by the second function selection
signal (RT) (RT signal, Pr. 155)............................................................................................ 125
4.10.4 Start signal selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250) ..................................................... 126
4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 196)......................................................... 128
4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 870)......... 133
4.10.7 Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167) .............................................. 135
4.10.8 Remote output function (REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497) .................................................... 137
4.10.9 Pulse train output of output power (Y79 signal, Pr. 799) ...................................................... 138

4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal .................................................. 139
4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 505) ................................................. 139
4.11.2 DU/PU monitor display selection
(Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)....................... 141
4.11.3 CA, AM terminal function selection (Pr.55, Pr.56, Pr.867, Pr.869)....................................... 147
4.11.4 Terminal CA, AM calibration
(Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr. 931)) ............... 149
4.11.5 How to calibrate the terminal CA when using the operation panel (FR-DU07) .................... 151

4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure .... 152
4.12.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)............................................................. 152
4.12.2 Power failure signal (Y67 signal) .......................................................................................... 155
4.12.3 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266 ).................................. 156

4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence........................................................... 159
4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ................................................................................ 159
4.13.2 Fault code output selection (Pr. 76)...................................................................................... 161

III

CONTENTS

4.7

4.13.3 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) ............................................ 162

4.14 Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor ................................. 163
4.14.1 Energy saving control and Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)............................................ 163
4.14.2 Energy saving monitor (Pr. 891 to Pr. 899) .......................................................................... 164

4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance ................................... 169
4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260)............................. 169
4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653, Pr. 654) ......................................................................... 170

4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4) ................................... 171
4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) ................................................................................ 171
4.16.2 Analog input compensation (Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253) ............................... 175
4.16.3 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74)............................................. 176
4.16.4 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905)) ........................................................ 177
4.16.5 4mA input check of current input (Pr. 573, Pr. 777, Pr. 778) ................................................ 182

4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction ....................... 186
4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ............................... 186
4.17.2 Parameter write selection (Pr. 77) ........................................................................................ 189
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ..................................................................... 190
4.17.4 Display of applied parameters and user group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174) .......... 190
4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297).................................................................................... 192

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location .................................. 195
4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)........................................................................................ 195
4.18.2 Operation mode at power ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) .................................................................... 203
4.18.3 Start command source and speed command source during
communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551).............................................. 204

4.19 Communication operation and setting.......................................................... 209
4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector ............................................................................ 209
4.19.2 Wiring and arrangement of RS-485 terminals ...................................................................... 211
4.19.3 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 549)...................................................... 214
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) ............................................................. 216
4.19.5 Operation selection at communication error (Pr.502, Pr.779) .............................................. 216
4.19.6 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) ................................................. 219
4.19.7 Modbus-RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 539, Pr. 549, Pr.779).................................. 232
4.19.8 BACnet MS/TP protocol........................................................................................................ 247
4.19.9 Operation by PLC function
(Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498, Pr. 506 to Pr. 515, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865) ........................................ 260

4.20 PID control ....................................................................................................... 261
4.20.1 Outline of PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 241, Pr. 553, Pr. 554,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) ................................................................................................................ 261

IV

4.20.2 Bias and gain calibration for PID displayed values
(Pr. 241, Pr. 759, C42(Pr. 934) to C45(Pr. 935)).................................................................. 273
4.20.4 Second PID function (Pr.753 to Pr. 758, Pr.765 to Pr.769) .................................................. 281
4.20.5 Advanced PID function (pump function) (Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 591).................................. 283

4.21 Special operation and frequency control ..................................................... 293
4.21.1 Bypass-inverter switchover function (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159)................. 293
4.21.2 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886)............................................ 298

4.22 Useful functions.............................................................................................. 300
4.22.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ............................................................................. 300
4.22.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr .259)................................................... 301
4.22.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) ......................................................................... 304
4.22.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) ................................................... 305
4.22.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) ........................................................................................ 307
4.22.6 Initiating a fault (Pr.997) ....................................................................................................... 308
4.22.7 Setting multiple parameters as a batch (Pr.999) .................................................................. 309

4.23 Setting from the parameter unit, operation panel ....................................... 315
4.23.1 PU display language selection (Pr. 145) .............................................................................. 315
4.23.2 Setting dial potentiometer mode/key lock selection (Pr. 161)............................................... 315
4.23.3 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)........................................................................................................ 317
4.23.4 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) ......................................................................................... 317

4.24 Setting of FR-PU07-01 .................................................................................... 318
4.24.1 PID display bias/gain setting menu ...................................................................................... 319
4.24.2 Unit selection for the PID parameter/PID monitored items (Pr. 759).................................... 320
4.24.3 PID set point direct setting menu.......................................................................................... 321
4.24.4 3-line monitor selection (Pr. 774 to Pr.776) .......................................................................... 322

4.25 Parameter clear............................................................................................... 323
4.26 All parameter clear ......................................................................................... 324
4.27 Parameter copy and parameter verification................................................. 325
4.27.1 Parameter copy .................................................................................................................... 325
4.27.2 Parameter verification........................................................................................................... 326

4.28 Initial value change list ................................................................................. 327
4.29 Check and clear of the faults history............................................................ 328

5

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

331

5.1

Reset method of protective function ............................................................. 332

5.2

List of fault or alarm display........................................................................... 333

5.3

Causes and corrective actions....................................................................... 334
V

CONTENTS

4.20.3 Pre-charge function (Pr.760 to Pr. 769)................................................................................ 275

5.4

Correspondences between digital and actual characters............................346

5.5

Check first when you have a trouble..............................................................347

5.5.1

Motor does not start............................................................................................................... 347

5.5.2

Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise........................................................... 349

5.5.3

Inverter generates abnormal noise ........................................................................................ 349

5.5.4

Motor generates heat abnormally .......................................................................................... 349

5.5.5

Motor rotates in the opposite direction................................................................................... 350

5.5.6

Speed greatly differs from the setting .................................................................................... 350

5.5.7

Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ................................................................................ 350

5.5.8

Speed varies during operation............................................................................................... 351

5.5.9

Operation mode is not changed properly............................................................................... 351

5.5.10 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating............................................................. 352
5.5.11 Motor current is too large....................................................................................................... 352
5.5.12 Speed does not accelerate .................................................................................................... 353
5.5.13 Unable to write parameter setting.......................................................................................... 353
5.5.14 Power lamp is not lit............................................................................................................... 353

6

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
6.1

Inspection item .................................................................................................356

6.1.1

Daily inspection...................................................................................................................... 356

6.1.2

Periodic inspection................................................................................................................. 356

6.1.3

Daily and periodic inspection ................................................................................................. 357

6.1.4

Display of the life of the inverter parts ................................................................................... 358

6.1.5

Checking the inverter and converter modules ....................................................................... 358

6.1.6

Cleaning................................................................................................................................. 358

6.1.7

Replacement of parts............................................................................................................. 359

6.1.8

Inverter replacement.............................................................................................................. 362

6.2

7

355

Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers......................363

6.2.1

Measurement of voltages and currents ................................................................................. 363

6.2.2

Measurement of powers ........................................................................................................ 365

6.2.3

Measurement of voltages and use of PT ............................................................................... 365

6.2.4

Measurement of currents....................................................................................................... 366

6.2.5

Use of CT and transducer...................................................................................................... 366

6.2.6

Measurement of inverter input power factor .......................................................................... 366

6.2.7

Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ and N/-) .......................... 367

6.2.8

Insulation resistance test using megger ................................................................................ 367

6.2.9

Pressure test.......................................................................................................................... 367

SPECIFICATIONS

369

7.1

Rating ................................................................................................................370

7.2

Common specifications...................................................................................372

VI

Outline dimension drawings........................................................................... 374

7.4

Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure .................................................. 384

7.4.1

When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) ................................................... 384

7.4.2

Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740-04320 or more .......................................................... 384

APPENDICES
Appendix 1

387

For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter ................................................................................ 388

Appendix 1-1

Replacement of the FR-F500 series ......................................................................... 388

Appendix 1-2

Replacement of the FR-A100  series ................................................. 389

Appendix 2

Parameter clear, parameter copy and instruction code list........... 390

Appendix 3

Specification change ......................................................................... 400

Appendix 3-1

SERIAL number check .............................................................................................. 400

Appendix 3-2

Changed functions .................................................................................................... 400

VII

CONTENTS

7.3

MEMO

1

OUTLINE

This chapter describes the basic "OUTLINE" for use of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

Product checking and parts identification ............... 2
Inverter and peripheral devices .............................. 3
Method of removal and reinstallation of the front
cover....................................................................... 6
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design .... 8

1

2


DU ............................................Operation panel (FR-DU07)
PU.................................................. Operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07(-01))
Inverter .....................................Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700 series
FR-F700 ...................................Mitsubishi inverter FR-F700 series
Pr. .............................................Parameter Number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation ............................. Operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07(-01)).
External operation ....................Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation .................Combined operation using the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07(-01)) and external operation.
Mitsubishi standard motor ........SF-JR
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor...SF-HRCA

• Microsoft and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• LONWORKS® is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the U.S.A and other
countries.
• DeviceNetTM is a registered trademark of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vender Association,
Inc.).
• BACnet® is a registered trademark of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
• Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of
their respective owners.

3

4

5

6

7
1

Product checking and parts identification

1.1 Product checking and parts identification
Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to
ensure that the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.

• Inverter Model

FR - F740 - 00126 - NA
Symbol

Voltage Class

F720

Three-phase 200V class

F740

Three-phase 400V class

Symbol
200V class 400V class
00046
00023
to
to
04750
12120

Model Number
Represents the rated
current

RS-485 terminals (Refer to page 35)
Connector for plug-in option connection
(Refer to the Instruction Manual of options.)
There are two connection connectors, and they are
called connector 1 and connector 2 from the top.

Cooling fan
(Refer to page 360)

PU connector
(Refer to page 34)

Voltage/current input switch (Refer to page 14, 171)
AU/PTC switchover switch
(Refer to page 110)
EMC filter ON/OFF connector
(Refer to page 15)
Operation panel (FR-DU07)
(Refer to page 6)

Power lamp
Lit when the control circuit
(R1/L11, S1/L21) is supplied
with power.
Alarm lamp
Lit when the inverter is
in the alarm status
(fault).

Control circuit
terminal block
(Refer to page 27)
Main circuit terminal block
(Refer to page 16)

Front cover
(Refer to page 6)

Charge lamp
Lit when power is
supplied to the main
circuit (Refer to page 16)
Rating plate

Capacity plate

wiring cover
(Refer to page 20)

Capacity plate

FR-F740-00126-NA

Rating plate
FR-F740-00126-NA

Inverter model
Input rating
Output rating

LD (50 C) XXA
SLD (40 C) XXA

Serial number

Inverter model Serial number

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check
Overload Current Rating

the SERIAL number.
LD
SLD

• Accessory

120% 60s, 150% 3s
110% 60s, 120% 3s

Surrounding Air
Temperature
50 C (122 F)
40 C (104 F)

· DC reactor supplied (FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740· Fan cover fixing screws (FR-F720-01250
01800) or more)
(FR-F740-00620) or less) (Refer to the Installation
· Eyebolt for hanging the inverter (FR-F720-01540
Guideline)
to 04750, FR-F740-00770 to 06830)
Screw Size (mm)

Number

M3 × 35
M4 × 40
M4 × 50
M3 × 35
M4 × 40
M4 × 50

1
2
1
1
2
1

REMARKS
For removal and reinstallation of covers, refer to page 6.

2

Model
400V 200V

400V

200V

Capacity

00105 to 00250
00340 to 00630
00770 to 01250
00083, 00126
00170 to 00380
00470, 00620

01540
01870 to 04750
00770
00930 to 03610
04320 to 06830

Eyebolt Size (mm) Number
M8
M10
M8
M10
M12

2
2
2
2
2

Inverter and peripheral devices

1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices
Three-phase AC power supply
Use within the permissible power supply
specifications of the inverter.

Human machine
interface

Programmable
controller

(Refer to page 370)

POWER
MODE
RUN
ERR
USER
BAT
BOOT

RUN
T.PASS
SD
ERR

MNG
D.LINK
RD
ERR

RUN
T.PASS
SD
ERR

MNG
D.LINK
RD
ERR

Inverter
(FR-F700)

PULL

USB

PULL

Moulded case circuit
breaker (MCCB)
or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELB), fuse

RS-485 terminal block
The inverter can be connected
with a computer such as a
programmable controller and
with GOT (human machine
interface).
It supports Mitsubishi inverter
protocol, Modbus-RTU (binary)
protocol and BACnet MS/TP
protocol.

The breaker must be selected carefully since
an in-rush current flows in the inverter at
power ON.

(Refer to page 4)

Magnetic contactor(MC)

The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding air
temperature. The surrounding air temperature should be
as low as possible within the permissible range. This must
be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an
enclosure. (Refer to page 10)
Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The
control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main
circuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to page 14)
Refer to page 15 for the built-in EMC filter.

Install the magnetic contactor to ensure safety.
Do not use this magnetic contactor to start and
stop the inverter.
Doing so will cause the inverter life to be shorten.

(Refer to page 4)
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL)
Install reactors to suppress harmonics and to
improve the power factor. An AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(option) is required when installing the inverter near
a large power supply system (1000kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do not use
reactors.
Select the reactor according to the model.
For the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less,
remove the jumpers across terminals P/+ and P1 to
connect to the DC reactor.

(Refer to page 4 )

1

EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BLF)
The FR-F720-02330
(FR-F740-01160) or
less has a built-in
common mode choke.

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

P/+ P1 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 P/+ N/-

For the FR-F720-03160 (FRF740-01800) or more, a DC
reactor is supplied.
Always install the reactor.

Ground

U V W

OUTLINE

AC reactor
(FR-HAL)

EMC filter
(ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Install an EMC filter (ferrite
core) to reduce the
electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from
about 0.5MHz to 5MHz.
A wire should be wound four
turns at a maximum.

Motor
Brake unit
(FR-BU2, FR-BU*1, MT-BU5*2)
Ground

P/+ PR
P/+

High power factor
converter
(FR-HC*1, MT-HC*2)

Power regeneration
common converter
(FR-CV*1)
Power regeneration
converter (MT-RC*2)

Power supply harmonics
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.

Greater braking capability
is obtained.
Install this as required.

PR

Resistor unit
(FR-BR*1, MT-BR5*2)
The regeneration braking
capability of the inverter can be
exhibited fully.
Install this as required.

Devices connected to the output
Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
surge suppressor or EMC filter (capacitor) on the
output side of the inverter.
When installing a moulded case circuit breaker on the
output side of the inverter, contact each manufacturer
for selection of the moulded case circuit breaker.

Ground
To prevent an electric shock, always ground the
motor and inverter.

*1 Compatible with the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less.
*2 Compatible with the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more.
: Install these options as required.

CAUTION
· Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter output side. This will
cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor, and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are connected,
immediately remove them.
· Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the communication
devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to minimize interference.
(Refer topage 15.)
· Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.

3

Inverter and peripheral devices
1.2.1

Peripheral devices

Check the inverter model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according
to the capacity. Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices:

200V class
Motor
Output
(kW(HP))

Applicable Inverter
Model

*1

*1
*2

*3

0.75 (1)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
18.5 (25)
22 (30)
30 (40)
37 (50)
45 (60)
55 (75)
75 (100)

FR-F720-00046-NA
FR-F720-00077-NA
FR-F720-00105-NA
FR-F720-00167-NA
FR-F720-00250-NA
FR-F720-00340-NA
FR-F720-00490-NA
FR-F720-00630-NA
FR-F720-00770-NA
FR-F720-00930-NA
FR-F720-01250-NA
FR-F720-01540-NA
FR-F720-01870-NA
FR-F720-02330-NA
FR-F720-03160-NA

90 (125)
110 (150)

FR-F720-03800-NA
FR-F720-04750-NA

Breaker Selection *2
Power factor improving
(AC or DC) reactor
Without
with
10A
15A
20A
30A
50A
60A
75A
125A
150A
175A
225A
250A
300A
400A
⎯

10A
15A
15A
30A
40A
50A
75A
100A
125A
150A
175A
225A
300A
350A
400A

⎯
⎯

400A
500A

Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Power factor improving
(AC or DC) reactor
Without
with
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N95
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
⎯
⎯
⎯

S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N125
S-N150
S-N180
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400

Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 200VAC 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
MCCB
INV
IM
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
MCCB
INV
IM
directly power supplied.
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed Class RK5, Class T
or Class L type fuse or UL 489 molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit
protection.
(Refer to the Installation Guideline.)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the
MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.

CAUTION
⋅ When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
⋅ When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.

4

Inverter and peripheral devices
400V class
Breaker Selection *2
Power factor improving
(AC or DC) reactor
Without
with

Applicable Inverter Model

*1

*1
*2

*3

Input Side Magnetic Contactor*3
Power factor improving
(AC or DC) reactor
Without
with

0.75 (1)

FR-F740-00023-NA

5A

5A

S-N10

S-N10

1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
18.5 (25)
22 (30)
30 (40)
37 (50)
45 (60)
55 (75)
75 (100)
90 (125)
110 (150)
132 (200)
160 (250)
185 (300)
220 (350)
250 (400)
280 (450)
315 (500)
355 (550)
400 (600)

FR-F740-00038-NA
FR-F740-00052-NA
FR-F740-00083-NA
FR-F740-00126-NA
FR-F740-00170-NA
FR-F740-00250-NA
FR-F740-00310-NA
FR-F740-00380-NA
FR-F740-00470-NA
FR-F740-00620-NA
FR-F740-00770-NA
FR-F740-00930-NA
FR-F740-01160-NA
FR-F740-01800-NA
FR-F740-01800-NA
FR-F740-02160-NA
FR-F740-02600-NA
FR-F740-03250-NA
FR-F740-03610-NA
FR-F740-04320-NA
FR-F740-04810-NA
FR-F740-05470-NA
FR-F740-06100-NA
FR-F740-06830-NA
FR-F740-07700-NA

10A
10A
20A
30A
30A
50A
60A
75A
100A
125A
150A
175A
200A
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯

10A
10A
15A
20A
30A
40A
50A
60A
75A
100A
125A
150A
175A
225A
225A
225A
400A
400A
400A
500A
600A
600A
700A
800A
900A

S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N35
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N80
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯

S-N10
S-N10
S-N10
S-N11, S-N12
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N20, S-N21
S-N25
S-N25
S-N50
S-N50
S-N65
S-N80
S-N95
S-N150
S-N180
S-N220
S-N300
S-N300
S-N400
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N600
S-N800

450 (700)

FR-F740-08660-NA

⎯

1000A

⎯

1000A
Rated product

500 (750)

FR-F740-09620-NA

⎯

1200A

⎯

1000A
Rated product

560 (800)

FR-F740-10940-NA

⎯

1500A

⎯

1200A
Rated product

630 (850)

FR-F740-12120-NA

⎯

2000A

⎯

1400A
Rated product

Selections for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 400VAC 50Hz.
Select the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
MCCB
INV
IM
Install one MCCB per inverter.
For using commercial-power supply operation, select a breaker with capacity which allows the motor to be
MCCB
INV
IM
directly power supplied.
For the use in the United States or Canada, provide the appropriate UL and cUL listed Class RK5, Class T
or Class L type fuse or UL 489 molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) that is suitable for branch circuit
protection.
(Refer to the Installation Guideline.)
Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic
contactor is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the
MC with class AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.

CAUTION
⋅ When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
⋅ When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the
inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.

5

1
OUTLINE

Motor
Output
(kW(HP))

Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover

1.3 Method of removal and reinstallation of the front cover
•Removal of the operation panel

1) Loosen the two screws on the operation panel.
(These screws cannot be removed.)

2) Push the left and right hooks of the operation panel
and pull the operation panel toward you to remove.

When reinstalling the operation panel, insert it straight to reinstall securely and tighten the fixed screws of the
operation panel.

FR-F720-01250-NA or less, FR-F740-00620-NA or less
•Removal
1) Loosen the installation screws of the
front cover.

2) Pull the front cover toward you to remove by pushing an
installation hook using left fixed hooks as supports.

Front cover

Front cover

Installation hook

•Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of
the front cover into the sockets of the
inverter.

2) Using the fixed hooks as supports,
securely press the front cover
against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done
with the operation panel mounted,
make sure that a connector is
securely fixed.)

Front cover
Front cover

6

3) Tighten the installation
screws and fix the front
cover.

Front cover

Method of removal and reinstallation of the
front cover
FR-F720-01540-NA or more, FR-F740-00770-NA or more
•Removal
1) Remove installation screws on
the front cover 1 to remove the
front cover 1.

2) Loosen the installation
screws of the front cover 2.

3) Pull the front cover 2 toward you to
remove by pushing an installation
hook on the right side using left
fixed hooks as supports.

Installation hook
Front cover 1
Front cover 2

•Reinstallation
1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the left side of the
front cover 2 into the sockets of the inverter.

2) Using the fixed hooks as supports, securely
press the front cover 2 against the inverter.
(Although installation can be done with the
operation panel mounted, make sure that a
connector is securely fixed.)

OUTLINE

1

Front cover 2

3) Fix the front cover 2 with the
installation screws.

Front cover 2

4) Fix the front cover 1 with the
installation screws.

Front cover 1
Front cover 2

REMARKS
⋅ For the FR-F740-04320 or more, the front cover 1 is separated into two parts.

CAUTION
1.
2.

Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.
The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Before reinstalling the
front cover, check the serial numbers to ensure that the cover removed is reinstalled to the inverter from where it was removed.

7

Installation of the inverter and
enclosure design

1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
When an inverter enclosure is to be designed and manufactured, heat generated by contained equipment, etc., the
environment of an operating place, and others must be fully considered to determine the enclosure structure, size and
equipment layout. The inverter unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of
operation, operate the inverter in the ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.

1.4.1

Inverter installation environment

As the inverter installation environment should satisfy the standard specifications indicated in the following table,
operation in any place that does not meet these conditions not only deteriorates the performance and life of the
inverter, but also causes a failure. Refer to the following points and take adequate measures.
Environmental standard specifications of inverter
Item
Surrounding air temperature
Ambient humidity
Atmosphere
Maximum Altitude
Vibration
*1

Description
LD
-10 to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing)
SLD(Initial setting) -10 to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) (non-freezing)
90% RH maximum (non-condensing)
Free from corrosive and explosive gases, dust and dirt
1,000m (3280.80 feet) or less
5.9m/s2 or less *1 at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)

2.9m/s2 or less for the FR-F740-04320 or more.

(1) Temperature
The permissible surrounding air temperature of the inverter is -10°C (14°F) to +50°C (122°F) (when LD is set) or -10°C
(14°F) to +40°C (104°F) (when SLD is set). Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside
this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the
following measures so that the surrounding air temperature of the inverter falls within the specified range.
1) Measures against high temperature
• Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 10.)
• Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electrical chamber.
• Block direct sunlight.
• Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
• Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.
2) Measures against low temperature
• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
3) Sudden temperature changes
• Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
• Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
• If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.

(2) Humidity
Normally operate the inverter within the 45 to 90% range of the ambient humidity. Too high humidity will pose problems
of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may produce a spatial electrical
breakdown. The insulation distance specified in JEM1103 "Control Equipment Insulator" is defined as humidity 45 to
85%.
1) Measures against high humidity
• Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
• Take dry air into the enclosure from outside.
• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
2) Measures against low humidity
What is important in fitting or inspection of the unit in this status is to discharge your body (static electricity)
beforehand and keep your body from contact with the parts and patterns, besides blowing air of proper humidity into
the enclosure from outside.
3) Measures against condensation
Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outsideair temperature changes suddenly.
Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
• Take the measures against high humidity in 1).
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)

8

Installation of the inverter and
enclosure design
(3) Dust, dirt, oil mist
Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contact of contact points, reduced insulation or reduced cooling effect due
to moisture absorption of accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to clogged filter.
In the atmosphere where conductive powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated
insulation and short circuit in a short time.
Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.
Countermeasures
• Place in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 10.)
• Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure pressure higher than the outside-air pressure.

(4) Corrosive gas, salt damage
If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or
the relays and switches will result in poor contact.
In such places, take the measures given in Section (3).

(5) Explosive, flammable gases
As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion proof enclosure.
In places where explosion may be caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it
structurally complies with the guidelines and has passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive
(including the test charges).
The best way is to avoid installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.

Use the inverter at the altitude of within 1000m (3280.80 feet).
If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate
dielectric strength.

(7) Vibration, impact
The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9m/s2 (2.9m/s2 for the FR-F740-04320 or more) at 10 to 55Hz
frequency (directions of X, Y, Z axes) and 1mm (0.04 inches) amplitude.
Vibration or impact, if less than the specified value, applied for a long time may make the mechanism loose or cause
poor contact to the connectors.
Especially when impact is imposed repeatedly, caution must be taken as the part pins are likely to break.
Countermeasures
• Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators.
• Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance.
• Install the enclosure away from sources of vibration.

9

1
OUTLINE

(6) Highland

Installation of the inverter and
enclosure design
1.4.2

Cooling system types for inverter enclosure

From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps,
resistors, etc.) and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature
lower than the permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter.
The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
1) Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (Totally enclosed type)
2) Cooling by heat sink (Aluminum fin, etc.)
3) Cooling by ventilation (Forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type)
4) Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (Heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
Cooling System

Enclosure Structure

Natural ventilation
(Enclosed, open type)

INV

Natural
cooling
Natural ventilation
(Totally enclosed type)

INV

heatsink

Heatsink cooling

Forced
cooling

INV

Forced ventilation

INV

Heat
pipe

Heat pipe

Comment
Low in cost and generally used, but the enclosure size
increases as the inverter capacity increases. For
relatively small capacities.

Being a totally enclosed type, the most appropriate for
hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil mist, etc. The
enclosure size increases depending on the inverter
capacity.

Having restrictions on the heatsink mounting position
and area, and designed for relative small capacities.

For general indoor installation. Appropriate for
enclosure downsizing and cost reduction, and often
used.

Totally enclosed type for enclosure downsizing.

INV

1.4.3

Inverter placement

(1) Installation of the Inverter
Installation on the enclosure

FR-F720-01250 or less
FR-F740-00620 or less

FR-F720-01540 or more
FR-F740-00770 or more

CAUTION
When encasing multiple inverters, install them in parallel as
a cooling measure. Install the inverter vertically.

Vertical

*

Fix six positions for the FR-F74004320 to 08660 and fix eight positions
for the FR-F740-09620 to 12120.

10

*Refer to the clearances on the next page.

Installation of the inverter and
enclosure design
(2) Clearances around the inverter
To ensure ease of heat dissipation and maintenance, leave at least the shown clearances around the inverter. At least the
following clearances are required under the inverter as a wiring space, and above the inverter as a heat dissipation space.
Clearances (front)

Surrounding air temperature and humidity
Measurement
position
5cm
(1.97inches)

Inverter

Measurement
position

FR-F720-02330 or less
FR-F740-01160 or less

5cm
(1.97inches)
5cm
(1.97inches)

5cm
(1.97inches)
or more *

10cm (3.94inches)
or more

Humidity: 90% RH maximum

•

10cm (3.94inches)
or more
5cm
10cm
(1.97inches) (3.94inches)
or more * or more

20cm (7.87inches)
or more
10cm
(3.94inches)
or more

5cm
(1.97inches) Inverter
or more
*

Temperature: -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F)
(LD)
-10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F)
(SLD)

Leave enough clearances as a
cooling measure.

Clearances (side)

FR-F720-03160 or more
FR-F740-01800 or more

20cm (7.87inches)
or more

* 1cm (0.39 inches) or more for FR-F720-00167, FR-74000083 or less

* 1cm (0.39 inches) or more for FRF720-00167, FR-740-00083 or less

REMARKS
For replacing the cooling fan of the FR-F740-04320 or more, 30cm(11.8 inches) of space is necessary in front of
the inverter. Refer to page 360 for fan replacement.

(3) Inverter mounting orientation
Mount the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.

(4) Above the inverter
Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter
should be heat resistant.

When multiple inverters are placed in the same
enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as
shown in the right figure (a). When it is inevitable to
arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such
measures as to provide guides since heat from the
bottom inverters can increase the temperatures in
the top inverters, causing inverter failures.

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

Guide

Guide

OUTLINE

(5) Arrangement of multiple inverters

1

Guide

Inverter
Inverter
When mounting multiple inverters, fully take caution
not to make the surrounding air temperature of the
inverter higher than the permissible value by
Enclosure
Enclosure
providing ventilation and increasing the enclosure (a) Horizontal arrangement
(b) Vertical arrangement
size.
Arrangement of multiple inverters

(6) Placement of ventilation fan and inverter
Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of
the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a
ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation
fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes
through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow
plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)
Inverter

Inverter





Placement of ventilation fan and inverter

11

MEMO

12

2

WIRING

This chapter explains the basic "WIRING" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4

Wiring ..................................................................... 14
Main circuit terminal specifications ......................... 16
Control circuit specifications ................................... 27
Connection of stand-alone option units .................. 36

1

2

3

4

5

6

7
13

Wiring

2.1 Wiring
2.1.1

Terminal connection diagram

Sink logic
Main circuit terminal

*1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)

Control circuit terminal

Ground

Jumper
P1

MC

MCCB
Three-phase AC
power supply

Jumper

*2

Jumper
P/+ PR*7

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

*2. To supply power to the
control circuit separately,
remove the jumper across
R1/L11 and S1/L21.

Resistor unit
*6. A CN8 (for MT-BU5) connector is
(Option)
provided for the FR-F720-03160
Brake unit
(FR-F740-01800) or more.
(Option)

*1

Be sure to connect the DC reactor
supplied with the FR-F720-03160
(FR-F740-01800) or more.
When a DC reactor is connected to
the 02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less,
remove the jumper across P1 and P/+.

EMC filter
ON/OFF
OFF connector *8

R1/L11
S1/L21

B1

STR

A1
STOP

B2
Relay output 2
A2

RL
JOG

Jog operation
Second function selection

RUN

RT

SU

MRS

IPF

Output stop
RES *3

Reset

OL

AU

PC

SD

Frequency setting signal (Analog)
3
2
1

Auxiliary (+)
input (-)
Terminal
4 input (+)
(-)
(Current
input)
Connector
for plug-in option
connection

Terminal functions
vary with the output
Up to frequency terminal assignment
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 194)
Instantaneous
power failure (Refer to page 128)
Overload
Frequency detection

SE

SINK

24VDC power supply
(Common for external power supply transistor)

CS PTC

Open collector output
Running

FU
SOURCE

Terminal 4 input selection
(Current input selection)
Selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Contact input common

AU

*5. It is recommended to use
2W1kΩ when the
frequency setting signal is
changed frequently.

Relay output
Terminal functions
vary with the output
Relay output 1 terminal assignment
(Fault output) (Pr. 195, Pr. 196)
(Refer to page 128)

C2

RM

Low speed

(Refer to page 171)

*8. The 200V class 00046 and 00077
are not provided with the ON/OFF
connector EMC filter.

C1

STF

RH

Middle speed

*4. Terminal input specifications
can be changed by analog
input specifications switchover
(Pr. 73, Pr. 267). Set the
voltage/current input switch in
the OFF position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to
10V) and ON to select current
input (0 to 20mA).

IM

Control circuit

High speed

Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ
*5

Motor

Ground

Main circuit

Start self-holding selection

*3. AU terminal can be
used as PTC input
terminal.

N/- CN8*6
U
V
W

ON

Ground

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)
Forward
Terminal functions vary
rotation
with the input terminal
start
assignment
Reverse
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
rotation
(Refer to page 122)
start

Multi-speed
selection

PX*7

Inrush current
limit circuit

*7. Do not use PR and PX terminals.
Please do not remove the jumper
connected to terminal PR and PX.

Open collector output common
Sink/source common

24V

*4 Voltage/current

input switch
4 2
ON
10(+5V)
OFF
0 to 5VDC Initial value
2 0 to 10VDC
selectable *4
0 to 20mADC
5
(Analog common)

PU
connector

10E(+10V)

Initial
0 to ±10VDC value
1
0 to ±5VDC selectable *4
Initial
4 to 20mADC value
4 0 to 5VDC
selectable *4
0 to 10VDC

CA

(-)
AM
5

Option connector 2

(+)
(-)

Analog current output
(0 to 20mADC)

Analog signal output
(0 to 10VDC)
RS-485 terminals

TXD+
TXD-

Data transmission

RXD+
RXD-

Option connector 1

(+)

SG

Terminating
resistor VCC

Data reception
GND
5V (Permissible load
current 100mA)

CAUTION
· To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables more than 10cm (3.94inches) away from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
· After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc. take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
· Set the voltage/current input switch correctly. Operation with a wrong setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.

14

Wiring
2.1.2

EMC filter

This inverter is equipped with a built-in EMC filter (capacitive filter) and common mode choke.
The EMC filter is effective for reduction of air-propagated noise on the input side of the inverter.
The EMC filter is factory-set to disable (OFF). To enable it, fit the EMC filter ON/OFF connector to the ON position.
The input side common mode choke, built-in the FR-F720-02330(FR-F740-01160) or less inverter, is always valid
regardless of ON/OFF of the EMC filter ON/OFF connector.
FR-F720-00105 to 00250
FR-F740-00023 to 00126

EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
FR-F720-00105 to 00250
FR-F740-00023 to 00126

EMC filter ON
FR-F720-00340, 00490
FR-F740-00170, 00250

FR-F720-00340, 00490
FR-F740-00170, 00250

EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)
FR-F720-00630
FR-F740-00310, 00380

EMC filter ON
FR-F720-00770 to 01250
FR-F740-00470, 00620

FR-F720-00630 or more
FR-F740-00310 or more

EMC filter OFF
(initial setting)

EMC filter ON

FR-F720-01540 or more
FR-F740-00770 or more

EMC filter
ON/OFF
connector

V

W

The FR-F720-00046 and 00077 are not provided with the EMC filter ON/OFF connector. (Always ON)

(1) Before removing a front cover, check to make sure that the indication of the inverter operation panel is OFF, wait
for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and check that there are no residual voltage
using a tester or the like. (For the front cover removal method, refer to page 6.)
(2) When disconnecting the connector, push the fixing tab and pull the connector straight without pulling the cable or
forcibly pulling the connector with the tab fixed. When installing the connector, also engage the fixing tab securely.
If it is difficult to disconnect the connector, use a pair of long-nose pliers, etc.

EMC filter
ON/OFF connector
(Side view)

Disengage connector fixing tab

With tab disengaged,
pull up connector straight.

CAUTION
⋅ Fit the connector to either ON or OFF.
⋅ Enabling (turning ON) the EMC filter increase leakage current. (Refer to page 47)

WARNING
While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.

15

2
WIRING

U

Main circuit terminal specifications

2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2.1

Specification of main circuit terminal

Terminal
Symbol

Terminal
Name

Description

Connect to the commercial power supply.
Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor
converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV).
Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Connected to the AC power supply terminals R/L1 and S/L2. To
retain the fault display and fault output or when using the high power
factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common
converter (FR-CV), remove the jumpers from terminals R/L1 and R1/
L11, and S/L2 and S1/L21 and apply external power to these
Power supply terminals.
for control
The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from
circuit
R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter capacity.

R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3

AC power
input

U, V, W

R1/L11,
S1/L21

200V
class
400V
class

FR-F720-00630 or less
60VA
FR-F740-00310 or less
60VA

FR-F720-00770
80VA
FR-F740-00380
60VA

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU and MT-BU5), power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV), high power factor converter
(FR-HC and MT-HC) or power regeneration converter (MT-RC).
For the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less, remove the jumper
across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect the DC reactor. (Be sure to
connect the DC reactor supplied with the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740DC reactor
01800) or more.)
connection
When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/
+ and P1 should not be removed.
Please do not remove or use terminals PR and PX or the jumper connected.
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed
Earth (ground)
(grounded).

P/+, P1

PR, PX

FR-F720-00046, 00077-NA

FR-F720-00105 to 00250-NA
Jumper

Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

R1/L11 S1/L21 N/-

PR

P/+

Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Power supply Motor

IM

Charge lamp

As this is an inside cover fixing screw,
do not remove it.

Power
supply

N/-

P/+

PR

PX

R1/L11 S1/L21

PX

IM

16

16

25

36

44

23

Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring

200V class

Jumper

16

FR-F720-00930 or more
80VA
FR-F740-00470 or more
80VA

Brake unit
connection

P/+, N/-

2.2.2

Refer
to
page

Motor

Charge lamp

Main circuit terminal specifications
FR-F720-00340, 00490-NA

FR-F720-00630-NA
R1/L11 S1/L21

Charge lamp

Jumper
Charge lamp
Jumper
N/-

Jumper

P/+ PR

P/+

Jumper

R1/L11 S1/L21

PX

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

N/-

PR

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

IM

IM
Power supply

Motor

Power supply

Motor

FR-F720-00770 to 01250-NA

FR-F720-01540 to 02330-NA
R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21

Charge lamp
Charge lamp

N/-

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P/+
Jumper

IM
Power supply

Jumper

PR

Jumper

Motor

2
N/-

P/+
Jumper

WIRING

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

IM
Power
supply

Motor

FR-F720-03160 to 04750-NA
R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp
Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

N/-

P/+

P/+

P/+
Power supply

IM
Motor

DC reactor

17

Main circuit terminal specifications
400V class
FR-F740-00023 to 00126-NA

FR-F740-00170, 00250-NA
Jumper

Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P/+

N/-

PR

Charge lamp

PX

R1/L11 S1/L21

N/-

Jumper

Jumper

Charge lamp

IM
Power
supply

P/+ PR

R1/L11 S1/L21

Motor

PX
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

IM
Motor

Power supply

FR-F740-00310, 00380-NA

FR-F740-00470, 00620-NA
R1/L11 S1/L21

R1/L11 S1/L21
Charge lamp

Jumper

PR

Jumper

Charge lamp
Jumper
P/+

N/-

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

N/-

IM

PR

Power supply

P/+

Jumper

Motor

IM
Power supply

FR-F740-00770 to 01160-NA

Motor

FR-F740-01800 to 02600-NA

R1/L11 S1/L21
R1/L11 S1/L21

Charge lamp
Charge lamp

Jumper

Jumper

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

N/-

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P/+
Jumper

18

Motor

P/+
P/+

IM
Power
supply

N/-

Power
supply

IM
Motor

DC reactor

Main circuit terminal specifications
FR-F740-03250 to 04810-NA

FR-F740-05470 to 12120-NA
R1/L11 S1/L21

R1/L11 S1/L21

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

N/-

Charge lamp

Charge lamp

Jumper

Jumper

P/+

P/+

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-

P/+
Power supply

P/+

IM
P/+

Motor
DC reactor

IM
Motor

Power supply
DC reactor

CAUTION
· The power supply cables must be connected to R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. (Phase sequence needs not to be matched.) Never connect
the power cable to the U, V, W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
· Connect the motor to U, V, W. At this time, turning ON the forward rotation switch (signal) rotates the motor in the
counterclockwise direction when viewed from the motor shaft.
· When wiring the inverter main circuit conductor of the FR-F740-05470 or more, tighten a nut from the right side of the
conductor. When wiring two wires, place wires on both sides of the conductor. (Refer to the drawing below.) For wiring, use
bolts (nuts) provided with the inverter.

WIRING

2

19

Main circuit terminal specifications
Wiring cover and Handling (FR-F720-00930 (FR-F740-00620) or less)
1)

Remove the wiring cover of the inverter. Punch out a knockout by firmly tapping it with such as a hammer. Remove
any sharp edges and burrs from knockout holes of the wiring cover.

2)

Install conduits and fix with conduits clamps. Pass the cable always through the conduit.
Wiring cover

Knockout

CAUTION
When handling the wiring cover, care must be taken not to cut fingers or hands with sharp edges and burrs.
To avoid wire offcuts and other foreign matter to enter the inverter, conduits must be installed to the all knockout holes.

WARNING
Do not wire without using conduits. Otherwise, the cable sheathes may be scratched by the wiring cover edges,
resulting in a short circuit or ground fault.
REMARKS
⋅ When using conduits for the FR-F720-00046 and 00077, fix the conduits to the wiring cover after connecting the earth cable to
the inverter earth terminal.

20

Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2.3

Cables and wiring length

(1) Applicable cable size
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m (65.62feet).

200V class (when input power supply is 220V)

FR-F720-00046 to
00105-NA
FR-F720-00167-NA
FR-F720-00250-NA
FR-F720-00340-NA
FR-F720-00490-NA
FR-F720-00630-NA
FR-F720-00770-NA
FR-F720-00930-NA
FR-F720-01250-NA
FR-F720-01540-NA
FR-F720-01870-NA
FR-F720-02330-NA
FR-F720-03160-NA
FR-F720-03800-NA
FR-F720-04750-NA
*1

*2

*3

*4
*5

Terminal Tightening
Screw
Torque
Size *4
N·m

2

R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3

U, V, W

R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3

2-4

2

M4

1.5

2-4

M4
M4
M5
M5
M5
M6
M8(M6)
M8(M6)
M8(M6)
M10(M8)
M10(M8)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)

1.5
1.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.4
7.8
7.8
7.8
14.7
14.7
24.5
24.5
24.5

5.5-4
5.5-4
14-5
14-5
22-5
38-6
38-8
60-8
80-8
100-10
100-10
150-12
150-12
100-12

AWG/MCM *2

HIV, etc. (mm ) *1

Earth
R/L1,
U, V, W P/+, P1 (ground) S/L2,
T/L3
cable
2

2

5.5-4
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.5-4
5.5
5.5
5.5
8-5
14
8
14
14-5
14
14
14
22-5
22
22
22
38-6
38
38
38
38-8
38
38
38
60-8
60
60
60
80-8
80
80
80
100-10 100
100
100
100-10 100
100
100
150-12 125
125
150
150-12 150
150 2×100
100-12 2×100 2×100 2×100

2
3.5
5.5
5.5
14
14
22
22
22
22
38
38
38
38
38

14

U, V, W
14

12
12
10
10
6
8
6
6
4
6 (*5)
2
2
2
2
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
4/0
4/0
4/0
250
250
2×4/0 2×4/0
2×4/0 2×4/0

PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
Earth
R/L1,
S/L2, U, V, W (ground)
T/L3
cable
2.5

2.5

2.5

4
6
16
16
25
50
50
50
70
95
95
⎯
⎯
⎯

4
6
10
16
25
50
50
50
70
95
95
⎯
⎯
⎯

4
6
16
16
16
25
25
25
35
50
50
⎯
⎯
⎯

The recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable)) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 75°C (167°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C (122°F) or less and the wiring distance is 20m (65.62feet) or
less.
The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C (167°F). Assumes
that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and the wiring distance is 20m (65.62feet) or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the FR-F720-00930 or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 70°C (158°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and the wiring distance is 20m(65.62feet) or less.
For the FR-F720-01250 or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible
temperature of 90°C (194°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, PX, P/+, N/-, P1 and a screw for grounding.
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the FR-F720-00930 or more is indicated in ( ).
When connecting the option unit to P/+, P1, N/-, use THHN cables for the option and terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W.

21

2
WIRING

Applicable Inverter
Model

Cable Sizes

Crimping
Terminal

Main circuit terminal specifications
400V class (when input power supply is 440V based on the rated current for 110% overload for 1 minute)

Terminal
Applicable Inverter Model Screw Size
*4
FR-F740-00023 to 00083-NA
FR-F740-00126-NA
FR-F740-00170-NA
FR-F740-00250-NA
FR-F740-00310-NA
FR-F740-00380-NA
FR-F740-00470-NA
FR-F740-00620-NA
FR-F740-00770-NA
FR-F740-00930-NA
FR-F740-01160-NA
FR-F740-01800-NA
FR-F740-02160-NA
FR-F740-02600-NA
FR-F740-03250-NA
FR-F740-03610-NA
FR-F740-04320-NA
FR-F740-04810-NA
FR-F740-05470-NA
FR-F740-06100-NA
FR-F740-06830-NA
FR-F740-07700-NA
FR-F740-08660-NA
FR-F740-09620-NA
FR-F740-10940-NA
FR-F740-12120-NA
*1

*2

*3

*4

M4
M4
M4
M4
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)
M12(M10)

Crimping
(Compression)
Terminal
Tightening
Torque N·m R/L1,
S/L2, U, V, W
T/L3
1.5
2-4
2-4
1.5
2-4
2-4
1.5
5.5-4 5.5-4
1.5
5.5-4 5.5-4
2.5
8-5
8-5
2.5
14-5
8-5
4.4
14-6 14-6
4.4
22-6 22-6
4.4
22-6 22-6
7.8
38-8 38-8
7.8
60-8 60-8
7.8
60-8 60-8
14.7
100-10 100-10
14.7
100-10 100-10
14.7
150-10 150-10
14.7
150-10 150-10
24.5
100-12 100-12
24.5
100-12 100-12
46
150-12 150-12
46
150-12 150-12
46
200-12 200-12
46
C2-200 C2-200
46
C2-250 C2-250
46
C2-250 C2-250
46
C2-200 C2-200
46
C2-200 C2-200

Cable Sizes
HIV, etc. (mm2) *1
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
2
2
3.5
5.5
8
14
14
22
22
38
60
60
80
100
125
150
2×100
2×100
2×125
2×150
2×200
2×200
2×250
2×250
3×200
3×200

Earth
U, V, W P/+, P1 (ground)
cable
2
2
2
2
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.5
5.5
8
8
8
8
8
14
14
14
22
14
22
22
14
22
22
14
38
38
22
60
60
22
60
60
38
80
80
38
100
100
38
125
100
38
150
150
38
2×100 2×100
38
2×100 2×100
38
2×125 2×125
38
2×150 2×125
60
2×200 2×150
60
2×200 2×200
60
2×250 2×200
60
2×250 2×250 100
3×200 3×200 100
3×200 3×200 100

AWG/MCM *2 PVC, etc. (mm2) *3
R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
14
12
12
10
8
6
6
4
4
1
1/0
1/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
2×4/0
2×4/0
2×250
2×300
2×350
2×400
2×500
2×500
3×350
3×400

U, V, W
14
14
12
10
8
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
3/0
4/0
250
300
2×4/0
2×4/0
2×250
2×300
2×350
2×400
2×500
2×500
3×350
3×400

R/L1,
S/L2,
T/L3
2.5
2.5
4
6
10
16
16
25
25
50
50
50
70
95
120
150
2×95
2×95
2×120
2×150
2×185
2×185
2×240
2×240
3×185
3×185

Earth
U, V, W (ground)
cable
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
6
10
10
10
10
16
16
16
25
16
25
16
50
25
50
25
50
25
70
35
95
50
120
70
150
95
2×95
95
2×95
95
2×120 120
2×150 150
2×185 2×95
2×185 2×95
2×240 2×120
2×240 2×120
3×185 2×150
3×185 2×150

For the FR-F740-01160 or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable)) with continuous
maximum permissible temperature of 75°C (167°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C (122°F) or less and the wiring distance is
20m (65.62feet) or less.
For the FR-F740-01800 or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (e.g. LMFC (heat resistant flexible cross-linked polyethylene
insulated cable)) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 90°C (194°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C (122°F)
or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
For the FR-F740-00930 or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
75°C (167°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and the wiring distance is 20m (65.62feet) or less.
For the FR-F740-01160 or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHN cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
90°C (194°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
For the FR-F740-00930 or less, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
70°C (158°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and the wiring distance is 20m (65.62feet) or less.
For the FR-F740-01160 or more, the recommended cable size is that of the cable (XLPE cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of
90°C (194°F). Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F) or less and wiring is performed in an enclosure.
(Selection example for use mainly in the Europe.)
The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+, N/-, P1, and a screw for earthing (grounding).
A screw for earthing (grounding) of the FR-F740-04320 or more is indicated in ( ).

The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
Line voltage drop [V]=

3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
1000

Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
CAUTION
· Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tighten too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tighten too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
· Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.

22

Main circuit terminal specifications
(2) Notes on grounding
Always ground the motor and inverter.
1)Purpose of grounding
Generally, an electrical apparatus has an ground terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use.
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to
manufacture an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current
flow into the case. The purpose of grounding the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from
getting an electric shock from this leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, this grounding is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers
and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast.
2)Grounding methods and grounding work
As described previously, grounding is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noiseaffected malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be discriminated clearly, and the
following work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components
from entering the malfunction prevention type grounding:
(a) If possible, use (l) independent grounding in figure below for the inverter. If independent grounding is not
available, use (ll) joint grounding in the figure below which the inverter is connected with the other
equipment at a grounding point.
The (lll) common grounding as in the figure below, which inverter shares a common ground cable with the
other equipment, must be avoided.
A leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the ground cables of the inverter
and inverter-driven motor. Therefore, use the independent grounding and separated the grounding cable of
the inverter from equipments sensitive to EMI.
In a high building, it may be effective to use the EMI prevention type grounding connecting to an iron
structure frame, and electric shock prevention type grounding with the independent grounding together.
(b) This inverter must be grounded. Grounding must conform to the requirements of national and local safety
regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
A neutral-point grounded power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be
used.
(c) Use the thickest possible ground cable. The ground cable should be of not less than the size indicated in
the above table on the previous page.
(d) The grounding point should be as near as possible to the inverter, and the grounding wire length should be
as short as possible.
(e) Run the ground cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run
them in parallel in the minimum distance.

2

(I) Independent earthing.......Best

Inverter

Other
equipment

(II) Joint earthing.......Good

Inverter

Other
equipment

WIRING

Inverter

Other
equipment

(III) Joint earthing.......Not allowed

To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), refer to the Installation Guideline.

23

Main circuit terminal specifications
(3) Total wiring length
The overall wiring length for connection of a single motor or multiple motors should be within the value in the table below.
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Setting
(carrier frequency)

FR-F720-00046
FR-F740-00023

FR-F720-00077
FR-F740-00038

FR-F720-00105 or more
FR-F740-00052 or More

2 (2kHz) or less

300m
(984.25 feet)

500m
(1640.42 feet)

500m
(1640.42 feet)

3 to 15 (3kHz to 14.5kHz) *

200m
(656.19 feet)

300m
(984.25 feet)

500m
(1640.42 feet)

* For the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, the setting range of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection is "0 to 6".
Total wiring length (FR-F720-00105 (FR-F740-00052) or more)

500m
(1640.42feet)
or less

300m
(984.25feet)
300m
(984.25feet)
300m (984.25feet) + 300m (984.25feet)
= 600m (1968.50feet)

When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
Take the following measures 1) or 2) in this case. (Refer to page 52)
1) Use a "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set frequency in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
according to wiring length
Wiring Length

Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Setting
(carrier frequency)

50m (164.04feet) or
less

50m (164.04feet) to
100m (328.08feet)

exceeding 100m
(328.08feet)

14.5kHz or less

9kHz or less

4kHz or less

2) Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the or less andthe sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to
the or more on the inverter outputside.
CAUTION
· Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function or fast response current limit function or a malfunction or fault
of the equipment connected on the inverter output side. If fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable this function.
(For Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection, refer to page 81.)
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to page 169. (When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the
FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, set "25" in Pr.72 (2.5kHz)).
· For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the manual of each
option.

(4) Cable size of the control circuit power supply (terminal R1/L11, S1/L21)
· Terminal Screw Size: M4
· Cable size: 0.75mm2 to 2mm2
· Tightening torque: 1.5N·m

24

Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2.4

When connecting the control circuit and the main circuit separately to the
power supply



When fault occurs, opening of the electromagnetic contactor (MC) on the
inverter power supply side results in power loss in the control circuit,
disabling the fault output signal retention. Terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 are
provided for when retention of a fault signal is required. In this case, connect
the power supply terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 of the control circuit to the
primary side of the MC.
Do not connect the power cable to incorrect terminals. Doing so may
damage the inverter.

MC
R/L1 Inverter
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
Remove the jumper

• FR-F720-00046 to 00250, FR-F740-00023 to 00126
1) Loosen the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumper
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the lower terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).

3)

1)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

2)

4)

R1/L11

S1/L21
R1/L11

S1/L21

Main circuit terminal block

2
1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Remove the jumper.
4) Connect the separate power
supply cable for the control
circuit to the upper terminals
(R1/L11, S1/L21).

WIRING

• FR-F720-00340, 00490, FR-F740-00170, 00250

3)

1)
R1/L11
S1/L21

2)

R1/L11
S1/L21

4)
R/
L1

S/
L2

T/
L3

Main circuit
terminal block

25

Main circuit terminal specifications
• FR-F720-00630 (FR-F740-00310) or more
1) Remove the upper screws.
2) Remove the lower screws.
3) Pull the jumper toward you to
remove.
4) Connect the separate power supply
cable for the control circuit to the
upper terminals (R1/L11, S1/L21).

R1/ S1/
L11 L21 Power supply
terminal block
for the control circuit
R/L1S/L2 T/L3

3)
Power supply terminal block
for the control circuit

R1/L11
S1/L21
MC

1)
2)
4)

Main power supply

FR-F720-00770 to 01250 FR-F720-01540 or more
FR-F720-00630
FR-F740-00770 or more
FR-F740-00310, 00380 FR-F740-00470, 00620

Power supply
terminal block for
the control circuit

U

V

W

CAUTION
· Be sure to use the inverter with the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, S/L2 and S1/L21 removed when supplying
power from other sources. The inverter may be damaged if you do not remove the jumper.
· The voltage should be the same as that of the main control circuit when the control circuit power is supplied from other than the
primary side of the MC.
· The power capacity necessary when separate power is supplied from R1/L11 and S1/L21 differs according to the inverter
capacity.

200V class
400V class

FR-F720-00630 or less
60VA
FR-F740-00310 or less
60VA

FR-F720-00770
80VA
FR-F740-00380
60VA

FR-F720-00930 or more
80VA
FR-F740-00470 or more
80VA

· If the main circuit power is switched OFF (for 0.1s or more) then ON again, the inverter resets and a fault output will not be held.

26

Control circuit specifications

2.3 Control circuit specifications
2.3.1

Control circuit terminals
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) (Refer to page 122.)

Terminal
Symbol
STF
STR
STOP
RH,
RM, RL
JOG

Contact input

RT

Terminal
Name
Forward
rotation start
Reverse
rotation start
Start selfholding
selection
Multi-speed
selection
Jog mode
selection
Second
function
selection

MRS

Output stop

RES

Reset

Terminal 4
input selection
AU
PTC input

CS

SD

PC

Selection of
automatic
restart after
instantaneous
power failure
Contact input
common (sink)
(initial setting)
External
transistor
common
(source)
24VDC power
supply common
External
transistor
common (sink)
(initial setting)
Contact input
common
(source)
24VDC power
supply

Rated
Specifications

Description
Turn ON the STF signal to start forward
rotation and turn it OFF to stop.
Turn ON the STR signal to start reverse
rotation and turn it OFF to stop.

When the STF and
STR signals are turned
ON simultaneously, the
stop command is given.

122

Turn ON the STOP signal to self-hold the start signal.
Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH,
RM and RL signals.
Turn ON the JOG signal to select Jog operation (initial setting)
and turn ON the start signal (STF or STR) to start Jog operation.
Turn ON the RT signal to select second function.
When the second function such as "second torque boost" and
"second V/F (base frequency)" are set, turning ON the RT signal
selects these functions.
Turn ON the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter
output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by
electromagnetic brake.
Used to reset fault output provided when fault occurs.
Turn ON the RES signal for more than 0.1s, then turn it OFF.
Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr.75, reset can be set
to enabled only at fault occurrence. Inverter recovers about 1s
after the reset is released.
Terminal 4 is valid only when the AU signal is turned ON. (The
frequency setting signal can be set between 0 and 20mADC.)
Turning the AU signal ON makes terminal 2 (voltage input)
invalid.
AU terminal is used as PTC input terminal (thermal protection of
the motor). When using it as PTC input terminal, set the AU/PTC
switch to PTC.

Refer to

122
122
122

122
Input resistance
4.7kΩ
Voltage at
opening: 21 to
27VDC
Contacts at
short-circuited: 4
to 6mADC

122

122

171

110

When the CS signal is left ON, the inverter restarts automatically at
power restoration. Note that restart setting is necessary for this
operation. In the initial setting, a restart is disabled.
(Refer to page 152 for Pr. 57 Restart coasting time)

122

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic)
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such
as a programmable controller, when source logic is selected, connect
the external power supply common for transistor output to this
terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
When connecting the transistor output (open collector output), such
as a programmable controller, when sink logic is selected, connect
the external power supply common for transistor output to this
terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by undesirable currents.
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).

--------------------

—

Power supply
voltage range
19.2 to 28.8VDC
Permissible load
current 100mA

31

Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.

27

2
WIRING

Type

(1) Input signals

Type

Control circuit specifications
Terminal
Symbol
10E

10

Frequency setting

2

4

Terminal
Name

Description

Rated
Specifications

Frequency
setting power
supply

When connecting the frequency setting potentiometer at an initial
status, connect it to terminal 10.
Change the input specifications of terminal 2 when connecting it
to terminal 10E. (Refer to page 175 for Pr. 73 Analog input selection.)

10VDC±0.4V
Permissible load
current 10mA
5.2VDC±0.2V
Permissible load
current 10mA

Frequency
setting
(voltage)

Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5V (10V, 20mA) and makes input
and output proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch from among input 0
to 5VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mA.
Set the voltage/current input switch in the ON position to select
current input (0 to 20mA).*1

Frequency
setting
(current)

Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the
maximum output frequency at 20mA (5V, 10V) makes input and
output proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU
signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). Use Pr. 267 to switch
from among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to
10VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch in the OFF position
to select voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).*1

Voltage input:
Input resistance
10kΩ ± 1kΩ
Maximum
permissible
voltage 20VDC
Current input:
Input resistance
245Ω ± 5Ω
Maximum
permissible
current 30mA

Refer to
171

171

171

Voltage/current
input switch
2
4

171

Switch 1
Switch 2

*1

1

Frequency
setting
auxiliary

Inputting 0 to ±5 VDC or 0 to ±10VDC adds this signal to terminal
2 or 4 frequency setting signal. Use Pr.73 to switch between the
input 0 to ±5VDC and 0 to ±10VDC (initial setting).

Input resistance
10kΩ ± 1kΩ
Maximum
permissible voltage
± 20VDC

171

5

Frequency
setting
common

Common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4)
and analog output terminal AM and CA. Do not ground.

--------------------

171

Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage signal with voltage/current input switch ON (current input is selected) or a current signal with switch OFF (voltage input is
selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of signal output devices. (For details, refer to page 171.)

28

Control circuit specifications

Terminal
Name

A1,
B1,
C1

Relay output 1
(Fault output)

A2,
B2,
C2

Relay output 2

RUN

Inverter
running

SU

Up to
frequency

OL

Overload
warning

IPF

Instantaneous
power failure

FU

Frequency
detection

SE

Open collector
output common

CA

Analog current
output

Analog voltage
output

AM

Rated
Specifications

Description

1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter’s
protective function has activated and the output stopped.
Contact capacity:
Fault: No conduction across B and C (Across A and C Continuity), 230VAC 0.3A
Normal: Across B and C Continuity (No conduction across A and C) (Power
factor=0.4)
30VDC 0.3A
1 changeover contact output
Switched low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or
higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched
high during stop or DC injection brake operation.
Switched low when the output
frequency reaches within the range of
±10% (initial value) of the set frequency.
Switched high during acceleration/
deceleration and at a stop.
Switched low when stall prevention is
activated by the stall prevention
function. Switched high when stall
Alarm code (4bit)
prevention is cancelled.
output
Switched low when an instantaneous
power failure and under voltage
protections are activated.
Switched low when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the
preset detected frequency and high
when less than the preset detected
frequency.

Output item:
Output frequency
(initial setting)

128

128

128
Permissible load
24VDC (27VDC
maximum) 0.1A
(A voltage drop is
3.4V maximum
when the signal is
ON.)
Low is when the
open collector
output transistor
is ON (conducts).
High is when the
transistor is OFF
(does not
conduct).

Common terminal for terminals RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU
Select one e.g. output frequency from
monitor items. (Not output during
inverter reset.)
The output signal is proportional to the
magnitude of the corresponding
monitoring item.
To set a full-scale value for monitoring
the output frequency and the output
current, set Pr. 56 and Pr. 158.
(Refer to page 147)

Refer to

-------------------Load impedance
200Ω to 450Ω
Output signal 0 to
20mADC
Output signal 0 to
10VDC
Permissible load
current 1mA
(load impedance
10kΩ or more)
Resolution 8 bit

128

128

128

128

-----

147

147

Type

(3) Communication
Terminal
Symbol

RS-485 terminals

RS-485

—

Terminal
Name

PU
connector

RXD-

Inverter
transmission
terminal
Inverter
reception
terminal

SG

Earth (Ground)

TXD+
TXDRXD+

Description

Refer to

With the PU connector, communication is available through RS-485.
(for connection on a 1:1 basis only)
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 4800 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m (1640.42feet)

209

With the RS-485 terminals, communication is available through RS-485.
Conforming standard
: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission format
: Multidrop link
Communication speed : 300 to 38400bps
Overall length
: 500m (1640.42feet)

211

29

2
WIRING

Terminal
Symbol

Analog

Open collector

Relay

Type

(2) Output signals

Control circuit specifications
2.3.2

Changing the control logic

The input signals are set to sink logic (SINK) when shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector on the back of the control circuit terminal block must be moved to the
other position.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the jumper connector position.)
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be
removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.

2) Change the jumper connector set to the sink logic (SINK) on the rear panel of the control circuit terminal block to
source logic (SOURCE).

Jumper connector

3) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.

CAUTION
1.
2.

Make sure that the control circuit connector is fitted correctly.
While power is ON, never disconnect the control circuit terminal block.

30

Control circuit specifications
4) Sink logic and source logic
⋅ In sink logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
⋅ In source logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when source logic is selected

Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected

Source logic

Sink logic

PC
Current
STF

STR

Sink
connector

R

Current
STF

R

STR

Source
connector

R

R

SD

Inverter

DC input (sink type)


RUN

TB1

Inverter

DC input (source type)

TB1

RUN

R

R

R
SE

-

R

+ TB17

SE

- TB18

+

24VDC

24VDC

Current flow

Current flow

• When using an external power supply for transistor output

Inverter

QY40P type transistor
output unit
TB1 STF

QY80 type transistor
output unit
PC

24VDC
(SD)

TB17
PC
TB18
24VDC SD
Current flow

Constant
voltage
circuit

Fuse

TB1

STF

TB2

STR

TB17
TB18

24VDC

TB2 STR

Constant
voltage
circuit

Inverter

24VDC
(SD)

SD

Current flow

31

2
WIRING

⋅ Source logic type
⋅ Sink logic type
Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of
the inverter with terminal +24V of the external power
the inverter with terminal 0V of the external power
supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC
supply. When using terminals PC and SD as a 24VDC
power supply, do not install an external power supply in
power supply, do not install a power supply in parallel in
parallel with the inverter. Doing so may cause a
the outside of the inverter. Doing so may cause a
malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable currents.)
malfunction due to undesirable current.)

Control circuit specifications
2.3.3

Control circuit terminal layout

Control circuit terminal
A1

B1

C1

RL RM RH
SE

RUN

A2

RT

B2

C2 10E

10

AU STOP MRS RES SD

SU IPF OL

FU

SD

SD

2

5

CA

4

AM

STF STR JOG CS

Terminal screw size: M3.5
Tightening torque: 1.2N.m
1
PC

(1) Common terminals of the control circuit (SD, 5, SE)
Terminals SD, 5, and SE are all common terminals (0V) for I/O signals and are isolated from each other. Do not
earth(ground) these terminals.
Avoid connecting the terminal SD and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
Terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, STOP, RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES,
AU, CS).
The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for frequency setting signal (terminal 2, 1 or 4), analog current output terminal (CA)
and analog output terminal AM.
It should be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN, SU, OL, IPF, FU).
The contact input circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.

(2) Signal inputs by contactless switches
The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR, STOP,
RH, RM, RL, JOG, RT, MRS, RES, AU, CS) can be controlled
using a transistor instead of a contacted switch as shown on the
right.

+24V

STF, etc

Inverter

SD

External signal input using transistor

32

Control circuit specifications
2.3.4
1)

2)
3)

Wiring instructions

It is recommended to use the cables of 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
If the cable gauge used is 1.25mm2 or more, the front cover may be lifted when there are many cables running or
the cables are run improperly, resulting in an operation panel contact fault.
The maximum wiring length should be 30m (98.43feet).
Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to
prevent a contact faults when using contact inputs since the
control circuit input signals are micro-currents.

Micro signal contacts

4)
5)
6)

Twin contacts

Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and
power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.

z Wiring of the control circuit of the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more
For wiring of the control circuit of the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, separate away from wiring of the
main circuit.
Make cuts in rubber bush of the inverter side and lead wires.



Rubber bush
(view from the inside)

2
WIRING

Make cuts along the lines inside with
a cutter knife and such.

33

Control circuit specifications
2.3.5

Mounting the operation panel (FR-DU07) on the enclosure surface

Having an operation panel on the enclosure surface is convenient. With a connection cable, you can mount the
operation panel (FR-DU07) to the enclosure surface, and connect it to the inverter.
Use the option FR-CB2††, or the following connector and cable available on the market.
Securely insert one end of connection cable into the PU connector of the inverter and the other end into the
connection connector of the operation panel (FR-DU07) along the guides until the stoppers are fixed.
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)

Operation panel(FR-DU07)

Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP)(option)

REMARKS
· Overall wiring length when the operation panel is connected: 20m(65.6 feet)
· Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Commercially available product examples
(as of Oct. 2008)

Product
1)

Communication cable

2)

RJ-45 connector

Type
SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m)
24AWG × 4P*
5-554720-3

* Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the communication cable.

Refer to page 214 for RS-485 communication.

34

Maker
Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
Tyco Electronics Corporation

Control circuit specifications
2.3.6

RS-485 terminal block

⋅ Conforming standard: EIA-485(RS-485)
⋅ Transmission format: Multidrop link
⋅ Communication speed: MAX 38400bps
(76800bps for BACnet MS/TP protocol)
⋅ Overall length: 500m
⋅ Connection cable:Twisted pair cable
(4 pairs)

OPEN

100Ω

Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2
(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)

TXD

SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2
(TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)

P5S SG
P5S
SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND)

2.3.7

RXD

VCC

Communication operation

2
WIRING

Using the PU connector or RS-485 terminal, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program
can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
For the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation), communication can be performed with the PU connector
and RS-485 terminal.
For the Modbus-RTU protocol and BACnet MS/TP protocol, communication can be performed with the RS-485
terminal.
For further details, refer to page 209.

35

Connection of stand-alone option units

2.4 Connection of stand-alone option units
The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in
accordance with the corresponding option unit manual.

2.4.1

Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration.

(1) Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
ON
T

OFF OCR contact

*2

MC
MCCB

MC

MC

Three-phase AC
power supply

U
V
W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Motor
IM

*3

Inverter

*1

GRZG type
OCR discharging resistor *5
R
R
External thermal
relay *4

P/+
N/*3

FR-BU2
PR
A
B
P/+
*1
C
N/BUE
SD

5m (16.4feet) or less
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
Keep a wiring distance of within 5m (16.4feet) between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor. Even when
the wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m (32.8feet).
It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of discharging resistors.
Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.


Brake Unit

Discharging Resistor

Recommended External Thermal Relay

FR-BU2-1.5K

GZG 300W-50Ω (one)

TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A

FR-BU2-3.7K

GRZG 200-10Ω (three in series)

TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A

FR-BU2-7.5K

GRZG 300-5Ω (four in series)

TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A

FR-BU2-15K

GRZG 400-2Ω (six in series)

TH-N20CXHZ 11A

GRZG 200-10Ω (six in series)

TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A

FR-BU2-H15K

GRZG 300-5Ω (eight in series)

TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A

FR-BU2-H30K

GRZG 400-2Ω (twelve in series)

TH-N20CXHZ 11A

FR-BU2-H7.5K

CAUTION
⋅ Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

36

1/L1

5/L3
TH-N20

2/T1
To the brake
unit terminal P/+

6/T3
To a resistor

Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) FR-BR-(H) connection example with resistor unit
ON
T

OFF

*2

MC
MC

MCCB

FR-BR

MC
Motor

U
V
W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Three phase AC
power supply

P TH1 *4
PR
TH2

IM
*3

Inverter

*1

P/+
N/*3

FR-BU2
PR
A
P/+
B
*1
N/C
BUE
SD

5m or less
*1
*2
*3
*4

Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m (16.4feet). Even
when the wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m (32.8feet).
Normal: across TH1 and TH2...close, Alarm: across TH1 and TH2...open

CAUTION
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

(3) Connection example with MT-BR5 type resistor unit

MCCB
Three phase AC
power supply

*2

ON

MC
R/L1 U
S/L2 V
T/L3 W

Motor
IM

Inverter
*5

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

2

MC

MC
5m *3
or less

*1 P/+

N/-

OFF CR1

*3

P *1
N
BUE
SD

P
PR

Brake unit
FR-BU2

P
PR

CR1

TH1
TH2

WIRING

T

*4

Resistor unit
MT-BR5

Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (MT-BR5) should be within 5m (16.4feet). If
twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m (32.8feet).
Normal: across TH1 and TH2...open, Alarm: across TH1 and TH2...close
CN8 connector used with the MT-BU5 type brake unit is not used.

CAUTION
⋅ Set "2" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use MT-BR5 type resistor unit.

37

Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4.2

Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU/MT-BU5)

When connecting the brake unit (FR-BU(H)/MT-BU5) to improve the brake capability at deceleration, make connection
as shown below.
(1) Connection with the FR-BU (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less)
ON

OFF

T *2
MC
FR-BR

MC
MC

MCCB
Three-phase AC
power supply

R/L1

U

Motor

S/L2

V

IM

T/L3

W

PR
TH2

Inverter

*1

TH1

P

FR-BU
PR

P/+

P/+

N/−

N/−

*1

HA
HB
HC

*3

5m (16.4feet)
or less
*1

Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU (H)) terminals so that their terminal signals match
with each other. (Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.)
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m(16.4
feet). If twisted wires are used, the distance should be within 10m(32.8feet).

*2
*3

CAUTION
⋅ If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter’s input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

(2) Connection with the MT-BU5 (FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "1" in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 114)
T *1

MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply

ON

MC
R/L1

U

Motor

S/L2

V

IM

T/L3

W

CR1

CR2

MC
MC
5m(16.4feet)
or less

Inverter
P/+
N/

OFF

P
PR

*2

CR1
P

TH1

PR
TH2
CR2

CN8
P
PR

*1
*2

P

TH1

PR

TH2
Resistor unit
Brake unit
MT-BR5
MT-BU5
When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
The wiring length between the resistor unit and brake resistor should be 10m(32.8feet) maximum when
wires are twisted and 5m(16.4feet) maximum when wires are not twisted.

CAUTION
⋅ Install the brake unit in a place where a cooling air reaches the brake unit heatsink and within a distance of the cable supplied
with the brake unit reaches the inverter.
⋅ For wiring of the brake unit and inverter, use an accessory cable supplied with the brake unit. Connect the main circuit cable to
the inverter terminals P/+ and N/- and connect the control circuit cable to the CN8 connector inside by making cuts in the
rubber bush at the top of the inverter for leading the cable.
⋅ The brake unit which uses multiple resistor units has terminals equal to the number of resistor units. Connect one resistor unit
to one pair of terminal (P, PR).

38

Connection of stand-alone option units

Make cuts in rubber bush of the upper portion of the inverter and lead a cable.
1) Make cuts in the rubber bush for leading the CN8 connector cable with a nipper or cutter knife.
Rubber bushes

Make cuts in
rubber bush

2) Insert a connector on the MT-BU5 side through a rubber bush to connect to a connector on the inverter side.
CN8 connector
Wire clamp

Insert the connector until
you hear a click sound.

CAUTION
Clamp the CN8 connector cable on the inverter side with a wire clamp securely.

2

♦ Parameters referred to
Refer to page 114
Refer to page 114

WIRING

Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection
Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty

39

Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4.3

Connection of the brake unit (BU type)

Connect the brake unit (BU type) correctly as shown below. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Remove the jumper
across terminals HB and PC and terminals TB and HC of the brake unit and fit it to across terminals PC and TB.
ON

OFF

T*1
MC
Inverter

MC

MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply

U

Motor

R/L1

V

IM

S/L2

W

MC

Brake unit
(BU type)

T/L3

Remove the
jumper
TB

N/-

N

OCR HC

P/+

HB
HA

Discharging
resistor

OCR

PC

PR

Fit a jumper

P
*1

When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.

CAUTION
⋅ The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit and discharging resistor should be within 2m(6.56feet). If twisted wires are
used, the distance should be within 5m(16.4feet).
⋅ If the transistors in the brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot, causing a fire. Therefore, install a
magnetic contactor on the inverter's power supply side to shut off a current in case of fault.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

2.4.4

Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC/MT-HC)

When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown below.
Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 114.)

(1) Connection with the FR-HC (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less)

High power factor converter

Outside box

(FR-HCB)
Reactor1
(FR-HCL01)
MCCB
Three-phase
AC power
supply

*1

*2
*3

*4

(FR-HC)
MC1
MC2

Reactor2
(FR-HCL02)

Inverter

MC1
MC2

Motor

R/L1
S/L2 *1
T/L3

U
V
W

IM

MC

R
S
T

R2
S2
T2

R2
S2
T2

R3
S3
T3

R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4

R4
S4
T4

P
N
Y1orY2
RDY
RSO
R
phase SE
S
detection
T

*4

P/+ *2
N/X11 *3
X10 *3
RES
SD
R1/L11
S1/L21

*1

Remove the jumpers across the inverter terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect the control circuit power supply to the R1/L11
and S1/L21 terminals. Do not connect anything to the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
(E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 342.))
Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P/+ and P/+, N/- and N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal. (Refer to page 122.)
For communication where the start command is sent only once, e.g. RS-485 communication operation, use the X11 signal when making setting to
hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. (Refer to page 114.)
Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the
FR-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-HC will be damaged.

CAUTION
⋅ The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
⋅ Use sink logic (initial setting) when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC cannot be connected when source logic is selected.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

40

Connection of stand-alone option units
(2) Connection with the MT-HC (FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)
MT-HCL01
MCCB

MT-HCB

MT-HCL02

MT-HC

Inverter

MC

R R2
S S2
T T2

Three-phase
AC power
supply

R2
S2
T2

R3
S3
T3
88R
88S

R1

R3 R4
S3 S4
T3 T4

R4
S4
T4

R/L1
U
S/L2 *1 V
T/L3
W

88R
88S

P
N

S1
RDY
RSO
SE

R
S
T

Motor
IM

P/+ *2
N/
*5

X10 *3
RES
SD
*1

R1 S1

R1/ S1/
L11 L21

MT-HCTR
*4
Isolated transformer

*1

*2
*3

*4
*5

Remove the jumper across terminals R and R1, S and S1 of the inverter, and connect the control circuit
power supply to the R1 and S1 terminals. Do not connect anything to the power input terminals R/L1, S/
L2, T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will occur. (Refer to page 342.)
Do not insert the MCCB between terminals P/+ and N/- (P/+ and P/+, N/- and N/-). Opposite polarity of
terminals N, P will damage the inverter.
Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 (X11) signal.
(Refer to page 122.) For communication where the start command is sent only once, e.g. RS-485
communication operation, use the X11 signal when making setting to hold the mode at occurrence of an
instantaneous power failure. (Refer to page 114.)
Connect the power supply to terminals R1 and S1 of the MT-HC via an isolated transformer.
Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the MT-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the
inverter, and connect terminal SE of the MT-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting,
MT-HC will be damaged.

CAUTION
⋅ Use sink logic (initial setting) when the MT-HC is connected. The MT-HC cannot be connected when source logic is
selected.
⋅ The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
⋅ When connecting the inverter to the MT-HC, do not connect the DC reactor provided to the inverter.

WIRING

♦ Parameters referred to
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection

2

Refer to page 114

41

Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4.5

Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
(FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less)

When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), make connection so that the inverter terminals
(P/+, N/-) and the terminal symbols of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) are the same.
After making sure that the wiring is correct, set "2" in Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to page 114.)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Dedicated stand-alone
reactor (FR-CVL)
MCCB

MC1
R/L11
S/L21
T/L31

Three-phase
AC power
supply

R2/L12
S2/L22
T2/L32

R/L11
S/L21 *4
T/MC1

*2
*3
*4
*5

V

IM

W

Inverter

P/L+
N/L−

P/+
N/−

P24
SD
RDYA

PC
SD

RDYB
RSO
SE
*1

R1/L11
S1/L21

FR-CV type
Power regeneration
common converter
R2/L1
S2/L2
T2/L3

U
*1

*2

*5

X10 *3
RES

Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11, S/L2 and S1/L21 of the inverter, and connect the
control circuit power supply across terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21. Do not connect anything to the power
input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (E.OPT (option fault) will
occur. (Refer to page 342.))
Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ and N/- (between P/L+ and P/+, between N/L- and N/-).
Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage the inverter.
Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
(Refer to page 122)
Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1.
Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
Be sure to connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the
inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting,
FR-CV will be damaged.

CAUTION
⋅ The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
⋅ Use sink logic (initial setting) when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic is
selected.
⋅ Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1.

♦ Parameters referred to
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection

42

Refer to page 114

Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4.6

Connection of the power regeneration converter (MT-RC)
(FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)

When connecting a power regeneration converter (MT-RC), perform wiring securely as shown below. Incorrect
connection will damage the regeneration converter and inverter. After connecting securely, set "1" in
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and "0" in Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty.
Inverter
MCCB

MC2

MC1

U

R/L1

Three-phase
AC power
supply

S/L2

V

T/L3

W

IM

R1/L11
S1/L21
DCL
P1

P1
P/+ N/

P

MT-RCL
P
R

R2

S

S2

T

T2

N

R2

Reset signal
RES
STF
SD

S2

C

T2

B
Alarm signal

A
R
S
RDY
T

Ready signal
R1

2

SE

WIRING

S1

MT-RC

CAUTION
⋅ When using the FR-F700 series together with the MTInverter input power supply (MC2)
RC, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of
the inverter so that power is supplied to the inverter after
1s or more has elapsed after powering ON the MT-RC.
MT-RC power supply (MC1)
When power is supplied to the inverter prior to the MTRC, the inverter and the MT-RC may be damaged or the
MCCB may trip or be damaged.
⋅ Refer to the MT-RC manual for precautions for
connecting the power coordination reactor and others.

ON

ON
1s or more

♦ Parameters referred to
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection
Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty

Refer to page 114
Refer to page 114

43

Connection of stand-alone option units
2.4.7

Connection of the power factor improving DC reactor (FR-HEL)

(1) Keep the surrounding air temperature within the permissible range (-10°C to +50°C). Keep enough clearance
around the reactor because it heats up. (Take 10cm (3.94 inches) or more clearance on top and bottom and 5cm
(1.97 inches) or more on left and right regardless of the installation direction.)
10cm (3.94 inches) or more
5cm (1.97 inches)
or more

5cm (1.97 inches)
or more

5cm (1.97 inches)
or more
5cm (1.97 inches)
or more

(2) When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it between terminals P1 and P/+.
For the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less, the jumper connected across terminals P1 and P/+ must be
removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its performance.
For the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.
P1

P/+
FR-HEL

Remove
the jumper.

CAUTION
⋅ The wiring distance should be within 5m(16.4feet).
⋅ The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 21)

44

3

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
OF THE INVERTER

This chapter explains the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE
INVERTER" for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6

EMC and leakage currents ..................................... 46
Installation of a reactor ........................................... 51
Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC).............. 51
Inverter-driven 400V class motor............................ 52
Precautions for use of the inverter.......................... 53
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter ....... 55

1

2

3

4

5

6

7
45

EMC and leakage currents

3.1 EMC and leakage currents
3.1.1

Leakage currents and countermeasures

Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage
current flows. Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation
at the increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following
measures. Select the earth leakage circuit breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier
frequency setting.

(1) To-ground leakage currents
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the ground cable,
etc. These leakage currents may operate ground leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
Suppression technique
⋅ If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting. Note that motor noise
increases.Selecting Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
⋅ By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line and
other line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
To-ground leakage currents
⋅ Take caution as long wiring will increase the leakage current. Decreasing the carrier frequency of the inverter
reduces the leakage current.
⋅ Increasing the motor capacity increases the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400V class is larger than
that of the 200V class.

(2) Line-to-line leakage currents
Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitances between the inverter output cables may operate the
external thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m (164.04feet) or more) for the 400V class
small-capacity model (FR-F740-00170 or less), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because
the ratio of the leakage current to the rated motor current increases.
Line-to-line leakage current data example(200V class)
Motor
Capacity
(kW(HP))

Rated Motor
Current(A)

0.4(1/2)
0.75(1)
1.5(2)
2.2(3)
3.7(5)
5.5(7.5)
7.5(10)

1.8
3.2
5.8
8.1
12.8
19.4
25.6

Leakage Currents(mA)
Wiring length
Wiring length
50m(164.04feet)
100m(328.08feet)
310
340
370
400
440
490
535

500
530
560
590
630
680
725

⋅ Motor: SF-JR 4P
⋅ Carrier frequency: 14.5kHz
⋅ Used wire: 2mm2, 4cores
Cabtyre cable

*The leakage currents of the 400V class are about twice as large.
MCCB
Power
supply

MC

Thermal relay
Inverter

Motor
IM

Line-to-line static
capacitances
Line-to-line leakage currents path

Measures
⋅ Use Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
⋅ If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting. Note that motor noise
increases. Selecting Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive. To ensure that the motor is
protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor to directly detect
motor temperature.
Installation and selection of moulded case circuit breaker
Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input
side. Select the MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor (which depends on the power supply voltage,
output frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity must
be selected since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding
breaker.) As an earth leakage circuit breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage circuit breaker designed for
harmonics and surge suppression.

46

EMC and leakage currents
(3) Selection of rated sensitivity current of earth leakage circuit breaker
When using the earth leakage current breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows,
independently of the PWM carrier frequency:
⋅ Breaker designed for harmonic and surge
Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial
suppression
power supply operation
Rated sensitivity current:
Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter
IΔn ≥ 10 × (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm)
Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power
⋅ Standard breaker
supply operation
Rated sensitivity current:
Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
IΔn ≥ 10 × {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 × (Ig2 + Igm)}
Leakage current example of
three-phase induction motor
during the commercial
power supply operation

Example of leakage current per 1km during
the commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit

Leakage current example of threephase induction motor during the
commercial power supply operation

(Three-phase three-wire delta
connection 400V60Hz)

(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
type motor 400V60Hz)

(200V 60Hz)

120
100
80
60
40
20
0

2 3.5 8 142238 80150
5.5
30 60 100

Cable size (mm2)

leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

(200V 60Hz)
2. 0
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
0. 3
0. 2
0. 1

leakage currents (mA)

Example of leakage current of
cable path per 1km during the
commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in
metal conduit

120
100
80
60
40
20

1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045

0

2 3.5 8 142238 80150
5.5
30 60 100

2. 0
1. 0
0. 7
0. 5
0. 3
0. 2
0. 1

Cable size (mm )

Motor capacity (kW)

1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045

Motor capacity (kW)

2

For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.

Example
zSelection example (in the case of the left figure (400V class
Breaker Designed for
Harmonic and Surge
Suppression
5.5mm2 ×
5m(16.40feet)
ELB

5.5mm2 ×
60m(196.86feet)

Noise
filter
Inverter

Ig1

Ign

Ig2

3φ
IM 400V
2.2kW
(3HP)
Igm

Leakage current Ig1 (mA)
Leakage current Ign (mA)
Leakage current Igi (mA)
Leakage current Ig2 (mA)

Igi

1
× 66 ×
3

connection))

Standard Breaker

5m(16.40feet)
1000m(3280.80feet)

= 0.11

0 (without noise filter)
1 (without EMC filter)
Refer to the following table for the leakage current of the inverter*

1
× 66 ×
3

60m(196.86feet)
1000m(3280.80feet)

Motor leakage current Igm (mA)

= 1.32

0.36

Total leakage current (mA)

2.79

6.15

Rated sensitivity current (mA)

30

100

* Refer to page 15 for the presence/absence of the EMC filter.

zInverter leakage current (with and without EMC filter)
Input power conditions
(200V class: 220V/60Hz, 400V class: 440V/60Hz, power supply unbalance within 3%)

Phase
grounding

EMC Filter
ON (mA)
OFF (mA)

200

22(1)*

1

400

30

1

400

1

1

Earthed-neutral
system

*For the FR-F720-00046 and FR-F720-00077, the EMC filter is
always valid. The leakage current is 1mA.

CAUTION
⋅ Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
⋅ In the
connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against an ground fault in the inverter output side.
Grounding must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536
class 1 and other applicable standards)
⋅ When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the effective
value is less than the rating. In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to
temperature rise.
⋅ The following models are standard breakers....BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA and NV-2F earth leakage relay (except
NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection
The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression....NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-C2, earth
leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H

47

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

Voltage
(V)

3

EMC and leakage currents
3.1.2

EMC measures

Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter to malfunction it and others are radiated by the inverter to malfunction
peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to have high immunity performance, it handles low-level signals, so it
requires the following basic techniques. Also, since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency, that could generate
electromagnetic noises. If these electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, EMI measures should be
taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on EMI paths.

1) Basic techniques
⋅ Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not
bundle them.
⋅ Use twisted pair shielded cables for the detector connection and control signal cables, and connect the sheathes
of the shield cables to terminal SD.
⋅ Ground the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
2) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter and malfunction the inverter (Immunity measures)
When devices that generate many electromagnetic noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many
relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunctioned by electromagnetic noises,
the following measures must be taken:
⋅ Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic
noises.
⋅ Fit data line filters to signal cables.
⋅ Ground the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
3) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices (EMI
measures)
Inverter-generated electromagnetic noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the
inverter and inverter main circuits (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of
the peripheral devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Inverter generated
electromagnetic
noise

Air propagated
noise

Noise directly
radiated from inverter

Path 1)

Noise radiated from
power supply cable

Path 2)

Noise radiated from
motor connection cable

Path 3)

5)

7)

Electromagnetic
induction noise

Path 4), 5)

Electrostatic
induction noise

Path 6)

Telephone

7)

2)
1)

Electrical path
propagated noise

48

Instrument
Noise propagated through
power supply cable

Path 7)

Noise from ground
cable due to leakage
current

Path 8)

Receiver

Sensor
power supply

3) Inverter
4)
Motor

IM

6)

1)
3) Sensor

8)

EMC and leakage currents
Propagation Path

Measures
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises,
e.g. instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when
their signal cables are run near the inverter, the devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated
electromagnetic noises. The following measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do
not bundle them.
(4) Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 15)
(5) Insert a common mode filters into I/O and capacitors between the input lines to suppress cableradiated noises.
(6) Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to
produce further effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static
induction noises may be propagated to the signal cables to malfunction the devices and the following
measures must be taken:
(1) Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
(2) Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the I/O cables of the inverter.
(3) Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do
not bundle them.
(4) Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to
produce further effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in
the same line, inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to malfunction
the devices and the following measures must be taken:
(1) Set the EMC filter ON/OFF connector of the inverter to the ON position. (Refer to page 15)
(2) Install the common mode filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cable) of the inverter.

1) 2) 3)

4) 5) 6)

7)

When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage
currents may flow through the ground cable of the inverter to malfunction the device. In such a case,
disconnection of the ground cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly.

8)

z Data line filter

Data line filter is effective as an EMC measure. Provide a data line filter for the detector cable, etc.

z EMC measures
Enclosure
Inverter
power
supply

Decrease carrier
frequency

EMC filter Inverter

Install common mode filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01)

on the inverter output side

FRBLF

IM Motor
Use 4-core cable for motor power cable
and use one cable as earth (ground) cable.

Control
power
supply
Do not earth (ground)
enclosure directly

3

Use a twisted pair shielded cable
Power
supply
for sensor

Sensor

Do not earth (ground) shield
but connect it to signal common cable.

Do not earth (ground)
control cable

REMARKS
For compliance with the EU EMC directive, refer to the Installation Guideline.

49

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

Separate inverter and
power line by more than
30cm (11.81inches) (at
least 10cm (3.93inches))
from sensor circuit.

EMC and leakage currents
3.1.3

Power supply harmonics

The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power
capacitor etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and
transmission path. Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
The differences between harmonics and noises are indicated below:
Item
Frequency
Environment
Quantitative understanding

Harmonics

Noise

Normally number 40 to 50 max.
(3kHz or less)
To-electric channel, power impedance
Theoretical calculation possible

Generated amount

Nearly proportional to load capacity

Affected equipment immunity

Specified in standard per equipment

Suppression example

Provide reactor.

High frequency (several 10kHz to 1GHz order)
To-space, distance, wiring path
Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult
Depending on the current fluctuation ratio (larger as
switching is faster)
Different depending on maker's equipment
specifications
Increase distance.

z Measures
DC reactor
(FR-HEL)

Power supply

The harmonic current generated from the inverter
to the input side differs according to various
conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether
a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and
output current on the load side.
For the output frequency and output current, we
understand that they should be calculated in the
conditions under the rated load at the maximum
operating frequency.

MCCB

MC
R

X

S

Y

T

Z

AC reactor

(FR-HAL)

P/+ P1
R/L1
U
IM

S/L2

V

T/L3

W

Inverter Do not insert power
factor improving capacitor.

CAUTION
The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
high frequency components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter.
For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.

50

Installation of a reactor

3.2 Installation of a reactor

MCCB

MC

Power
supply

AC reactor
(FR-HAL)
X
R
S

Y

T

Z

Inverter
R/L1 U

IM

S/L2 V
T/L3 W
P/+ P1

Power supply system
capacity

When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (1000kVA or more) or when a power capacitor is to
be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent
this, always install the AC reactor (FR-HAL)
(kVA)
5300
5000 Capacities requiring
4000 installation of
AC reactor
3000
2000
1000
110165 247 330 420
Inverter capacity

550 kVA

DC reactor (FR-HEL) *
* When connecting the FR-HEL to the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1.
For the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, a DC reactor is supplied. Always install the reactor.

REMARKS
The wiring length between the FR-HEL and inverter should be 5m maximum and minimized. Use the same wire size as that of the
power supply wire (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 21)

3.3 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)
On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
Refer to page 4 for selection.)
(
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g.
emergency stop operation).
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work
The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3MC for the inverter input side
current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.

REMARKS
Since repeated inrush current at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is 100 million times (about
500,000 times for FR-F720-01540 or more)), frequent starts/stops must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter start controlling
terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop the inverter.

• Inverter start/stop circuit example

MC

Power
supply

R/L1

U

As shown on the left, always use the start signal

S/L2

V

To the (ON or OFF of STF (STR) signal) to make a start
motor

T/L3

W

R1/L11
*2

S1/L21
T *1
Inverter
Operation preparation
MC
OFF
ON

MC

Stop

B1

*1 When the power supply is 400V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*2 Connect the power supply terminals R1/L11, S1/L21
of the control circuit to the primary side of the MC to
hold an alarm signal when the inverter's protective
circuit is activated. At this time, remove jumpers
across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and S/L2 and S1/
L21. (Refer to page 25 for removal of the jumper.)

A1

MC
Start/Stop
Start

C1

RA
RA

3

or stop. (Refer to page 126)

STF(STR)
SD

RA

(2) Handling of the inverter output side magnetic contactor
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop.
When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and
such will activate. When an MC is provided to switch to a commercial power supply, for example, it is recommended to
use bypass operation Pr. 135 to Pr. 139 (Refer to page 293).

51

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

MCCB

Inverter-driven 400V class motor

3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals.
Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class motor is
driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:
z Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring length
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
Specifically,
1)Specify the "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
2)For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven,
dedicated motor".
3)Set Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length

Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection

50m or less

Wiring Length
50m to 100m

exceeding 100m

15(14.5kHz) or less

9(9kHz) or less

4(4kHz) or less

(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side
Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) to the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less and the
sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) to the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more on the inverter output side.
CAUTION
· For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection , refer to page 169. (When using an optional sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the or
more, set "25" in Pr.72 (2.5kHz).)
· For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H) and sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC), refer to the manual of each
option.

52

Precautions for use of the inverter

3.5 Precautions for use of the inverter
The FR-F700 series is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method
may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform
such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.

Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting
holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% or less.

If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor
torque to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
Refer to page 21 for the recommended cable sizes.
(5) The overall wiring length should be 500m (1640.4 feet) maximum.

Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease or the equipment
connected to the secondary side may malfunction or become faulty under the influence of a charging current due
to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore, note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 24.)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference

The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, set the EMC filter valid to
minimize interference. (Refer to page 15)
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter
output side.

This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above
devices is installed, immediately remove it.
(8) For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor.

When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched
OFF, and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is not more
than 30VDC using a tester, etc.

(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.

Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about
1,000,000 times (about 500,000 times for FR-F720-01540 or more).), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be
avoided. Always use the start signal (ON/OFF of STF and STR signals) to start/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 14)
(11) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.

Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity
may damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being
connected incorrectly to short terminals 10E and 5.

53

3
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits caused by
peripheral circuit inadequacy or an earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation
resistance may damage the inverter modules.
· Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase to phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-ON.
Especially for an old motor or use in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.

Precautions for use of the inverter
(12) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2 which are used for bypass operation.

When the wiring is incorrect or if there is an electronic
bypass circuit as shown on the right, the inverter will be
damaged when the power supply is connected to the
inverter U, V, W terminals due to arcs generated at the
time of switch-over or chattering caused by a sequence
error.

MC1

Power
supply

Interlock
R/L1 U
IM
S/L2 V
MC2
T/L3 W Undesirable current
Inverter

(13) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor
in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch on the start signal.

If the start signal (start switch) remains on after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as
the power is restored.
(14) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, provide MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when a fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g.
emergency stop operation). For example, MC avoids overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat
capacity of the resistor is insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an
optional brake resistor.
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a
power failure
3) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
The inverter's input side MC is used for the above purpose, select class JEM1038-AC3 MC for the inverter
input side current when making an emergency stop during normal operation.
(15) Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop.
When the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter
and such will activate. When MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it
ON/OFF after the inverter and motor have stopped.
(16) Countermeasures against inverter-generated EMI

If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes frequency setting signal to fluctuate and motor
rotation speed to be unstable when changing motor speed with analog signal, the following countermeasures are
effective.
·
·
·
·

Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
Use shield cables as signal cables.
Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).

(17) Instructions for overload operation

When performing an operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, increase/decrease in the temperature of the
transistor element of the inverter may repeat due to a continuous flow of large current, shortening the life from
thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing
bound current, starting current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will
result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not start. Therefore, increase the inverter capacity to have enough
allowance for current.
(18) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.

54

Failsafe of the system which uses
the inverter

3.6 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter
fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products,
provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the
inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter,
without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be
detected.
No

Interlock Method

Check Method

Used Signals

1)

Inverter protective
function operation

Operation check of an alarm contact
Circuit error detection by negative logic

2)

Inverter running status

Operation ready signal check

3)

Inverter running status

Logic check of the start signal and
running signal

4)

Inverter running status

Logic check of the start signal and
output current

Output frequency

1) Check by the output of the inverter fault signal
When the fault occurs and the inverter trips, the fault output
signal (ALM signal) is output (ALM signal is assigned to
terminal A1B1C1 in the initial setting).
Check that the inverter functions properly.

Refer to Page

Fault output signal
ALM signal
Operation ready signal
(RY signal)
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Running signal (RUN signal)
Start signal
(STF signal, STR signal)
Output current detection signal
Y12 signal

128
128
126, 128

126, 135

Inverter fault occurrence
(trip)

In addition, negative logic can be set (ON when the inverter
ALM
is normal, OFF when the fault occurs).
(when output

Time
ON OFF

at NC contact)
RES

ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON

Check if the RY signal is output after powering ON the
inverter.
3) Checking the inverter operating status by the start signal
input to the inverter and inverter running signal.
The inverter running signal (RUN signal) is output when the

3

OFF
ON

RH

DC injection brake
operation point
DC injection
brake operation
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Reset
processing

inverter is running (RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN
in the initial setting).
Check if RUN signal is output when inputting the start signal
to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse

OFF
ON

STF

Output frequency

Operation ready signal (RY signal) is output when the
inverter power is ON and the inverter becomes operative.

ON

RY
RUN

Time
ON

OFF
ON

OFF

signal is STR signal). For logic check, note that RUN signal
is output for the period from the inverter decelerates until
output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence
considering the inverter deceleration time

55

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER

2) Checking the inverter operating status by the inverter
Power
operation ready completion signal
supply

Failsafe of the system which uses the
inverter
4) Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal.
The output current detection signal (Y12 signal) is output when the inverter operates and currents flows in the motor.
Check if Y12 signal is output when inputting the start signal to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse
signal is STR signal). Note that the current level at which Y12 signal is output is set to 110% of the inverter rated current
in the initial setting, it is necessary to adjust the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with
Pr.150 Output current detection level.
For logic check, as same as the inverter running signal (RUN signal), the inverter outputs for the period from the inverter
decelerates until output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time.
Output

Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 Setting

Signal

Positive logic Negative logic

ALM

99

199

RY

11

111

RUN

0

100

Y12

12

112

y When using various signals, assign functions to Pr. 190 to Pr.
196 (output terminal function selection) referring to the table on
the left.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

(2) Backup method outside the inverter
Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure
status of the inverter itself. For example, when the inverter CPU fails, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter
fault signal, start signal and RUN signal, there is a case where a fault signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output
even if an inverter fault occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the
backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
1) Start signal and actual operation check
Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to
the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the
start signal turns off. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it is
recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2) Command speed and actual operation check
Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command
and detected speed of the speed detector.
Controller
System failure

Inverter

Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor

56

4

PARAMETERS

This chapter explains the "PARAMETERS" for use of this
product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7
57

Operation panel (FR-DU07)

4.1 Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.1

Component of the operation panel (FR-DU07)

To mount the operation panel (FR-DU07) on the enclosure surface, refer to page 34.
(a) Unit indicator

(g) Monitor indicator

(b) Monitor (4-digit LED)

(h) PLC function indicator

(c) Setting dial

(i) Operation mode indicator

(d) PU/EXT key

(j) Rotation direction indicator

(e) MODE key

(k) FWD key, REV key

(f) SET key

(l) STOP/RESET key

No.

Component

Name

Description

(a)

Unit indicator

Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. (Flickers when the set frequency monitor is displayed.)
A: Lit to indicate current.
V: Lit to indicate voltage.

(b)

Monitor (4-digit LED)

Shows the frequency, parameter number, etc.
(To monitor the output power, the set frequency and other items, set Pr. 52, Pr. 774 to
Pr. 776. )

Setting dial

The dial of the Mitsubishi inverters. The setting dial is used to change the frequency and
parameter settings.
Press the setting dial to perform the following operations:
⋅ To display a set frequency in the monitor mode
⋅ To display the present setting during calibration
⋅ To display a fault history number in the faults history mode

(c)

Used to switch between the PU and External operation modes.
To use the External operation mode (operation using a separately connected frequency
setting potentiometer and start signal), press this key to light up the EXT indicator.

(d)

PU/EXT key

(Press

simultaneously (0.5s), or change the Pr.79 setting to change to the

combined operation mode. )
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Used to cancel the PU stop also.
Used to switch among different setting modes.

(e)

MODE key

Pressing

simultaneously changes the operation mode.

Holding this key for 2 seconds locks the operation panel.

(f)

SET key

Used to enter a setting.
If pressed during the
operation, monitored item
changes as the following:

(g)

Monitor indicator

Lit to indicate the monitor mode.

(h)

PLC function indicator Lit to indicate that the PLC function is active.

(i)

(j)

Operation mode
indicator

Rotation direction
indicator

Output frequency → Output current → Output voltage*
* Energy saving monitor is displayed when the
energy saving monitor is set with Pr. 52.

PU: Lit to indicate the PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate the External operation mode. (EXT is lit at power-ON in the initial setting.)
NET: Lit to indicate the Network operation mode.
PU and EXT: Lit to indicate EXT/PU combined operation mode 1 and 2
FWD: Lit to indicate the forward rotation.
REV: Lit to indicate the reverse rotation.
Lit: When the forward/reverse operation is being performed.
Flickers: When the frequency command is not given even if the forward/reverse command is given.
When the frequency command is lower than the starting frequency.
When the MRS signal is being input.

(k)

FWD key, REV key

FWD key: Used to give a start command in forward rotation.
REV key: Used to give a start command in reverse rotation.

(l)

STOP/RESET key

Used to stop operation commands.
Used to reset a fault when the protective function (fault) is activated.

58

Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.2

Basic operation (factory setting)

Operation mode switchover
At powering ON (External operation mode)

PU Jog operation mode

Parameter setting

Monitor/frequency setting

(Refer to page 61)

(Example)

Value change

PU operation mode
(output frequency monitor)

and frequency flicker.
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!

Output current monitor

Output voltage monitor

Displays the present
setting

Parameter setting mode

(Example)

Value change

Parameter and a setting value
flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!

Parameter clear

Parameter
all clear

Fault clear

Faults history

Automatic
parameter setting

Initial value change list

[Operation for displaying faults history]

Parameter copy

(Refer to page 328)

Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists,

is displayed.

While a fault is displayed:
The

display shifts as follow by pressing

Output current

Output voltage

: Output frequency at the fault

Energization time.

(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)
Pressing

the setting dial shows the fault is at which number of the history.

59

PARAMETERS

4

Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.3

Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)

Setting of Pr. 79 Operation mode selection according to combination of the start command and speed command can
be easily made.
Operation example

Start command: external (STF/STR), frequency command: operate with

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

and

for 0.5s.

3. Turn

until

appears.

(refer to the table below for other settings)

Flickering

Operation Panel Indication

Operation Method
Start command
Frequency command

*

,
Flickering

External

Analog

(STF, STR)

voltage input

Flickering

External

*

(STF, STR)
Flickering

Analog

,

voltage input

Flickering

* To use

4. Press

as a potentiometer, refer to page 316.

to set.

Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
The monitor display appears after 3s.

REMARKS
is displayed ... Why?
Pr. 79 is not registered in user group with "1" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
Parameter write is disabled with "1" set in Pr. 77.
is displayed ... Why?
Setting cannot be changed during operation. Turn the start command (
If

is pressed before pressing

or

, STF or STR) OFF.

, the easy setting mode is terminated and the display goes back to the monitor display. If

the easy setting mode is terminated while Pr. 79 = "0 (initial setting)," the operation mode switches between the PU operation mode
and the External operation mode. Check the operation mode.
Reset can be made with

.

The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) >
terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".

60

Operation panel (FR-DU07)
4.1.4

Changing the parameter setting value
Changing example

Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency .

Operation

Display

1.Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

2.Press

PU indication is lit.

to choose the PU operation

mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.

3.Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

4.

Pr. 1) appears.

5.Press
"

6.Turn
value "

7.Press

to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.

to change it to the set
".
to set.

Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!

to

· Turn

to read another parameter.

· Press

to show the setting again.

· Press

twice to show the next parameter.

· Press

twice to return the monitor to frequency monitor.

are displayed ... Why?

appears. ...... Write disable error
appears. ...... Write error during operation
appears. ...... Calibration error
appears. ..... Mode designation error
For details refer to page 334.
REMARKS

POINT
When Pr. 77 Parameter write selection = "0 (initial setting)," the parameter setting change is only available while the inverter is
stopped under the PU operation mode. To enable the parameter setting change while the inverter is running or under the
operation mode other than PU operation mode, change the Pr. 77 setting.

4.1.5

Displaying the set frequency

During PU operation mode and External/PU combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "3"), push the setting dial (

) to

display the set frequency currently set.

61

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ The number of digits displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed
and set. If the values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals cannot be
displayed nor set.
(Example) When Pr.1
When 60Hz is set, 60.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed. The second decimal places cannot be displayed nor set.

Parameter list

4.2 Parameter list
4.2.1

Parameter list

In the initial setting, only the simple mode parameters are displayed.
Set Pr. 160 User group read selection as required.
Parameter

Initial
Value

Name

Setting
Range
9999

User group read
selection

160

0

0
1

Remarks
Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.
Simple mode and extended mode parameters can be
displayed.
Only the parameters registered in the user group can be
displayed.

REMARKS
⋅ The parameters marked

are the simple mode parameters.

⋅ The parameters marked with

in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial

value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
⋅ Refer to the appendix 2 (page 390) for instruction codes for communication and availability of parameter clear, all clear, and
parameter copy of each parameter.
⋅ Parameters with
have different specifications according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the
SERIAL number.

Name

Setting Range

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value
6/4/3/2/
1.5/1% *1
120/60Hz

Refer
to
Page

0

Torque boost

0 to 30%

1

Maximum frequency

0 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Minimum frequency

0 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

87

Base frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

89

Multi-speed setting (high speed)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

93

Multi-speed setting (middle speed)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

30Hz

93

Multi-speed setting (low speed)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

10Hz

93

Acceleration time

0 to 3600/ 360s

0.1/0.01s

5s/15s *3

101

Deceleration time

0 to 3600/ 360s

0.1/0.01s

10s/30s *3

101

0.01/0.1A

Rated
inverter
current

107

0.01Hz

3Hz

112

*2

78
87

9

Electronic thermal O/L relay

0 to 500/0 to 3600A

DC injection
brake

0.1%

10

DC injection brake operation
frequency

0 to 120Hz, 9999

11

DC injection brake operation time

0 to 10s, 8888

0.1s

0.5s

112

12

DC injection brake operation voltage

0 to 30%

0.1%

4/2/1% *4

112

⎯

13
14

Starting frequency

0 to 60Hz

0.01Hz

0.5Hz

104

Load pattern selection

0, 1

1

1

91

Jog
operation

Basic functions

Function Parameters

15

Jog frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

5Hz

95

16

Jog acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600/360s

0.1/0.01s

0.5s

95

⎯

17

MRS input selection

0, 2

1

0

124

⎯

18

High speed maximum frequency

120 to 400Hz

⎯

19

Base frequency voltage

0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999

⎯

62

0.01Hz
0.1V

120/60Hz
*2

9999

87
89

Customer
Setting

Parameter list
Refer
to
Page

0.01Hz

60Hz

101

1

0

101

20

Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency

1 to 400Hz

21

Acceleration/deceleration time
increments

0, 1

22

Stall prevention operation level

0 to 120%, 9999

0.1%

110%

81

23

Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed

0 to 150%, 9999

0.1%

9999

81

24
to
27

Multi-speed setting (4 speed to 7
speed)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

93

⎯

28

Multi-speed input compensation
selection

0, 1

1

0

97

29

Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection

0, 1, 2, 3, 6

1

0

105

Regenerative function selection

0, 2, 10, 20, 100, 120/
0, 1, 2, 10, 11, 20, 21,
100, 101, 120, 121 *2

1

0

114

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
41
42

Frequency jump 1A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

88

Frequency jump 1B

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

88

Frequency jump 2A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

88

Frequency jump 2B

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

88

Frequency jump 3A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

88

Frequency jump 3B

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

88

Speed display

0, 1 to 9998

1

0

139

Up-to-frequency sensitivity

0 to 100%

0.1%

10%

133

Output frequency detection

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

6Hz

133

43

Output frequency detection for
reverse rotation
Second acceleration/deceleration
time

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

133

0 to 3600/360s

0.1/0.01s

5s

101

0.1/0.01s

9999

101

0.1%

9999

78

0.01Hz

9999

89

0.1%

110%

81

0.01Hz

0Hz

81

0.01Hz

30Hz

133

9999

107

1

0

141

1

1

141

0.01Hz

60Hz

147

Rated
inverter
current

147

⎯

Frequency jump

⎯

Frequency
detection

⎯

30

Second functions

44
45
46
47

Second deceleration time

0 to 3600/360s, 9999

Second torque boost

0 to 30%, 9999

Second V/F (base frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

48
49

Second stall prevention operation
current
Second stall prevention operation
frequency

50

Second output frequency detection

0 to 400Hz

Second electronic thermal O/L relay

0 to 500A, 9999/
0 to 3600A, 9999 *2

Monitor functions

51
52
54

DU/PU main display data selection

CA terminal function selection

0 to 120%
0 to 400Hz, 9999

0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 20,
23 to 25, 50 to 57, 67,
81 to 86, 100
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17,
21, 24, 50, 52, 53, 67,
70, 85

55

Frequency monitoring reference

0 to 400Hz

56

Current monitoring reference

0 to 500A/0 to 3600A *2

0.01/0.1A
*2

0.01/0.1A
*2

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

Acceleration/
deceleration times

Initial
Value

Stall
prevention

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Multi-speed
setting

Setting Range

4
PARAMETERS

Name

Function Parameters

63

Parameter list
Name

Automatic
restart functions

Function Parameters

⎯

Setting Range

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

57

Restart coasting time

0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999/
0, 0.1 to 30s, 9999 *2

0.1s

9999

152

58

Restart cushion time

0 to 60s

0.1s

1s

152

Remote function selection

0, 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13

1

0

98

59
60
65

Energy saving control selection

0, 4, 9

1

0

163

⎯

Retry selection

0 to 5

1

0

159

⎯

66

Stall prevention operation reduction
starting frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

81

67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74

Number of retries at fault occurrence

0 to 10, 101 to 110

1

0

159

Retry waiting time

0 to 10s

0.1s

1s

159

Retry count display erase

0

1

0

159

Special regenerative brake duty

0 to 10%

0.1%

0%

114

Applied motor

0, 1, 2, 20

1

0

111

PWM frequency selection

0 to 15/0 to 6, 25 *2

1

2

169

Analog input selection

0 to 7, 10 to 17

1

1

171

Input filter time constant

0 to 8

1

1

176

⎯

75

Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection

0 to 3, 14 to 17,
100 to 103, 114 to 117

1

14

186

⎯

76
77
78
79

Fault code output selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

161

Parameter write selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

189

Reverse rotation prevention selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

190

Operation mode selection

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7

1

0

195

80

Motor capacity

0.4 to 55kW, 9999/
0 to 3600kW, 9999 *2

0.01/0.1kW

9999

79

90

Motor constant (R1)

0 to 50Ω, 9999/
0 to 400mΩ, 9999 *2

0.001Ω/
0.01mΩ

9999

79

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
117
118
119
120
121

V/F1(first frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

92

V/F1(first frequency voltage)

0 to 1000V

V/F2(second frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

V/F2(second frequency voltage)

0 to 1000V

V/F3(third frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

V/F3(third frequency voltage)

0 to 1000V

V/F4(fourth frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

V/F4(fourth frequency voltage)

0 to 1000V

V/F5(fifth frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

V/F5(fifth frequency voltage)

0 to 1000V

PU communication station number

0 to 31

PU communication speed
PU communication stop bit length
PU communication parity check

0, 1, 2

1

2

214

Number of PU communication retries

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

214

122

PU communication check time
interval
PU communication waiting time
setting

0.1s

9999

214

0 to 150ms, 9999

1

9999

214

0, 1, 2

1

1

214

Retry

⎯

⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯

⎯
⎯

PU connector communication

Adjustable 5 points V/F

Simple magnetic
flux vector control

⎯

64

123
124

PU communication CR/LF selection

0.1V

0V

92

0.01Hz

9999

92

0.1V

0V

92

0.01Hz

9999

92

0.1V

0V

92

0.01Hz

9999

92

0.1V

0V

92

0.01Hz

9999

92

0.1V

0V

92

1

0

214

48, 96, 192, 384

1

192

214

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

214

0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999

Customer
Setting

Parameter list
Refer
to
Page

125 frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

177

⎯

126

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

177

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

261

1

10

261

PID action selection

10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51,
60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 81,
90, 91, 100, 101, 110,
111, 120, 121

129
130
131
132
133
134

PID proportional band

0.1 to 1000%, 9999

0.1%

100%

261

PID integral time

0.1 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

1s

261

PID upper limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

261

PID lower limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

261

PID action set point

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01%

9999

261

PID differential time

0.01 to 10.00s, 9999

0.01s

9999

261

135

Electronic bypass sequence selection 0, 1

1

0

293

136

MC switchover interlock time

0 to 100s

0.1s

1s

293

137

Start waiting time

0 to 100s

0.1s

0.5s

293

138

Bypass selection at a fault

0, 1

1

0

293

139

Automatic switchover frequency from
inverter to bypass operation

0 to 60Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

293

Backlash measures

140

Backlash acceleration stopping
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

1Hz

105

141

Backlash acceleration stopping time

0 to 360s

0.1s

0.5s

105

142

Backlash deceleration stopping
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

1Hz

105

143

Backlash deceleration stopping time

0 to 360s

0.1s

0.5s

105

⎯

144

Speed setting switchover

0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102,
104, 106, 108, 110

1

4

139

PU

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
PID control automatic switchover
frequency

145

PU display language selection

0 to 7

1

1

315

147

Acceleration/deceleration time
switching frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

101

148
149
150

Stall prevention level at 0V input

0 to 120%

0.1%

110%

81

Stall prevention level at 10V input

0 to 120%

0.1%

120%

81

Output current detection level

0 to 120%

0.1%

110%

135

151

Output current detection signal delay
time

0 to 10s

0.1s

0s

135

152
153

Zero current detection level

0 to 150%

0.1%

5%

135

Zero current detection time

0 to 10s

0.01s

0.5s

135

⎯

154

0, 1

1

1

81

⎯

155

Voltage reduction selection during
stall prevention operation
RT signal function validity condition
selection

0, 10

1

0

125

⎯

156
157

1

0

81

0.1s

0s

81

Bypass

PID control

128

Current detection

⎯

⎯

Stall prevention operation selection

0 to 31, 100, 101

OL signal output timer

0 to 25s, 9999

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

Initial
Value

Setting Range

4
PARAMETERS

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

⎯

127

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Name

Function Parameters

65

Parameter list

Function Parameters

⎯

⎯
⎯

158

159

Setting Range

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

AM terminal function selection

1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17,
21, 24, 50, 52, 53, 67, 70,
86

1

1

141

Automatic switchover frequency
range from bypass to inverter
operation

0 to 10Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

293

0, 1, 9999

1

0

190

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

315

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

152

Name

160 User group read selection

Automatic restart
functions

162
163
164

First cushion time for restart

0 to 20s

0.1s

0s

152

First cushion voltage for restart

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

152

165

Stall prevention operation level for
restart

0 to 120%

0.1%

110%

152

Current
detection

166

Output current detection signal
retention time

0 to 10s, 9999

0.1s

0.1s

135

167

Output current detection operation
selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

135

⎯

168
169

Parameter for manufacturer setting.
Do not set.

Cumulative
monitor clear

161

170

Watt-hour meter clear

0, 10, 9999

1

9999

141

171

Operation hour meter clear

0, 9999

1

9999

141

User group

⎯

Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection
Automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure selection

172

User group registered display/batch
clear

9999, (0 to 16)

1

0

190

173
174

User group registration

0 to 999, 9999

1

9999

190

User group clear

0 to 999, 9999

1

9999

190

⎯

66

Customer
Setting

Parameter list

179

Input terminal function assignment

180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190

Output terminal function assignment

191
192
193
194

195

Multi-speed
setting

196

232
to
239

⎯

240
241

⎯

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

1

60

122

1

61

122

1

0

122

1

1

122

1

2

122

1

3

122

1

4

122

JOG terminal function selection

1

5

122

CS terminal function selection

1

6

122

1

24

122

STOP terminal function selection

1

25

122

RES terminal function selection

1

62

122

1

0

128

1

1

128

1

2

128

1

3

128

1

4

128

1

99

128

1

9999

128

0.01Hz

9999

93

STF terminal function selection

STR terminal function selection

Setting Range
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24,
25, 50, 51, 60, 62, 64 to
67, 70 to 72, 77, 78,
9999
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24,
25, 50, 51, 61, 62, 64 to
67, 70 to 72, 77, 78,
9999

RL terminal function selection
RM terminal function selection
RH terminal function selection

0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24,
25, 50, 51, 62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72, 77, 78, 9999

RT terminal function selection
AU terminal function selection

MRS terminal function selection

0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24,
25, 50, 51, 62 to 67, 70
to 72, 77, 78, 9999

0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24,
25, 50, 51, 62, 64 to 67,
70 to 72, 77, 78, 9999

RUN terminal function selection
SU terminal function selection
IPF terminal function selection
OL terminal function selection

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25,
26, 45 to 54, 64, 67,
70 to 79, 82, 85, 90 to
96, 98, 99, 100 to 105,
107, 108, 110 to 116,
125, 126, 145 to 154,
164, 167, 170, 179, 182,
185, 190 to 196, 198,
199, 9999

FU terminal function selection

ABC1 terminal function selection

ABC2 terminal function selection

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25,
26, 45 to 54, 64, 67,
70 to 79, 82, 85, 90, 91,
94 to 96, 98, 99,
100 to 105, 107, 108,
110 to 116, 125, 126,
145 to 154, 164, 167,
170, 179, 182, 185, 190,
191, 194 to 196, 198,
199, 9999

Multi-speed setting (8 speed to 15
speed)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

Soft-PWM operation selection

0, 1

1

1

169

Analog input display unit switchover

0, 1

1

0

177

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

178

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Name

4
PARAMETERS

Function Parameters

67

Parameter list
Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

0 to 100%

0.1%

100%

175

0 to 100%

0.1%

75%

175

1

1

300

Name

Function Parameters

242

⎯

243

⎯

244

Cooling fan operation selection

0, 1

245

Rated slip

0 to 50%, 9999

0.01%

9999

80

246

Slip compensation time constant

0.01 to 10s

0.01s

0.5s

80

247

Constant-power range slip
compensation selection

0, 9999

1

9999

80

⎯

250

Stop selection

0 to 100s,
1000 to 1100s, 8888,
9999

0.1s

9999

119

⎯

251

Output phase loss protection
selection

0, 1

1

1

162

252

Override bias

0 to 200%

0.1%

50%

175

253

Override gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

175

255
256
257
258
259
260
261

Life alarm status display

(0 to 15)

1

0

301

Inrush current limit circuit life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

301

Control circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

301

Main circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

301

Main circuit capacitor life measuring

0, 1

1

0

301

PWM frequency automatic switchover 0, 1

1

1

169

Power failure stop selection

0, 1, 2, 21, 22

1

0

156

262

Subtracted frequency at deceleration
start

0 to 20Hz

0.01Hz

3Hz

156

263
264

Subtraction starting frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

60Hz

156

Power-failure deceleration time 1

0 to 3600/ 360s

0.1/0.01s

5s

156

265

Power-failure deceleration time 2

0 to 3600/ 360s,
9999

0.1/0.01s

9999

156

266

Power failure deceleration time
switchover frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

156

267
268

Terminal 4 input selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

171

Monitor decimal digits selection

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

141

269

Parameter for manufacturer setting.
Do not set.
Password lock level

0 to 6, 99, 101 to 106,
199, 9999

1

9999

192

Password lock/unlock

(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998,
9999

1

9999

192

Rotation direction detection selection
at restarting

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

152

Life check

Frequency compensation
function

⎯

Slip
compensation

Terminal 1 added compensation
amount (terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added compensation
amount (terminal 4)

Setting Range

Power failure stop

⎯

⎯
⎯

Password
function

⎯

⎯

68

296
297
299

Customer
Setting

Parameter list

332
333

RS-485 communication

334

341
342

PLC function

⎯

343
390
414
415

Remote
output

495

⎯

Maintenance

⎯

PLC function

⎯

⎯
⎯

0

214

RS-485 communication speed

3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96, 192,
384
(96, 192, 384, 768)

1

96

214

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

214

0, 1, 2

1

2

214

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

214

0 to 999.8s, 9999

0.1s

0s

214

0 to 150ms, 9999

1

9999

214

0, 1

1

0

204

0, 1, 2

1

0

204

0, 1, 2, 10, 12

1

0

203

0, 1, 2

1

1

214

0, 1

1

0

216

Communication error count

⎯

1

0

232

% setting reference frequency

1 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

247

RS-485 communication stop bit
length
RS-485 communication parity check
selection

336

340

Refer
to
Page

1

RS-485 communication check time
interval
RS-485 communication waiting time
setting
Communication operation command
source
Communication speed command
source
Communication startup mode
selection
RS-485 communication CR/LF
selection
Communication EEPROM write
selection

339

Initial
Value

0 to 31
(0 to 127, 0 to 247)

RS-485 communication retry count

338

Minimum
Setting
Increments

RS-485 communication station
number

335

337

Setting Range

PLC function operation selection

0, 1

1

0

260

Inverter operation lock mode setting

0, 1

1

0

260

Remote output selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

137

496
497
498

Remote output data 1

0 to 4095

1

0

137

Remote output data 2

0 to 4095

1

0

137

1

0

260

502

Stop mode selection at
communication error

0 to 3

1

0

216

503

Maintenance timer

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

304

504

Maintenance timer alarm output set
time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

304

Speed setting reference

1 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

139

0 to 65535

1

0

260

505
506
to
515
522
539

PLC function flash memory clear

Parameter 1 to 10 for user

0 to 9999

Output stop frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

120

Modbus-RTU communication check
time interval

0 to 999.8s, 9999

0.1s

9999

232

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

331

Name

4
PARAMETERS

Function Parameters

69

Parameter list

Communication

Function Parameters

549
550
551

Current average
monitor

PID
control

553

⎯

Multiple
rating

⎯

⎯

Pump function

PID control

⎯

Speed
smoothing
control

⎯

⎯

70

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

0, 1, 2

1

1

232

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

204

1, 2

1

2

204

0.1%

9999

261

1

0

261,
283

Name
Protocol selection
NET mode operation command
source selection
PU mode operation command source
selection

Setting Range

PID deviation limit

0 to 100.0%, 9999

PID signal operation selection

0 to 3, 10 to 13

555

Current average time

0.1 to 1.0s

0.1s

1s

305

556

Data output mask time

0.0 to 20.0s

0.1s

0s

305

557

Current average value monitor signal
output reference current

0 to 500A/0 to 3600A *2

0.01/0.1A
*2

Rated
inverter
current

305

563
564

Energization time carrying-over times

(0 to 65535)

1

0

141

Operating time carrying-over times

(0 to 65535)

1

0

141

570

Multiple rating setting

0, 1

1

0

86

571
573

Holding time at a start

0.0 to 10.0s, 9999

0.1s

9999

104

4mA input check selection

1, 2, 3, 4, 9999

1

9999

182

575

Output interruption detection time

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

1s

576

Output interruption detection level

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

577

Output interruption cancel level

900 to 1100%

0.1%

1000%

578
579
580
581

Auxiliary motor operation selection

0 to 3

1

0

283

Motor connection function selection

0 to 3

1

0

283

MC switching interlock time

0 to 100s

0.1s

1s

283

Start waiting time

0 to 100s

0.1s

1s

283

582

Auxiliary motor connection-time
deceleration time
Auxiliary motor disconnection-time
acceleration time

0 to 3600/360s, 9999

0.1/0.01s

1s

283

0 to 3600/360s, 9999

0.1/0.01s

1s

283

554

583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
611
653
654
665

261,
283
261,
283
261,
283

Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

283

Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

283

Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

283

Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

283

Auxiliary motor 2 stopping frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

283

Auxiliary motor 3 stopping frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

283

Auxiliary motor start detection time

0 to 3600s

0.1s

5s

283

Auxiliary motor stop detection time

0 to 3600s

0.1s

5s

283

Acceleration time at a restart

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

5/15s *2

152

Speed smoothing control

0 to 200%

0.1%

0

170

Speed smoothing cutoff frequency

0 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

20Hz

170

Regeneration avoidance frequency
gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

298

Customer
Setting

Parameter list
Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

0 to 255

1

255

247

Max Info Frames

1 to 255

1

1

247

728

Device instance number (Upper 3
digit)

0 to 419 (0 to 418)

1

0

247

729

Device instance number (Lower 4
digit)

0 to 9999 (0 to 4302)

1

0

247

Second PID action selection

10, 11, 20, 21, 50, 51,
60, 61, 70, 71, 80, 81,
90, 91, 100, 101, 110,
111, 120, 121, 9999

1

9999

281

Second PID control automatic
switchover frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

281

Second PID action set point

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01%

9999

281

Second PID proportional band

0.1 to 1000%, 9999

0.1%

100%

281

Second PID integral time

0.1 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

1s

281

Second PID differential time

0.01 to 10.00s, 9999

0.01s

9999

281

PID unit selection

0 to 43, 9999

1

9999

320

Pre-charge fault selection

0, 1

1

0

275

Pre-charge ending level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

275

Pre-charge ending time

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

9999

275

Pre-charge upper detection level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

275

Pre-charge time limit

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

9999

275

Second pre-charge fault selection

0, 1

1

0

275,
281

Second pre-charge ending level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

275,
281

Second pre-charge ending time

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

9999

275,
281

Second pre-charge upper detection
level

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

275,
281

Second pre-charge time limit

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

9999

275,
281

727

754
755
756
757
758
759
760
PID control

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Auto Baudrate/Max Master

753

761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
774

PU

Setting Range

775
776

PU/DU monitor selection 1
PU/DU monitor selection 2
PU/DU monitor selection 3

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

726

Name

4
PARAMETERS

BACnet MS/TP protocol

Function Parameters

322
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17,
20, 23 to 25, 40 to 42,
50 to 57, 67, 81 to 86,
100, 9999

1

9999

322
322

71

Parameter list
Name

Function Parameters

777
⎯

⎯

4mA input fault operation frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

Current input check filter

0 to 10s

779

Operation frequency during
communication error

0 to 400Hz, 9999

799

Pulse increment setting for output
power

0.1kWh, 1kWh, 10kWh,
100kWh, 1000kWh

778

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

0.01Hz

9999

182

0.01s

0

182

0.01Hz

9999

216

0.1

1kWh

138

1

0

260

PLC function

⎯

Setting Range

826
to
865

⎯

867
869
870

AM output filter

0 to 5s

0.01s

0.01s

147

Current output filter

0 to 5s

0.01s

0.02s

147

Speed detection hysteresis

0 to 5Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

133

⎯

872

Input phase loss protection selection

0, 1

1

0

162

Regeneration avoidance operation
selection
Regeneration avoidance operation
level
Regeneration avoidance at
deceleration detection sensitivity

0, 1, 2

1

0

298

0.1V

380V/
760VDC*5

298

1

0

298

0.01Hz

6Hz

298

⎯

882

885

Regeneration avoidance
compensation frequency limit value

0 to 30Hz, 9999

886

Regeneration avoidance voltage gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

298

888

Free parameter 1

0 to 9999

1

9999

307

889

Free parameter 2

0 to 9999

1

9999

307

891

Cumulative power monitor digit
shifted times

0 to 4, 9999

1

9999

164

892

Load factor

30 to 150%

0.1%

Energy saving monitor

Regeneration avoidance function

0 to 65535

Free
parameter

⎯

Parameter 11 to 50 for user

72

883
884

300 to 800V
0 to 5

893

Energy saving monitor reference
(motor capacity)

0.1 to 55kW/
0 to 3600kW *2

894

Control selection during commercial
power-supply operation

0, 1, 2, 3

895
896
897

Power saving rate reference value

0, 1, 9999

Power unit cost

0 to 500, 9999

Power saving monitor average time

898

Power saving cumulative monitor
clear

899

Operation time rate (estimated value)

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01/0.1kW
*2

1

100%

164

SLD/LD value
of Applied
motor Capacity

164

0

164

1

9999

164

0.01

9999

164

0, 1 to 1000h, 9999

1h

9999

164

0, 1, 10, 9999

1

9999

164

0.1%

9999

164

Customer
Setting

Parameter list
Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

Calibration parameters
Analog output
current calibration
PID control
PU

⎯

⎯

⎯

C0
(900) *6
C1
(901) *6
C2
(902) *6
C3
(902) *6
125
(903) *6
C4
(903) *6
C5
(904) *6
C6
(904) *6
126
(905) *6
C7
(905) *6
C8
(930) *6
C9
(930) *6
C10
(931) *6
C11
(931) *6
C42
(934) *6

CA terminal calibration

⎯

⎯

⎯

149

AM terminal calibration

⎯

⎯

⎯

149

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

177

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

177

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

177

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

177

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

177

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

177

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

177

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

177

Current output bias signal

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

149

Current output bias current

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

149

Current output gain signal

0 to 100%

0.1%

100%

149

Current output gain current

0 to 100%

0.1%

100%

149

PID display bias coefficient

0 to 500.00, 9999

0.01

9999

261

C43
(934) *6 PID display bias analog value

0 to 300.0%

0.1%

20%

261

C44
(935) *6 PID display gain coefficient

0 to 500.00, 9999

0.01

9999

261

C45
(935) *6 PID display gain analog value

0 to 300.0%

0.1%

100%

261

989
990
991

997

999

Parameter copy alarm release

10/100

1

10/100

325

PU buzzer control

0, 1

1

1

317

PU contrast adjustment

0 to 63

1

58

317

Fault initiation

16 to 18, 32 to 34, 48,
49, 64, 80 to 82, 96, 112,
128, 129, 144, 145, 160,
161, 162, 164 to 168,
176 to 179, 192 to 194,
196 to 199, 228, 229,
230, 241, 242, 245 to
247, 253, 9999

1

9999

308

Automatic parameter setting

1, 2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 30,
31, 9999

1

9999

309

Customer
Setting

Parameter List

Minimum
Setting
Increments

4
PARAMETERS

Setting Range

Name

Function Parameters

73

Parameter list
Name

Clear
parameter

Function Parameters

⎯
⎯
⎯
*1

*2
*3
*4

*5
*6

Setting Range

Minimum
Setting
Increments

Initial
Value

Refer
to
Page

Pr.CL Parameter clear
ALLC All parameter clear

0, 1

1

0

323

0, 1

1

0

324

Er.CL Faults history clear

0, 1

1

0

328

PCPY Parameter copy
Pr.CH

0, 1, 2, 3

1

0

325

AUTO

Initial value change list

⎯

⎯

⎯

327

Automatic parameter setting

⎯

⎯

⎯

309

Differ according to capacities.
6%: FR-F720-00046, FR-F740-00023
4%: FR-F720-00077 to 00167, FR-F740-00038 to 00083
3%: FR-F720-00250 and 00340, FR-F740-00126 and 00170
2%: FR-F720-00490 to 01540, FR-F740-00250 to 00770
1.5%: FR-F720-01870 and 02330, FR-F740-00930 and 01160
1%: FR-F720-03160 or more, FR-F740-01800 or more
Differ according to capacities.
FR-F720-02330 or less / FR-F720-03160 or more
FR-F740-01160 or less / FR-F740-01800 or more
Differ according to capacities.
FR-F720-00340 or less / FR-F720-00490 or more
FR-F740-00170 or less / FR-F740-00250 or more
Differ according to capacities.
4%: FR-F720-00340 or less, FR-F740-00170 or less
2%: FR-F720-00490 to 02330, FR-F740-00250 to 01160
1%: FR-F720-03160 or more, FR-F740-01800 or more
Differs according to the voltage class. (200V class/400V class).
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).

74

Customer
Setting

Parameters according to purposes
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2

4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3

4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4

4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3

4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2

4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2
4.9.3
4.9.4

4.10
4.10.1
4.10.2
4.10.3
4.10.4
4.10.5
4.10.6
4.10.7
4.10.8
4.10.9

4.11
4.11.1
4.11.2
4.11.3
4.11.4
4.11.5

4.12
4.12.1
4.12.2
4.12.3

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor

78

Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)............................................................................................................................ 78
Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr.80, Pr.90) .................................................................................................... 79
Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247) ...................................................................................................................... 80
Stall prevention operation
(Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157).................................................. 81
Multiple rating (Pr. 570)............................................................................................................................................... 86

Limiting the output frequency

87

Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18) .................................................................................................. 87
Avoiding mechanical resonance points (Frequency jump) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)........................................................... 88

V/F pattern

89

Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) .......................................................................................................... 89
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ................................................................................................................................... 91
Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109)................................................................................................... 92

Frequency setting by external terminals

93

Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) ................................................... 93
Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ..................................................................................................................................... 95
Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting (Pr. 28)............................................................................... 97
Remote setting function (Pr. 59)................................................................................................................................. 98

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and
acceleration/deceleration pattern

101

Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147)................................................................................................ 101
Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)........................................................................... 104
Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143) ............................................................................... 105

Selection and protection of a motor

107

Motor protection from overheat (Electronic thermal relay function) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51)................................................ 107
Applied motor (Pr. 71).............................................................................................................................................. 111

Motor brake and stop operation

112

DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)........................................................................................................................
Selection of a regenerative brake and DC feeding (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) .......................................................................
Stop selection (Pr. 250)............................................................................................................................................
Output stop function (Pr. 522)..................................................................................................................................

Function assignment of external terminal and control

122

Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)..............................................................................................
Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17).................................................................................................
Condition selection of function validity by the second function selection
signal (RT) (RT signal, Pr. 155)...............................................................................................................................
Start signal selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250).......................................................................................
Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 196)...........................................................................................
Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 870).........................................
Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)................................................................................
Remote output function (REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497)......................................................................................
Pulse train output of output power (Y79 signal, Pr. 799)........................................................................................

Monitor display and monitor output signal

122
124
125
126
128
133
135
137
138

4

139

Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 505)...................................................................................
DU/PU monitor display selection
(Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)........................................................
CA, AM terminal function selection (Pr.55, Pr.56, Pr.867, Pr.869)........................................................................
Terminal CA, AM calibration
(Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr. 931))................................................
How to calibrate the terminal CA when using the operation panel (FR-DU07).....................................................

Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure

112
114
119
120

PARAMETERS

4.3

139
141
147
149
151

152

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)............................................................................................... 152
Power failure signal (Y67 signal)............................................................................................................................. 155
Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266 )................................................................... 156

75

4.13
4.13.1
4.13.2
4.13.3

4.14
4.14.1
4.14.2

4.15
4.15.1
4.15.2

4.16
4.16.1
4.16.2
4.16.3
4.16.4
4.16.5

4.17
4.17.1
4.17.2
4.17.3
4.17.4
4.17.5

4.18
4.18.1
4.18.2
4.18.3

4.19
4.19.1
4.19.2
4.19.3
4.19.4
4.19.5
4.19.6
4.19.7
4.19.8
4.19.9

4.20
4.20.1
4.20.2
4.20.3
4.20.4
4.20.5

4.21
4.21.1
4.21.2

4.22
4.22.1
4.22.2
4.22.3
4.22.4
4.22.5
4.22.6

76

Operation setting at fault occurrence

159

Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69).................................................................................................................... 159
Fault code output selection (Pr. 76)......................................................................................................................... 161
Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872).............................................................................. 162

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor

163

Energy saving control and Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) ............................................................................. 163
Energy saving monitor (Pr. 891 to Pr. 899)............................................................................................................. 164

Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance

169

PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260) ............................................................. 169
Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653, Pr. 654)............................................................................................................ 170

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)

171

Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)...................................................................................................................
Analog input compensation (Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253) ................................................................
Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74) ..............................................................................
Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905))...........................................................................................
4mA input check of current input (Pr. 573, Pr. 777, Pr. 778)..................................................................................

Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction

177
182

186

Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ................................................................
Parameter write selection (Pr. 77) ...........................................................................................................................
Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)........................................................................................................
Display of applied parameters and user group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)...........................................
Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297).......................................................................................................................

Selection of operation mode and operation location

171
175
176

186
189
190
190
192

195

Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)........................................................................................................................... 195
Operation mode at power ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) ...................................................................................................... 203
Start command source and speed command source during
communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551)................................................................................ 204

Communication operation and setting

209

Wiring and configuration of PU connector...............................................................................................................
Wiring and arrangement of RS-485 terminals.........................................................................................................
Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 549)........................................................................................
Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) ...............................................................................................
Operation selection at communication error (Pr.502, Pr.779)................................................................................
Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)...................................................................................
Modbus-RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 539, Pr. 549, Pr.779) ...................................................................
BACnet MS/TP protocol ...........................................................................................................................................
Operation by PLC function
(Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498, Pr. 506 to Pr. 515, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865)..........................................................................

PID control

214
216
216
219
232
247
260

261

Outline of PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 241, Pr. 553, Pr. 554,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577).....................................................................................................................................................
Bias and gain calibration for PID displayed values
(Pr. 241, Pr. 759, C42(Pr. 934) to C45(Pr. 935)).....................................................................................................
Pre-charge function (Pr.760 to Pr. 769)...................................................................................................................
Second PID function (Pr.753 to Pr. 758, Pr.765 to Pr.769)....................................................................................
Advanced PID function (pump function) (Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 591) ...................................................................

Special operation and frequency control

209
211

261
273
275
281
283

293

Bypass-inverter switchover function (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159).................................................. 293
Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886).............................................................................. 298

Useful functions

300

Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ................................................................................................................
Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr .259) .....................................................................................
Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) ............................................................................................................
Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) .....................................................................................
Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889)............................................................................................................................
Initiating a fault (Pr.997)............................................................................................................................................

300
301
304
305
307
308

4.22.7

4.23
4.23.1
4.23.2
4.23.3
4.23.4

4.24
4.24.1
4.24.2
4.24.3
4.24.4

Setting multiple parameters as a batch (Pr.999) .................................................................................................... 309

Setting from the parameter unit, operation panel

315

PU display language selection (Pr. 145).................................................................................................................
Setting dial potentiometer mode/key lock selection (Pr. 161)................................................................................
Buzzer control (Pr. 990) ...........................................................................................................................................
PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) ............................................................................................................................

Setting of FR-PU07-01

315
315
317
317

318

PID display bias/gain setting menu .........................................................................................................................
Unit selection for the PID parameter/PID monitored items (Pr. 759).....................................................................
PID set point direct setting menu.............................................................................................................................
3-line monitor selection (Pr. 774 to Pr.776).............................................................................................................

319
320
321
322

4.25

Parameter clear

323

4.26

All parameter clear

324

4.27

Parameter copy and parameter verification

325

4.27.1
4.27.2

Parameter copy........................................................................................................................................................ 325
Parameter verification .............................................................................................................................................. 326

4.28

Initial value change list

327

4.29

Check and clear of the faults history

328

PARAMETERS

4

77

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor

4.3 Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Refer to Page

Set starting torque manually

Manual torque boost

Pr. 0, Pr. 46

78

Automatically control output current
according to load
Compensate for motor slip to secure
low-speed torque
Limit output current to prevent inverter
trip

Simple magnetic flux
vector control

Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 90

79

Pr. 245 to Pr. 247

80

Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66,
Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157

81

Pr. 570

86

Change the overload current rating
specifications

4.3.1

Slip compensation
Stall prevention operation
Multiple rating setting

Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46)

You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low-frequency range to improve motor torque reduction in the lowspeed range.
Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
The starting torque boost can be changed by switching terminals.
Parameter
Number

0

Torque boost

46 *1
*1

Initial Value
200V class (400V class)

Name

00046 (00023)
00077 to 00167 (00038 to 00083)
00250, 00340 (00126, 00170)
00490 to 01540 (00250 to 00770)
01870,02330 (00930, 01160)
03160 (01800) or more

Second torque
boost

Setting
Range
6%
4%
3%
2%
1.5%
1%

0 to 30%

0 to 30%

9999

9999

Description

Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.

Set the torque boost value when the
RT signal is ON.
Without second torque boost

They can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

(1) Starting torque adjustment
100%

⋅ On the assumption that Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage is
100%, set the output voltage at 0Hz in % in Pr. 0 (Pr. 46).
⋅ Adjust the parameter little by little (about 0.5%), and check
the motor status each time. If the setting is too large, the
motor will overheat. The guideline is about 10% at the
greatest.

Output
voltage
Pr.0
Pr.46

Setting
range
0

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Base
frequency

(2) Set multiple torque boost (RT signal, Pr. 46)
⋅ Use the second torque boost when changing the torque boost according to application or when using multiple
motors by switching between them by one inverter.
⋅ Pr. 46 Second torque boost is valid when the RT signal turns ON.
REMARKS
⋅ The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 124)
⋅ The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal in the default setting. By setting "3" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function
selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.

CAUTION
⋅ Increase the setting when the distance between the inverter and motor is long or when motor torque is insufficient in the lowspeed range. If the setting is too large, an overcurrent trip may occur.
⋅ The Pr. 0 and Pr. 46 settings are valid only when V/F control is selected.
⋅ When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor) with the FR-F720-00250 or 00340 and FR-F740-00126 or
00170, set the torque boost value to 2%. If the initial set Pr. 71 value is changed to the setting for use with a constant-torque
motor, the Pr. 0 setting changes to the corresponding value in above.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 3 Base frequency, Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 111
Pr. 80 Motor capacity
Refer to page 79
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)

78

Refer to page 89
Refer to page 122

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
4.3.2

Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr.80, Pr.90)

Providing optimum excitation to the motor can also produce high torque in a low-speed range.
(Simple magnetic flux vector control)
Parameter
Number

Initial
Value

Name

Setting Range
200V class (400V class)

Description

0.4 to
Set the capacity of the motor used to
55kW
select Simple magnetic flux vector
0 to
control.
03160 (01800) or more
3600kW
9999
V/F control is performed
02330 (01160) or less 0 to 50Ω Used to set the motor primary
resistance value.
0 to
03160 (01800) or more
400mΩ (Normally setting is not necessary.)
Use the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF9999
HRCA) constants
02330 (01160) or less

80

Motor capacity

9999

90

Motor constant (R1)

9999

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

POINT
⋅ The number of motor poles should be any of 2, 4 and 6 poles.
⋅ Single-motor operation (One motor for one inverter)
⋅ The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m

(1) Automatically control optimum torque (Pr.80)
⋅ When Simple magnetic flux vector control is not used, set "9999" (initial value) in Pr.80.
⋅ Set the used motor capacity (equal to or one rank higher than the inverter capacity).
REMARKS
When using a constant-torque motor, set Pr. 71 Applied motor to "1" (constant-torque motor).

CAUTION
⋅ When Simple magnetic flux vector control is selected, the rated motor frequency is set in Pr. 3 and the rated motor voltage is set in
Pr. 19. The base frequency voltage is handled as 200V class : 200V, 400V class : 400V when "9999" or "8888" is set in Pr. 19 .
⋅ Adjustable 5 points V/F, energy saving operation mode, Optimum excitation control function only under V/F control. They do not
function for Simple magnetic flux vector control.

(2) Set the motor constant (Pr.90)
⋅ Normally setting is not necessary. When you need more torque under Simple magnetic flux vector control for other
manufacturer’s motor, set the motor primary resistance value (R1) for connection. When the setting value is
"9999" (initial value), the motor constant is based on the Mitsubishi motor constant (SF-JR, SF-HRCA).
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 3 Base frequency, Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection

4

Refer to page 111

Pr. 77 Parameter write selection

Refer to page 189

PARAMETERS

Pr. 71 Applied motor

Refer to page 89

Refer to page 163

79

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
4.3.3

Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)

The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed constant.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

245

Rated slip

9999

0.01 to 50%
0, 9999

246

Slip compensation time
constant

0.5s

0.01 to 10s

247

Constant-power range slip
compensation selection

9999

0
9999

Description
Used to set the rated motor slip.
No slip compensation
Used to set the slip compensation response
time. When the value is made smaller,
response will be faster. However, as load
inertia is greater, a regenerative overvoltage
(E.OV ) fault is more liable to occur.
Slip compensation is not made in the
constant power range (frequency range
above the frequency set in Pr. 3)
Slip compensation is made in the constant
power range.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ Slip compensation is validated when the motor rated slip calculated by the following formula is set in Pr. 245. Slip
compensation is not used when Pr. 245 = "0" or "9999".
Rated slip =

Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed
× 100[%]
Synchronous speed at base frequency

REMARKS
When performing slip compensation, the output frequency may become greater than the set frequency. Set the Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency value a little higher than the set frequency.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency
Pr. 3 Base frequency

80

Refer to page 87
Refer to page 89

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
4.3.4

Stall prevention operation
(Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 49, Pr. 66, Pr. 148, Pr. 149, Pr. 154, Pr. 156, Pr. 157)

This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter
from coming to trip due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit stall prevention and fast-response
current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration, driving or regeneration.
Stall prevention
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is
automatically varied to reduce the output current.
Also the second stall prevention function can restrict the output frequency range in which the stall prevention
function is valid.
Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
Parameter
Number

Name

22 *1

Stall prevention operation
level

110% *2

23

Stall prevention operation
level compensation factor
at double speed

9999

48

Second stall prevention
operation current

110% *2

49

Second stall prevention
operation frequency

0Hz

Initial Value

Setting
Range

Description

0

66
148
149
154
156
157

Stall prevention operation
reduction starting frequency
Stall prevention level at 0V
input
Stall prevention level at
10V input
Voltage reduction
selection during stall
prevention operation
Stall prevention operation
selection
OL signal output timer

60Hz

Stall prevention operation selection becomes invalid.
Set the current value at which stall prevention
0.1 to 120% *2
operation will be started.
9999
Analog variable
The stall operation level can be reduced when
0 to 150% *2
operating at a high speed above the rated frequency.
9999
Constant according to Pr. 22
0
Second stall prevention operation invalid
0.1 to 120% *2 The second stall prevention operation level can be set.
0
Second stall prevention operation invalid
Set the frequency at which stall prevention operation
0.01 to 400Hz
of Pr. 48 is started.
9999
Pr. 48 is valid when the RT signal is ON.
Set the frequency at which the stall operation level is
0 to 400Hz
started to reduce.

110% *2

0 to 120% *2

120% *2

0 to 120% *2

1
0
0s

0
1
0 to 31,
100, 101
0 to 25s
9999

Stall prevention operation level can be changed by
the analog signal input to terminal 1.
You can select whether to use
output voltage reduction during
Without voltage reduction stall prevention operation or not.
You can select whether stall prevention operation and fastresponse current limit operation will be performed or not.
Set the output start time of the OL signal output when
stall prevention is activated.
Without the OL signal output
With voltage reduction

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
*1 This parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
*2 When Pr. 570 Multiple rating setting = "1", performing inverter reset and all parameter clear changes the initial value and setting range. (Refer to
page 86)

(1) Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22)

Constant
speed

ion
at
ler
ce
De

Ac
ce
ler
at
ion

Output frequency

Time
OL
Stall prevention operation example

⋅ Set in Pr. 22 the ratio of the output current to the rated inverter current at
which stall prevention operation will be performed. Normally set 110%
(initial value).
⋅ Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes deceleration) during
acceleration, makes deceleration during constant speed, and stops
deceleration during deceleration.
⋅ When stall prevention operation is performed, the OL signal is output.

CAUTION
⋅ If an overload status lasts long, an inverter trip (e.g. electronic thermal relay function (E.THM)) may occur.
⋅ When Pr. 156 has been set to activate the fast-response current limit (initial setting), the Pr. 22 setting should not be higher than
140%. The torque will not be developed by doing so. (When Pr. 570 = "1")

81

4
PARAMETERS

Output current

Pr.22

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
(2) Stall prevention operation signal output and output timing adjustment (OL signal, Pr. 157)
⋅ When the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, the stall
prevention operation signal (OL signal) turns ON for longer than 100ms. When the output current falls to or below
the stall prevention operation level, the output signal turns OFF.
⋅ Use Pr. 157 OL signal output timer to set whether the OL signal is output immediately or after a preset period of time.
⋅ This operation is also performed when the regeneration avoidance function
Pr. 157 Setting
0
(initial value)
0.1 to 25
9999

Description

(overvoltage stall) is executed.

Overload state
(OL operation)

Output immediately.
Output after the set time (s) has elapsed.
Not output.

OL output signal
Pr.157 Set time(s)

REMARKS
⋅ The OL signal is assigned to the terminal OL in the initial setting. The OL signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by
setting "3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).

CAUTION
· If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears to shutoff the
inverter output.
· Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

(3) Setting of stall prevention operation in high frequency range (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)
Setting example

When Pr. 23 = "9999", the stall prevention
operation level is as set in Pr. 22 to 400Hz.

Stall prevention operation level
as set in Pr. 23
Pr. 66

Stall prevention
operation level (%)

When Pr. 23 = 9999

Stall prevention operation
level (%)

Pr. 22

110

66

33
22
16.5
0

400Hz
Output frequency (Hz)

Pr.22 = 110%
Pr.23 = 100%
Pr.66 = 60Hz

60 100

200

300

400

Output frequency (Hz)

⋅ During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor
current does not increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the current at motor lockup
becomes smaller than the rated output current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not executed if the
motor is at a stop.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the
high frequency range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the high-speed range on a centrifugal
separator etc. Normally, set 60Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
⋅ Formula for stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level in high
frequency range (%)
However, A =

Pr. 66(Hz) × Pr. 22(%)
Output frequency (H)

= A+B × [
, B =

Pr. 22 - A
Pr. 23 - 100
]×[
]
Pr. 22 - B
100

Pr. 66(Hz) × Pr. 22(%)
400Hz

⋅ When Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed = "9999" (initial value), the stall
prevention operation level is kept constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.

82

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
(4) Set multiple stall prevention operation levels (Pr. 48, Pr. 49)

Stall prevention
operation current

⋅ Setting "9999" in Pr. 49 Second stall prevention operation frequency and turning the RT signal ON make Pr. 48 Second stall
prevention operation current valid.
⋅ In Pr. 48, you can set the stall prevention operation level at the output frequency from 0Hz to that set in Pr. 49.
During acceleration, however, the operation level is as set in Pr. 22.
⋅ This function can also be used for stop-on-contact or similar operation by decreasing the Pr. 48 setting to weaken the
deceleration torque (stopping torque).

Pr.48

Pr. 49 Setting

Operation

0(initial value)

The second stall prevention operation is not performed.
If the output frequency is equal to or less than the frequency set in
Pr. 49, the second stall prevention function activates. (during
constant speed or deceleration)*1
The second stall prevention function is performed according to
the RT signal.
RT signal ON ... Stall level Pr. 48
RT signal OFF ... Stall level Pr. 22

0.01Hz to 400Hz
During acceleration

9999 *2
*1

During deceleration/constant speed
Pr.49

*2

Running frequency

The smaller setting of the stall prevention operation levels set in Pr. 22 and Pr. 48 has a higher
priority.
When Pr. 22 = "9999" (Stall prevention operation level analog input), the stall prevention
operation level also switches from the analog input (terminal 1 input) to the stall prevention
operation level of Pr. 48 when the RT signal turns ON.
(The second stall prevention operation level cannot be input in an analog form.)

Set frequency exceeds Pr. 49
Output
frequency (Hz)

Set frequency is Pr. 49 or less
Output
frequency

Set
frequency
Pr.49

Output
frequency (Hz)

Pr.49
Set
frequency

Time

Time

Stall
prevention
level

Pr. 22
used

Pr. 48
used

Output
frequency

Pr. 22
used

Pr. 48
used

REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 49 ≠ "9999" (level changed according to frequency) and Pr. 48 = "0%", the stall prevention operation level is 0% at or
higher than the frequency set in Pr. 49.
⋅ In the initial setting, the RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal. By setting "3" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
⋅ The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 125)

(5) Stall prevention operation level setting by terminal 1 (analog variable) (Pr. 148, Pr. 149)
Current limit level at input voltage 10V/5V.
Set using Pr. 149.

Initial setting 120%
110%
100%
50%
Input voltage (V)
(-5VDC/10V)

0

⋅ Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level to "9999".
Input 0 to 5V (or 0 to 10V) to terminal 1.
Select 5V or 10V using Pr. 73 Analog input
selection. When Pr. 73 = "1" (initial value), 0 to
±10V is input.
⋅ Set the current limit level at the input voltage of 0V
in Pr. 148 Stall prevention level at 0V input.
⋅ Set the current limit level at the input voltage of
10V or 5V in Pr. 149 Stall prevention level at 10V input

(5VDC/10V)

Current limit level at input voltage 0V.
Set using Pr. 148.

REMARKS
⋅ The fast-response current limit level cannot be set.
⋅ When Pr. 22 = 9999 (analog variable), functions other than the terminal 1 (auxiliary input, override function, PID control) are not
executed.

83

4
PARAMETERS

Current limit level (%)

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
(6) To further prevent a trip (Pr. 154)
⋅ When Pr. 154 is set to "0", the output voltage reduces during stall prevention operation. By making setting to reduce
the output voltage, an overcurrent trip can further become difficult to occur.
⋅ Use this function where a torque decrease will not pose a problem.
Pr. 154 Setting
0
1
(initial value)

Description
Output voltage reduced
Output voltage not reduced

(7) Limit the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit operation according to
the operating status (Pr. 156)
⋅ Refer to the following table and select whether fast-response current limit operation will be performed or not and
the operation to be performed at OL signal output.

*3

*1
*2
*3

Deceleration

*1

Constant
speed

Pr. 156
Setting

Fast-response
Current Limit
:Activated
: Not
activated

Stall Prevention
Operation Selection
:Activated
:Not activated
Acceleration

Deceleration

Constant
speed

OL Signal
Output
:Operation
continued
:Operation
not continued

OL Signal
Output
:Operation
continued
:Operation
not continued
*1

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

⎯ *2

101
*3

⎯ *2

⎯ *2
Regeneration Driving

100

Regeneration Driving

0
(initial
value)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Acceleration

Pr. 156
Setting

Fast-response
Current Limit
: Activated
: Not
activated

Stall Prevention
Operation Selection
:Activated
:Not activated

⎯ *2

When "Operation not continued at signal output" is selected, the "
" fault code (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation
stopped.
Since both fast-response current limit and stall prevention are not activated, OL signal and E.OLT are not output.
The settings "100" and "101" allow operations to be performed in the driving and regeneration modes, respectively. The setting "101" disables the
fast-response current limit in the driving mode.

CAUTION
⋅ When the load is heavy, the elevator is predetermined, or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention is activated
and acceleration/deceleration may not be made according to the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Set Pr. 156 and stall
prevention operation level to the optimum values.
⋅ In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit is not activated. Torque may not be produced,
causing a drop due to gravity.

84

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor

CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Always perform test operation.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration
distance.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 171
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)
Pr. 570 Multiple rating setting
Refer to page 86

Refer to page 122
Refer to page 128

4
PARAMETERS

⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

85

Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
4.3.5

Multiple rating (Pr. 570)

You can use the inverter by changing the overload current rating specifications according to load applications.
Note that the control rating of each function changes.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting
Range
0

570

Multiple rating setting

0
1

Description
SLD
Surrounding air temperature 40°C (104°F),
Overload current rating 110% 60s, 120% 3s
(Inverse time characteristics)
LD
Surrounding air temperature 50°C (122°F),
Overload current rating 120% 60s, 150% 3s
(Inverse time characteristics)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

• The initial value and setting range of the following parameters are changed by performing reset and all parameter
clear after changing this parameter setting.
• Reflect the Pr. 570 setting in the following procedure.
1) Change the Pr. 570 setting.
2) Reset the inverter.
3) Perform all parameter clear.
Parameter
Number
9

Electronic thermal O/L
relay

22

Stall prevention operation
level

23

Stall prevention operation
level compensation factor
at double speed

48

Second stall prevention
operation current

56

Current monitoring
reference

148

Stall prevention level at
0V input

149

Stall prevention level at
10V input

150

Output current detection
level

165

Stall prevention operation
level for restart

557

893
*1
*2

Pr. 570 Setting
0
(initial value)

Name

Current average value
monitor signal output
reference current
Energy saving monitor
reference (motor
capacity)

1

Refer to
Page
107

Initial Value

SLD rated current *1

LD rated current *1

Setting Range
Initial Value
Setting Range

0, 0.1 to 120%, 9999
110%
0 to 150%, 9999

0, 0.1 to 150%, 9999
120%
0 to 200%, 9999

Initial Value

9999

9999

Setting Range
Initial Value

0, 0.1 to 120%
110%

0, 0.1 to 150%
120%

81

Initial Value

SLD rated current *1

LD rated current *1

147

Setting Range
Initial Value
Setting Range
Initial Value

0 to 120%
110%
0 to 120%
120%

0 to 150%
120%
0 to 150%
150%

Setting Range
Initial Value
Setting Range
Initial Value

0 to 120%
110%
0 to 120%
110%

0 to 150%
120%
0 to 150%
120%

Initial Value

SLD rated current *1

LD rated current *1

305

Initial Value

SLD value of applied
motor capacity *2

LD value of applied
motor capacity *2

164

81
81

81
81
135
152

The rated current differs according to the inverter capacity. Refer to rated specifications (page 370).
For the FR-F720-02330(FR-F740-01160) or less, SLD/LD value of applied motor capacity is the same. Refer to rated specifications (page 370).

CAUTION
When Pr. 570 = "0" (initial value), Pr.260 PWM frequency automatic switchover becomes invalid. (Refer to page 169.)

86

Limiting the output frequency

4.4 Limiting the output frequency
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Set upper limit and lower limit of
output frequency
Perform operation by avoiding
mechanical resonance points

4.4.1

Maximum/minimum
frequency

Refer to Page

Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18

87

Pr. 31 to Pr. 36

88

Frequency jump

Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)

You can limit the motor speed. Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
Parameter
Number

Initial Value
200V class (400V class)

Name

1

Maximum frequency

2

Minimum frequency

02330 (01160) or less
03160 (01800) or more

120Hz
60Hz

0Hz

High speed maximum
frequency

18 *

Setting Range

02330 (01160) or less
03160 (01800) or more

120Hz
60Hz

Description

0 to 120Hz

Set the upper limit of the output
frequency.

0 to 120Hz

Set the lower limit of the output
frequency.

120 to 400Hz

Set when performing the
operation at 120Hz or more.

* The parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

Output frequency
(Hz)

Clamped at the
maximum frequency

Pr.1
Pr.18
Pr.2
0
Clamped at the (4mA)
minimum frequency

Frequency setting
5, 10V
(20mA)

(1) Set maximum frequency
⋅ Set the upper limit of the output frequency in Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency. If the value of the frequency command entered is
higher than the setting, the output frequency is clamped at the
maximum frequency.
⋅ When you want to perform operation above 120Hz, set the upper
limit of the output frequency to Pr. 18 High speed maximum
frequency. (When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 automatically switches to the
frequency of Pr. 18. When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 18 automatically
switches to the frequency of Pr. 1.)

REMARKS
⋅ When performing operation above 60Hz using the frequency setting analog signal, change Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting
gain). If only Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 is changed, operation above 60Hz cannot be performed

(2) Set minimum frequency
⋅ Use Pr. 2 Minimum frequency to set the lower limit of the output frequency.
⋅ The output frequency is clamped by the Pr. 2 setting even the set frequency is lower than the Pr. 2 setting (The
frequency will not decrease to the Pr. 2 setting.)
REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr. 2, the Pr. 15 setting has precedence over the Pr. 2 setting.
⋅ When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency may drop to Pr. 2 or below.

CAUTION
If the Pr. 2 setting is higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency value, note that the motor will run at the set
frequency according to the acceleration time setting by merely switching the start signal ON, without entry of
the command frequency.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Pr. 15 Jog frequency

Refer to page 104
Refer to page 95

Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency

Refer to page 177

87

PARAMETERS

4

Limiting the output frequency
4.4.2

Avoiding mechanical resonance points (Frequency jump) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)

When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters
allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Parameter
Number
31
32
33
34
35
36

Name
Frequency jump 1A
Frequency jump 1B
Frequency jump 2A
Frequency jump 2B
Frequency jump 3A
Frequency jump 3B

Initial Value
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999

Setting Range
0 to
0 to
0 to
0 to
0 to
0 to

400Hz, 9999
400Hz, 9999
400Hz, 9999
400Hz, 9999
400Hz, 9999
400Hz, 9999

Description

1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B is
frequency jumps
9999: Function invalid

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

Frequency jump
Set frequency (Hz)

Pr.36
Pr.35
Pr.34
Pr.33

⋅ Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set
to either the top or bottom point of each area.
⋅ The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points,
and operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump
areas.

Pr.32
Pr.31

Pr.34:35Hz
Pr.33:30Hz

Pr.33:35Hz
Pr.34:30Hz

Example 1 To fix the frequency to 30Hz in the range 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 34
and 30Hz in Pr. 33.
Example 2 To jump the frequency to 35Hz in the range 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr.
33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34.

CAUTION
⋅ During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.

88

V/F pattern

4.5 V/F pattern
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Set motor ratings
Select a V/F pattern according to
applications
Use special motor

4.5.1

Refer to Page

Base frequency, base
frequency voltage

Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47

89

Load pattern selection

Pr. 14

91

Adjustable 5 points V/F

Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109

92

Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47)

Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
Parameter
Number

Initial Value

Setting Range

Base frequency

60Hz

0 to 400Hz

19 *

Base frequency voltage

9999

0 to 1000V
8888
9999

47 *

Second V/F (base frequency)

9999

3

Name

0 to 400Hz
9999

Description
Set the frequency when the motor
rated torque is generated. (50Hz/60Hz)
Set the base voltage.
95% of power supply voltage
Same as power supply voltage
Set the base frequency when the RT
signal is ON.
Second V/F invalid

* The parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0" (Refer to page 190)

Output voltage (V)

(1) Setting of base frequency (Pr. 3)

Pr.19
Output frequency
(Hz)

Pr.3
Pr.47

(2) Set multiple base frequencies (Pr. 47)

⋅ When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated
frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency. When running
the motor using bypass operation, set Pr. 3 to the same value
as the power supply frequency.
⋅ If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "50Hz" only,
always set to "50Hz". Leaving the base frequency unchanged
from "60Hz" may make the voltage too low and the torque
insufficient. It may result in an inverter trip due to overload.
Caution must be taken especially when Pr. 14 Load pattern
selection = "1" (variable torque load).
⋅ When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, set Pr. 3 to
60Hz.

⋅ When you want to change the base frequency when switching two motors with one inverter, use the Pr. 47 Second V/F
(base frequency).
⋅ Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency) is valid when the RT signal is ON.
REMARKS

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 125)
⋅ In the initial setting, the RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal. By setting "3" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function
selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.

89

V/F pattern
(3) Base frequency voltage setting (Pr. 19)
⋅ Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
⋅ If the setting is equal to or less than the power supply voltage, the maximum output voltage of the inverter is as set in
Pr. 19.
⋅ Pr. 19 can be utilized in the following cases.
(a) When regeneration frequency is high (e.g. continuous regeneration)
During regeneration, the output voltage becomes higher than the reference and may cause an overcurrent trip
(E.OC ) due to an increased motor current.
(b) When power supply voltage variation is large
When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, speed variation or motor overheat may
be caused by excessive torque or increased motor current.
CAUTION
⋅ When Pr. 71 Applied motor is set to "2" (adjustable 5 points V/F characteristic), the Pr. 47 setting becomes invalid. In addition, you
cannot set "8888" or "9999" in Pr. 19.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection
Refer to page 91
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 111
Pr. 80 Motor capacity
Refer to page 79.
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)

90

Refer to page 105

Refer to page 122.

V/F pattern
4.5.2

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14)

You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application and load characteristics.
Parameter
Number
14

Name
Load pattern selection

Initial Value

Setting Range

1

0
1

Description
For constant-torque load
For variable-torque loads

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) For constant-torque load (setting "0")
⋅ At or less than the base frequency voltage, the output voltage varies linearly with the
output frequency.
⋅ Set this value when driving the load whose load torque is constant if the speed varies,
e.g. conveyor, cart or roll drive.

Output voltage

100%

POINT
Pr.3 Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

If the load is a fan or pump, select "For rated torque load (setting "0")" in any of the
following cases.
⋅ When a blower of large moment of inertia (J) is accelerated in a short time
⋅ For constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump
⋅ When load torque increases at low speed, e.g. screw pump

(2) For variable-torque load (setting "1", initial value)
⋅ At or less than the base frequency voltage, the output voltage varies with the output
frequency in a square curve.
⋅ Set this value when driving the load whose load torque varies in proportion to the
square of the speed, e.g. fan or pump.

Output voltage

100%

Pr.3 Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Refer to page 89

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 3 Base frequency

91

V/F pattern
4.5.3

Adjustable 5 points V/F (Pr. 71, Pr. 100 to Pr. 109)

A dedicated V/F pattern is available by freely setting the V/F characteristic between a startup and the base
frequency and base voltage under V/F control (frequency voltage/frequency).
The torque pattern that is optimum for the machine's characteristic can be set.
Parameter
Number

Name

71

Applied motor

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109

V/F1(first frequency)
V/F1(first frequency voltage)
V/F2(second frequency)
V/F2(second frequency voltage)
V/F3(third frequency)
V/F3(third frequency voltage)
V/F4(fourth frequency)
V/F4(fourth frequency voltage)
V/F5(fifth frequency)
V/F5(fifth frequency voltage)

Initial Value

Setting Range

0

0, 1, 2, 20

9999
0V
9999
0V
9999
0V
9999
0V
9999
0V

0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 1000V
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 1000V
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 1000V
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 1000V
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 1000V

Description
Set "2" for adjustable 5 points V/F
control.

Set each points (frequency,
voltage) of V/F pattern.
9999: No V/F setting

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

Voltage
Base frequency
voltage
Pr.19

V/F5
V/F4
V/F3

Torque boost
Pr.0

V/F1
V/F2

0

Frequency

Base frequency
V/F Characteristic Pr.3

⋅ Any V/F characteristic can be provided by presetting the parameters of
V/F1 (first frequency voltage/first frequency) to V/F5.
⋅ For a machine of large static friction coefficient and small dynamic
static friction coefficient, for example, set a V/F pattern that will
increase the voltage only in a low-speed range since such a machine
requires large torque at a start.
(Setting procedure)
1)Set the rated motor current in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (No
function at the setting of "9999" (initial value) or "8888".)
2)Set Pr. 71 Applied motor to "2" (Adjustable 5 points V/F
characteristic).
3)Set the frequency and voltage you want to set in Pr. 100 to Pr. 109.

CAUTION
Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
CAUTION
⋅ Adjustable 5 points V/F characteristics function only under V/F control or Optimum excitation control. They do not function for
Simple magnetic flux vector control.
⋅ When Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage = "8888" or "9999", Pr. 71 cannot be set to "2". To set Pr. 71 to "2", set the rated voltage value in Pr. 19.
⋅ When the frequency values at each point are the same, a write disable error (
) appears.
⋅ Set the points (frequencies, voltages) of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 within the ranges of Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage.
⋅ When "2" is set in Pr. 71, Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency) will not function.
⋅ When Pr. 71 is set to "2", the electronic thermal relay function makes calculation as a standard motor.

REMARKS
⋅ A greater energy saving effect can be expected by combining Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection and adjustable 5 points V/F.
⋅ For the FR-F720-00250 and 00340 and the FR-F740-00126 and 00170, the Pr.0 Torque boost and Pr.12 DC injection brake
operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to the Pr. 71 setting.

Pr. 71

Standard Motor Setting
0, 2, 20

Constant-torque Motor Setting
1

Pr. 0
Pr. 12

3%
4%

2%
2%

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

Pr. 3 Base frequency, Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
Refer to page 89
Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage
Refer to page 112
Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency)
Refer to page 89
Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection
Refer to page 163
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 111
Pr. 80 Motor capacity, Pr. 90 Motor constant (R1)
Refer to page 79

92

Frequency setting by external terminals

4.6 Frequency setting by external terminals
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Make frequency setting by
combination of terminals
Perform Jog operation

Multi-speed operation
Jog operation

Added compensation for multi-speed
setting and remote setting
Infinitely variable speed setting by
terminals

4.6.1

Refer to Page

Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 15, Pr. 16

93
95

Multi-speed input
compensation selection

Pr. 28

97

Remote setting function

Pr. 59

98

Multi-speed setting operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)

Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the contact terminals.
Any speed can be selected by merely turning ON-OFF the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting Range

24 *

Multi-speed setting (high speed)
Multi-speed setting (middle speed)
Multi-speed setting (low speed)
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)

60Hz
30Hz
10Hz
9999

0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz, 9999

25 *

Multi-speed setting (speed 5)

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

26 *

Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999

27 *
232 *
233 *
234 *
235 *
236 *
237 *
238 *
239 *

Multi-speed setting (speed 7)
Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)
Multi-speed setting (speed 10)
Multi-speed setting (speed 11)
Multi-speed setting (speed 12)
Multi-speed setting (speed 13)
Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999

0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999
0 to 400Hz, 9999

4
5
6

Description
Set the frequency when RH turns ON.
Set the frequency when RM turns ON.
Set the frequency when RL turns ON.

Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can
be set according to the combination of
the RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
9999: not selected

The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Multi-speed setting (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)

RM
RL

Speed 2
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
Time
ON
ON

Inverter
STF
RH
RM
RL

10
2
5

Frequency setting
potentiometer

Forward
rotation

4

SD

ON

REMARKS
⋅ In the initial setting, if two or three speeds are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency of the lower signal.
For example, when the RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
⋅ The RH, RM, RL signals are assigned to the terminal RH, RM, RL in the initial setting.
By setting "0 (RL)", "1 (RM)", "2 (RH)" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function assignment), you can assign the signals to
other terminals.

93

PARAMETERS

RH

Speed 1
(High speed)

Multi-speed selection

Output frequency (Hz)

⋅ Operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 4 when the RH signal turns ON, Pr. 5 when the RM signal turns
ON, and Pr. 6 when the RL signal turns ON.

Frequency setting by external terminals
(2) Multi-speed setting higher than speed 4 (Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)

Speed 10
Speed 6

Speed 9

Speed 11
Speed 12

Forward
rotation

Speed 13

Speed 8

Speed 4

Speed 14
Speed 7

Speed 15

Time
RH
RM

ON ON ON ON

ON ON ON
ON

RL

ON

REX

ON ON

ON ON
ON

ON

ON

ON ON
ON

ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

Inverter
STF
REX
RH
RM

10
2
5

RL

Frequency setting
potentiometer

Speed 5

Multi-speed selection

Output frequency
(Hz)

⋅ Frequency from speed 4 to speed 15 can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set
the running frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239. (In the initial value setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are invalid.)
⋅ For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 186 to assign the function.

SD

Multi-Speed Operation
Connection Example

*
*

When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is performed at frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned OFF
and REX is turned ON.

REMARKS
⋅ The priorities of the frequency commands by the external signals are "Jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4 analog
input > terminal 2 analog input". (Refer to page 171 for the frequency command by analog input)
⋅ Valid in External operation mode or PU/external combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "3" or "4").
⋅ Multi-speed parameters can also be set in the PU or External operation mode.
⋅ Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
⋅ When a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 59 Remote function selection, the RH, RM and RL signals are used as the remote setting
signals and the multi-speed setting becomes invalid.
⋅ When making analog input compensation, set "1" in Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection.

CAUTION
⋅ The RH, RM, RL, REX signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection). Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 2 Minimum frequency
Refer to page 87
Pr. 15 Jog frequency
Refer to page 95
Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection
Refer to page 97
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 98
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122

94

Frequency setting by external terminals
4.6.2

Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)

You can set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. Jog operation can be performed
from either the outside or PU.
Can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Parameter
Number

Name

15

Jog frequency

16

Jog
acceleration/
deceleration
time

Initial
Value

Setting Range

5Hz

0 to 400Hz

0.5s

0 to 3600/360s*

Description
Set the frequency for jog operation.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time for jog operation. As the
acceleration/deceleration time set the time taken to reach the
frequency set in Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency. (Initial value is 60Hz)
The acceleration and deceleration times cannot be set
separately.

The above parameters are displayed as simple mode parameters only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected. When the
operation panel (FR-DU07) is connected, the above parameters can be set only when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
* When the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is "0" (initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting increments are
"0.1s", and when the setting is "1", the setting range is "0 to 360s" and the setting increments are "0.01s"

(1) Jog operation from outside
⋅ When the Jog signal is ON, a start and stop are available by the start signal (STF, STR). (The JOG signal is
assigned to the terminal JOG in the initial setting)
Output
frequency(Hz)
Pr.20
Pr.15
Jog frequency
setting range

Inverter
Three-phase AC
power supply

Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation

Time

Pr.16
JOG signal
Forward
rotation STF
Reverse
rotation STR

Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
JOG signal

U
V
W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
STF
STR
JOG

Motor

SD

ON

10
2
5

ON
ON

Connection diagram for external jog operation

Indication

Operation
1.Screen at powering ON
Confirm that the External operation mode is selected.
([EXT] lit)
If not displayed, press
to change to the
external [EXT] operation mode.
If the operation mode still does not change,
set Pr. 79 to change to the External operation mode.
ON

3.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON.
The motor rotates while start switch
(STF or STR) is ON.
Rotates at 5Hz. (Initial value of Pr. 15)

Forward
rotation

4

ON
Reverse
rotation

Rotates while ON

PARAMETERS

2.Turn the JOG switch ON.

Forward
rotation

4.Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF.
OFF

Reverse
rotation

Stop

REMARKS
⋅ When you want to change the running frequency, change Pr. 15 Jog frequency . (initial value "5Hz")
⋅ When you want to change the running frequency, change Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time . (initial value "0.5"s)

95

Frequency setting by external terminals
(2) Jog operation from PU
⋅ Set the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to the jog operation mode. Operation is performed only while the start button is pressed.
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Three-phase AC
power supply

U
V
W

Motor

FR-DU07

Operation

Indication

1.Confirmation of the RUN indication and
operation mode indication

The monitor mode should have been selected.
The inverter should be at a stop.

2.Press

to choose the
PU JOG operation mode.

3.Press

(or

).

While
(or
) is pressed, the
motor rotates.
Rotates at 5Hz. (initial value of Pr. 15)

4.Release

(or

Hold down.

).
Release

[When changing the frequency of PU JOG
operation]

The parameter
number read
previously
appears.

5.Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

6.Turn

Stop

until Pr. 15 Jog frequency

appears.

7.Press

to show the present set
value. (5Hz)

8.Turn
"

to set the value to
". (10Hz)

9.Press

to set.

10. Perform the operations in steps 1 to 4.

Flicker

Parameter setting complete!!

The motor rotates at 10Hz.

CAUTION
⋅ When Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A), the acceleration/
deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 Base frequency.
⋅ The Pr. 15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting.
⋅ The JOG signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). Changing the
terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set parameters
after confirming the function of each terminal.
⋅ During jog operation, the second acceleration/deceleration via the RT signal cannot be selected. (The other second
functions are valid. (Refer to page 124))
⋅ When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "4", push
push

/

of the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to make a start or

to make a stop.

⋅ This function is invalid when Pr. 79 = "3".

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Refer to page 104
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Refer to page 105
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122

96

Refer to page 101

Frequency setting by external terminals
4.6.3

Input compensation of multi-speed and remote setting (Pr. 28)

By inputting the frequency setting compensation signal (terminal 1, 2), the speed (frequency) can be
compensated for relative to the multi-speed setting or the speed setting by remote setting function.
Parameter
Number
28

Name
Multi-speed input
compensation selection

Initial Value

Setting Range

0

0
1

Description
Without compensation
With compensation

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

REMARKS
⋅ Select the compensation input voltage (0 to ±5V, 0 to ±10V) and used terminal (terminal 1, 2) using Pr. 73 Analog input
selection.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Refer to page 93

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (multi-speed operation)
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 171
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 98

97

Frequency setting by external terminals
4.6.4

Remote setting function (Pr. 59)

Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can use contact signals to perform
continuous variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.
Description
Parameter
Number

Initial
Value

Name

59

Remote function
selection

Setting
Range

RH, RM, RL
Signal Function

Frequency Setting
Storage Function

0
1
2

Multi-speed setting
Remote setting
Remote setting

3

Remote setting

11
12

Remote setting
Remote setting

13

Remote setting

⎯
Used
Not used
Not used
(Turning STF/STR
OFF clears remotelyset frequency.)
Used
Not used
Not used
(Turning STF/STR
OFF clears remotelyset frequency.)

0

Deceleration to the
Frequency Lower
Than the Set
Frequency
⎯
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

Forward
rotation

Inverter
STF

Acceleration

RH
Deceleration

RM

10

RL

2

SD

5

Clear

Connection
diagram for remote setting

Output frequency
(Hz)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

When Pr. 59 = 1
When Pr. 59 = 1, 2
When Pr. 59 = 3
When Pr. 59 = 2, 3
*

0Hz
Acceleration
(RH)
Deceleration
(RM)
Clear (RL)
Forward
rotation (STF)
Power supply

Time
ON

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON

ON

ON

* External operation frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency

98

ON
ON

Frequency setting by external terminals
(1) Remote setting function
⋅ Use Pr. 59 to select whether to use the remote setting function or not and whether to use the frequency setting
storage function in the remote setting mode or not.
When Pr. 59 setting is any of "1 to 3, 11 to 13" (remote setting function valid), the functions of the RH, RM and RL
signals are changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL).
⋅ When the remote function is used, the output frequency of the inverter can be compensated for as follows:
External operation ...Frequency set with RH and RM operation + external operation frequency other than multispeed (PU operation frequency when Pr.79 = "3" (external, PU combined)) and terminal 4
input
(When making analog input compensation, set "1" to Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation
selection.
When Pr. 28 is set to "0" and acceleration/deceleration is made to reach the set frequency of
the analog voltage input (terminal 2 or terminal 4) by RH/RM, the auxiliary input by terminal 1
becomes invalid.)
PU operation............Frequency set by RH/RM operation + PU running frequency
⋅ By setting Pr. 59 = "11 to 13", the speed can be decelerated to the frequency lower than the main speed (set by the
external operation frequency (except multi-speed setting) or PU operation frequency).
Output frequency
(Hz)

When Pr. 59 = 1, 2, 3
Decelerates to the main speed
When Pr. 59 = 11, 12, 13
Decelerates to the minimum frequency

Main speed
Minimum frequency

Time

0
ON

Forward rotation (STF)
Acceleration (RH)

ON

Deceleration (RM)

ON

(2) Frequency setting storage
⋅ The frequency setting storage function stores the remotely-set frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) into
the memory (EEPROM). When power is switched OFF once, then ON, operation is resumed with the remotely set
frequency. (Pr. 59 =1, 11)

⋅ The frequency when the start signal (STF or STR) turns OFF
⋅ Remotely-set frequency is stored every minute after turning OFF (ON) the RH (acceleration) and RM
(deceleration) signals together. (The frequency is overwritten if the latest frequency is different from the
previous frequency when comparing the two. The state of the RL signal does not affect writing.)
CAUTION
The set frequency is clamped at (main speed + Pr.1 )
(Hz)
Output frequency is
clamped at Pr.1
Pr.1

Set frequency
Output frequency
When Pr.59 = 1, 2, 3

Main speed setting

When Pr.59 = 11, 12, 13

0Hz
ON

Deceleration(RM)
Forward rotation(STF)

Time

ON

Acceleration(RH)

4

ON

⋅ When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches ON, acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 44 Second acceleration/
deceleration time and Pr. 45 Second deceleration time. Note that when the time set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8 is longer than the time set in Pr.
44 or Pr. 45, the acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8. (when RT signal is OFF)
When the RT signal is ON, acceleration/deceleration is made in the time set to Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time and Pr.
45 Second deceleration time, regardless of the Pr. 7 or Pr. 8 setting.
⋅ Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is OFF, turning ON the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal changes the preset
frequency.
⋅ When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the frequency
setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr. 59 ="2, 3, 12, 13"). If set valid (Pr. 59 ="1, 11"), frequency is written
to EEPROM frequently, and this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
⋅ The RH, RM, RL signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
⋅ This parameter can be also used for the Network operation mode.

99

PARAMETERS

⋅ The range of frequency change by RH (acceleration) and RM
(deceleration) is 0 to maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting).
Note that the maximum value of set frequency is (main speed +
maximum frequency).

Frequency setting by external terminals
REMARKS
During Jog operation or PID control operation, the remote setting function is invalid.

⋅ When the remotely-set
frequency is cleared by turning
on the RL (clear) signal after
turn OFF (ON) of both the RH
and RM signals, the inverter
operates at the frequency in the
remotely-set frequency cleared
state if power is reapplied after
one minute has elapsed since
turn OFF (ON) of both the RH
and RM signals.

Remotely-set frequency stored last time
Output frequency
(Hz)

⋅ Even when the remotely-set
frequency is cleared by turning
on the RL (clear) signal after
turn OFF (ON) of both the RH
and RM signals, the inverter
operates at the remotely-set
frequency stored in the last
operation if power is reapplied
before one minute has elapsed
since turn OFF (ON) of both the
RH and RM signals

Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM) OFF
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation
(STF)
Power supply

Within 1 minute
Remotely-set frequency stored last time

Time
ON
ON
ON
ON

ON
ON

Remotely-set frequency stored last time

Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM) OFF

Power supply

Operation is performed at the set
frequency 0Hz.

Time
ON
ON

Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF)

One minute
More than
one minute

Output frequency
(Hz)

Setting frequency is "0"

ON
ON

ON
ON

CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency
Refer to page 87
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr. 45 Second deceleration time.
Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection
Refer to page 97
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122

100

Refer to page 101

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time
and acceleration/deceleration pattern

4.7 Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and
acceleration/deceleration pattern
Purpose

Parameter that must be set

Motor acceleration/deceleration time
setting
Starting frequency
Set acceleration/deceleration pattern
suitable for application

4.7.1

Acceleration/deceleration times

Refer to page

Pr.7, Pr.8, Pr.20, Pr.21,
Pr.44, Pr.45, Pr.147

101

Pr.13, Pr.571

104

Pr.29, Pr.140 to Pr.143

105

Starting frequency and starttime hold
Acceleration/deceleration
pattern and backlash measures

Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147)

Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/
decrease.
For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr. 611 Acceleration
time at a restart (page 152).

Name

7

Acceleration time

8

Deceleration time

Initial Value
200V class (400V
class)
00340
5s
(00170) or less
00490
15s
(00250) or more
00340
10s
(00170) or less
00490
30s
(00250) or more

20 *1

Acceleration/
deceleration
reference frequency

21 *1

Acceleration/
deceleration time
increments

0

44 *1

Second
acceleration/
deceleration time

5s

45 *1

Second
deceleration time

9999

Acceleration/
deceleration time
switching
frequency

9999

60Hz

Setting Range

0 to 3600/ 360s
*2

0 to 3600/ 360s
*2

1 to 400Hz

0

147 *1

*1
*2

1

0 to 3600/360s *2
0 to 3600/360s *2
9999
0 to 400Hz
9999

Description

Set the motor acceleration time.

Set the motor deceleration time.
Set the frequency that will be the basis of
acceleration/deceleration time.
As acceleration/deceleration time, set the
frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20.
Increments: 0.1s
Increments and
Range: 0 to 3600s setting range of
acceleration/
Increments: 0.01s deceleration time
setting can be
Range: 0 to 360s
changed.
Set the acceleration/deceleration time
when the RT signal is ON.
Set the deceleration time when the RT
signal is ON.
Acceleration time = deceleration time
The frequency where the acceleration/
deceleration time switches to the time set
in Pr.44 and Pr.45.
No function

The parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0" (Refer to page 190)
Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting
increments is "0.1s".

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

101

4
PARAMETERS

Paramete
r Number

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time
and acceleration/deceleration pattern
(1) Acceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 20)
Pr.20
(60Hz)

⋅ Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to reach Pr.
20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz.
⋅ Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.

Output
frequency (Hz)

Running
frequency

Acceleration
time setting

Time

Acceleration Pr.7
time

Deceleration Pr.8
time

Pr.20
=

×

Maximum operating
frequency - Pr. 13

Example) How to find the setting value for Pr. 7 when increasing the output
frequency to the maximum frequency of 50Hz in 10s with Pr. 20 =
60Hz (initial setting) and Pr. 13 = 0.5Hz.

Pr.7 =

Acceleration time from stop to
maximum operating frequency

60Hz
50Hz - 0.5Hz

× 10s

12.1s

(2) Deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 20)
⋅ Use Pr. 8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency.
⋅ Set the deceleration time according to the following formula.
Deceleration
time setting

Pr. 20
=

Maximum operating
frequency - Pr. 10

×

Deceleration time from maximum
operating frequency to stop.

Example) How to find the setting value for Pr. 8 when decreasing the
output frequency from the maximum frequency of 50Hz in 10s
with Pr. 20 = 120Hz and Pr. 10 = 3Hz.

Pr. 8

=

120Hz
50Hz - 3Hz

×

10s

25.5s

(3) Change the setting range and increments of the acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 21)
⋅ Use Pr. 21 to set the acceleration/deceleration time and minimum setting range.
Setting "0" (initial value) ..................... 0 to 3600s (minimum setting increments 0.1s)
Setting "1" .......................................... 0 to 360s (minimum setting increments 0.01s)
CAUTION
⋅ Changing the Pr. 21 setting changes the acceleration/deceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 16, Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
(The Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a restart setting is not affected.)

When Pr. 21 = "0", setting "5.0" s in Pr. 7 and "1" in Pr. 21 automatically changes the Pr. 7 setting to "0.5" s.

(4) Set multiple acceleration/deceleration time (RT signal, Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 147)
⋅ The Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 settings become valid when the RT signal turns ON or the output frequency reaches the
value of Pr. 147 setting or higher.
⋅ When "9999" is set in Pr. 45, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44).
⋅ By setting Pr. 147, acceleration/deceleration time can be automatically changed at turn-OFF of the RT signal.
Pr. 147 setting

Acceleration/deceleration time

9999 (initial value)
0.00Hz
0.01Hz ≤ Pr. 147 ≤ set frequency
Set frequency < Pr. 147

Description

Acceleration/deceleration time is not
Pr. 7, Pr. 8
automatically changed.
Second acceleration/deceleration time is
Pr.44, Pr. 45
applied from the start.
Output frequency < Pr. 147: Pr. 7, Pr. 8 Acceleration/deceleration time is automatically
Pr. 147 ≤ output frequency: Pr. 44, Pr. 45 changed. *
Not changed as the frequency has not reached
Pr. 7, Pr. 8
the switchover frequency.

* Even if the output frequency is lower than the Pr. 147 setting, the acceleration/deceleration time is changed to the second acceleration/
deceleration time by the RT signal.

Output
frequency (Hz)

Set frequency

Pr.147 setting
Time
Slope set
by Pr.7

Slope set
by Pr.44

Acceleration time

102

Slope set
by Pr.44
(Pr.45)

Slope set
by Pr.8

Deceleration time

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time
and acceleration/deceleration pattern
CAUTION
⋅ In S-shaped acceleration/deceleration pattern A (refer to page 105), the set time is the period required to reach the base
frequency set in Pr. 3 Base frequency.
⋅ Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher

t=

4
9

×

T
2

(Pr.3)

× f2 +

5
9

T

T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting value(s)
f : Set frequency(Hz)

⋅ Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time when Pr. 3 Base frequency = 60Hz (0Hz to set frequency)

Frequency setting (Hz)
60

120

200

400

5

5

12

27

102

15

15

35

82

305

Acceleration/
deceleration time (s)

⋅ The RT signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection). Changing
the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

REMARKS
⋅ The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second function valid. (Refer to page 125)
⋅ The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal in the default setting. By setting "3" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal
function selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.
⋅ If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change. Set Pr.
125 and Pr. 126 to adjust the gains.
⋅ When the Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 settings are 0.03s or less, the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04s. At that time, set
Pr. 20 to "120Hz" or less.
⋅ If the acceleration/deceleration time is set, the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made shorter than the
shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 89
Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency
Refer to page 112
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection
Refer to page 105
Pr. 125, Pr. 126 (Frequency setting gain frequency)
Refer to page 177
Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122
Pr. 999 Automatic parameter setting
Refer to page 309

PARAMETERS

4

103

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time
and acceleration/deceleration pattern

4.7.2

Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)

You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want to smooth motor drive at a start.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

13

Starting frequency

0.5Hz

571

Holding time at a start

9999

Setting Range

0 to 60Hz

0.0 to 10.0s
9999

Description
Frequency at start can be set in the
range 0 to 60Hz.
You can set the starting frequency
at which the start signal is turned
ON.
Set the holding time of Pr. 13
Starting frequency.
Holding function at a start is invalid

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Starting frequency setting (Pr. 13)

Setting range

Output
frequency
(Hz)
60

⋅ Frequency at start can be set in the range 0 to 60Hz.
⋅ You can set the starting frequency at which the start signal is
turned ON.

Pr.13
0
Time
ON

STF

CAUTION
The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.

(2) Start-time hold function (Pr. 571)

Setting range

Output
frequency
(Hz)
60

⋅ This function holds the output frequency set in Pr. 13 Starting
frequency during the period set in Pr. 571.
⋅ This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor
drive at a start.
REMARKS

Pr. 13
0
Pr. 571 setting time
STF

Time

When Pr. 13 = "0Hz", the starting frequency is held at 0.01Hz.

ON

CAUTION
⋅ When the start signal was turned OFF during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.
⋅ At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold function is
invalid.

CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value lower than Pr. 2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON the start signal
will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not input.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr.2 Minimum frequency

104

Refer to page 87

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time
and acceleration/deceleration pattern

4.7.3

Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29, Pr. 140 to Pr. 143)

You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for application.
You can also set the backlash measures that stop acceleration/deceleration once at the parameter-set
frequency and time during acceleration/deceleration.
Parameter
Number

29

Initial
Value

Name

Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection

0

Setting
Range
0
1
2
3
6

140
141
142
143

Backlash acceleration stopping frequency
Backlash acceleration stopping time
Backlash deceleration stopping frequency
Backlash deceleration stopping time

1Hz
0.5s
1Hz
0.5s

0 to 400Hz
0 to 360s
0 to 400Hz
0 to 360s

Description
Linear acceleration/ deceleration
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
Backlash measures
Variable-torque acceleration/
deceleration
Set the stopping frequency and time
for backlash measures.
Valid when Pr. 29 = 3

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Output frequency
(Hz)

Setting value "0"
[Linear acceleration
/ deceleration]

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Linear acceleration/ deceleration (Pr. 29 = "0", initial value)
⋅ When the frequency is changed for acceleration, deceleration, etc. in inverter
operation, the output frequency is changed linearly (linear acceleration/
deceleration) to reach the set frequency without straining the motor and
inverter. Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform frequency/time slope.

Time

(2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr. 29 = "1")

Output frequency
(Hz)

Setting value "1"
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration A]

fb
Time

⋅ For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
Used when acceleration/deceleration must be made in a short time to a highspeed range of not lower than the base frequency. In this acceleration/
deceleration pattern, Pr. 3 Base frequency (fb) is the inflection point of the S
pattern and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time appropriate for motor
torque reduction in a constant-power operation range of base frequency (fb) or
higher.

CAUTION
⋅ As the acceleration/deceleration time of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time taken until Pr. 3 Base frequency
is reached, not Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.

PARAMETERS

4

105

Setting of acceleration/deceleration time
and acceleration/deceleration pattern
(3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr. 29 = "2")

Setting value "2"
[S-pattern acceleration
/deceleration B]

Set frequency
(Hz)

⋅ For prevention of load shifting in conveyor and other applications. Since
acceleration/deceleration is always made in an S shape from current
frequency (f2) to target frequency (f1), this function eases shock produced
at acceleration/deceleration and is effective for load collapse prevention,
etc.

Output frequency
(Hz)

f1

f2

Output frequency (Hz)

Time

(4) Backlash measures (Pr. 29 = "3", Pr. 140 to Pr. 143)
⋅ What is backlash?
Reduction gears have an engagement gap and have a dead zone
between forward rotation and reverse rotation. This dead zone is called
backlash, and this gap disables a mechanical system from following motor
rotation.
More specifically, a motor shaft develops excessive torque when the
direction of rotation changes or when constant-speed operation shifts to
deceleration, resulting in a sudden motor current increase or regenerative
status.
⋅ To avoid backlash, acceleration/deceleration is temporarily stopped.
Set the acceleration/deceleration stopping frequency and time in Pr. 140 to
Pr. 143.

Setting value "3"
[Anti-backlash measure
function]
Pr. 142
Pr. 140

Pr. 13
Pr. 141

Pr. 143

Time

(5) Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration (Pr.29 = "6")

Setting value "6"

⋅ This function is useful for variable-torque load such as a fan and blower to
accelerate/decelerate in short time.
In areas where output frequency > base frequency, the speed
accelerates/decelerates linearly.

[Variable-torque
acceleration/deceleration]
Setting
frequency
Pr.3
Base frequency

CAUTION
⋅ As the acceleration/deceleration time of variable-torque acceleration/
Time

Pr.7 Acceleration time Pr.8 Deceleration time

deceleration, set the time taken to reach Pr. 3 Base frequency, not Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.

REMARKS
⋅ When the base frequency is not 45 to 65Hz, the speed accelerates/decelerates
linearly even though Pr. 29 = "6".

⋅ Variable-torque acceleration/deceleration overrides Pr. 14 = "1" setting (for variabletorque load). Thus, when Pr. 14 = "1" while variable-torque acceleration/
deceleration is valid, inverter operates as Pr. 14 = "0" (for constant-torque load).

CAUTION
Setting the backlash measures increases the acceleration/deceleration time by the stopping time.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 3 Base frequency
Refer to page 89
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection
Refer to page 91

106

Refer to page 101

Selection and protection of a motor

4.8 Selection and protection of a motor
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Motor protection from overheat

Electronic thermal O/L relay

Use the constant-torque motor

Applied motor

4.8.1

Refer to page

Pr. 9, Pr. 51

107

Pr. 71

111

Motor protection from overheat (Electronic thermal relay function) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51)

Set the current of the electronic thermal O/L relay to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the
optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter
Number

*1
*2

Name

Initial Value

9

Electronic thermal
O/L relay

Rated inverter
current

51 *1

Second electronic
thermal O/L relay *2

9999

Setting Range
200V class (400V class)
02330 (01160) or less
03160 (01800) or more
02330 (01160) or less
03160 (01800) or more

0 to 500A
0 to 3600A
0 to 500A
0 to 3600A

9999

Description
Set the rated motor current.
Valid when the RT signal is ON.
Set the rated motor current.
Second electronic thermal O/L relay
invalid

The parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0" (Refer to page 190)
When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.

(1) Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic (THM)
[Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic (E.THM)]

Operation time (min)

70

Pr. 9 = 100% setting
of inverter rating*1.2
30Hz or more*3

30Hz
or more*3
20Hz
60
10Hz

20Hz

Operation range
Range on the right of
characteristic curve
Non-operation range
Range on the left of
characteristic curve

10Hz
6Hz

6Hz

0.5Hz

50 0.5Hz

Characteristic when
electronic thermal relay
function for motor
protection is turned OFF
(When Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))

240
Operation time (s)

(s) unit display in this range

(min) unit display in
this range

Pr. 9 = 50% setting of
inverter rating*1.2

180

120
Electronic thermal relay
function for transistor
protection

60
52.5%

105%

100 120
50
150
Inverter output current(%)
(% to the rated inverter current)

This function detects the overload (overheat) of the
motor and the inverter trips. (The operation
characteristic is shown on the left)
⋅ Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr. 9.
(If the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rating and
the Pr.3 Base frequency is set to 60 Hz, set the 1.1
times of the 60Hz rated motor current.)
⋅ Set "0" in Pr. 9 when you do not want to activate the
electronic thermal relay function, e.g. when using
an external thermal relay with the motor. (Note that
the output transistor protection of the inverter
functions (E.THT).)
⋅ When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
1) Set "1" in Pr. 71. (This provides a 100%
continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed
range.)
2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
*1
*2
*3

When 50% of the inverter rated output current (current value) is
set in Pr. 9
The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated
current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
When you set the electronic thermal relay function dedicated to
the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve
applies to operation at 6Hz or higher.

4

⋅ Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
⋅ When multiple motors are operated by a single inverter, protection cannot be provided by the electronic thermal relay function.
Install an external thermal relay to each motor.
⋅ When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective characteristics of
the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
⋅ A special motor cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function. Use the external thermal relay.

107

PARAMETERS

CAUTION

Selection and protection of a motor
(2) Electronic thermal relay function operation characteristic (THT)
Electronic thermal relay function (transistor protection thermal) operation characteristics of the inverter when the ratio
of the motor current to the inverter rated current is presented as transverse is shown. Transverse is calculated as
follows: (motor current [A]/inverter rated current [A]) × 100 [%].

150

150

120

120

Operation time (S)

Running frequency : 1Hz or more
Carrier frequency: 2kHz

Inverter Capacity
FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more

Operation time (S)

Optimum Conditions

90

60

30

90

60

30

0

0
0

25

50

75 100 125 150 175 200

0

15

12

12

Operation time (S)

Operation time (S)

Running frequency : 1Hz or less
Carrier frequency: 2kHz

15

9

6

3

25

50

75 100 125 150 175 200

Ratio of the motor current
to the inverter rated current (%)

Ratio of the motor current
to the inverter rated current (%)

9

6

3

0

0
0

25

50

75 100 125 150 175 200

Ratio of the motor current
to the inverter rated current (%)

0

25

50

75 100 125 150 175 200

Ratio of the motor current
to the inverter rated current (%)

CAUTION
⋅ Protective function by electronic thermal relay function is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal input. Avoid
unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
⋅ The operation time of the transistor protection thermal relay shortens when the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting increases

108

Selection and protection of a motor
(3) Set multiple electronic thermal relay functions (Pr. 51)
Use this function when rotating two motors of different rated currents individually by a
single inverter. (When rotating two motors together, use external thermal relays.)
⋅ Set the rated current of the second motor in Pr. 51.
⋅ When the RT signal is ON, thermal protection is provided based on the Pr. 51 setting.
REMARKS
⋅ The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second
functions valid. (Refer to page 124)
⋅ The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal in the initial setting. By setting "3" in any of Pr. 178
to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.

MC
IM

U
V
W

MC
IM

RT
SD

(4) Electronic thermal relay function prealarm (TH) and alarm signal (THP signal)
100%: Electronic thermal relay function alarm operation value
Electronic thermal
relay function
operation level

100%
85%
Time

Electronic thermal O/L
relay alarm (THP)

OFF

ON

ON

⋅ The alarm signal (THP) is output and electronic thermal relay
function prealarm (TH) is displayed when the electronic
thermal value reaches 85% of the level set in Pr. 9 or Pr. 51. If
it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay
setting, an electronic thermal relay protection (E.THM/E.THT)
activates.
⋅ The inverter does not trip even when the alarm signal (THP)
is output.
⋅ For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign the
function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic)
in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

(5) External thermal relay input (OH signal)
⋅ To protect the motor against overheat, use the OH signal when using an external
Thermal relay protector
thermal relay or the built-in thermal protector of the motor.
Inverter
⋅
When the thermal relay operates, the inverter trips and outputs the fault signal
Motor
U
(E.OHT).
V
IM
W
⋅ For the terminal used for OH signal input, assign the function by setting "7" in any of
OH

SD

Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)

External thermal relay input
connection example

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

PARAMETERS

4

109

Selection and protection of a motor
(6) PTC thermistor input (PTC signal)
Inverter
U
AU V
PTC W

Inverter

Motor

AU
PTC

AU(PTC)
SD

PTC thermistor input connection example

AU/PTC switchover switch
Factory-set to "AU".
Set to the "PTC" position to
validate the PTC signal input.

Built-in PTC thermistor of the motor can be input to the PTC signal (AU terminal).
⋅ For the terminal used for PTC signal input, assign the function by setting "63" in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection
and also set the AU/PTC switchover switch to the PTC terminal function. (The initial setting is the AU terminal
function.)
⋅ If a motor overheat state is detected for more than 10s according to the input from the PTC thermistor, the inverter
shuts off the output and outputs the PTC thermal fault signal (E.PTC).
⋅ The input specifications of the PTC thermistor Motor Temperature
are shown on the right.
Normal
Boundary
Overheat

PTC Thermistor Resistance Value (Ω)
0 to 500
500 to 4k
4k or higher

CAUTION
⋅ When the PTC signal was not assigned to Pr. 184 and the AU/PTC switchover switch was set to the PTC terminal function, the
function assigned to the AU terminal is always OFF. Reversely, when the PTC signal was assigned to Pr. 184 and the AU/PTC
switchover switch was set to the AU terminal function, a PTC thermal error (E.PTC) occurs since the function is always in a
motor overheat state.
⋅ When you want to input a current, assign the AU signal to the other signal.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 71 Applied motor
Refer to page 111
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection
Refer to page 169
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (Output terminal function selection)
Specifications of the AU terminal
Refer to page 27

110

Refer to page 122
Refer to page 128

Selection and protection of a motor
4.8.2

Applied motor (Pr. 71)

Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor.
Setting is necessary when using a constant-torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay
function suitable for the motor is set.
Parameter
Number
71

Name
Applied motor

Initial Value

Setting Range

0

0, 1, 2, 20

Description
Selecting the standard motor or constanttorque motor sets the corresponding motor
thermal characteristic.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

Refer to the following list and set this parameter according to the motor used.
Motor ({ : used motor)

Pr. 71
Setting
0
(initial value)

Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal Relay Function

Standard
(SF-JR, etc.)

Constant-torque
(SF-HRCA, etc.)

Thermal characteristics of a standard motor

1

Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor

2

Thermal characteristics of a standard motor
Adjustable 5 points V/F(Refer to page 92)

20

Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4P(1.5kW(2HP) or less)

REMARKS
⋅ For the FR-F720-00250 and 00490 and the FR-F740-00126 and 00170, the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection brake
operation voltage settings are automatically changed according to the Pr. 71 setting as follows.
Pr. 71

Standard Motor Setting
0, 2, 20

Constant-torque Motor Setting
1

Pr. 0

3%

2%

Pr. 12

4%

2%

CAUTION
Make sure to set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Refer to page 112
Refer to page 92

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 0 Torque boost
Refer to page 78
Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage
Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F)

111

Motor brake and stop operation

4.9 Motor brake and stop operation
Purpose

Parameter that must be set

Motor braking torque adjustment
DC injection brake
Improve the motor braking torque with an
Selection of a regenerative brake
option
Performing operation by DC current input DC current feeding mode
Selection of motor stopping method
Coast the motor to a stop
Output stop function

4.9.1

Refer to Page

Pr. 10 to Pr. 12

112

Pr. 30, Pr. 70

114

Pr. 30
Pr. 250
Pr. 522

114
119
120

DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)

The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust the stop timing and braking torque.
In DC injection brake operation, DC voltage is directly applied to the motor to prevent the motor shaft from
rotating when a motor decelerates to stop.
The motor will not return to the original position if the motor shaft rotates due to external force.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value
200V class (400V class)

10

DC injection brake
operation frequency

3Hz

DC injection brake
operation time

0.5s

11

00340 (00170) or
less
00490 to 02330
(00250 to 01160)
03160 (01800) or
more

DC injection brake
operation voltage

12

Setting
Range
0 to 120Hz
9999
0
0.1 to 10s
8888

Description
Set the operation frequency of the DC injection
brake.
Operated at Pr. 13 or less.
DC injection brake disabled
Set the operation time of the DC injection brake.
Operate when X13 signal is ON

4%
2%

0 to 30%

Set the DC injection brake voltage (torque). When
"0" is set, DC injection brake is disabled.

1%

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Operation frequency setting (Pr. 10)

When Pr. 11="0.1 to 10s"

DC injection
brake
voltage

Pr. 10 Operation
frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

⋅ When the frequency at which the DC injection brake will be operated is set

Time
Pr.12
Operation
voltage

Time

Pr. 11 Operation time

Output frequency (Hz)

When Pr. 11="8888"

DC injection
brake
voltage
X13 signal

112

Time
Pr.12
Operation
voltage

Time
ON OFF

to Pr. 10, the DC voltage is applied to the motor upon reaching to the set
frequency during deceleration.

⋅ At the Pr. 10 setting of "9999", the DC injection brake is operated when
deceleration is made to the frequency set in Pr. 13 Starting frequency.

(2) Operation time setting (Pr. 11)
⋅ In Pr. 11, set the time of the DC injection brake.
⋅ When Pr. 11 = "0s", the DC injection brake is disabled. (At a stop, the
motor coasts.)
⋅ When Pr. 11="8888", the DC injection brake is applied while X13 signal
is ON.
⋅ For the terminal used for X13 signal input, set "13" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr.
189 to assign the function. (Refer to page 122.)
⋅ When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increasing
the setting produces an effect.

Motor brake and stop operation
(3) Operation voltage (torque) setting (Pr. 12)
⋅ Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage to the power supply voltage.
⋅ When Pr. 12 = "0%", the DC injection brake is disabled. (At a stop, the motor coasts.)
⋅ When using the constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA) and energy saving motor (SF-HR, SF-HRCA), change the Pr. 12
setting as follows.
SF-JRCA: FR-F720-00167 (FR-F740-00083) or less ...4%,
FR-F720-00250 to 02330 (FR-F740-00126 to 01160)...2%
SF-HR, SF-HRCA: FR-F720-00167 (FR-F740-00083) or less...4%,
FR-F720-00250 and 00340 (FR-F740-00126 and 00170)...3%,
FR-F720-00490 to 02330 (FR-F740-00250 to 01160)...2% (FR-F740-00620...1.5%)
REMARKS
⋅ For the 00126 and 00170, when the Pr. 12 setting is as below, changing the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting changes the Pr. 12
setting automatically, it is not necessary to change the Pr. 12 setting.
(a) When Pr. 12 is 4% (initial value)
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 2% if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the standard motor
(0, 2) to the value selecting the constant motor (1).
(b) When Pr. 12 is 2%
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 4% if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the constant motor
(1) to the value selecting the standard motor (0, 2).
⋅ Even if the Pr. 12 setting is increased, braking torque is limited so that the output current is within the rated inverter current.

CAUTION
As stop holding torque is not produced, install a mechanical brake.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Refer to page 104
Refer to page 111

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Pr. 71 Applied motor

113

Motor brake and stop operation
4.9.2

Selection of a regenerative brake and DC feeding (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)

When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, MT-BU) to increase the
regenerative brake duty.
Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or power regeneration converter (MT-RC) for
continuous operation in regenerative status.
Use a high power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or
continuously use the regenerative mode.
You can select DC feeding mode 1, which operates with DC power supply (terminal P/+, N/-), or DC feeding
mode 2, which normally operates with AC power supply (terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and with DC power supply
such as battery at power failure occurrence.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

Description
Regeneration unit

0
100
10

30

Regenerative
function
selection

0

20
120
1
101
11
21
121
2

70

Special
regenerative
brake duty

0%

0 to 10%

Inverter without regenerative
function, brake unit (FR-BU2,
FR-BU, BU type)

Terminal for power
supply to the inverter

Reset at main circuit
power supply ON

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

Reset
Not reset

P/+, N/(DC feeding mode 1)

-

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 - P/+, N/(DC feeding mode 2)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3

Brake unit (MT-BU5), power
regeneration converter (MTRC)

P/+, N/(DC feeding mode 1)

-

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 - P/+, N/(DC feeding mode 2)

Reset
Not reset

P/+, N/-

-

High power factor converter
(FR-HC, MT-HC), power
regeneration common
converter (FR-CV)

Set the %ED of the brake transistor operation when using a brake unit (MT-BU5).
(Setting is available only for the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.


Regeneration Unit

Power Supply to
the Inverter

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Inverter without regenerative function, P/+, N/brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 P/+, N/High power factor converter (FR-HC),
power regeneration common
P/+, N/converter (FR-CV)

Pr. 30 Setting
0 (initial value), 100
10
20, 120
2


Regeneration Unit

Power Supply to the
Inverter

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
P/+, N/R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 - P/+, N/Power regeneration converter (MT-RC) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Brake unit (MT-BU5)
P/+, N/R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 - P/+, N/High power factor converter (MT-HC)
P/+, N/Brake unit (FR-BU2)

114

Reset
Not reset
Reset
Not reset

Pr. 30 Setting
0 (initial value), 100
10
20, 120
1, 101
1, 101
11
21, 121
2

Pr. 70 Setting
⎯
0% (initial value)
10%
⎯

Motor brake and stop operation
(1) When the brake unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU) is used
⋅ Set "0 (initial value), 10, 20, 100 or 120" in Pr. 30. The Pr. 70 setting is invalid.
CAUTION
⋅ Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
⋅ Do not operate the MT-BU5 type brake unit and FR-BU2 in parallel. Doing so could cause an alarm or brake unit failure. Use the
FR-BU2 only when performing parallel operation.

(2) When using a brake unit (MT-BU5) and power regeneration converter (MT-RC) (FR-F72003160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)
⋅ Set "1, 11, 21, 101 or 121" in Pr. 30.
⋅ Set "10%" In Pr. 70 when using a brake unit (MT-BU5).
⋅ Set "0%" in Pr. 70 when using a power regeneration converter (MT-RC).
CAUTION
⋅ Set "2" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use MT-BR5 type resistor unit.

(3) When using the high power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration
common converter (FR-CV)
⋅ Set "2" in Pr. 30. The Pr. 70 setting is invalid.
⋅ Use any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function assignment) to assign the following signals to the contact input
terminals.
(a) X10 signal: FR-HC, MT-HC connection, FR-CV connection (inverter operation enable signal)
To make protective coordination with the FR-HC, MT-HC or FR-CV, use the inverter operation enable signal
to shut off the inverter output. Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC, MT-HC (RDYB signal of the FR-CV).
(b) X11 signal: FR-HC, MT-HC connection (instantaneous power failure detection signal)
When the setting has been made to hold the mode at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure for RS485 communication operation, use this signal to hold the mode. Input the Y1 or Y2 signal (instantaneous
power failure detection signal) of the FR-HC, MT-HC.
⋅ For the terminal used for X10 or X11 signal input, assign its function by setting "10" (X10) or "11" (X11) in any of Pr.
178 to Pr. 189.
REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 30 = "2", "Err" is displayed on the operation panel as the inverter is reset by the setting.

(4) DC feeding mode 1 (Pr. 30 = "10, 11")
⋅ Setting "10, 11" in Pr. 30 enables DC power supply operation.
⋅ Leave the AC power supply connection terminal R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 open and connect the DC power supply to
terminal P/+ and N/-. Also, remove jumpers across terminal R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as S/L2 and S1/L21, and
connect terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 to terminal P/+ and N/-.
⋅ The diagram below is a connection example.
Inverter

R1/L11
DC power

MC

(+)

S1/L21
P/+

U
V
W

4

IM

Earth
(Ground)

N/-

(-)

Forward rotation start

STF

Reverse rotation start

STR

Contact input common

SD

Frequency command
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

Inrush
current
limit circuit

PARAMETERS

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

10

3
2
1

2
5

115

Motor brake and stop operation
(5) DC feeding mode 2 (Pr. 30 = "20, 21, 120 or 121")
⋅ When "20, 21, 120 or 121" is set in Pr. 30, operation is performed with AC power supply normally and with DC
power supply such as battery at power failure.
⋅ Connect the AC power supply to terminal R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and connect the DC power supply to terminal P/+
and N/-. Also, remove jumpers across terminal R/L1 and R1/L11 as well as S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect
terminals R1/L11 and S1/L21 to terminal P/+ and N/-.
⋅ Turning ON the DC feeding operation permission signal (X70) enables DC power supply operation. Refer to the
table below for I/O signals.
Signal

Name

Description

X70

DC feeding operation
permission signal

X71

DC feeding cancel signal

Input

Output Y85

Parameter Setting

When performing operation with DC feeding, turn ON
the X70 signal.
When the inverter output is shut off because of power
failure, the inverter can be started in about 150ms
after switching OFF the X70 signal then ON again.
(When automatic restart operation is valid, the
inverter starts after additional Pr. 57 set time has
elapsed.)
When the X70 signal turns OFF during inverter
operation, output is shutoff (Pr .261 = 0) or the
inverter is decelerated to a stop (Pr. 261 ≠ 0).
Turn this signal ON to stop DC feeding.
When the X71 signal is turned ON during inverter
operation with turning ON the X70 signal, output is
shutoff (Pr. 261 = 0) or the inverter is decelerated to a
stop (Pr. 261 ≠ 0), then the X85 signal turns OFF after
the inverter stop.
After turning ON the X71 signal, operation cannot be
performed even if the X70 signal is turned ON.
This signal turns ON during power failure or under
voltage of AC power.
The signal turns OFF when the X71 signal turns ON
or power is restored.
The Y85 signal does not turn OFF during inverter
operation even if the power is restored and turns OFF
after an inverter stop.
When the Y85 signal turns ON because of
undervoltage, the Y85 signal does not turn OFF even
if undervoltage is eliminated.
ON/OFF status is retained at an inverter reset.

DC feeding signal

Set 70 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.

Set 71 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.

Set "85 (positive logic) or 185
(negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196

⋅ The following shows the connection diagram when switching to DC power supply using inverter power failure
detection.
Inverter
MCCB

MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Three-phase AC
power supply

DC power

MC1

(+)

Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start

116

U
V
W

R1/L11
S1/L21
P/+

IM

Earth
(Ground)

N/-

(-)

STF
STR

DC feeding permission signal

X70 *1

DC feeding cancel signal
Contact input common

X71 *1
SD

Frequency command
Frequency setting
potentiometer
1/2W1kΩ

Inrush
current
limit circuit

Y85

MC1

10

3
2
1

DC feeding signal
*2

SE
2
5

*1

Assign the function using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).

*2

Assign the function using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).

24VDC

Motor brake and stop operation
⋅ Operation example 1 at power failure
Control power
supply

AC power supply

DC power supply

ON

AC power supply

ON

Y85(MC)

ON

X70

ON

X71
ON

STF(STR)

ON

Motor
coasting

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Time
Approx. 150ms
Back up operation

⋅ Operation example 2 at power failure (when DC power is restored)
Control power
supply

AC

AC power supply

ON

DC

AC
Power restoration
Turns OFF after
stop while running

ON

Y85(MC)

ON

X70
X71 OFF
STF(STR)

ON

ON

Motor
coasting

Output
frequency
(Hz)

Time
Approx. 150ms
Back up operation

⋅ Operation example 3 at power failure (when continuous operation is performed)
Control power
supply

AC

AC power supply

ON

AC
Power restoration

ON

Y85(MC)

4

Remains ON while running

ON

PARAMETERS

X70

DC

X71 OFF
STF(STR)

ON

Output
frequency
(Hz)
Time
Back up operation

117

Motor brake and stop operation
(6) Power supply specification at DC feeding
200V class
400V class

Rated input DC voltage
Permissible fluctuation
Rated input DC voltage
Permissible fluctuation

283VDC to 339VDC
240VDC to 373VDC
537VDC to 679VDC
457VDC to 740VDC

CAUTION
⋅ As voltage between P/+ and N/- becomes 415VDC (830VDC) or more temporarily at regeneration, make selection of DC power
supply carefully.

(7) Regenerative brake duty alarm output and alarm signal (RBP signal) (FR-F720-03160 (FRF740-01800) or more)
100%: regenerative overvoltage protection operation value ⋅ [RB] appears on the operation panel and an alarm signal (RBP) is
100%
85%

Ratio of brake duty
to the Pr. 70 setting
Regenerative
brake prealarm
(RBP)

OFF

ON

ON

output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr. 70 is
reached. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100% of the Pr.
70 setting, a regenerative overvoltage (E.OV1 to E.OV3) occurs.
⋅ The inverter does not shut off the output when the alarm signal is
output.
⋅ For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign the
Tim function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in
any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).

REMARKS
⋅ The MRS signal can also be used instead of the X10 signal. (Refer to page 122.)
⋅ Refer to pages 36 to 44 for connection of the brake unit, high power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) and power regeneration
common converter (FR-CV).
⋅ When AC power is connected to terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 during DC feeding with "2, 10 or 11" (DC feeding) set in Pr. 30, an
option alarm (E.OPT) occurs.
⋅ When DC feeding operation is performed with "2, 10, 11, 20, 21, 120 or 121" (DC feeding) set in Pr. 30, undervoltage protection
(E.UVT) and instantaneous power failure (E.IPF) are not detected.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

(8) Reset selection at main circuit power ON (Pr. 30)
At initial status, inverter resets at main circuit power ON when using separated power source for main circuit (R, S, T)
and control circuit (R1, S1). With this parameter, you can select to perform inverter reset or not at main circuit power
ON.
• Pr. 30 = "0, 1, 20, 21" ..................... With inverter reset (Settings of "20 and 21" are for power failure)
• Pr. 30 = "100, 101, 120, 121" ......... Without inverter reset
* Settings of Pr. 30 = "2 (for FR-HC, MT-HC and FR-CV), 10 and 11(for DC feeding mode 1)" are for DC power supply,
and therefore reset selection is not available.

WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used.
Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time

Refer to page 152

Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection)
Pr. 190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection)
Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection

118

Refer to page 122
Refer to page 128

Refer to page 156

Motor brake and stop operation
4.9.3

Stop selection (Pr. 250)

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns OFF. Used
to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching OFF of the start signal.
You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR). (Refer to page 126 for start signal selection)
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Description
Setting Range Start Signal (STF/STR)
Stop Operation
(Refer to page 126)
0 to 100s

1000s to 1100s
250

Stop selection

9999
9999

8888

STF signal: Forward
rotation start
STR signal: Reverse
rotation start

The motor is coasted to a
stop when the preset time
elapses after the start
signal is turned OFF. The
motor is coasted to a stop
STF signal: Start signal
(Pr. 250 - 1000)s after the
STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal start signal is turned OFF.

STF signal: Forward
rotation start
STR signal: Reverse
When the start signal is
rotation start turned OFF, the motor
decelerates to stop.
STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/
reverse signal

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Decelerate the motor to a stop
Output frequency
(Hz)

Deceleration starts
when start signal turns OFF

Start
signal
RUN
signal

Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.)

⋅ Set Pr. 250 to "9999" (initial value) or "8888".
⋅ The motor decelerates to a stop when the start
signal (STF/STR) turns OFF.

DC brake
Time
OFF

ON
ON

OFF

(2) Coast the motor to a stop.

Start signal

Motor coasts to stop
Time
OFF

ON

RUN signal

ON

OFF

⋅ Use Pr. 250 to set the time from when the start signal
turns OFF until the output is shut off. When any of
"1000" to "1100" is set, the output is shut off after
(Pr. 250 − 1000)s.
⋅ The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250
has elapsed after the start signal had turned OFF.
The motor coasts to a stop.
⋅ The RUN signal turns OFF when the output stops.

REMARKS
Stop selection is invalid when the following functions are activated.
⋅ Power failure stop function (Pr. 261)
⋅ PU stop (Pr. 75)
⋅ Deceleration stop because of communication error (Pr. 502)
⋅ Emergency stop by LONWORKS communication
When setting of Pr. 250 is not 9999 nor 8888, acceleration/deceleration is performed according to the frequency command, until
start signal is OFF and output is shutoff.

CAUTION
⋅ When the start signal is turned ON again during motor coasting, the motor starts at Pr. 13 Starting frequency.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 7 Acceleration time , Pr. 8 Deceleration time
Pr. 13 Starting frequency

Refer to page 101

Refer to page 104

119

4
PARAMETERS

Output frequency
(Hz)

Output is shut off when set
time elapses after start signal
turns OFF
Pr.250

Motor brake and stop operation
4.9.4

Output stop function (Pr. 522)

The motor coasts to a stop (inverter output shutoff) when inverter output frequency falls to Pr. 522 setting or lower.
Parameter
Number
522

Name

Initial
Value

Output stop frequency

9999

Setting
Range
0 to 400Hz
9999

Description
Set the frequency to start coasting to a stop (output shutoff).
No function

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

⋅ When both of the frequency setting signal and output frequency falls to the frequency set in Pr. 522 or lower, the
inverter stops the output and the motor coasts to a stop.
⋅ After a stop, the inverter output re-starts when the frequency signal is set higher than Pr.522 + 2Hz. The motor reaccelerates at the Pr.13 Starting frequency.
Example of when target frequency>Pr.522+2Hz, and start signal is ON/OFF
Output frequency*
Target frequency
(fixed)
Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522
Pr.13
Time
Inverter output shutoff

STF
RUN

* The output frequency before the slip compensation is compared with the Pr.522 setting.

Example of:

target frequency = analog input command,
start signal always ON

Analog input command

Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522

Time
*2

Output frequency

*3

*3

Pr.522+2Hz
Pr.522
Pr.13

*1

*1

Time
Inverter output
shutoff

Inverter output
shutoff

STF
RUN

120

*1

After a stop, inverter re-starts accelerating at Pr.13 Starting frequency.

*2
*3

The output frequency before the slip compensation is compared with the Pr.522 setting.
Steepness of the slope depends on the acceleration/deceleration time settings such as Pr.7.

Motor brake and stop operation
REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 522 ≠ "9999", output stop function disables DC injection brake operation, so the motor coasts to a stop when the output
frequency falls to Pr. 522 or lower. Re-acceleration during coasting may cause an inverter trip depending on the parameter
setting.
⋅ Output stop function is disabled during PID control, JOG operation, and power failure stop.
⋅ Output stop function does not operate during reverse rotation deceleration. However, when the frequency setting signal and
output frequency falls to Pr. 522 or lower, the inverter coasts to a stop.
⋅ During the output stop due to the output stop function (when forward/reverse command is given, but frequency command is not
given), FWD/REV LED indication on the operation panel flickers fast.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency , Pr. 11 DC injection brake operation time , Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage

Refer to page 112

Refer to page 104

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 13 Starting frequency

121

Function assignment of external
terminal and control

4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control
Purpose

Parameter That Must be Set

Assign function to input terminal
Set MRS signal (output shutoff) to NC
contact specification
Make the second function valid only
during constant speed operation.
Assign start signal and forward/
reverse command to other signals
Assign function to output terminal
Detect output frequency.
Detect output current.
Remote output function
Detect specified output power

Input terminal function
selection

Pr. 178 to Pr. 189

122

Pr. 17

124

Pr. 155

125

Pr. 250

126

Pr. 190 to Pr. 196

128

Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 870

133

MRS input selection
RT signal function validity
condition selection
Start signal (STF/STR)
operation selection
Output terminal function
assignment
Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Output frequency detection
Speed detection hysteresis
Output current detection
Zero current detection
Remote output
Pulse train output of output
power

Refer to Page

Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166,
Pr. 167
Pr. 495 to Pr. 497
Pr. 799

135
137
138

4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189)
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

178

STF terminal function selection

60

STF (forward rotation command)

179

STR terminal function selection

61

STR (reverse rotation command)

180

RL terminal function selection

0

RL (low-speed operation command)

181

RM terminal function selection

1

182

RH terminal function selection

2

183

RT terminal function selection

3

RM (middle-speed operation command) 0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24, 25,
50, 51, 62, 64 to 67, 70 to
RH (high speed operation command) 72, 77, 78, 9999
RT (second function selection)

184

AU terminal function selection

4

AU (terminal 4 input selection)

185

JOG terminal function selection

5

JOG (Jog operation selection)

186

CS terminal function selection

6

187

MRS terminal function selection

24

188

STOP terminal function
selection

25

CS (selection of automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure)
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24, 25,
50, 51, 62, 64 to 67, 70 to
MRS (output stop)
72, 77, 78, 9999
STOP (start self-holding selection)

189

RES terminal function selection

62

RES (inverter reset)

Initial Signal

Setting Range
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24, 25,
50, 51, 60, 62, 64 to 67, 70
to 72, 77, 78, 9999
0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24, 25,
50, 51, 61, 62, 64 to 67, 70
to 72, 77, 78, 9999

0 to 8, 10 to 14, 16, 24, 25,
50, 51, 62 to 67, 70 to 72,
77, 78, 9999

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Input terminal function assignment
⋅ Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to set the functions of the input terminals.
⋅ Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Setting

Signal
Name

0

RL

122

Function
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)

Low-speed operation command

Pr. 59 ≠ 0 *1

Remote setting (setting clear)

Related Parameters
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59

Refer to
Page
93
98

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
Signal
Name

1

RM

*1
*2

2

RH

3
4
5

RT
AU
JOG

6

CS

7

OH

8

REX

10
11
12
13
14

X10
X11
X12
X13
X14

16

X16

24

MRS

25

STOP

50

SQ

51

X51

60

STF

61

STR

62
63
64

RES
PTC
X64

65

X65

66

X66

67

X67

70
71

X70
X71

72

X72

77

X77

78
9999

X78
⎯

Function

Related Parameters

Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr.
232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59 ≠ 0 *1
Remote setting (deceleration)
Pr. 59
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr.
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)
High-speed operation command
232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59 ≠ 0 *1
Remote setting (acceleration)
Pr. 59
Second function selection
Pr. 44 to Pr. 51
Terminal 4 input selection
Pr. 267
Jog operation selection
Pr. 15, Pr. 16
Selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr.162 to Pr.165,
flying start
Pr. 299, Pr. 611
Pr. 57, Pr. 58 Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159
Electronic bypass function
External thermal relay input *2
Pr. 9
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH)
Pr.232 to Pr.239
Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV connection) Pr. 30
FR-HC or MT-HC connection, instantaneous power failure detection
Pr. 30
PU operation external interlock
Pr. 79
External DC injection brake operation start
Pr. 11, Pr. 12
PID control valid terminal
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577
PU/External operation switchover
Pr. 79, Pr. 340
(turning ON X16 selects External operation)
Output stop
Pr. 17
Electronic bypass function
Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159
Start self-holding selection
⎯
Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498,
Sequence start
Pr. 506 to Pr. 515
Fault clear signal
⎯
Forward rotation command
⎯
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only)
Reverse rotation command
⎯
(assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only)
Inverter reset
⎯
PTC thermistor input (assigned to AU terminal (Pr. 184) only)
Pr. 9
PID forward/reverse action switchover
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134
PU/NET operation switchover
Pr. 79, Pr. 340
(turning ON X65 selects PU operation)
External/NET operation switchover
Pr. 79, Pr. 340
(turning ON X66 selects NET operation)
Command source switchover
Pr. 338, Pr. 339
(Pr.338 and Pr.339 commands are valid when X67 turns ON)
DC feeding operation permission
Pr. 30, Pr. 70
DC feeding cancel
Pr. 30, Pr. 70
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 241, Pr.
PID integral value reset
553, Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577,
C42 to C45
Pr. 127 to Pr. 130, Pr. 133,
Pre-charge end command
Pr. 134, Pr. 760 to Pr. 764
Second pre-charge end command
Pr. 753 to Pr. 758, Pr. 765 to Pr. 769
No function
⎯
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value)

Middle-speed operation command

Refer to
Page
93
98
93
98
125
171
95
152
293
107
93
114
114
195
112
261
201
124
293
126
260
332
126
126
⎯
107
261
203
203
204
114
114
261
275
275
⎯

When Pr. 59 Remote function selection ≠ "0", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals change as listed above.
The OH signal turns ON when the relay contact "opens".

REMARKS
⋅ Same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR.
⋅ The priorities of the speed commands are in order of jog > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14).
⋅ When the X10 signal (FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV connection - inverter operation enable signal) is not set or when the PU
operation external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned at the Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting of "7", the MRS signal
shares this function.
⋅ Same signal is used to assign multi-speeds (7 speeds) and remote setting. They cannot be set individually.
(Same signal is used since multi-speed (7 speeds) setting and remote setting are not used to set speed at the same time .)

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Also
check that wiring is correct, since the terminal name and the signal function became different. Please set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.

123

4
PARAMETERS

Setting

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
(2) Response time of each signal
⋅ The response time of the X10 signal is within 2ms. However, when the X10 signal is not assigned at the Pr. 30
Regenerative function selection setting of "2" (FR-HC/MT-HC/FR-CV connection), the response time of the MRS
signal is within 2ms.
Pr. 17 MRS input selection is invalid.
Pr. 30
Setting

MRS
Assignment

2

×

Other than 2

×

X10
Assignment
×

Response Time
MRS
X10
Within 2ms
⎯
Within 20ms
Within 20ms
⎯
Within 20ms

×

⎯
Within 2ms
Within 2ms
⎯
⎯
⎯

Pr. 17
Invalid
⎯
Valid
Valid
⎯
Valid

4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)
The inverter output can be shut off from the MRS signal. The logic of the MRS signal can also be selected.
Parameter
Number
17

Name
MRS input selection

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

0

0
2

Description
Open input always
Close input always (NC contact input specifications)

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

Motor coasts
to stop

Time

MRS signal

ON

STF (STR)
signal

ON

Setting value "0"

(Initial
value)

Inverter

Output
stop

MRS
SD

Setting value "2"
Output
stop

Inverter
MRS
SD

(1) Output shutoff signal (MRS signal)
⋅ Turning ON the output shutoff signal (MRS) during inverter running
shuts off the output immediately.
⋅ Terminal MRS may be used as described below.
(a) When mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) is used to
stop motor
The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake
operates.
(b) To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter
With the MRS signal ON, the inverter cannot be operated if the
start signal is entered into the inverter.
(c) Coast the motor to a stop.
When the start signal is turned OFF, the inverter decelerates the
motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS
signal is turned ON, the motor coasts to a stop.

(2) MRS signal logic inversion (Pr. 17)
⋅ When Pr. 17 is set to "2", the MRS signal (output stop) can be
changed to the normally closed (NC contact) input specification.
When the MRS signal turns ON (opens), the inverter shuts off the
output.
REMARKS
⋅ The MRS signal is assigned to the terminal MRS in the initial setting. By setting "24" in either Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal
function selection), the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal.
⋅ When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)

124

Refer to page 122

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by the second function selection
signal (RT) (RT signal, Pr. 155)
You can select the second function using the external terminal (RT signal).
You can also set the RT signal operation condition (reflection time).
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

Second function is immediately valid with ON of the
RT signal.
Second function is valid only during the RT signal is
ON and constant speed operation.
(invalid during acceleration/deceleration)

0
RT signal function validity
condition selection

155

Description

0
10

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ When the RT signal turns ON, the second function becomes valid.
⋅ The second function has the following applications.
(a) Switching between normal use and emergency use
(b) Switching between heavy load and light load
(c) Changing of acceleration/deceleration time by broken line acceleration/deceleration
(d) Switching of characteristic between main motor and sub motor
Second function
connection diagram

Second acceleration/deceleration time example
Setting value "0" (initial value)

Start
Second
function
selection

Output frequency

Inverter

STF(STR)
RT

High speed

RH

Middle speed

RM

Acceleration
time is reflected
Time

RT
RH

SD

RM

⋅ When the RT signal is ON, the following second functions are selected at the same time.
First Function Parameter
Number

Torque boost
Base Frequency
Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Electronic thermal relay function
Stall prevention
Output frequency detection
PID control

Second Function
Parameter Number

Refer to
Page

Pr. 0

Pr. 46

78

Pr. 3
Pr. 7
Pr. 8
Pr. 9
Pr. 22
Pr. 42(Pr. 43)
Pr. 127 to Pr. 130, Pr. 133,
Pr. 134, Pr. 760 to Pr. 764

Pr. 47
Pr. 44
Pr. 44, Pr. 45
Pr. 51
Pr. 48, Pr. 49
Pr. 50
Pr. 753 to Pr. 758,
Pr. 765 to Pr. 769

89
101
101
107
81
133

4

261

REMARKS
⋅ The RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal in the initial setting. By setting "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection), the RT signal can be assigned to the other terminal.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection)

Refer to page 122

125

PARAMETERS

Function

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.4 Start signal selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250)
You can select the operation of the start signal (STF/STR).
Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns OFF.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching OFF of the start signal.
(Refer to page 119 for stop selection)

Parameter
Number

Initial
Value

Name

Setting
Range

0 to 100s

1000s to
1100s
250

Stop selection

9999
9999

8888

Description
Stop Operation
(Refer to page 119)

Start Signal (STF/STR)
STF signal: Forward rotation
start
STR signal: Reverse rotation
start
STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/reverse
rotation signal
STF signal: Forward rotation
start
STR signal: Reverse rotation
start
STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: Forward/reverse
rotation signal

The motor is coasted to a stop
when the preset time elapses
after the start signal is turned
OFF. When the setting is any
of 1000s to 1100s, the inverter
coasts to a stop in (Pr. 250 1000)s.

When the start signal is turned
OFF, the motor decelerates to
stop.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) 2-wire type (STF, STR signal)
⋅ A two-wire type connection is shown below.
⋅ In the initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) are used as start and stop signals. Turn ON
either of the forward and reverse rotation signals to start the motor in the corresponding direction. If both are turned
OFF (or ON) during operation, the inverter decelerates to a stop.
⋅ The speed setting signal may either be given by entering 0 to 10VDC across the speed setting input terminal 2 and
5, by setting the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (high, middle, low speeds), etc. (For multi-speed
operation, refer to page 93)
⋅ When Pr. 250 is set in any of "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal becomes a start command and the STR signal a
forward/reverse command.

STF
STR Inverter

Forward/
reverse
signal

SD

10
5

ON
ON

2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "9999")

Time

Reverse
rotation

Time

Forward
rotation

2

5

Forward
rotation
STR

SD

2

Reverse
rotation

Output frequency

10

STF

STF
STR Inverter

Start signal

Output frequency

Forward
rotation start
Reverse
rotation start

STF
STR

ON
ON

2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "8888")

REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 250 is set in any of "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", the motor coasts to a stop if the start command is turned OFF. (Refer to
page 119)
⋅ The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial setting. The STF signal can be assigned to
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection and the STR signal to Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection only.

126

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
(2) 3-wire type (STF, STR, STOP signal)
⋅ A 3-wire type connection is shown below.
⋅ The start self-holding selection becomes valid when the STOP signal is turned ON. In this case, the forward/
reverse rotation signal functions only as a start signal.
⋅ If the start signal (STF or STR) is turned ON and then OFF, the start signal is held and makes a start. When
changing the direction of rotation, turn STR (STF) ON once and then OFF.
⋅ To stop the inverter, turning OFF the STOP signal once decelerates it to a stop.
Stop

Forward
rotation start
Reverse
rotation start

Stop

Start
STF

STF

Inverter

Inverter
STOP

STR

STR

STOP
Forward rotation
/reverse rotation

SD

Time

Output frequency
Reverse Forward
rotation
rotation

Output frequency
Reverse Forward
rotation
rotation

SD

Time

ON

ON

ON

STF

STF
ON

ON

STR

STR

STOP ON

STOP ON
OFF

OFF

3-Wire Type Connection Example (Pr. 250 ="9999")

OFF

OFF

3-Wire Type Connection Example (Pr. 250 ="8888")

REMARKS
⋅ The STOP signal is assigned to the terminal STOP in the initial setting. By setting "25" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, the STOP signal can
also be assigned to the other terminal.
⋅ When the JOG signal is turned ON to enable jog operation, the STOP signal becomes invalid.
⋅ If the MRS signal is turned ON to stop the output, the self-holding function is not canceled.

(3) Start signal selection
STF

STR

Pr. 250 Setting Inverter Status
0 to 100s, 9999
1000s to 1100s, 8888

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Stop
Reverse rotation
Forward rotation
Stop

4
PARAMETERS

Stop
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 (Multi-speed setting)
Refer to page 93
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122

127

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190 to Pr. 196)
You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and relay output terminal.
Parameter
Number

Initial
Value

Name

Initial Signal

190

RUN terminal
function selection

0

RUN (inverter running)

191

SU terminal function
selection

1

SU (up to frequency)

2

IPF (instantaneous power
failure, undervoltage)

3

OL (overload alarm)

Open
collector
output
terminal

192

IPF terminal function
selection

193

OL terminal function
selection

194

FU terminal function
selection

4

FU (output frequency
detection)

195

ABC1 terminal
function selection

99

ALM (fault output)

196

ABC2 terminal
function selection

Relay
output
terminal

9999

No function

Setting Range

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25, 26,
45 to 54, 64, 67, 70 to 79, 82, 85, 90
to 96, 98, 99, 100 to 105, 107, 108,
110 to 116, 125, 126, 145 to 154,
164, 167, 170, 179, 182, 185, 190
to 196, 198, 199, 9999

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10 to 19, 25, 26, 45 to
54, 64, 67, 70 to 79, 82, 85, 90, 91,
94 to 96, 98, 99, 100 to 105, 107,
108, 110 to 116, 125, 126, 145 to
154, 164, 167, 170, 179, 182, 185,
190, 191, 194 to 196, 198, 199,
9999

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Output signal list
⋅ You can set the functions of the output terminals.
⋅ Refer to the following table and set the parameters: (0 to 99: Positive logic, 100 to 199: Negative logic)
Setting

Signal
Name

Function

Operation

Positive
Logic

Negative
Logic

0

100

RUN

Inverter running

1

101

SU

Up to frequency

2

102

IPF

Instantaneous power
failure/undervoltage

3

103

OL

Overload alarm

4

104

FU

Output frequency
detection

5

105

FU2

Second output
frequency detection

7

107

RBP

Regenerative brake
pre-alarm

8

108

THP

Electronic thermal
relay function
prealarm

10

110

PU

PU operation mode

11

111

RY

Inverter operation
ready

128

*1

Output during operation when the inverter
output frequency rises to or above Pr. 13
Starting frequency.
Output when the output frequency is
reached to the set frequency.
Output at occurrence of an instantaneous
power failure or when undervoltage
protection is activated.
Output while stall prevention function is
activated.
Output when the output frequency reaches
the frequency setting in Pr. 42 (Pr. 43 for
reverse rotation).
Output when the output frequency reaches
the frequency setting in Pr. 50.
Output when 85% of the regenerative brake
duty set in Pr. 70 is reached.
Setting is available for the FR-F720-03160
(FR-F740-01800) or more.
Output when the electronic thermal value
reaches 85% of the trip level.
(Electronic thermal relay function protection
(E.THT/E.THM) activates, when the value
reached 100%.)
Output when the PU operation mode is
selected.
Output when the reset process is completed
(when the inverter can be started by
switching the start signal ON or while it is
running) after powering ON the inverter.

Related
Parameters

Refer
to Page

⎯

131

Pr. 41

133

Pr. 57

152

Pr. 22, Pr. 23,
Pr. 66, Pr. 148,
Pr. 149, Pr. 154

81

Pr. 42, Pr. 43

133

Pr. 50

133

Pr. 70

114

Pr. 9

109

Pr. 79

195

⎯

131

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
Signal
Name

Function

Negative
Logic

12

112

Y12

Output current
detection

13

113

Y13

Zero current
detection

14

114

FDN

PID lower limit

15

115

FUP

PID upper limit

16

116

RL

17
18
19
25

⎯
⎯
⎯
125

MC1
MC2
MC3
FAN

26

126

FIN

45

145

RUN3

46

146

Y46

47

147

PID

48

148

Y48

49

149

Y49

50

150

Y50

51

151

Y51

Pre-charge time over

Operation
Output when the output current is higher
than the Pr. 150 setting for longer than the
time set in Pr. 151.
Output when the output power is lower than
the Pr. 152 setting for longer than the time
set in Pr. 153.
Output when the feedback value falls below
the lower limit of PID control.
Output when the feedback value rises above
the upper limit of PID control
Output when forward rotation is performed in
PID control.

PID forward/reverse
rotation output
Electronic bypass MC1
Used when the bypass-inverter switchover
Electronic bypass MC2
function is used.
Electronic bypass MC3
Fan fault output
Output at the time of a fan alarm.
Output when the heatsink temperature
Heatsink overheat
reaches about 85% of the heatsink overheat
pre-alarm
protection operation temperature.
Inverter running and
Output when the inverter is running and start
start command is ON command is ON.
During deceleration at Output when the power failure-time
occurrence of power
deceleration function is executed.
failure
(retained until release)
During PID control
Output during PID control.
activated
PID deviation limit
During pre-charge
operation
During second precharge operation

52

152

Y52

Second pre-charge
time over

53

153

Y53

Pre-charge level over

54

154

Y54

64

164

Y64

Second pre-charge
level over
During retry

67

167

Y67

During power failure

70

170

SLEEP

PID output
interruption

Output when the absolute value of deviation
exceeds the limit value.

Related
Parameters
Pr. 150, Pr. 151

135

Pr. 152, Pr. 153

135

Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577

261

Pr. 135 to Pr. 139,
Pr. 159

293

Pr. 244

300
⎯

340

⎯

131

Pr. 261 to Pr. 266
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 241, Pr. 553, Pr.
554, Pr. 575 to Pr.
577, C42 to C45

261

261

Pr. 65 to Pr. 69
Pr. 57

155

Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577

261

Pr. 127 to Pr. 134,
Pr. 241, Pr. 553,
Pr. 554,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577,
Pr. 753 to Pr. 769,
C42 to C45

Output when the pre-charged amount
exceeds the set level in Pr.763 or Pr.768.
Output during retry processing.
Output during output shutoff due to power
failure or under voltage.
Output when the PID output interruption
function is executed.

156

261,
275
261,
275
261,
275
261,
275
261,
275
261,
275
159

Output during the pre-charge operation.

Output when the pre-charged time exceeds
the time set in Pr.764 or Pr.769.

Refer
to Page

4
PARAMETERS

Setting
Positive
Logic

129

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
Setting

Signal
Name

Positive
Logic

Negative
Logic

71

⎯

RO1

72

⎯

RO2

73

⎯

RO3

74

⎯

RO4

75

⎯

RIO1

76

⎯

RIO2

77

⎯

RIO3

78

⎯

RIO4

79

179

Y79

82

182

Y82

85

185

Y85

90

190

Y90

91

191

Y91

92

192

Y92

93

193

Y93

94

194

ALM2

Function
Commercial-power
supply side motor 1
connection RO1
Commercial-power
supply side motor 2
connection RO2
Commercial-power
supply side motor 3
connection RO3
Commercial-power
supply side motor 4
connection RO4
Inverter side motor 1
connection RIO1
Inverter side motor 2
connection RIO2
Inverter side motor 3
connection RIO3
Inverter side motor 4
connection RIO4

Operation

Used when using advanced PID control
(pump function).

Output in pulses every time the accumulated
output power of the inverter reaches the
Pr.799 setting.
Control of binary output from BACnet is
BACnet binary output
available.
Output during power failure or under voltage
DC feeding
of AC power.
Output when any of the control circuit
capacitor, main circuit capacitor and inrush
Life alarm
current limit circuit or the cooling fan
approaches the end of its service life.
Output when a fault occurs due to the
Fault output 3
internal circuit failure of inverter wiring
(power-OFF signal)
mistake.
Turned ON and OFF alternately every time
Energy saving
the power saving average value is updated
average value
when the power saving monitor is used.
updated timing
Cannot be set to Pr. 195 and Pr. 196 (relay
output terminal).
Average current value and maintenance
Current average
timer value are output as pulses.
value monitor signal
Cannot be set to Pr. 195 and Pr. 196 (relay
output terminal).
Output when the fault occurs. Continues
outputting the signal during inverter reset
Fault output 2
and stops outputting after reset is cancelled.
Pulse train output of
output power

Related
Parameters

Refer
to Page

Pr. 575 to Pr. 591

283

Pr. 799

138
⎯

247

Pr. 30, Pr. 70

114

Pr. 255 to Pr. 259

301

⎯

132

Pr. 52, Pr. 54,
Pr. 158, Pr. 891 to
Pr. 899

164

Pr. 555 to Pr. 557

305

⎯

132

*2

95

195

Y95

Maintenance timer
signal

96

196

REM

Remote output

98

198

LF

Alarm output

99

199

ALM

Fault output

⎯

No function

9999

Output when Pr. 503 rises to or above the Pr.
504 setting.
Output to the terminal when a value is set to
the parameter.
Output when an alarm (fan failure or
communication error warning) occurs.
Output when the fault occurs. The signal
output is stopped when the fault is reset.
⎯

Pr. 503, Pr. 504

304

Pr. 495 to Pr. 497

137

Pr. 121, Pr. 244

214,
300

⎯

132

⎯

⎯

*1

Note that when the frequency setting is varied using an analog signal or

*2

frequency) signal may alternate ON and OFF depending on that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed due to acceleration/
deceleration time setting. (The output will not alternate ON and OFF when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0s".)
When a power supply reset is performed, the fault output 2 signal (ALM2) turns OFF as soon as the power supply switches OFF.

130

of the operation panel (FR-DU07), the output of the SU (up to

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
REMARKS
⋅ The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
⋅ When the function is executed, the terminal conducts at the setting of any of "0" to "99", and does not conduct at the setting of
any of "100" to "199".
⋅ When Pr. 76 Fault code output selection = "1", the output signals of the terminals SU, IPF, OL and FU are switched as set in Pr. 76.
(When an inverter fault occurs, the signal output is switched to the fault code output.)
⋅ The output assignment of the terminal RUN and fault output relay are as set above regardless of Pr. 76.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
⋅ Do not assign signals which repeat frequent ON/OFF to A1 B1 C1, A2 B2 C2. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact decreases.

(2) Inverter operation ready signal (RY signal) and inverter running signal (RUN, RUN3 signal)
Power
supply

ON

OFF
ON

STF

ON

RH

Output frequency

OFF

DC injection brake
operation point
Pr. 13
Starting
frequency

DC injection
brake
operation

Reset
processing

Time
ON

RY

Inverter
Status
Output
Signal

OFF

ON

ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON

ON
ON
ON

Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal selection function) referring to the
table below.
Output
Signal

Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 Setting
Positive logic

RY
RUN
RUN3

OFF

Start
Start
Start
Signal is Signal is Signal is
OFF
ON
ON
(during
(during
(during
stop)
stop)
running)

RY
RUN
RUN3
*1
*2

OFF
ON

RUN
RUN3

⋅ When the inverter is ready to operate, the output of the operation
ready signal (RY) is ON. It is also ON during inverter running.
⋅ When the output frequency of the inverter rises to or above
Pr. 13 Starting frequency, the output of the inverter running
signal (RUN) is turned ON. During an inverter stop or DC
injection brake operation, the output is OFF.
⋅ The output of the RUN3 signal is ON when the inverter
running and start signals are ON.
(For the RUN3 signal, output is ON if the starting command is
ON even when a fault occurs or the MRS signal is ON.
⋅ When using the RY, RUN and RUN3 signals, assign functions to

Under DC
Injection
Brake

Negative logic

11

111

0

100

45

145

Output Shut Off *2

Automatic Restart after
Instantaneous Power Failure
Coasting

Start signal Start signal Start signal Start signal Restarting
is ON
is OFF
is ON
is OFF

ON
OFF
ON

OFF
OFF
ON

ON *1
OFF
OFF

ON

OFF

ON
ON
ON

This signal turns OFF during power failure or undervoltage.
Output is shutoff in conditions like a fault and when the MRS signal is ON.

REMARKS

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ RUN signal is assigned to the terminal RUN in the initial setting.

131

Function assignment of external
terminal and control

Output frequency

(3) Fault output signal (ALM, ALM2 signal)
Inverter fault occurrence
(trip)

Time
ON OFF

Fault output signal(ALM)

OFF

ON

Fault output 2 signal(ALM2)

ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)

Reset signal(RES)

⋅ If the inverter comes to trip, the ALM and ALM2
signals are output.
⋅ The ALM2 signal remains ON during a reset
period after fault occurrence.
⋅ When using the ALM2 signal, set "94 (positive
logic)" or "194 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190 to
Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) to assign
the function to the output terminal.
⋅ The ALM signal is assigned to the A1B1C1
contact in the initial setting.

Reset ON

REMARKS
Refer to page 334 for the inverter fault description.

(4) Input MC shutoff signal (Y91 signal)
⋅ The Y91 signal is output at occurrence of a fault attributable to the failure of the inverter circuit or a fault caused by
a wiring mistake.
⋅ When using the Y91 signal, set "91 (positive logic)" or "191 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output
terminal function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
⋅ The following table indicates the faults that will output the Y91 signal. (Refer to page 334 for the fault description.)
Fault Definition
Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH)
CPU fault (E.CPU)
CPU fault (E.6)
CPU fault (E.7)
Parameter storage device fault (E.PE)
Parameter storage device fault (E.PE2)
24VDC power output short circuit (E.P24)
Power supply short circuit for operation panel, power supply
short circuit for RS-485 (E.CTE)
Output side earth(ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF)
Output phase loss (E.LF)
Brake transistor alarm detection/internal circuit error (E.BE)

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 13 Starting frequency

Refer to page 104

Pr. 76 Fault code output selection

132

Refer to page 161

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU, FU2 signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43, Pr. 50, Pr. 870)
The inverter output frequency is detected and output to the output signal.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
0 to 100%
0 to 400Hz

41
42

Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Output frequency detection

10%
6Hz

43

Output frequency detection
for reverse rotation

9999

50

Second output frequency
detection
Speed detection hysteresis

870

Description

9999

Set the level where the SU signal turns ON.
Set the frequency where the FU signal turns ON.
Set the frequency where the FU signal turns ON in
reverse rotation.
Same as Pr. 42 setting

30Hz

0 to 400Hz

Set the frequency where the FU2 signal turns ON.

0Hz *

0 to 5Hz

Set the hysteresis width for the detected frequency.

0 to 400Hz

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

⋅ When the output frequency reaches the set frequency, the up-to-frequency
signal (SU) is output.
⋅ The Pr. 41 value can be adjusted within the range ±1% to ±100% on the
assumption that the set frequency is 100%.
⋅ This parameter can be used to ensure that the set frequency has been
reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for related equipment.

Time
OFF

OFF

ON

(2) Output frequency detection (FU signal, FU2
signal, Pr. 42, Pr. 43, Pr. 50)

Time
Pr.43
Pr.50

Reverse
rotation

Output
signal OFF
FU
FU2

OFF

Parameter
Number

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

Output
Signals

OFF
OFF

Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 Setting
Positive
logic

Negative
logic

42, 43

FU

4

104

50

FU2

5

105

⋅ When the output frequency rises to or above the Pr. 42
setting, the output frequency detection signal (FU) is
output.
⋅ This function can be used for electromagnetic brake
operation, open signal, etc.
⋅ Frequency detection that is dedicated to reverse
operation can be set by setting detection frequency to Pr.
43. This function is effective for switching the timing of
electromagnetic brake operation between forward
rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift
operation, etc.
⋅ When Pr. 43 ≠ "9999", the Pr. 42 setting applies to
forward rotation and the Pr. 43 setting applies to reverse
rotation.
⋅ When outputting a frequency detection signal besides
the FU signal, set the detection frequency in Pr. 50. The
FU2 signal output when the output frequency reaches or
exceeds the Pr. 50 setting.
⋅ For each signal, assign functions to Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
(output terminal function selection) referring to the left
table.

133

4
PARAMETERS

Pr.50
Pr.42

Forward
rotation

(Hz)

Output frequency

SU

(1) Up-to-frequency sensitivity (SU signal, Pr. 41)

Adjustment
range Pr.41

Output frequency
(Hz)

Set frequency

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

Function assignment of external
terminal and control

Output frequency
(Hz)

(3) Speed detection hysteresis (Pr. 870)

Pr.42

FU

Pr.870

OFF
ON

ON

OFF
ON

Example of output frequency detection signal (FU)

⋅ This function prevents chattering of the speed detection
signals.
When an output frequency fluctuates, the up to frequency
signal (SU) and output frequency detection signals (FU,
FU2) may repeat ON/OFF (chatters). Setting hysteresis
to the detected frequency prevents chattering of these
signals.
REMARKS
Setting a higher value to this parameter slows the response of
frequency detection signals (SU, FU and FU2).

REMARKS
The output frequency compared with the set frequency changes depending on the control method.
Control Method
V/F control
Simple magnetic flux vector control

Compared Output Frequency
Output frequency
Output frequency before slip compensation

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)

134

Refer to page 128

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.7 Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)
The output current during inverter running can be detected and output to the output terminal.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting
Range

150

Output current detection
level

110%*

0 to 120%*

151

Output current detection
signal delay time

0s

0 to 10s

152

Zero current detection level

5%

0 to 150%

Zero current detection time

0.5s

0 to 10s

Output current detection
signal retention time

0.1s

153

166

167

0 to 10s

Output current detection
operation selection

0

9999

Description
Set the output current detection level. 100% is the
rated inverter current.
Set the output current detection period. Set the
time from when the output current has risen above
the setting until the output current detection signal
(Y12) is output.
Set the zero current detection level. The rated
inverter current is assumed to be 100%.
Set the time period from when the output current
drops below the Pr. 152 value until when the zero
current detection signal (Y13) is output.
Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is ON.
The Y12 signal ON status is retained. The signal is
turned OFF at the next start.
Y12 Signal - ON
Y13 Signal - ON

0

Operation continued

1

Fault stop (E.CDO)

Operation continued

10

Operation continued

Fault stop (E.CDO)

11

Fault stop (E.CDO)

Fault stop (E.CDO)

Operation continued

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

* When Pr. 570 Multiple rating setting = "1", performing inverter reset and all parameter clear changes the initial value and setting
range. (Refer to page 86.)

(1) Output current detection (Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr.
151, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)

9999, Pr. 167 = 0
Pr. 150

Output current

Pr. 151
Pr. 166
Minimum 0.1s
(initial value)

Output current
detection signal
(Y12)

OFF

ON

Time

OFF

⋅ The output power detection function can be used for excessive
torque detection, etc.
⋅ If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting during
inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr. 151, the
output current detection signal (Y12) is output from the inverter's
open collector or relay output terminal.
⋅ When the Y12 signal turns ON, the ON state is held for the time
set in Pr. 166 .
⋅ When Pr. 166 = "9999", the ON state is held until a next start.
⋅ At the Pr. 167 setting of "1" or "11", the inverter output is stopped
and the output current detection fault (E.CDO) is displayed when
the Y12 signal turns ON. When a fault stop occurs, the Y12
signal is ON for the time set in Pr. 166 at the Pr. 166 setting of
other than "9999", and remains ON until a reset is made at the Pr.
166 setting of "9999". Setting Pr. 167 = "1" or "11" at Y12 signal
ON does not cause E.CDO. Setting to Pr. 167 becomes effective
after Y12 is turned OFF.
⋅ For the X12 signal, set "12 (positive logic)" or "112 (negative
logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)
and assign the function to the output terminal.

135

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 166

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
(2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr.
153, Pr. 167)

Pr. 167 = 0 or 1
Output
current
Pr.152
0[A]
Start signal

Pr.152
0.1s*
OFF

ON
OFF

Zero current
detection time
(Y13)

Time

ON

Pr. 153
Detection time

OFF

ON

Pr. 153
Detection time

* Once turned ON, the zero current detection time
signal (Y13) is held ON for at least 0.1s.

⋅ If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr.
153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from
the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
⋅ When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not
be generated. This may cause a drop due to gravity when
the inverter is used in vertical lift application. To prevent this,
the output current zero signal (Y13) can be output from the
inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output
current has fallen to "0".
⋅ When Pr.167 = "10" or "11", turning Y13 signal ON stops the
inverter output and causes output current detection fault
(E.CDO) to be displayed. ON status of Y13 signal is held for
0.1s at the fault. Setting Pr. 167 = "10" or "11" while Y13
signal is ON does not cause E.CDO. Setting to Pr. 167
becomes effective after Y13 is turned OFF.
⋅ For the Y13 signal, set "13 (positive logic)" or "113 (negative
logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function
selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.

CAUTION
⋅ The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1s. Note that the response time changes according to the load
condition.
When Pr. 152 = "0", detection is disabled.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too low, and the zero current detection time setting not too
long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output current.
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions by use of the zero current
detection signal, install a safety backup such as an emergency brake.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)

136

Refer to page 128

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.8 Remote output function (REM signal, Pr. 495 to Pr. 497)
You can utilize the ON/OFF of the inverter's output signals instead of the remote output terminal of the
programmable controller.
Parameter
Number

Initial
Value

Name

Setting
Range

Remote output data clear at
powering OFF
Remote output data retention
even at powering OFF
Remote output data clear at
powering OFF
Remote output data retention
even at powering OFF

0
1

495

Remote output selection

0
10
11

496 *
497 *

Remote output data 1
Remote output data 2

0
0

Description

0 to 4095
0 to 4095

Remote output data clear at
inverter reset

Remote output data retention
even at inverter reset

Refer to the following diagram.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.


Pr. 496
b11

b0
RUN

SU

IPF

OL

FU

ABC1

ABC2

*1

*1

*1

*1

*1

Pr. 497
b11

b0
Y0 *2

Y1 *2

Y2 *2

Y3 *2

Y4 *2

Y5 *2

Y6 *2

RA1 *3

RA2 *3

RA3 *3

*1

*1

*1 As desired
*2 Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-A7AY) is fitted
*3 RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option (FR-A7AR) is fitted

⋅ The output terminal can be turned ON/OFF depending
on the Pr. 496 or Pr. 497 setting. The remote output
selection can be controlled ON/OFF by computer link
communication from the PU connector or RS-485 port
or by communication from the communication option.
⋅ Set "96" (positive logic) or "196" (negative logic) in any
of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection),
and assign the remote output (REM) signal to the
terminal used for remote output,
⋅ When you refer to the left diagram and set 1 to the
terminal bit (terminal where the REM signal has been
assigned) of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497, the output terminal
turns ON (OFF for negative logic). By setting 0, the
output terminal turns OFF (ON for negative logic).

Example)When "96" (positive logic) is set to Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection and "1" (H01) is set to Pr. 496,
the terminal RUN turns ON.
ON/OFF example for positive logic
Power
supply

OFF

OFF

REM

OFF

ON

REM

REM signal clear

REM signal held

Signal condition during a reset
Pr. 495 = 0, 1

Pr. 495 = 10, 11

ON

Reset
REM ON

OFF

Inverter
reset time
(about 1s)

Reset

ON

REM

ON

*

⋅ When Pr. 495 = "0 (initial value), 10", performing a power
supply reset (including a power failure) clears the REM signal
output. (The ON/OFF status of the terminals are as set in Pr.
190 to Pr. 196.) The Pr. 496 and Pr. 497 settings are also "0".
When Pr. 495 = "1, 11", the remote output data before power
supply-OFF is stored into the EEPROM, so the signal output
at power recovery is the same as before power supply-OFF.
However, it is not stored when the inverter is reset (terminal
reset, reset request through communication).
(See the chart on the left)
⋅ When Pr. 495 = "10, 11", the signal during reset is held even an
inverter reset is made.

* When Pr. 495 = "1," the signal condition saved in
EEPROM (condition of the last power OFF) is applied.

REMARKS
⋅ The output terminal where the REM signal is not assigned using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 does not turn ON/OFF if 0/1 is set to
the terminal bit of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497. (It turns ON/OFF with the assigned function.)

CAUTION
⋅ When Pr. 495="1, 11"(remote output data retention at power OFF), connect R1/11 with P/+, and S1/L21 with N/- so that the
control power is retained. If you do not take such a step, the output signals provided after power-ON are not guaranteed.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
⋅ Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)

Refer to page 128

137

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 495 = 1, 11

Pr. 495 = 0, 10
Power
supply

Function assignment of external
terminal and control
4.10.9 Pulse train output of output power (Y79 signal, Pr. 799)
After power ON or inverter reset, output signal (Y79 signal) is output in pulses every time accumulated output
power, which is counted after the Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power is set, reaches the specified value
(or its integral multiples).
Parameter
Number
799

Name

Initial
Value

Pulse increment setting for
output power

1kWh

Setting Range

Description

0.1kWh, 1kWh, 10kWh, Pulse train output of output power (Y79) is output in
pulses at every output power (kWh) that is specified.
100kWh, 1000kWh

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Pulse increment setting for output power (Y79 signal, Pr.799)
⋅ After power ON or inverter reset, output signal (Y79 signal) is output in pulses every time accumulated output
power of the inverter exceeds Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power.
⋅ The inverter continues to count the output power at activation of retry function or at an automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (power failure that is too short to cause an inverter reset). It does not clear the output
power.
⋅ If power failure occurs, output power is counted from 0kWh again.
⋅ Assign pulse output of output power (Y79: setting value 79 (positive logic), 179 (negative logic)) to any of Pr.190 to
Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).
Output power
20kWh
10kWh

Pulse output of output power
(Y79)

OFF

ON

Time

ON for 0.15s (0.1 to 0.2s)
When Pr.799 = 10

CAUTION
⋅ Because the accumulated data in the inverter is cleared when control power is lost by power failure or at an inverter reset, the
value on the monitor cannot be used to charge electricity bill.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. (Refer to page 128)

REMARKS
⋅ When parameter copy is performed, Pr.799 = "9999" might be set. However, the inverter operates as Pr.799 were at "1kWh"
(initial value) in such case.

138

Monitor display and monitor output signal

4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal
Purpose

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be set

Display motor speed
Set speed

Speed display and speed setting

Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 505

139

Change PU monitor display data

DU/PU main display data selection
Cumulative monitor clear

Pr. 52, Pr. 170, Pr. 171,
Pr. 268, Pr. 891

141

Terminal CA, AM function selection

Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 867, Pr. 869

141

Pr. 55, Pr. 56, Pr. 867

147

Pr. 900, Pr. 901, Pr. 930, Pr. 931

149

Change of the monitor output from
terminal CA and AM
Set the reference of the monitor
output from terminal CA and AM
Adjust terminal CA, AM outputs

Setting of reference of terminal CA and AM
Terminal CA, AM calibration

4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37, Pr. 144, Pr. 505)
You can change the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) monitor display or frequency setting to motor speed or
machine speed.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

37

Speed display

0

144

Speed setting switchover

4

505

Speed setting reference

60Hz

Setting Range
0
1 to 9998 *1
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 102,
104, 106, 108, 110
1 to 120Hz

Description
Frequency display, setting
Set the machine speed at 60Hz.
Set the number of motor poles when
displaying the motor speed.
Set the reference speed for Pr. 37.

...... The specification differs according to the manufacture date. Refer to page 400 and check the SERIAL.
*1

The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr.1 Maximum frequency and it can be calculated from the following formula.

Pr.37 (set maximum value)

<

65535 x Pr.505
Pr.1(Hz)

Note that Pr.37 (set maximum value) is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.
*2

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for operation with frequency set in Pr. 505.
For example, when Pr. 505 = "60Hz" and Pr. 37 = "1000", "1000" is displayed on the running speed monitor when the
running frequency is 60Hz. When running frequency is 30Hz, "500" is displayed.
⋅ When displaying the motor speed, set the number of motor poles (2, 4, 6, 8, 10) or number of motor poles + 100
(102, 104, 106, 108, 110) to Pr. 144.
⋅ When both Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 have been set, their priorities are as given below.
Pr. 144, 102 to 110 > Pr. 37, 1 to 9998 > Pr. 144, 2 to 10
⋅ When the running speed monitor is selected, each monitor and setting are determined by the combination of Pr. 37
and Pr. 144 as listed below. (The units within the thick frame are the initial values.)
Pr. 144
Setting

Output Frequency
Monitor

Set Frequency
Monitor

Running Speed
Monitor

Frequency Setting
Parameter Setting

0
(initial
value)

0
2 to 10
102 to 110
0
2 to 10

Hz
Hz
r/min *1
Hz
Machine speed *1

102 to 110

Hz

Hz
Hz
r/min *1
Hz
Machine speed *1
Hz

r/min *1
r/min *1
r/min *1
Machine speed *1
Machine speed *1
r/min *1

Hz
Hz
r/min *1
Hz
Machine speed *1
Hz

1 to 9998
*1

*2
*3

Motor speed r/min conversion formula............ frequency × 120/number of motor poles (Pr. 144)
Machine speed conversion formula ...................Pr. 37 × frequency/Pr. 505 setting (Hz)
For Pr. 144 in the above formula, the value is "Pr. 144-100" when "102 to 110" is set in Pr. 144 and the value is "4" when Pr. 37 = 0 and Pr. 144 = 0.
The increments for Hz are 0.01Hz, machine speed are 1m/min, and r/min are 1r/min.
Pr. 505 is always set as frequency (Hz).

139

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 37
Setting

Monitor display and monitor output signal
CAUTION
⋅ Under V/F control, the output frequency of the inverter is displayed in terms of synchronous speed, and therefore, displayed
value = actual speed + motor slip.
⋅ When the running speed display is selected at the setting of Pr. 37 "0" and Pr. 144 "0", the monitor display is provided on the
assumption that the number of motor poles is 4. (Displayed as 1800r/min when Pr.505 is set.)
⋅ Refer to Pr. 52 when you want to change the PU main monitor (PU main display).
⋅ Since the panel display of the operation panel (FR-DU07) is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is
displayed "----".
⋅ When an optional FR-A7ND or FR-A7NL card is mounted, frequency is displayed regardless of Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 setting.

CAUTION
Make sure that the settings of the running speed and number of motor poles are correct. Otherwise, the motor
might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection

140

Refer to page 141

Monitor display and monitor output signal
4.11.2 DU/PU monitor display selection
(Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation panel (FR-DU07)/parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07) can be selected.
Parameter
Number

Name

52 *

DU/PU main display data
selection

54 *

CA terminal function
selection

158 *

170

AM terminal function
selection

Watt-hour meter clear

Initial Value
0
(output
frequency)

1
(output
frequency)

9999

Setting Range
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14,
17, 20, 23 to 25,
50 to 57, 67,
81 to 86 100
1 to 3, 5, 6,
8 to 14, 17, 21,
24, 50, 52, 53,
67, 70, 85
1 to 3, 5, 6,
8 to 14, 17, 21,
24, 50, 52, 53,
67, 70, 86
0
10
9999

171
268 *
563
564

Operation hour meter clear

9999

Monitor decimal digits
selection

9999

Energization time
carrying-over times
Operating time carryingover times

0
0

0, 9999
0
1
9999
0 to 65535
(reading only)
0 to 65535
(reading only)
0 to 4

891 *

Cumulative power monitor
digit shifted times

9999
9999

Description
Select the monitor to be displayed on the
operation panel and parameter unit.
Refer to the following table for monitor description.

Select the monitor output to terminal CA.

Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
Sets the maximum value for the monitoring from
communication to 9999kWh.
Sets the maximum value for the monitoring from
communication to 65535kWh.
Set "0" to clear the operation time monitor.
Setting "9999" has no effect.
Displayed as integral value.
Displayed in 0.1 increments.
No function
Displays the numbers of cumulative energization
time monitor exceeded 65535h. Reading only
Displays the numbers of operation time monitor
exceeded 65535h. Reading only
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative
power monitor digit.
Clamps the monitor value at maximum.
No shift
Clears the monitor value when it exceeds the
maximum value.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

4
PARAMETERS

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

141

Monitor display and monitor output signal
(1) Monitor description list (Pr. 52)
⋅ Set the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) in Pr.
52 DU/PU main display data selection.
⋅ Set the monitor to be output to the terminal CA (analog output (0 to 20mADC current output)) in Pr. 54 CA terminal
function selection.
⋅ Set the monitor to be output to the terminal AM (analog output (0 to 10VDC voltage output)) in Pr. 158 AM terminal
function selection.
⋅ Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The signals marked × cannot be selected for
monitoring)
Pr. 52 Parameter
Setting Value
Types of Monitor

Increments
DU LED

PU main
monitor

Pr. 54 (CA)
Pr. 158 (AM)
Parameter
Setting
Value

Full-scale
value of the
terminal CA
and AM

Output frequency

0.01Hz

0/100

1

Pr. 55

Output current *7

0.01A/0.1A

0/100

2

Pr. 56
200V class:
400V
400V class:
800V

Output voltage
Fault display
Frequency setting
value

*5

0.1V

0/100

3

⎯

0/100

×

5

*1

5

1(r/min)

6

*1

6

Converter output
voltage

0.1V

8

*1

8

Regenerative
brake duty

0.1%

9

*1

9

Pr. 70

Electronic thermal
relay function load
factor

0.1%

10

*1

10

100%

0.01A/0.1A

11

*1

11

Pr. 56

12

*1

12

13

*1

13

14

*1

14

Running speed

Output current
peak value
Converter output
voltage peak value
Input power
Output power *7
Load meter

*5

0.1V
0.01kW/
0.1kW *5
0.01kW/
0.1kW *5

Displays the inverter output frequency
Displays the inverter output current
effective value

⎯

0.01Hz

The value
converted with
the Pr. 37 value
from Pr. 55
200V class:
400V
400V class:
800V

Displays 8 past faults individually

Displays the motor speed (The display
differs depending on the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144
settings.) (For details, refer to page 139 .)

Displays the DC bus voltage value
Brake duty set in Pr. 30 and Pr. 70 (Setting
is available for the FR-F720-03160 (FRF740-01800) or more)
Displays the motor thermal cumulative
value on the assumption that the thermal
operation level is 100%.
Retains the peak value of the output
current monitor and displays (clears at
every start)

200V class:
400V
400V class:
800V
Rated inverter
power × 2
Rated inverter
power × 2

0.1%

17

17

Cumulative
energization time *2

1h

20

×

⎯

Reference voltage
output

⎯

⎯

21

⎯

Actual operation
time *2*3

1h

23

×

⎯

Motor load factor

0.1%

24

24

142

Displays the inverter output voltage

Displays the set frequency

Pr. 55

100%

200%

Description

Retains the peak value of the DC bus
voltage value and displays (clears at every
start)
Displays power of the inverter input side
Displays power of the inverter output side
Displays the torque current in % on the
assumption that the Pr. 56 setting is 100%
Displays the cumulative energization time
since the inverter shipment
You can check the numbers of the monitor
value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563.
Terminal CA: 20mA is output
Terminal AM: 10V is output
Displays the cumulative inverter running
time.
You can check the numbers of the monitor
value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
Use Pr. 171 to clear the value.
(Refer to page 146 .)
Displays the output current value in % on
the assumption that the rated inverter
current value is 100%.
Monitor value = output current monitor
value/rated inverter current × 100 [%]

Monitor display and monitor output signal

Types of Monitor

Increments

PU main
monitor

DU LED

Cumulative power
*6

Power saving
effect
Cumulative saving
power *6
PID set point
PID measured
value
PID deviation
Input terminal
status

0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *4, *5

Pr. 54 (CA)
Pr. 158 (AM)
Parameter
Setting
Value

Full-scale
value of the
terminal CA
and AM

25

×

⎯

50

50

Inverter
capacity

51

×

⎯

0.1%

52

52

0.1%

53

53

0.1%

54

×

⎯

*1

×

⎯

*1

×

⎯

Variable
according
to
parameters

⎯

100%/
C42 or C44
100%/
C42 or C44

55

Description

Displays the cumulative power amount
according to the output power monitor
Use Pr. 170 to clear the value.
(Refer to page 146.)
Displays energy saving effect monitor
You can change the monitor to power
saving, power saving average value,
charge display and % display using
parameters.
(For details, refer to page 165.)
Displays the set point, measured value and
deviation during PID control
(For details, refer to page 269.)
Displays ON/OFF status of the input
terminal on the PU
(Refer to page 145 for DU display)
Displays ON/OFF status of the output
terminal on the PU
(Refer to page 145 for DU display)
Displays ON/OFF status of the input terminal
of the digital input option (FR-A7AX) on the
DU (Refer to page 145 for details)
Displays ON/OFF status of the output
terminal of the digital output option (FRA7AY) and relay output option (FR-A7AR)
on the DU (Refer to page 145 for details)
Displays the measured value
(For details, refer to page 269.)
Desired values can be output from terminal
CA and AM using the PLC function.
Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function
programming manual for details of the PLC
function.
Displays the reception status of BACnet
communication
(Refer to page 247 for details)

Output terminal
status

⎯

Option input
terminal status

⎯

56

×

×

⎯

Option output
terminal status

⎯

57

×

×

⎯

PID measured
value 2

0.1%

67

67

100%/
C42 or C44

PLC function
output

0.1%

×

70

100%

1

81

×

⎯

1

82

×

⎯

Displays the count of received token

1

83

×

⎯

Displays the count of valid APDU detection

1

84

×

⎯

Displays the count of communication error

Terminal CA output
level

⎯

85

85

Terminal AM
output level

⎯

BACnet reception
status
BACnet token pass
counter
BACnet valid
APDU counter
BACnet
communication
error counter

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5

86

(Pr. 54 only)

86

(Pr. 158 only)

20mA

10V

Displays actual output current level of
terminal CA which is controlled by BACnet
communication
(Refer to page 247 for details)
Displays actual output voltage level of
terminal AM which is controlled by BACnet
communication
(Refer to page 247 for details)

Frequency setting to output terminal status on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07).
The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0. When
the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
The actual operation time is not added up if the cumulative operation time before power supply-OFF is less than 1h.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
The setting depends on capacities. (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less/FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)

*6

Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed as "----".

*7

When the output current is less than the specified current level (5% of the rated inverter current), the output current is monitored as 0A. Therefore,
the monitored value of an output current and output power may be displayed as "0" when using a much smaller-capacity motor compared to the
inverter or in other instances that cause the output current to fall below the specified value.

143

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 52 Parameter
Setting Value

Monitor display and monitor output signal
REMARKS
⋅ By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of output speed to fault display can be selected in sequence by

.

⋅ When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the displayed units are Hz, V and A only and the others are not displayed.
⋅ The monitor set in Pr. 52 is displayed in the third monitor position. (The output voltage monitor is changed.)

Initial value
* The monitor displayed at powering ON is the first monitor. Display the monitor you want to display on the first monitor and hold
down

for 1s. (To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down

for 1s after displaying the output frequency

monitor.)
• Power-ON monitor (first monitor)

• Second monitor

• Third monitor

• Fault monitor
With fault

Output frequency monitor

Output voltage monitor

Output current monitor

Example)When Pr. 52 is set to "20" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as described
below.
• Power-ON monitor (first monitor)

• Second monitor

• Third monitor

• Fault monitor
With fault

Output frequency monitor

Output current monitor

Cumulative energization time monitor

(2) Display set frequency during stop (Pr. 52)
⋅ When Pr. 52 is set to "100", the set frequency
monitor is displayed during a stop and the output
frequency monitor is displayed during operation.
(LED of Hz flickers during stop and is lit during
running.)
When Pr.52="100", the set frequency displayed at a
stop indicates frequency to be output when the start
command is ON.
Different from the frequency setting based on
displayed when Pr. 52="5", the value maximum/
minimum frequency and frequency jump is
displayed.

Pr. 52
0

Output
frequency

During
running/stop

During
stop

During
running

Output
frequency

Set
frequency

Output
frequency

Output current

Output current

Output voltage

Output voltage

Fault display

Fault display

REMARKS
⋅ During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
⋅ During MRS, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.

144

100

Monitor display and monitor output signal
(3) Operation panel (FR-DU07) I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52)
⋅ When Pr. 52 is set to any of "55 to 57", the I/O terminal states can be monitored on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
⋅ The I/O terminal monitor is displayed on the third monitor.
⋅ The LED is ON when the terminal is ON, and the LED is OFF when the terminal is OFF. The center line of LED is
always ON.
Monitor Description

Pr. 52 Setting
55

Displays the I/O and output terminal ON/OFF states of the inverter unit.

56 *

Displays the input terminal ON/OFF states of the digital input option (FR-A7AX).

57 *

Displays the output terminal ON/OFF states of the digital output option (FR-A7AY) or relay output option (FR-A7AR).

* You can set "56" or "57" even if the option is not fitted. When the option is not fitted, the monitor displays are all OFF.

⋅ On the unit I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal states and the lower the
output terminal states.
RM

AU STOP
RES STF
JOG CS
MRS
STR

RH
RT

RL

Input Terminals

- Display example When signals STF,
RH and RUN are ON
Hz
A
V

Center line is always ON

ABC1

RUN
ABC2

SU

OL
IPF

FU

Free

Free
Free
Free Free

MON P.RUN
PU

EXT

REV

NET
FWD

Output terminal

⋅ On the input option terminal monitor (Pr. 52= "56"), the decimal point LED of the first digit LED is ON.
X1

X4

X2
X3

X0

X7

X5
X6

X8
X9

Center line is always ON
Free

X10

X12
X11

X13

X15
X14

DY

Free

Free
Free Free
Decimal point LED of first digit LED is always ON

⋅ On the input option terminal monitor (Pr. 52= "57"), the decimal point LED of the second digit LED is ON.
Y1

Y4

Y2
Y3

Y0

Y5
Y6

FR-A7AY

Center line is always ON

4
RA2

FR-A7AR

PARAMETERS

RA1

RA3

Decimal point LED of second digit LED is always ON

145

Monitor display and monitor output signal
(4) Cumulative power monitor and clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 891)
⋅ On the cumulative power monitor (Pr. 52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 1h
increments.
⋅ The operation panel (FR-DU07), parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and communication (RS-485 communication,
communication option) display units and display ranges are as indicated below.
Operation Panel *1

Parameter Unit *2

Range

Unit

Range

Unit

0 to 99.99kWh
100.0 to 999.9kWh
1000 to 9999kWh

0.01kWh
0.1kWh
1kWh

0 to 999.99kWh
1000.0 to 9999.9kWh
10000 to 99999kWh

0.01kWh
0.1kWh
1kWh

*1
*2

Communication
Range
Pr. 170 = 10
Pr. 170 = 9999
0 to 9999kWh

0 to 65535kWh
(initial value)

Unit
1kWh

Power is measured in the range 0 to 9999.99kWh, and displayed in 4 digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "99.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
Power is measured in the range 0 to 99999.99.99kWh, and displayed in 5 digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "999.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.

⋅ The monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 891 settings.
For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh when Pr. 891 = "2", the PU/DU display is 12.78 (display
in 100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
⋅ If the maximum value exceeded at Pr. 891 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that a
digit shift is necessary. If the maximum value exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
⋅ Writing "0" in Pr. 170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
REMARKS
⋅ If "0" is written in Pr. 170 and Pr. 170 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.

(5) Cumulative energization time and actual operation time monitor (Pr. 171, Pr. 563, Pr. 564)
⋅ On the cumulative energization time monitor (Pr. 52 = "20"), the inverter running time is added up every hour.
⋅ On the actual operation time monitor (Pr. 52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not
added up during a stop.)
⋅ If the numbers of monitor value exceeds 65535, it is added up from 0. You can check the numbers of cumulative
energization time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation time monitor
exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
⋅ Writing "0" in Pr. 171 clears the actual operation time monitor. (Energization time monitor cannot be cleared.)
REMARKS
⋅ The actual operation time is not added up unless the inverter is operated one or more hours continuously.
⋅ If "0" is written in Pr. 171 and Pr. 171 is read again, "9999" is always displayed. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual operation
time meter.

(6) You can select the decimal digits of the monitor (Pr. 268)
⋅ As the operation panel (FR-DU07) display is 4 digits long, the decimal places may vary at analog input, etc. The
decimal places can be hidden by selecting the decimal digits.
In such a case, the decimal digits can be selected by Pr. 268.
Pr. 268 Setting
9999 (initial value)
0

1

Description
No function
When 1 or 2 decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) are monitored, the decimal places are
dropped and the monitor displays an integer value (1 increments).
The monitor value of 0.99 or less is displayed as 0.
When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the
monitor displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments).
When the monitor display digit is originally in 1 increments, it is displayed unchanged in 1 increments.

REMARKS
⋅ The number of display digits on the cumulative energization time (Pr. 52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr. 52 = "23"), cumulative
power (Pr. 52 = "25") or cumulative saving power monitor (Pr. 52 = "51") does not change.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 37 Speed display, Pr. 144 Speed setting switchover
Refer to page 139
Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference

146

Refer to page 147

Monitor display and monitor output signal
4.11.3 CA, AM terminal function selection (Pr.55, Pr.56, Pr.867, Pr.869)
For signal output, two different output terminals are available: analog current output terminal CA and analog
output terminal AM.
You can select the signals output to the terminals CA, AM.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range
200V class
(400V class)

60Hz

0 to 400Hz

Frequency monitoring
reference

55 *

56 *

Current monitoring
reference

Rated inverter
current

867
869

AM output filter
Current output filter

0.01s
0.02s

02330
(01160)
0 to 500A
or less
03160
0 to
(01800)
3600A
or more
0 to 5s
0 to 5s

Description
Full-scale value when frequency
monitor value is output to terminal CA
and AM.

Full-scale value when current monitor
value is output to terminal CA and AM.

Set the output filter of terminal AM.
Adjust response level of current output.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set
in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

(1) Frequency monitoring reference(Pr. 55)

Terminal CA
output current

Terminal AM
output voltage

(10VDC) (20mADC)

1Hz

60Hz
(initial value)

400Hz

Setting range of Pr. 55

• Set the full scale value when outputting the frequency monitor from
terminal CA or AM.
• For the calibration of terminal CA, set the full-scale value of the
connected meter when output current of terminal CA is 20mADC.
Set the frequency to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter
(20mADC ammeter) connected between terminal CA and 5. (For
example, 60Hz or 120Hz)
Output voltage is proportional to the frequency. (Maximum output
current is 20mADC.)
• For the calibration of terminal AM, set the full-scale value of the
connected meter when output voltage of terminal AM is 10VDC.
Set the frequency to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter
(10VDC voltmeter) connected between terminal AM and 5. (For
example, 60Hz or 120Hz)
Output voltage is proportional to the frequency. (Maximum output
voltage is 10VDC.)

(2) Current monitoring reference (Pr. 56)

Rated output current 500A
(3600A)
(initial value)
Setting range of Pr. 56

147

4
PARAMETERS

Terminal CA
output current

Terminal AM
output voltage

(10VDC) (20mADC)

• Set the full scale value when outputting the current monitor from
terminal CA or AM.
• For the calibration of terminal CA, set the full-scale value of the
connected current meter when the output current of terminal CA is
20mADC.
Set the current to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter
(20mADC ammeter) connected between terminal CA and 5.
Output current is proportional to the monitored value of output
current. (Maximum output current is 20mADC.)
• For the calibration of terminal AM, set the full-scale value of the
connected current meter when the output voltage of terminal AM is
10VDC.
Set the current to be indicated as the full scale value on the meter
(10VDC voltmeter) connected between terminal AM and 5.
Output voltage is proportional to the monitored value of output
current. (Maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)

Monitor display and monitor output signal
(3) Terminal AM response adjustment (Pr. 867)
• Using Pr. 867, the output voltage response of the terminal AM can be adjusted within the range 0 to 5s.
• Increasing the setting stabilizes the terminal AM output more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the
response level to 7ms)

(4) Adjustment of response level of terminal CA (Pr. 869)
• The response level of the output current of the terminal CA can be adjusted between 0 and 5s with Pr. 869.
• Increasing the setting stabilizes the terminal CA output more but reduces the response level. (Setting "0" sets the
response level to about 7ms.)
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 37 Speed display

148

Refer to page 139

Monitor display and monitor output signal
4.11.4 Terminal CA, AM calibration
(Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), C1 (Pr. 901), C8 (Pr.930) to C11 (Pr. 931))
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal CA and terminal AM to full scale
deflection.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

C0(900)

CA terminal calibration

⎯

⎯

C1(901)

AM terminal calibration

⎯

⎯

C8(930)

Current output bias signal

0%

0 to 100%

C9(930)

Current output bias current

0%

0 to 100%

C10(931)

Current output gain signal

100%

0 to 100%

C11(931)

Current output gain current

100%

0 to 100%

*1
*2
*3

Description
Calibrates the scale of the meter
connected to terminal CA.
Calibrates the scale of the analog
meter connected to terminal AM.
Output signal value for minimum
analog current output
Output current value for minimum
analog current output
Output signal value for maximum
analog current output
Output current value for maximum
analog current output

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.

(1) CA terminal calibration (C0(Pr. 900), C8(Pr. 930) to C11(Pr. 931) )
⋅ Terminal CA is factory-set to provide a 20mADC

(ammeter)

output in the full-scale status of the corresponding
monitor item. Calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900) allows
the output current ratios (gains) to be adjusted
according to the meter scale. Note that the maximum
output current is 20mADC.
5
⋅ Use calibration parameters C8(Pr. 930) and C9(Pr. 930)
to set a value for zero analog current output (meter
Output signal value
points zero) . In addition, use calibration parameters
for minimum analog output
Analog output current
C10(Pr. 931) and C11(Pr. 931) to set a value for
(C10(Pr.931))
(CA)
maximum analog current output.
Analog current output
C0(Pr.900) 20mA
⋅ Use calibration parameters C8(Pr. 930) and C10(Pr.931)
value
for
maximum
100%
to set output signal values (monitor output set in Pr. 54)
output signal
when the current output at terminal CA is zero or
(C11(Pr.931))
maximum. At this time, the full-scale of each monitor is
100%. (Refer to page 142)
⋅ Use calibration parameters C9(Pr. 930) and C11(Pr.931)
Output signal value
to set the current output values at terminal CA when
0
Output signal value
the output signal value (monitor output set in Pr. 54) is
for zero analog current output
zero or maximum. At this time, the current output
(C8(Pr.930))
calibrated using calibration parameter C0(Pr. 900) is
Analog current output value for zero output signal
100%.
(+)

(-)

(C9(Pr.930))

⋅ Calibrate CA terminal in the following procedure.
1) Connect a 0-20mADC meter (DC ammeter) to across inverter terminals CA and 5. (Note the polarity. Terminal
CA is plus.)
2) Set calibration parameters C8(Pr. 930) to C11 (Pr. 931) to initial values. (When the meter needle does not point to
0, calibrate using C8(Pr. 930) and C9(Pr. 930))
3) Refer to the monitor description list (page 142) to set Pr. 54.
When running frequency, inverter output current or the like has been selected as the monitor, preset in Pr. 55 or
Pr. 56 the running frequency or current value at which the output signal is 20mA.
4) Run the inverter. (The inverter may be run in either the PU or External operation mode.)
5) Use calibration parameter C0(Pr. 900) to set the meter needle to point to full-scale.
REMARKS
⋅ When calibrating a monitor output signal, which cannot be adjusted to 100% value without an actual load and a measurement
equipment, set Pr. 54 to "21" (reference voltage output). (20mADC is output at terminal CA.)

⋅ Even when calibration parameters are set as C8(Pr. 930) ≥ C10(Pr. 931) and C9(Pr. 930) ≥ C11(Pr. 931), current can be output at
terminal CA.

149

4
PARAMETERS

CA

0 to 20mADC

Monitor display and monitor output signal
(2) AM terminal calibration (C1(Pr.901))
⋅ Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale
status of the corresponding monitor item. Calibration parameter C1 (Pr.
901) allows the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to
the meter scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.

Inverter
AM
10VDC
5

⋅ Calibrate the AM terminal in the following procedure.
1) Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) to across inverter terminals AM and 5. (Note the polarity. The
terminal AM is positive.)
2) Refer to the monitor description list (page 142) and set Pr. 158.
When you selected the running frequency or inverter output current as the monitor, preset the running frequency
or current value, at which the output signal will be 10V, to Pr. 55 or Pr. 56.
3) When outputting the item that cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21"
(reference voltage output) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for
example) in Pr. 158.
REMARKS
⋅ When calibrating a monitor output signal, which cannot be adjusted to 100% value without an actual load and a measurement
equipment, set Pr. 158 to "21" (reference voltage output).10VDC is output from the terminal AM.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 54 CA terminal function selection
Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference
Pr.56 Current monitoring reference
Pr.158 AM terminal function selection

150

Refer to page 147
Refer to page 147
Refer to page 147
Refer to page 147

Monitor display and monitor output signal
4.11.5 How to calibrate the terminal CA when using the operation panel (FR-DU07)

Display

Operation

(When Pr. 54 = 1)

1.Confirmation of the RUN indication and
operation mode indication
The parameter
number read
previously appears.

2. Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

3. Turn

until

4. Press
5.Turn

C0 to C11
setting
is enabled.

appears.

to display

.

until

appears.

Set to C0 CA terminal calibration.

6. Press

The monitor set to Pr. 54 CA terminal
function selection is displayed.

to enable setting.

7. If the inverter is at a stop, (press
or

) to start the inverter.

(Motor needs not be connected.)

8. Turn

(

)

+
to adjust the indicator needle
Analog indicator

to the desired position.

9. Press

-

. Setting is complete.

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to return to the

Press

twice to show the next parameter (

indication (step 4).
).

REMARKS
⋅ Calibration can also be made for external operation. Set the frequency in External operation mode, and make calibration in
the above procedure.
⋅ Calibration is available even during operation.
⋅ For the operating procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the parameter unit instruction manual.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Refer to page 149
Refer to page 149

4
PARAMETERS

C0 CA terminal calibration
C1 AM terminal calibration

151

Operation selection at power failure and
instantaneous power failure

4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous
power failure
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

At instantaneous power failure
occurrence, restart inverter without
stopping motor
When undervoltage or a power
failure occurs, the inverter can be
decelerated to a stop.

Automatic restart operation
after instantaneous power
failure / flying start
Power failure-time
deceleration-to-stop
function

Refer to Page

Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165,
Pr. 299, Pr. 611

152

Pr. 261 to Pr. 266

156

4.12.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure / flying start
(Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 162 to Pr. 165, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the following cases.
⋅ when bypass operation is switched to inverter operation
⋅ when power comes back ON after an instantaneous power failure
⋅ when motor is coasting at start
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value
200V class
(400V class)

Setting Range
200V class
(400V class)

FR-F720-00077 (FR-F740-00038) or less .... 0.5s
FR-F720-00105 to 00340
(FR-F740-00052 to 00170).......................... 1s
FR-F720-00490 to 02330
(FR-F740-00250 to 01160) ......................... 3.0s
FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more .. 5.0s
The above times are coasting time.

0
57

Restart coasting
time

9999
02330 (01160)
or less
03160 (01800)
or more
9999

58

Restart cushion
time

162

Automatic
restart after
instantaneous
power failure
selection

163
164

165

299

611

First cushion
time for restart
First cushion
voltage for
restart
Stall prevention
operation level
for restart
Rotation
direction
detection
selection at
restarting
Acceleration
time at a restart

1s

0.1 to
5s
0.1 to
30s

0 to 60s
0
1

0

10
11
0s

0 to 20s

0%

0 to 100%

110%*1

0 to 120%*1
0
1

9999
9999
02330 (01160)
or less

5s

03160 (01800)
or more

15s

Description
200V class (400V class)

0 to 3600s, 9999

Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart
after an instantaneous power failure.
No restart
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
With frequency search
Without frequency search (Reduced voltage
system)
Frequency search at every start
Reduced voltage system at every start
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Consider using these parameters according to the
load (moment of inertia, torque) magnitude.
Considers the rated inverter current as 100% and
set the stall prevention operation level during
restart operation.
Without rotation direction detection
With rotation direction detection
When Pr. 78="0", the rotation direction is detected.
When Pr. 78="1", "2", the rotation direction is not
detected.

Set the acceleration time to reach Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency at a
restart.
Acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration
time (e.g. Pr. 7) when "9999" is set.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
*1

When Pr. 570 Multiple rating setting = "1", performing inverter reset and all parameter clear changes the initial value and setting range. (Refer to page 86.)

152

Operation selection at power failure
and instantaneous power failure
(1) Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation
15ms to 100ms
ON

IPF

OFF
ON

OFF

⋅ When Instantaneous power failure protection (E.IPF) and undervoltage
protection (E.UVT) are activated, the inverter output is shut off. (Refer to
page 340 for E.IPF and E.UVT.)
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation is set,
the motor can be restarted if power is restored after an instantaneous
power failure and under voltage. (E.IPF and E.UVT are not activated.)
⋅ When E.IPF and E.UVT are activated, instantaneous power failure/under
voltage signal (IPF) is output.
⋅ The IPF signal is assigned to the terminal IPF in the initial setting. The IPF
signal can also be assigned to the other terminal by setting "2 (positive
logic) or 102 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal
function selection).

(2) Connection (CS signal)

MC2

MCCB

MC1

MC3

R/L1 U
S/L2 V
T/L3 W
R1/L11
S1/L21
STF
CS
SD

IM

MC
switchover
sequence

For use for only
automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure or flying start,
short CS and SD in advance.

CS
SD

When Pr. 162 = 0, 10 (with frequency search)
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
Motor
speed N (r/min)
Inverter
output frequency
f (Hz)
Inverter
output voltage
E (V)
Coasting
time (Pr.57)

*

+

Speed
detection time

Restart cushion
time (Pr. 58 setting)

Acceleration time
at a restart
(Pr. 611 setting)

⋅ When the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
selection signal (CS) is turned ON, automatic restart operation
is enabled.
⋅ When Pr. 57 is set to other than "9999" (automatic restart
operation enabled), the inverter will not operate if used with the
CS signal remained OFF.
REMARKS
⋅ The CS signal is assigned to the terminal CS in the initial setting. By
setting "6" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection),
you can assign the CS signal to the other terminal.

(3) Automatic restart operation selection (Pr. 162, Pr. 299)
With frequency search
When "0 (initial value), 10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter
smoothly starts after detecting the motor speed upon power
restoration.
⋅ During reverse rotation, the inverter can be restarted smoothly
as the direction of rotation is detected.
⋅ You can select whether to make rotation direction detection or
not with Pr. 299 "Rotation direction detection selection at restarting".
When capacities of the motor and inverter differ, set "0" (without
rotation direction detection) in Pr. 299.
Pr.299 Setting
9999 (initial value)
0
1

* The output shut off timing differs according
to the load condition.

0

Pr.78 Setting
1

2

×

×
×

×
×

: with rotation direction detection
× : with rotation direction detection
REMARKS
⋅ Speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to
the motor speed. (maximum 500ms)
⋅ When the inverter capacity is two rank or more larger than the
motor capacity, the inverter may not start due to overcurrent
trip (E.OC ).
⋅ If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, the
inverter functions abnormally. (Inverter does not start properly.)
⋅ Since the DC injection brake is operated instantaneously when
the speed is detected at a restart, the speed may reduce if the
moment of inertia of the load is small.
⋅ When reverse rotation is detected when Pr. 78="1" (reverse
rotation disabled), the rotation direction is changed to forward
rotation after decelerates in reverse rotation when the start
command is forward rotation. The inverter will not start when
the start command is reverse rotation.

153

4
PARAMETERS

Power
supply

Operation selection at power failure and
instantaneous power failure
When Pr. 162 = 1, 11 (without frequency search)
Instantaneous (power failure) time
Power supply
(R/L1,S/L2,T/L3)
Motor speed N
(r/min)
Inverter
output frequency
f (Hz)
Inverter
output voltage
E (V)

Without frequency search
When Pr. 162 = "1, 11", automatic restart operation is performed
in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is gradually
risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to an
instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting
speed of the motor.
REMARKS
⋅ This system stores the output frequency prior to an instantaneous
power failure and increases the voltage. Therefore, if the
instantaneous power failure time exceeds 0.2s, the inverter starts
at Pr. 13 Starting frequency (initial value = 0.5Hz) since the stored
output frequency cannot be retained.

*

Coasting time
Pr. 57 setting

Restart cushion
time
Pr. 58 setting
* The output shut off timing differs according
to the load condition.

Restart operation at every start
When Pr. 162 = "10" or "11", automatic restart operation is also
performed every start, in addition to the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure. When Pr. 162 = "0", automatic
restart operation is performed at the first start after power
supply-ON, but not performed at the second time or later.

(4) Restart coasting time (Pr. 57)
⋅ Coasting time is the time from when the motor speed is detected until automatic restart control is started.
⋅ Set Pr. 57 to "0" to perform automatic restart operation. The coasting time is automatically set to the value below.
Generally this setting will pose no problems.
200V class
400V class
Coasting time

00077 or less
00038 or less
0.5s

00105 to 00340
00052 to 00170
1s

00490 to 02330
00250 to 01160
3s

03160 or more
01800 or more
5s

⋅ Operation may not be performed well depending on the magnitude of the moment of inertia(J) of the load or
operation frequency. Adjust the coasting time between 0.1s and 5s according to the load specifications.

(5) Restart cushion time (Pr. 58)
⋅ Cushion time is the length of time taken to raise the voltage appropriate to the detected motor speed (output
frequency prior to instantaneous power failure when Pr. 162 = "1" or "11).
⋅ Normally the initial value need not be changed for operation, but adjust it according to the magnitude of the
moment of inertia(J) of the load or torque magnitude.

(6) Automatic restart operation adjustment (Pr. 163 to
Pr. 165, Pr. 611)

Voltage
100%

Pr.164

(Pr.163)

Pr.58

Time

⋅ Using Pr. 163 and Pr. 164, you can adjust the voltage rise time at
a restart as shown on the left.
⋅ Using Pr. 165, you can set the stall prevention operation level at
a restart.
⋅ Using Pr. 611, you can set the acceleration time until Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency is reached after
automatic restart operation is performed besides the normal
acceleration time.
REMARKS
⋅ If the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is
changed, the setting increments of Pr. 611 do not change.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 196 (I/O terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
⋅ When automatic restart operation is selected, undervoltage protection (E.UVT) and instantaneous power failure protection
(E.IPF) among the fault output signals will not be provided at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
⋅ The SU and FU signals are not output during a restart. They are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed.
⋅ Automatic restart operation will also be performed after a reset when a retry is made by the retry function.

154

Operation selection at power failure
and instantaneous power failure

CAUTION
Provide mechanical interlocks for MC1 and MC2. The inverter will be damaged if the power supply is input to the
inverter output section.
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start
suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure. Stay away from
the motor and machine. When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function,
apply in easily visible places the CAUTION stickers supplied to the installation guideline.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Refer to page 104
Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 Retry function
Refer to page 159
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection
Refer to page 190
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122

Refer to page 101

4.12.2 Power failure signal (Y67 signal)
When output is shutoff due to a power failure or undervoltage, the Y67 signal turns ON regardless of the automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure function setting.
Y67 signal turns OFF at power failure recovery or undervoltage recovery.
To use Y67 signal, set "67 (positive logic) or 167 (negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (Output terminal function
selection) to assign the function.
Converter voltage recovery after E.UVT

Recovery after power failure
Power supply

ON

OFF

Power supply

ON

ON
E.UVT occurrence

Output frequency

Output frequency
Time
Y67

OFF

ON

OFF

Time
Converter voltage recovery
Y67

OFF

ON

OFF

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Refer to page 128

4
PARAMETERS

Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)

155

Operation selection at power failure
and instantaneous power failure
4.12.3 Power failure-time deceleration-to-stop function (Pr. 261 to Pr. 266 )
When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated
and re-accelerated to the set frequency.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
Operation at
undervoltage or
power failure
Coasts to a stop

0

261

Power failure stop
selection

0

Subtracted frequency
at deceleration start

3Hz

Subtraction starting
frequency

60Hz

264

Power-failure
deceleration time 1

5s

265

Power-failure
deceleration time 2

9999

266

Power failure
deceleration time
switchover frequency

60Hz

262

263

Description
At power restoration
during power failure
deceleration
Coasts to a stop

Deceleration time to a
stop

—
Depends on Pr. 262 to
Decelerates to a stop
Decelerates to a stop
1
Pr. 266 settings
Depends on Pr. 262 to
Decelerates to a stop
Accelerates again
2
Pr. 266 settings
Automatically adjusts
21
Decelerates to a stop
Decelerates to a stop
the deceleration time
Automatically adjusts
22
Decelerates to a stop
Accelerates again
the deceleration time
Normally operation can be performed with the initial value unchanged. But
0 to 20Hz adjust the frequency according to the magnitude of the load specifications
(moment of inertia, torque).
When output frequency ≥ Pr. 263
0 to
Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262.
400Hz When output frequency < Pr. 263
Decelerate from output frequency
9999
Decelerate from the speed obtained from output frequency minus Pr. 262.

0 to 3600/
Set a deceleration slope down to the frequency set in Pr. 266.
360s *
0 to 3600/
Set a deceleration slope below the frequency set in Pr. 266.
360s *
9999
Same slope as in Pr. 264
0 to
400Hz

Set the frequency at which the deceleration slope is switched from the Pr. 264
setting to the Pr. 265 setting.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

* When the setting of Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments is "0" (initial value), the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting increments are
"0.1s", and when the setting is "1", the setting range is "0 to 360s" and the setting increments are "0.01s"

(1) Connection and parameter setting
Power supply
Remove the jumper
Connect terminal
R1/L11 and P/+
and terminal
S1/L21 and N/-.

⋅ Remove the jumpers across terminals R/L1 and R1/L11 and
across terminals S/L2 and S1/L21, and connect terminals
R1/L11 and P/+ and terminals S1/L21 and N/-.
⋅ When setting of Pr. 261 is not "0", the inverter decelerates to
a stop if an undervoltage, power failure or input phase loss
(when Pr. 872 ="1"(input phase loss enabled)) occurs.

Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
P/+
N/−

(2) Operation outline of deceleration to stop at
power failure

Power supply
Output
frequency
Power-failure
deceleration
time switchover
frequency
Pr.266

156

Subtracted
frequency at
deceleration start
Pr.262

Pr.264
Power-failure
deceleration time 1
Pr.265
Power-failure
deceleration
time 2
Time

⋅ If an undervoltage or power failure occurs, the output
frequency is dropped by the frequency set in Pr. 262 .
⋅ Deceleration is made in the deceleration time set in Pr. 264.
(The deceleration time setting is the time required from Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency to a stop.)
⋅ When the frequency is low and enough regenerative energy
is not provided, for example, the deceleration time (slope)
from Pr. 265 to a stop can be changed.
⋅ When Pr. 261 = "21, 22", inverter decelerates to stop
automatically by adjusting the deceleration time to make
converter voltage (DC bus) constant. (The setting of Pr. 262
to Pr. 266 are invalid.)

Operation selection at power failure
and instantaneous power failure
(3) Power failure stop function (Pr. 261 = "1, 21")
⋅ If power is restored during power failure deceleration, deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter remains
stopped. To restart, turn OFF the start signal once, then turn it ON again.
⋅ At power failure when Pr. 261 = "21", inverter decelerates to stop automatically by adjusting the deceleration time to
make converter voltage (DC bus) constant. (The setting of Pr. 262 to Pr. 266 are invalid.)
Pr.261 = 21

Pr.261 = 1
Power
supply

Power
supply

During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure
Deceleration time: automatically adjusted

Output frequency

Output frequency

During deceleration at
occurrence of power failure
During stop at
occurrence of
power failure

During stop at
occurrence of
power failure

Time

Time
STF

STF

Y46

Y46
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

REMARKS
⋅ When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999"), deceleration to stop function is invalid and the
restart after instantaneous power failure operation is performed.

⋅ When the power failure deceleration stop function is active (Pr. 261 = "1,
21"), the inverter will not start even if the power is turned ON with the
start signal (STF/STR) ON. After switching ON the power supply, turn
OFF the start signal once and then ON again to make a start.

ON

Power supply

Not started as inverter
is stopped due to power
failure

Output
frequency
Time

STF

OFF

ON

ON

Y46

(4) Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 261 = "2, 22")
⋅ When power is restored during deceleration after an instantaneous power failure, acceleration is made again up to
the set frequency.
⋅ When this function is used in combination with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation,
deceleration is available at a power failure and acceleration is available again after power restoration. When power
is restored after a stop by deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, automatic restart operation is performed
if automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999")
⋅ At power failure when Pr. 261 = "22", inverter decelerates to stop automatically by adjusting the deceleration time to
make converter voltage (DC bus) constant. If the power supply recovers, inverter accelerates again to the set
frequency.
⋅ The setting of Pr. 262 to Pr. 266 are invalid when Pr. 261 = "22".
.

Power
supply
Output
frequency

When power is restored during
deceleration at occurrence of
power failure
IPF

Pr.261 = 2, 22, Pr.57

9999

When used with automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure

During power failure

Power
supply
During deceleration
at occurrence of
power failure

Output
frequency
Reacceleration*

Time

Y46
* Acceleration time depends on Pr. 7 (Pr. 44 ).

4
During deceleration
at occurrence of
power failure

Automatic restart
after instantaneous
power failure
Time

Y46

Reset time + Pr.57

157

PARAMETERS

Pr. 261 = 2, 22

Operation selection at power failure
and instantaneous power failure
(5) Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal)
⋅ After a power failure stop, inverter cannot start even if power is restored and the start command is given. In this
case, check the power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal). (at occurrence of input phase loss protection
(E.ILF), etc.)
⋅ The Y46 signal is ON during deceleration at an instantaneous power failure or during a stop after deceleration at an
instantaneous power failure.
⋅ For the Y46 signal, set "46 (forward action)" or "146 (reverse action)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal
function selection) to assign the function.
REMARKS
⋅ Stop selection function is disabled while inverter decelerates due to a power failure, even though stop selection (Pr. 250) is set.

CAUTION
⋅ When Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection = "2" (FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV is used), the power failure deceleration function is
invalid.
⋅ When the (output frequency - Pr. 262) at undervoltage or power failure occurrence is negative, the calculation result is regarded
as 0Hz. (DC injection brake operation is performed without deceleration).
⋅ During a stop or trip, the power failure stop selection is not performed.
⋅ Y46 signal turns on when undervoltage occurs even when the motor is not decelerating at an instantaneous power failure. For
this reason, Y46 signal outputs instantly at powering OFF, which is not a fault.
⋅ When power failure deceleration stop function is selected, undervoltage protection (E.UVT), instantaneous power failure
protection (E.IPF), and input phase loss protection (E.ILF) do not function.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other terminals. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

CAUTION
Even if the power failure stop function is valid, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to coast.
The motor will coast if enough regenerative energy is given from the motor.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage
Refer to page 112
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection
Refer to page 114
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time
Refer to page 152
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 128
Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection
Refer to page 162

158

Refer to page 101

Operation setting at fault occurrence

4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence
Purpose

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set

Recover by retry operation at fault
occurrence
Output fault code from terminal

Retry operation

Do not input/output phase loss alarm

Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69

159

Pr. 76

161

Pr. 251, Pr. 872

162

Fault code output function
Input/output phase loss
protection selection

4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
If a fault occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. You can also select the fault for a retry.
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time ≠ "9999"), restart
operation is performed at retry operation as at an instantaneous power failure. (Refer to page 152 for the restart
function.)
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
0 to 5
0

65

Retry selection

0

67

Number of retries at fault
occurrence

0

1 to 10
101 to 110

68

Retry waiting time

1s

0 to 10s

69

Retry count display erase

0

0

Description
A fault for retry can be selected. (Refer to the next page)
No retry function
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
A fault output is not provided during retry operation.
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. (The
setting value of minus 100 is the number of retries.)
A fault output is provided during retry operation.
Set the waiting time from when an inverter fault occurs
until a retry is made.
Clear the number of restarts succeeded by retry.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ Retry operation automatically resets a fault and
restarts the inverter at the starting frequency when the
time set in Pr. 68 elapses after the inverter is tripped.
Pr.68 5
⋅ Retry operation is performed by setting Pr. 67 to any
value other than "0". Set the number of retries at fault
Pr.68
Inverter
occurrence in Pr. 67.
output
⋅ When retries fail consecutively more than the number
frequency
of times set in Pr. 67, a retry count excess fault (E.RET)
0
occurs, resulting in inverter trip.
Time
(Refer to retry failure example)
Retry start
Success count + 1
⋅ Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the
Fault occurrence
inverter trips until a retry is made in the range 0 to 10s.
Retry success count
⋅ Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative
number of successful restart times made by retry. The
ON
Y64
cumulative count in Pr. 69 is increased by 1 when a
retry is regarded as successful after normal operation
Retry failure example
continues without faults occurring for more than four
times longer than the time set in Pr. 68 after a retry
Pr.68
Pr.68
Pr.68
start.
Inverter
(When retry is successful, cumulative number of retry
output
frequency
failure is cleared.)
⋅ Writing "0" in Pr. 69 clears the cumulative count.
0
Time
⋅ During a retry, the Y64 signal is ON. For the Y64
First
Second
Third
signal, assign the function by setting "64 (positive
Retry failure
Fault retry Fault retry Fault retry
operation)" or "164 (negative operation)" in any of Pr.
(E.RET)
occurrence occurrence occurrence
190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) .
Fault signal

Retry success example

Retry success

Y64

ON

ON

ON

CAUTION
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
(output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of
each terminal.

159

PARAMETERS

ON

(ALM)

4

Operation setting at fault occurrence
⋅ Use Pr. 65 to select the fault to be activated for retries. No retry will be made for the fault not indicated. (Refer to page
334 for the fault description.)
indicates the errors selected for retry.
Fault for
Retry

Pr. 65 Setting
0

1

2

3

4

5

Fault for
Retry

Pr. 65 Setting
0

1

2

3

4

5

E.OLT
E.OPT
E.OP1
E.OP2
E. PE
E.PTC
E.CDO
E.SER
E.ILF
E.PID
E.PCH
E.LCI

E.OC1
E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1
E.OV2
E.OV3
E.THM
E.THT
E.IPF
E.UVT
E.BE
E. GF
E.OHT

CAUTION
⋅ For a retry error, only the description of the first fault is stored.
⋅ When an inverter fault is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal relay
function, regenerative brake duty etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-ON reset.)
⋅ Retry is not performed if E.PE (Parameter storage device fault) occurred at power ON.
⋅ If a fault that is not selected for a retry occurs during retry operation (retry waiting time), the retry operation stops while the fault
indication is still displayed.
⋅ The retry function is invalid for the fault initiated by the fault initiation function.

CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine in the case of the inverter is
tripped. The motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the inverter trip.
When you have selected the retry function, apply in easily visible places the CAUTION stickers supplied.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time

160

Refer to page 152

Operation setting at fault occurrence
4.13.2 Fault code output selection (Pr. 76)
At fault occurrence, its description can be output as a 4-bit digital signal from the open collector output terminals.
The fault code can be read by a programmable controller, etc., and its corrective action can be shown on a
display, etc.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range
0

76

Fault code output selection

Without fault code output
With fault code output
(Refer to the following table)
Fault code output at fault occurrence
only (Refer to the following table)

1

0

Description

2
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ By setting Pr. 76 to "1" or "2", the fault code can be output to the output terminals.
⋅ When the setting is "2", a fault code is output at only fault occurrence, and during normal operation, the terminals
output the signals assigned to Pr. 191 to Pr. 194 (output terminal function selection).
⋅ The following table indicates fault codes to be output. (0: output transistor OFF, 1: output transistor ON)
Operation Panel
Indication
(FR-DU07)

Output of Output Terminals
SU

IPF

OL

FU

Fault Code

Normal *
0
0
0
0
0
E.OC1
0
0
0
1
1
E.OC2
0
0
1
0
2
E.OC3
0
0
1
1
3
E.OV1 to E.OV3
0
1
0
0
4
E.THM
0
1
0
1
5
E.THT
0
1
1
0
6
E.IPF
0
1
1
1
7
E.UVT
1
0
0
0
8
E.FIN
1
0
0
1
9
E. BE
1
0
1
0
A
E. GF
1
0
1
1
B
E.OHT
1
1
0
0
C
E.OLT
1
1
0
1
D
E.OPT
1
1
1
0
E
E.OP1
1
1
1
0
E
Other than the above
1
1
1
1
F
* When Pr. 76 = "2", the output terminals output the signals assigned to Pr. 191 to Pr. 194 .

CAUTION

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 191 to Pr. 194 (output terminal function selection)

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ When a value other than "0" is set in Pr.76
When a fault occurs, the output terminals SU, IPF, OL, FU output the signal in the above table, independently of the Pr. 191 to
Pr. 194 (output terminal function selection) settings. Please be careful when inverter control setting has been made with the output
signals of Pr. 191 to Pr. 194.

Refer to page 128

161

Operation setting at fault occurrence
4.13.3 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872)
You can disable the output phase loss protection function that stops the inverter output if one phase of the
inverter output side (load side) three phases (U, V, W) is lost.
The input phase loss protection selection of the inverter input side (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) can be valid.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

251

Output phase loss protection
selection

1

872

Input phase loss protection
selection

0

Setting Range
0
1
0
1

Description
Without output phase loss protection
With output phase loss protection
Without input phase loss protection
With input phase loss protection

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251)
⋅ When Pr. 251 is set to "0", output phase loss protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.

(2) Input phase loss protection selection (Pr. 872)
⋅ When Pr. 872 is set to "1", input phase loss protection (E.ILF) is provided if a phase loss of one phase among the
three phases is detected for 1s continuously.
REMARKS
If input phase is lost when Pr. 872 = "1" (with input phase loss protection) and Pr. 261 ≠ "0" (power failure stop function valid),
input phase loss protection (E.ILF) is not provided but power-failure deceleration is made.

CAUTION
⋅ When an input phase loss occurs in the R/L1 and S/L2 phases, input phase loss protection is not provided but the inverter
output is shut off.
⋅ If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the converter section and capacitor lives of the inverter will be shorter.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection

162

Refer to page 156

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor

4.14 Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
Purpose

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set

Energy saving operation

Energy saving operation and
Optimum excitation control

How much energy can be saved

Energy saving monitor

Pr. 60

163

Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158,
Pr. 891 to Pr. 899

164

4.14.1 Energy saving control and Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)
Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically performs energy saving control.
This inverter is optimum for fan and pump applications.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

60

Energy saving control selection *

0

0
4
9

Description
Normal operation mode
Energy saving operation mode
Optimum excitation control mode

* When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.

(1) Energy saving operation mode (Setting "4")
⋅ When "4" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the energy saving operation mode.
⋅ In the energy saving operation mode, the inverter automatically controls the output voltage to minimize the inverter
output voltage during a constant operation.
REMARKS
⋅ For applications a large load torque is applied to or machines repeat frequent acceleration/deceleration, an energy saving effect
is not expected.

(2) Optimum excitation control mode (Setting "9")
⋅ When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the Optimum excitation control mode.
⋅ The Optimum excitation control mode is a control method which controls excitation current to improve the motor
efficiency to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.
REMARKS
⋅ When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to the inverter,
the energy saving effect is not expected.

CAUTION
⋅ When the energy saving mode and Optimum excitation control mode are selected, deceleration time may be longer than the
setting value. Since overvoltage fault tends to occur as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set a longer
deceleration time.
⋅ Since output voltage is controlled in energy saving operation mode and by Optimum excitation control, output current may
slightly increase.

PARAMETERS

♦ Parameters referred to
Pr. 80 Motor capacity

4

Refer to page 79

163

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
4.14.2 Energy saving monitor (Pr. 891 to Pr. 899)
From the power consumption estimated value during commercial power supply operation, the energy saving
effect by use of the inverter can be monitored/output.
Parameter
Number
52
54
158

Name

Initial Value

DU/PU main display data
selection

0
(output
frequency)

CA terminal function
selection
AM terminal function
selection

1
(output
frequency)

Setting Range
200V class (400V class)
0, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 20,
23 to 25, 50 to 57, 67,
81 to 86, 100
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 21,
24, 50, 52, 53, 67, 70, 85
1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to 14, 17, 21,
24, 50, 52, 53, 67, 70, 86
0 to 4

891

Cumulative power monitor
digit shifted times

9999
9999

892

893

894

Load factor

Energy saving monitor
reference (motor capacity)

Control selection during
commercial power-supply
operation

100%

SLD/LD value
of Applied
motor Capacity

0

30 to 150%

02330
(01160) or
less
03160
(01800) or
more

0.1 to 55kW

0 to 3600kW
0
1
2
3
0

895

Power saving rate
reference value

9999

896

Power unit cost

9999

897

Power saving monitor
average time

9999

898

Power saving cumulative
monitor clear

9999

1
9999
0 to 500
9999
0
1 to 1000h
9999
0
1
10
9999

899

Operation time rate
(estimated value)

9999

0 to 100%
9999

Description
50: Power saving monitor
51: Cumulative saving power monitor

50: Power saving monitor
Set the number of times to shift the
cumulative power monitor digit
Clamps the monitor value at
maximum.
No shift
Clears the monitor value when it
exceeds the maximum value.
Set the load factor for commercial
power supply operation. Multiplied by
the power consumption rate (page 167)
during commercial power supply
operation.
Set the motor capacity (pump
capacity). Set when calculating power
saving rate, power saving rate average
value, commercial operation power.
Discharge damper control (fan)
Inlet damper control (fan)
Valve control (pump)
Commercial power-supply drive (fixed
value)
Consider the value during commercial
power-supply operation as 100%
Consider the Pr. 893 setting as 100%.
No function
Set the power unit cost. Displays the
power saving amount charge on the
energy saving monitor.
No function
Average for 30 minutes
Average for the set time
No function
Cumulative monitor value clear
Cumulative monitor value hold
Accumulation continued
(communication data upper limit 9999)
Accumulation continued
(communication data upper limit
65535)
Use for calculation of annual power
saving amount. Set the annual
operation ratio (consider 365 days ×
24hr as 100%).
No function

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

164

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
(1) Energy saving monitor list
⋅ The following items are monitored by the power saving monitor (Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 158 = "50").
(Only 1) Power saving and 3) Power saving average value can be output to Pr. 54 (terminal CA) and Pr. 158
(terminal AM))
Energy Saving
Monitor Item
1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Power saving

Power saving rate

Description and Formula
Difference between the estimated value of power
necessary for commercial power supply operation
and the input power calculated by the inverter
Power during commercial power supply
operation − input power monitor
Ratio of power saving on the assumption that power
during commercial power supply operation is 100%
1) Power saving
× 100
Power during commercial
power supply operation

Unit
0.01kW/
0.1kW *3

Power saving rate
average value

Power saving amount
average value

Average value of power saving amount per hour
during predetermined time (Pr. 897)
Σ ( 1) Power saving × Δt)
Pr. 897
Ratio of power saving average value on the
assumption that the value during commercial
power supply operation is 100%
Σ ( 2) Power saving rate × Δt)
× 100
Pr. 897
Ratio of power saving average value on the
assumption that Pr. 893 is 100%
3) Power saving average value
× 100
Pr. 893
Power saving average value represented in terms
of charge
3) Power saving average value × Pr. 896

9999

0

⎯

9999

0.1%

Ratio of power saving on the assumption that Pr.
893 is 100%
1) Power saving
× 100
Pr. 893
Power saving average
value

Parameter Setting
Pr. 895 Pr. 896 Pr. 897 Pr. 899

1

0.01kWh
/0.1kWh

⎯

9999

*3

0

9999
0 to
1000h

0.1%
1

0.01/0.1
*3

⎯

0 to
500

⋅ The following shows the items which can be monitored by the cumulative saving power monitor (Pr. 52 = "51").
(The monitor value of the cumulative monitor can be shifted to the right with Pr. 891 Cumulative power monitor digit
shifted times.)

6)
7)

8)

9)
*1

Description and Formula

Unit

Power saving
amount

Power saving is added up per hour.
Σ ( 1) Power saving × Δt)

0.01kWh
/0.1kWh

Power saving
amount charge

Power saving amount represented in terms of charge
6) Power saving amount × Pr. 896

0.01/0.1

Annual power
saving amount

Estimated value of annual power saving amount
6) Power saving amount
Pr. 899
× 24 × 365 ×
Operation time during accumulation
100
of power saving amount

Annual power
saving amount
charge

Annual power saving amount represented in terms of
charge
8) Annual power saving amount × Pr. 896

Parameter Setting
Pr. 895 Pr. 896 Pr. 897 Pr. 899
⎯

9999

⎯

0 to
500

9999

*1*2*3

*1*3

0.01kWh
/0.1kWh

⎯

9999
0 to
100%

*1*2*3

0.01/0.1
*1*3

4

⎯

⎯

0 to
500

*2

For communication (RS-485 communication, communication option), the display increments are 1. For example, 10.00kWh indicates that
communication data is 10.
When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.

*3

The setting depends on capacities. (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less/FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)

REMARKS
⋅ Since four digits are displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07), the value is displayed in 0.1 increments when a monitor value
in 0.01 increments exceeds 99.99, then rounded up to 100.0. The maximum display is "9999".
⋅ As the operation panel (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is 5-digit display, it displays in 0.1 increments since a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0",
when a monitor value in 0.01 increments exceeds "999.99". The maximum display is "99999".
⋅ The upper limit of communication (RS-485 communication, communication option) is "65535" when Pr. 898 Power saving cumulative
monitor clear = "9999". The upper limit of 0.01 increments monitor is "655.35" and that of 0.1 increments monitor is "6553.5".

165

PARAMETERS

Energy Saving
Monitor Item

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
(2) Power saving instantaneous monitor ( 1) power savings, 2) power saving rate )
⋅ On the power saving monitor ( 1)), an energy saving effect as compared to the power consumption during
commercial power supply operation (estimated value) is calculated and displays on the main monitor.
⋅ In the following case, the power saving monitor ( 1)) is "0".
(a)Calculated values of the power saving monitor are negative values.
(b)During the DC injection brake operation
(c)Motor is not connected (output current monitor is 0A)
⋅ On the power saving rate monitor ( 2)), setting "0" in Pr. 895 Power saving rate reference value displays the power
saving rate on the assumption that power (estimated value) during commercial power supply operation is 100%.
When Pr. 895 = "1", the power saving rate on the assumption that the Pr. 893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor
capacity) value is 100% is displayed.

(3) Power saving average value monitor ( 3) power saving average value, 4) average power
saving rate average value, 5) power saving amount average value)
⋅ Power saving average value monitor is displayed by setting a value other than "9999" in Pr. 897 Power saving
monitor average time.
⋅ The power saving average value monitor ( 3)) displays the unit time average value of the power saving amount at
averaging.
⋅ The average value is updated every time an average time has elapsed after the Pr. 897 setting is changed, power is
turned ON or the inverter is reset, assuming as a starting point. The power savings average value update timing
signal (Y92) is inverted every time the average value is updated.
Power
is OFF

When Pr.897=4 [Hr]
Power saving
instantaneous
value [kW]

During stop

0
Pr. 897 setting
Power saving
average value
[kW]
Y92: power saving
average value
0
update timing signal

4
Operation start

8
Average

12

16

Average

20
Average

0 in the first
measurement

T
Last value

Average
Stores Hi/Low when the
power is OFF and starts.

4

8

12

16

0

4

⋅ The power saving average value monitor ( 4)) displays the average value per unit time of power saving rate ( 2)) at
every average time by setting "0" or "1" in Pr. 895 Power saving rate reference value.
⋅ By setting the charge (power unit) per 1kWh of power amount in Pr. 896 Power unit cost, the power saving amount
average value monitor ( 5)) displays the charge relative to the power saving average value (power saving average
value ( 3)) × Pr. 896).

(4) Cumulative saving power monitor ( 6) power saving amount, 7) power saving amount
charge, 8) annual power saving amount, 9) annual power saving amount charge)
⋅ On the cumulative saving power monitor, the monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 891
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times settings. For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh
when Pr. 891 = "2", the PU/DU display is 12.78 (display in 100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that
a digit shift is necessary. If the maximum value exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is
recounted. The other monitors are clamped at the display maximum value.
⋅ The cumulative saving power monitor ( 6)) can measure the power amount during a predetermined period.
Measure according to the following steps
1) Write "9999" or "10" in Pr. 898 Power saving cumulative monitor clear.
2) Write "0" in Pr. 898 at measurement start timing to clear the cumulative saving power monitor value and start
accumulation of power saving.
3) Write "1" in Pr. 898 at measurement end timing to hold the cumulative saving power monitor value.
REMARKS
⋅ The cumulative saving power monitor value is stored every hour. Hence, when the power supply is switched OFF within one
hour, and switched ON again, the previously stored monitor value is displayed and accumulation starts. (The cumulative monitor
value may decrease)

166

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
(5) Power estimated value of commercial power supply operation (Pr. 892, Pr. 893, Pr. 894)
⋅ Select the commercial power supply operation pattern from among the four patterns of discharge damper control
(fan), inlet damper control (fan), valve control (pump) and commercial power supply drive, and set it to Pr. 894
Control selection during commercial power-supply operation.
⋅ Set the motor capacity (pump capacity) in Pr. 893 Energy saving monitor reference (motor capacity).
⋅ The power consumption rate (%) during commercial power supply operation is estimated from the operation
pattern and the ratio of speed to rating (current output frequency/Pr. 3 Base frequency) in the following chart.
110

Commercial power-supply drive

Power consumption [%]

100

Discharge side
90 damper control
(fan)
80
70

Valve control
(pump)

60
50
40

Inlet damper control
(fan)

30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100110
Ratio of speed to rating [%]

⋅ From the motor capacity set in Pr. 893 and Pr. 892 Load factor, the power estimated value (kW) during commercial
power supply operation is found by the following formula.
Power estimated value (kW) during commercial power supply operation
= Pr. 893 (kW) ×

Power consumption (%)
Pr. 892 (%)
×
100
100

REMARKS
⋅ Since the speed does not increase above the power supply frequency in commercial power supply operation, it becomes
constant when the output frequency rises to or above Pr. 3 Base frequency.

PARAMETERS

4

167

Energy saving operation and energy saving monitor
(6) Annual power saving amount, power charge (Pr. 899)
⋅ By setting the operation time rate [%] (ratio of time when the motor is actually driven by the inverter during a year)
in Pr. 899, the annual energy saving effect can be predicted.
⋅ When the operation pattern is predetermined to some degree, the estimated value of the annual power saving
amount can be found by measurement of the power saving amount during a given measurement period.
⋅ Refer to the following and set the operation time rate.
1) Predict the average time [h/day] of operation in a day.
2) Find the annual operation days [days/year]. (Monthly average operation days × 12 months)
3) Calculate the annual operation time [h/year] from 1) and 2).
Annual operation time (h/year) = Average time (h/day) × Operation days (days/year)
4) Calculate the operation time rate and set it to Pr. 899.
Operation time rate (%) =

Annual operation time (h/year)
24 (h/day) x 365 (days/year)

× 100(%)

REMARKS
⋅ Operation time rate setting example: When operation is performed for about 21 hours per day and the monthly average
operation days are 16 days
Annual operation time = 21 (h/day) × 16 (days/month) × 12 months = 4032 (h/year)
4032 (h/year)
Operation time rate (%) = 24 (h/day)× 365 (days/year) × 100(%) = 46.03%
Set 46.03% to Pr. 899.

⋅ Calculate the annual power saving amount from Pr. 899 Operation time rate (estimated value) and power saving
average value monitor
Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) =

Power saving average value
(kW) during accumulation × 24h × 365 days ×
when Pr. 898 = 10 or 9999

Pr. 899
100

⋅ The annual power saving amount charge can be monitored by setting the power charge per hour in Pr. 896 Power
unit cost.
Calculate the annual power saving amount charge in the following method.
Annual power saving amount charge = Annual power saving amount (kWh/year) × Pr. 896
REMARKS
In the regeneration mode, make calculation on the assumption that "power saving = power during commercial power supply
operation (input power = 0)".

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 3 Base frequency

Refer to page 89

Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection
Pr. 54 CA terminal function selection
Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection

168

Refer to page 141
Refer to page 147
Refer to page 147

Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance

4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
Purpose

Reduction of the motor noise
Carrier frequency and
Measures against EMI and leakage currents Soft-PWM selection
Reduce mechanical resonance

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set
Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260

169

Pr. 653, Pr. 654

170

Speed smoothing control

4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260)
You can change the motor sound.
Parameter
Number

72 *

Name

PWM frequency selection

Initial
Value

2

Setting Range
200V class (400V
class)
02330
(01160)
or less
03160
(01800)
or more

0 to 15

0 to 6, 25
0

240 *

260

Soft-PWM operation
selection

1

PWM frequency automatic
switchover

1

1

0

1

Description
PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The
setting displayed is in [kHz]. Note that 0 indicates
0.7kHz, 15 indicates 14.5kHz and 25 indicates
2.5kHz.
(25 is exclusively for a sine wave filter.)
Soft-PWM is invalid
When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5" ("0 to 4" for FR-F72003160 (FR-F740-01800) or more), soft-PWM is
valid.
PWM carrier frequency is constant independently
of load.
When the carrier frequency is set to 3kHz or more
(Pr. 72 ≥ "3"), perform continuous operation at less
than 85% of the rated inverter current.
Decreases PWM carrier frequency automatically
when load increases.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

* The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr.
77 Parameter write selection.

(1) PWM carrier frequency changing (Pr. 72)
⋅ You can change the PWM carrier frequency of the inverter.
⋅ Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or
motor or on EMI measures or on leakage current reduction caused by the PWM switching.

⋅ When using an option sine wave filter (MT-BSL/BSC) for the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, set
"25"(2.5kHz) in Pr. 72.

(2) Soft-PWM control (Pr. 240)

(3) PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr. 260)
⋅ If continuous operation is performed at 85% or higher of the rated inverter current (the value in the parenthesis on
page 370) with Pr.260 = "1 (initial setting)" and Pr.72 ≥ "3 (inverter carrier frequency is set to 3kHz is higher)," E.THT
(Inverter overload trip) is likely to occur. To avoid that, the carrier frequency is automatically lowered to as low as
2kHz. (Motor noise increases, but not to the point of failure)
⋅ When Pr. 260 is set to"0", the carrier frequency becomes constant (Pr. 72 setting) independently of the load, making
the motor sound uniform.
Note that continuous operation should be performed at less than 85% of the inverter rating.

169

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ Soft-PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending
complex tone.

Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
CAUTION
⋅ Decreasing the PWM carrier frequency effect on EMI measures and on leakage current reduction, but increases motor noise.
⋅ When Pr. 570 = "0" (initial value), functions of Pr. 260 become invalid. PWM carrier frequency automatically decreases when load
increases. (Refer to page 86.)
⋅ When PWM carrier frequency is set to 1kHz or less (Pr. 72≤1), fast-response current limit may function prior to stall prevention
operation due to increase in ripple currents, resulting in insufficient torque. In such case, set fast-response current limit
operation invalid using Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection

Refer to page 81

4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653, Pr. 654)
Vibration due to mechanical resonance influences the inverter control, causing the output current (torque) to be
unstable. In this case, the output current (torque) fluctuation can be reduced to ease vibration by changing the
output frequency.
Parameter
Number

653
654

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

Description

0

0 to 200%

The torque fluctuation is reduced to reduce vibration due to
mechanical resonance.

20Hz

0 to 120Hz

Set the minimum value for the torque variation cycle
(frequency).

Speed smoothing control
Speed smoothing cutoff
frequency

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Control block diagram
Acceleration/deceleration
processing
+

Speed
command

Output frequency
V/F control

Frequency output
Voltage output

-

Speed smoothing control
Cutoff frequency
Pr.654
Proportional gain
Pr.653

Current for torque

(2) Setting method
If vibration due to mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr. 653, run the inverter at the frequency which
generates maximum vibration and check if the vibration will be reduced or not after several seconds.
If effect is not produced, gradually increase the Pr. 653 setting and check the effect repeatedly until the most
effective value is set in Pr. 653.
If vibration becomes large by increasing the Pr. 653 setting, gradually decrease the Pr. 653 setting from 100% to
check the effect in a similar manner.
When the vibrational frequency due to the mechanical resonance (fluctuation of torque, speed, and converter
output voltage) is known using a tester and such, set 1/2 to 1 time of the vibrational frequency to Pr.654. (Setting
vibrational frequency range can suppress the vibration better.)
Cutoff frequency
Current for
torque
Torque fluctuation
detection range

0

Pr.654

159Hz (fixed)

Vibrational frequency

CAUTION
⋅ Depending on the machine, vibration may not be reduced enough or an effect may not be produced.

170

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)

4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Selection of voltage/current input
(terminal 1, 2, 4) Perform forward/
reverse rotation by analog input.

Analog input selection

Analog auxiliary input and
compensation (added compensation
and override function)
Noise elimination at the analog input Input filter
Adjustment (calibration) of analog
Bias and gain of frequency setting
input frequency and voltage (current) voltage (current)
Adjust the main speed by analog
auxiliary input.

Refer to Page

Pr. 73, Pr. 267

171

Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243,
Pr. 252, Pr. 253

175

Pr. 74
Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241,
C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)

176
177

4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)
You can select the function that switches between forward rotation and reverse rotation according to the analog
input terminal selection specifications, the override function and the input signal polarity.
Parameter
Number

73

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

1

0 to 5,
10 to 15
6, 7,
16, 17

Analog input selection

Terminal 4 input
selection

267

0

Description
Voltage/current
input switch
Switch 2 - OFF
(initial status)
Switch 2 - ON

You can select the input specifications of terminal 2 (0
to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) and input specifications of
terminal 1 (0 to ±5V, 0 to ±10V).
Override and reversible operation can be selected.

0

Switch 1 - ON
(initial status)

Terminal 4 input 4 to 20mA

1
2

Switch 1 - OFF

Terminal 4 input 0 to 5V
Terminal 4 input 0 to 10V

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Selection of analog input selection
⋅ For the terminals 2, 4 used for analog input, voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA) can be
selected.
Change parameters (Pr.73, Pr.267) and a voltage/current input switch (switch 1, 2) to change input specifications.
Voltage/current
input switch
2
4

Switch 1:Terminal 4 input
ON: Current input (initial status)
OFF: Voltage input
Switch 2: Terminal 2 input
ON: Current input
OFF: Voltage input (initial status)

Switch 2

4

⋅ Rated specifications of terminal 2 and 4 change according to the voltage/current input switch setting.
Voltage input: Input resistance 10kΩ ± 1kΩ, Maximum permissible voltage 20VDC
Current input: Input resistance 245Ω ± 5Ω, Maximum permissible current 30mA
CAUTION
⋅ Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with
the setting. Incorrect setting as in the table below could cause component damage. Incorrect settings other than
below can cause abnormal operation.
Setting Causing Component Damage
Switch setting
Terminal input
ON
Voltage input
(Current input)
OFF
Current input
(Voltage input)

Operation
This could cause component damage to the analog signal output circuit of signal output
devices. (electrical load in the analog signal output circuit of signal output devices increases)
This could cause component damage of the inverter signal input circuit. (output
power in the analog signal output circuit of signal output devices increases)

171

PARAMETERS

Switch 1

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
⋅ Refer to the following table and set Pr. 73 and Pr. 267. (
AU
signal

Pr. 73
Setting

Terminal 2
Input

Terminal 1
Input

0
1
(initial value)
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
0
1
(initial value)
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

0 to 10V

0 to ±10V

0 to to 5V

0 to ±10V

0 to 10V
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
0 to 5V
0 to 20mA
0 to 20mA
0 to 10V
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
0 to 5V
0 to 20mA
0 to 20mA

0 to ±5V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V

Terminal 4 Input

⎯

OFF

Pr. 267 setting
0
(initial
value)

1

ON

2

4 to 20mA

1 to 5V *

2 to 10V *

indicates the main speed setting)

0 to ±10V

⎯

0 to ±5V
0 to ±5V

Compensation Input
Terminal and
Compensation Method

Terminal 1
Added compensation
Terminal 2
Override

Polarity Reversible

No
(Indicates that a
frequency command
signal of negative
polarity is not
accepted.)

Terminal 1
Added compensation
Yes

Terminal 2
Override
Terminal 1
Added compensation
Terminal 1
Added compensation

0 to 10V
0 to 5V

⎯

Terminal 2
Override

⎯

0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V
0 to ±5V

Terminal 1
Added compensation

0 to 10V
0 to 5V

⎯

⎯

0 to ±10V
0 to ±5V

No
(Indicates that a
frequency command
signal of negative
polarity is not
accepted.)

Terminal 2
Override
Terminal 1
Added compensation

Yes

⎯ : Invalid
* If the input specification to terminal 4 is changed from the current input (Pr. 267 = "0") to the 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V voltage input (Pr. 267 ="1 or
2"), calibrate the input with C6. (Refer to page 177)

⋅ Set the voltage/current input switch referring to the table below.
indicates an initial value.)

(

Terminal 2 Input
Specifications

Pr. 73 Setting

Switch 2

Terminal 4 Input
Specifications

Pr. 267 Setting

Switch 1

Voltage input (0 to 10V)

0, 2, 4, 10, 12, 14

OFF

Voltage input (0 to 10V)

2

OFF

Voltage input (0 to 5V)

1 (initial value), 3, 5, 11, 13, 15

OFF

Voltage input (0 to 5V)

1

OFF

Current input (0 to 20mA)

6, 7, 16, 17

ON

Current input (0 to 20mA)

0 (initial value)

ON

CAUTION
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

Turn the AU signal ON to make terminal 4 valid.
Match the setting of parameter and switch. A different setting may cause a fault, failure or malfunction.
The terminal 1 (frequency setting auxiliary input) signal is added to the main speed setting signal of the terminal 2 or 4.
When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or 4 is used for the main speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal
(50% to 150% at 0 to 5V or 0 to 10V). (When the main speed of the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is not input, compensation by the
terminal 2 is invalid.))
⋅ Use Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at input of the maximum output frequency
command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input.
Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, is not
affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
⋅ When Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level = "9999", the value of the terminal 1 is as set to the stall prevention operation level.

172

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(2) Perform operation by analog input voltage
Inverter
STF Voltage/current

Forward
rotation

input switch

SD
0 to 5VDC

2

4

10

Frequency
setting

2
5

Connection diagram using
terminal 2 (0 to 5VDC)
Inverter
STF Voltage/current

Forward
rotation

input switch

SD

0 to 10VDC
Frequency
setting

2

4

10E

⋅ The frequency setting signal inputs 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10VDC) to across
the terminals 2 and 5. The 5V (10V) input is the maximum output
frequency. The maximum output frequency is reached when 5V (10V) is
input.
⋅ The power supply 5V (10V) can be input by either using the internal
power supply or preparing an external power supply. The internal power
supply outputs 5VDC across terminals 10 and 5, or 10V across terminals
10E and 5.
Terminal

Inverter Built-in Power
Supply Voltage

Frequency Setting
Resolution

Pr. 73 (terminal 2
input voltage)

10
10E

5VDC
10VDC

0.030Hz/60Hz
0.015Hz/60Hz

0 to 5VDC input
0 to 10VDC input

⋅ When inputting 10VDC to the terminal 2, set any of "0, 2, 4, 10, 12, 14"
in Pr. 73. (The initial value is 0 to 5V)

2
5

Connection diagram
using terminal 2 (0 to 10VDC)

Forward
rotation
Terminal 4
input selection
DC0 to 5V
Frequency
setting

⋅ Setting "1 (0 to 5VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10VDC)" in Pr. 267 changes the
terminal 4 to the voltage input specification. When the AU signal turns
ON, the terminal 4 input becomes valid.

Inverter
STF
AU
SD

Voltage/current
input switch

2

4

REMARKS
The wiring length of the terminal 10, 2, 5 should be 30m (98.4 feet) maximum.

10
4
5

Connection diagram
using terminal 4 (0 to 5VDC)

(3) Perform operation by analog input current
Forward
rotation

Inverter
STF
AU
SD

4 to 20mADC
Frequency Current
input
setting
equipment

Voltage/current
input switch

4

2

⋅ When the pressure or temperature is controlled constant by a fan, pump,
etc., automatic operation can be performed by inputting the output signal
4 to 20mADC of the adjuster to across the terminals 4 and 5.
⋅ The AU signal must be turned ON to use the terminal 4.

4
5

Connection diagram using
terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)

4 to 20mADC
Current
Frequency
input
setting
equipment

Inverter
STF Voltage/current
SD

input switch

4

2

⋅ Setting any of "6, 7, 16, 17" in Pr. 73 changes the terminal 2 to the
current input specification. At this time, the AU signal need not be turned
ON.

4
PARAMETERS

Forward
rotation

2
5

Connection diagram using
terminal 2 (4 to 20mADC)

173

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
Reverse
rotation

Reversible
Not reversible
-5
(-10)

Set frequency
(Hz)

60

Forward
rotation

(4) Perform forward/reverse rotation
(polarity reversible operation)

by

input

⋅ Setting any of "10 to 17" in Pr. 73 enables polarity reversible operation.
⋅ Providing ± input (0 to ±5V or 0 to ±10V) to the terminal 1 enables
forward/reverse rotation operation according to the polarity.

+5
(+10)
0 Terminal 1 input (V)

Compensation input characteristic
when STF is ON

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level
Refer to page 81
Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
Pr. 252, Pr. 253 Override bias/gain
Refer to page 175

174

analog

Refer to page 177

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4.16.2 Analog input compensation (Pr. 73, Pr. 242, Pr. 243, Pr. 252, Pr. 253)
A fixed ratio of analog compensation (override) can be made by the added compensation or terminal 2 as an
auxiliary input for multi-speed operation or the speed setting signal (main speed) of the terminal 2 or terminal 4.
Parameter
Number
73

Name

Initial Value

Setting
Range

1

0 to 3, 6, 7, 10
to 13, 16, 17
4, 5, 14, 15

Analog input selection
Terminal 1 added compensation
amount (terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added compensation
amount (terminal 4)

242
243

100%

0 to 100%

75%

0 to 100%

252

Override bias

50%

0 to 200%

253

Override gain

150%

0 to 200%

Description
Added compensation
Override compensation
Set the ratio of added compensation
amount when terminal 2 is the main speed.
Set the ratio of added compensation
amount when terminal 4 is the main speed.
Set the bias side compensation value of
override function.
Set the gain side compensation value of
override function.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Added compensation (Pr. 242, Pr. 243)
Forward Inverter
rotation
STF
SD
10
2
5
Auxiliary input
0 to 10V( 5V)

1

Added compensation
connection example

⋅ The compensation signal can be input for the main speed setting for
synchronous/continuous speed control operation, etc.
⋅ Setting any of "0 to 3, 6, 7, 10 to 13, 16, 17" in Pr. 73 adds the voltage across
terminals 1 and 5 to the voltage signal across terminals 2-5.
⋅ If the result of addition is negative, it is regarded as 0 at the Pr. 73 setting of
any of "0 to 3, 6, 7", or reverse rotation operation (polarity reversible
operation) is performed when the STF signal turns ON at the Pr. 73 setting of
any of "10 to 13, 16, 17".
⋅ The compensation input of the terminal 1 can also be added to the multispeed setting or terminal 4 (initial value 4 to 20mA).
⋅ The added compensation for terminal 2 can be adjusted by Pr. 242, and the
compensation for terminal 4 by Pr. 243.
Analog command value using terminal 2
Pr. 242
100(%)

= Terminal 2 input + Terminal 1 input ×
Analog command value using terminal 4

Pr. 243
100(%)

Output frequency
When voltage across
terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5V
(5V)

Output frequency
When voltage across
terminals 2 and 5 is 2.5V
(5V)
When voltage
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0V

When voltage
across terminals
2 and 5 is 0V
-5V -2.5V
(-10V) (-5V)

0

+2.5V +5V Terminal 1
(+5V) (+10V)
Forward rotation

STF Signal
ON
Forward rotation
STF Signal
ON
(a) When Pr. 73 setting is 0 to 5

-5V -2.5V
(-10V) (-5V)

Reverse rotation
STF Signal
ON
Reverse rotation
STF Signal
ON

0

+2.5V
(+5V)

+5V Terminal 1
(+10V)

Forward rotation

Forward rotation

(b) When Pr. 73 setting is 10 to 15

Auxiliary input characteristics

175

4
PARAMETERS

= Terminal 4 input + Terminal 1 input ×

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(2) Override function (Pr. 252, Pr. 253)
⋅ Use the override function to change the main speed at a fixed ratio.
⋅ Set any of "4, 5, 14, 15" in Pr. 73 to select an override.
⋅ When an override is selected, the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is used for the main
speed setting and the terminal 2 for the override signal. (When the main speed of
the terminal 1 or terminal 4 is not input, compensation made by the terminal 2
becomes invalid.)
⋅ Using Pr. 252 and Pr. 253, set the override range.
⋅ How to find the set frequency for override

Forward Inverter
rotation
STF
SD
10
Override
setting

2
5
1

(+)
(-)

Set frequency (Hz) = Main speed set frequency (Hz) ×

Override connection diagram

Example)When Pr. 73 = "5"
The set frequency changes as shown below according to the
terminal 1 (main speed) and terminal 2 (auxiliary) inputs.

Override value (%)

200

Pr.252
Pr.253

Compensation amount (%)
100(%)

Main speed set frequency (Hz): Terminal 1, 4 input, multi-speed setting
Compensation amount (%): Terminal 2 input

150

Set frequency (Hz)

Main
speed

Initial value
(50% to 150%)

100

50
0
0V

2.5V
5V
(5V)
(10V)
Voltage across terminals 2 and 5

90

Terminal 2 5VDC
input(150%)

60

Terminal 2 2.5VDC
input(100%)

45
Terminal 2 0V
input(50%)

30
15
0
0

2.5

5

Terminal 1 input voltage (V)

CAUTION
⋅ When the Pr. 73 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a fault, failure
or malfunction. (Refer to page 171 for setting.)

REMARKS
⋅ The AU signal must be turned ON to use the terminal 4.
⋅ When inputting compensation to multi-speed operation or remote setting, set "1" (compensation made) to Pr. 28 Multi-speed
input compensation selection. (Initial value is "0")

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection
Refer to page 97
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 171

4.16.3 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74)
The time constant of the primary delay filter relative to external frequency command (analog input (terminal 1,
2, 4) signal) can be set.
Parameter
Number
74

Name

Input filter time constant

Initial Value

1

Setting Range

0 to 8

Description
Set the primary delay filter time
constant for the analog input. A
larger setting results in slower
response.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ Effective for eliminating noise in the frequency setting circuit.
⋅ Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise. A larger setting results in
slower response. (The time constant can be set between approximately 5ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8.)

176

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4.16.4 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905))
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0
to 5V, 0 to 10V or 4 to 20mADC).
Set Pr. 73 and Pr. 267 to switch between 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC and 4 to 20mADC. (Refer to page 171)
Parameter
Number
125
126
241 *1, 3
C2(902) *1, 2

Name
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
Analog input display unit
switchover
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
frequency

Initial Value

Setting
Range

60Hz

0 to 400Hz

60Hz

0 to 400Hz

0

0
1

0Hz

0 to 400Hz

C3(902) *1, 2

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

0%

0 to 300%

C4(903) *1, 2

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

100%

0 to 300%

C5(904) *1, 2

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
frequency

0Hz

0 to 400Hz

C6(904) *1, 2

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

20%

0 to 300%

C7(905) *1, 2

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

100%

0 to 300%

Set the frequency of terminal 2 input gain
(maximum).
Set the frequency of terminal 4 input gain
(maximum).
Displayed in %
Select the unit of
Displayed in V/mA analog input display.
Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 2 input.
Set the converted % of the bias side
voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
Set the converted % of the gain side
voltage (current) of terminal 2 input.
Set the frequency on the bias side of
terminal 4 input.
Set the converted % of the bias side
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input.
Set the converted % of the gain side
current (voltage) of terminal 4 input.

The parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.

4
PARAMETERS

*1
*2
*3

Description

177

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(1) Change the frequency at
analog input. (Pr. 125, Pr. 126)

Output frequency
(Hz)

Initial value
60Hz

⋅ Set a value in Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing only
the frequency setting (gain) of the maximum analog
input power (current). (C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)
setting need not be changed)
Gain Pr.125

Bias
C2
(Pr. 902)

0
0
Frequency setting signal
0
0
C3 (Pr. 902)

100%
5V
10V
20mA
C4 (Pr. 903)

Output frequency
(Hz)

Initial value
50Hz
60Hz

Bias
C5
(Pr. 904)

maximum

Gain Pr. 126

20
0
0
4 Frequency setting signal
0
1
0
2
C6 (Pr. 904)

100%
20mA
5V
10V
C7 (Pr. 905)

(2) Analog input bias/gain calibration (C2(Pr.
902) to C7(Pr. 905), )
⋅ The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust the
relationship between the input signal entered from
outside the inverter to set the output frequency, e.g. 0
to 5V, 0 to 10V or 0 to 20mADC, and the output
frequency.
⋅ Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using
C2 (Pr. 902). (initial set to the frequency at 0V)
⋅ Using Pr. 125, set the output frequency relative to the
frequency command voltage (current) set in Pr. 73
Analog input selection.
⋅ Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using
C5 (Pr. 904). (initial set to the frequency at 4mA)
⋅ Using Pr. 126, set the output frequency relative to
20mA of the frequency command current (0 to
20mA).
⋅ There are three methods to adjust the frequency
setting voltage (current) bias/gain.
(a) Method to adjust any point by application of
voltage (current) to across the terminals 2 and 5
(4 and 5).
page 179
(b) Method to adjust any point without application of a
voltage (current) to across terminals 2 and 5 (4
and 5).
page 180
(c) Adjusting only the frequency without adjusting the
voltage (current).
page 181

CAUTION
⋅ When the terminal 2 is calibrated to change the inclination of the set frequency, the setting of the terminal 1 is also changed.
⋅ When a voltage is input to the terminal 1 to make calibration, (terminal 2 (4) analog value + terminal 1 analog value) is the analog
calibration value.
⋅ When the voltage/current input specifications were changed using Pr. 73 and Pr. 267, be sure to make calibration.

(3) Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)
⋅ You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias/gain calibration.
⋅ Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr. 73 and Pr. 267, the display units of C3 (Pr. 902), C4 (Pr. 903),
C6 (Pr. 904) C7 (Pr. 905) change as shown below.
Analog Command
Pr. 241 = 0 (initial value)
(terminal 2, 4)
(according to Pr. 73, Pr. 267 )
0 to 5V input
0 to 5V → displayed in 0 to 100%(0.1%).
0 to 10V input
0 to 10V → displayed in 0 to 100%(0.1%).
4 to 20mA input
0 to 20mA → displayed in 0 to 100%(0.1%).

Pr. 241 = 1
0 to 100% → displayed in 0 to 5V(0.01V).
0 to 100% → displayed in 0 to 10V(0.01V).
0 to 100% → displayed in 0 to 20mA(0.01mA).

REMARKS
⋅ Analog input display is not displayed correctly if voltage is applied to terminal 1 when terminal 1 input specifications (0 to ±5V, 0
to ±10V) and main speed (terminal 2, terminal 4 input) specifications (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 0 to 20mA) differ. (For example, 5V
(100%) is analog displayed when 0V and 10V are applied to terminal 2 and terminal 1 respectively in the initial status.
⋅ Set "0" (initial value is 0% display) in Pr. 241 to use.

178

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(4) Frequency setting signal (current) bias/gain adjustment method
(a)Method to adjust any point by application of voltage (current) across the terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5).

Display

Operation
1. Confirm the RUN indication and operation

2.

mode indication
The inverter should be at a stop.
The inverter should be in the PU operation
mode.(Using
)
Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.

3. Turn
4. Press

until

The parameter
number read
previously appears.

appears.

to display

C0 to C7 setting
is enabled.

.

5. Turn

until
(
) appears.
Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain.

Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input
Analog voltage (current)
value (%) across terminals 2 and 5
(across terminals 4 and 5)

6. Press

to display the analog
voltage (current) value (%).

7. Apply a 5V (20mA) voltage (current).
(Turn the external potentiometer
connected across terminals 2 and 5
(across terminals 4 and 5) to maximum
(any position).)
CAUTION
After performing the operation in step 6, do not touch
completion of calibration.

*
*The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum
position of the potentiometer.

until
*

8. Press

Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input

to set.

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
(Adjustment completed)
*The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum
position of the potentiometer.

Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to return to the

Press

twice to show the next parameter (

indication (step 4).
).

REMARKS

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ If the frequency meter (indicator) connected to across terminals CA and 5 does not indicate exactly 60Hz, set calibration
parameter C0 CA terminal calibration. (Refer to page 149)
⋅ If the gain and bias of frequency setting voltage (current) are too close, an error (
) may be displayed at setting.

179

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(b) Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) to across terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5).
(To change from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))

Display

Operation
1. Confirm the RUN indication and operation

2.

mode indication
The inverter should be at a stop.
The inverter should be in the PU operation
mode.(Using
)
Press
to choose the parameter
setting mode.

3. Turn

until

4. Press

The parameter
number read
previously appears.

appears.

to display

C0 to C7 setting
is enabled.

.

5. Turn

until
(
)
appears. Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain.

Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input

to display the analog voltage
(current) value (%).

Analog voltage (current)
value (%) across terminals 2 and 5
(across terminals 4 and 5)

Turn
to set the gain voltage (%).
"0V (0mA) equals to 0%, 5V (10V, 20mA) to
100%"

The gain frequency is
reached when the analog
voltage (current) value across
terminals 2 and 5 (across terminals
4 and 5) is 100%.

6. Press
7.

Remarks
The current setting at the instant of
turning
is displayed.

Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input

8.

Press

to set.

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!
(Adjustment completed)

Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to return to the

Press

twice to show the next parameter (

indication (step 4).
).

REMARKS
By pressing

after step 6, you can confirm the current frequency setting bias/gain setting.

It cannot be confirmed after execution of step 7.

180

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(c) Method to adjust only the frequency without adjustment of a gain voltage (current).
(When changing the gain frequency from 60Hz to 50Hz)

Display

Operation
1.

Pr. 125) or
(Pr. 126) appears.

or

Terminal 2 input

Terminal 4 input

2. Press

to show the present set value.
(Rated motor frequency (initial value))

3. Turn
"

to change the set value to
". (50.00Hz)
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input

4. Press

to set.

5. Mode/monitor check
Press

Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!

twice to choose the

monitor/frequency monitor.

6. Apply a voltage across the drive unit
terminals 2 and 5 (across 4 and 5) and
turn ON the start command (STF, STR).
Operation starts at 50Hz.

REMARKS
⋅ Changing C4 (Pr. 903) or C7 (Pr. 905) (gain adjustment) value will not change the Pr. 20 value. The input of terminal 1 (frequency
setting auxiliary input) is added to the speed setting signal.
⋅ For the operating procedure using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the FR-PU04/FR-PU07 instruction manual.
⋅ When setting the value to 120Hz or more, it is necessary to set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency to 120Hz or more. (Refer to
page 87)
⋅ Make the bias frequency setting using calibration parameter C2 (Pr. 902) or C5 (Pr. 904). (Refer to page 178)

CAUTION
Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0V (0mA). Even if a speed command
is not given, merely turning ON the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.
♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
Refer to page 101
Pr. 73 Analog input selection, Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection
Refer to page 171
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195

PARAMETERS

4

181

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
4.16.5 4mA input check of current input (Pr. 573, Pr. 777, Pr. 778)
When inputting 4 to 20mA current to terminal 2 or terminal 4, decrease in analog current input is detected to
enable continuous operation even if input has decreased.
Parameter
Number

Name

Setting
Range

Initial Value

Description

1

2
4mA input check
selection

573

9999
3

4
9999
4mA input fault
operation
frequency

777

778

0 to 400Hz

9999

9999

Current input check
filter

0

0 to 10s

When the current input drops to or below 2mA, the LF
signal is output and inverter continues operation at the
frequency (average value) just before current reaches
2mA.
When the analog input current drops to or below 2mA,
the fault (E.LCI) is output and the inverter output is
shutoff.
When the analog input current drops to or below 2mA,
the alarm signal (LF) is output, and the fault (E.LCI) is
output after deceleration to a stop. When the current
rises to or above 3mA during the deceleration, the
motor accelerates again to the set point and resumes
normal operation.
When the analog input current drops to or below 2mA,
the alarm signal (LF) is output and the inverter
continues operation at the Pr. 777 setting.
4mA input is not checked.
Set the frequency to continue the operation when the
analog input current drops to or below 2mA while Pr. 573
="4."
4mA input is not checked while Pr. 573 = "4."
Detection for an analog input current drop is performed
for the time period of Pr. 778 while the analog input
current ≤ 2mA.
Detection for an analog input current drop is cancelled
for the time period of Pr. 778 while the analog input
current > 3mA.
Pr. 778 =0: Immediately detected or the detection is
cancelled.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Operation continuation (Pr. 573 = "1")

Set frequency
When C3(C6) = 0%
60Hz
Current input
decrease detection

*
2mA 4mA

20mA

Analog input

Normal use range
* When Pr.573 = "1", input decrease is detected (LF signal output) even if
the analog input value to bias frequency of terminal 2 or terminal 4 is set
to 2mA or less using C2 (Pr. 902) or C5 (Pr. 904) and the value is not as
bias frequency settings.

182

⋅ When the input current of terminal 4 (terminal 2) falls
2mA or below, output alarm output signal (LF) is output.
⋅ When the current falls below 2mA, the output
frequency (average value) before detection is retained
and operation at the retained frequency continues.
⋅ When the current input increases above 3mA, the
LF signal output is turned OFF and the inverter
operates according to the current input.
⋅ For the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198
(negative logic)" in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal
function selection) and assign functions to the output
terminal.
⋅ Since turning OFF the start command clears the
retained frequency, the inverter does not operate at
the retained frequency even if restarted.

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
During external operation (Pr. 573 = 1)
Output frequency
Continuing the operation at the frequency
before the input current drop
Analog input
20mA

Input current
decrease

4mA

2mA

Return

3mA
Time

STF
LF signal

During PID control (reverse action) (Pr. 573 = 1)
Output frequency
Continuing the operation at the frequency
before the input current drop
20mA

Set point (fixed)

Input current
decrease
Return

Measured value
4mA

2mA

3mA
Time

STF
LF signal
ON during input decrease

PID signal

CAUTION
· Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

(2) Fault output (Pr. 573 = "2")
When the analog input current drops to or below 2mA, the fault (E.LCI) is output and the inverter output is shutoff.

(3) Fault output after deceleration to stop (Pr. 573 = "3")
When the analog input current drops to or below 2mA, the alarm (LF) is output and the motor decelerates to stop.
After it is stopped, the fault (E.LCI) is output.
When the input current rises again during the deceleration (including the cases when the 4mA current input is
invalid or no check is performed for the input current), the motor accelerates again to the set point and performs
normal operation.
During PID control (reverse action) (Pr. 573 = 3)

Set point (fixed)

PARAMETERS

20mA

4

An input current drop is detected and the motor
decelerates
E.LCI is output after the motor stops

Output frequency

Input current
decrease
Return

Measured value
4mA

2mA

3mA
Time

STF
LF signal
PID signal
ALM signal

183

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
During PID control (reverse action) (Analog input current is restored during deceleration while Pr.573 =3)
An input current drop is detected and the motor decelerates
Normal operation after the current is restored

Output frequency

20mA

Set point (fixed)

Input current
decrease
Return

Measured value
4mA

3mA

2mA

Time
STF
LF signal
PID signal
OFF during deceleration

(4) Continuing the operation at Pr. 777 setting (Pr. 573 = "4")
When the analog input current drops to or below 2mA, the alarm (LF) is output and the inverter continues operation
at the set frequency of Pr. 777. When the analog input current is restored to or above 3mA, the alarm (LF) is
cancelled.
During external operation (Pr. 573 = 4)

Continuing the operation at the set
frequency of Pr. 777

Output frequency

Time

Analog input
20mA

Input current
decrease

4mA

Return

3mA

2mA

Time

STF
LF signal

During PID control (reverse action) (Pr. 573 = 4)
Continuing the operation at the set
frequency of Pr. 777

Output frequency

Time
20mA

Set point (fixed)

Input current
decrease
Return

Measured value
4mA

2mA

3mA
Time

STF
LF signal
PID signal
ON while detecting an input current drop

REMARKS
⋅ When the Pr. 573 and Pr. 777 settings are changed after the detection for an input current drop, the inverter operates with the
changed settings. However, the inverter operates with previous settings while in stop or in alarm.

184

Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4)
(5) Function related to 4mA input check
Function
Minimum frequency
Multi-speed operation

Jog operation

MRS
Remote setting
Retry
Added compensation,
override function
Input filter time
constant
Forward/reverse
rotation prevention

PID control

Power failure stop
Pump function

Switch-over

Operation
Even if the input current decreases, minimum frequency setting clamp is valid.
Operation by multiple speed signal has precedence even if input current decreases.
(Frequency is not retained when the input current decreases.)
Operation stops when a multi-speed signal turns OFF.
The JOG signal has precedence even during decrease in input current. (Frequency is
not retained when the input current decreases.)
Operation stops when the JOG signal is turned OFF during decrease in input current.
PU/jog operation is enabled during PID control.
At this time, PU/jog operation has precedence during decrease in input current.
Output is shut off by the MRS signal even if input current decreases. (The inverter
stops when the MRS signal is turned OFF.)
The retained frequency will not change even if remote acceleration/deceleration and
clear are performed during decrease in input current. Reflected at restoration.
Remote setting is invalid under PID control.
When retry was successful at error occurrence during decrease in input current,
retained frequency was not cleared and operation continues.

Refer to
page
87
93

95

124
98
159

Operation of added compensation (terminal 1) and override compensation (terminal
2) are invalid during decrease in input current.

175

The value before filtering is detected.
When input current decreases, frequency after filtering (average value) is retained.

176

Motor rotation direction can be restricted independently of 4mA input check setting.

190

Although PID operation is stopped when input current decreases, the X14 signal
remains ON. (PID operation is valid.) During the pre-charge operation, the precharge ending level and the pre-charge limit are not applied.
The SLEEP function overrides the operation continuation selection (Pr.573 ≠ "2 or 3").
Even if the 4mA input is lost, the SLEEP function activates. PID operation restarts at
the specified frequency when the cancellation conditions for the SLEEP function are
satisfied.
Even if input current decreases when undervoltage or power failure occurs, the motor
stops according to the setting of power-failure deceleration stop function. E.LCI
occurs if a fault occurs from a stop.
If auxiliary motor switchover conditions of pump function is satisfied even when input
current decreases, motor connection/release operation is performed.
When the switchover function is operated, frequency is the same as that of the
retained frequency.
Note that if 4mA input is invalid once in switchover mode, the frequency is not
retained next time.

261

156
283

195

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 175
Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection
Refer to page 171

PARAMETERS

4

185

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction

4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
Purpose

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set

Limit reset function
Trips stop when PU is disconnected
Stop from PU
Prevention of parameter rewrite
Prevention of reverse rotation of the
motor
Display necessary parameters
Parameter restriction with using
password
Control of parameter write by
communication

Reset selection/disconnected
PU detection/PU stop selection
Parameter write selection
Reverse rotation prevention
selection
Display of applied parameters
and user group function

Pr. 75

186

Pr. 77

189

Pr. 78

190

Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174

190

Pr. 296, Pr. 297

192

Pr. 342

216

Password function
EEPROM write selection

4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)
You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection
function and PU stop function.
Parameter
Number

75 *

Name

Reset selection/disconnected
PU detection/PU stop selection

Initial
Value

14

Setting Range
200V class (400V class)
02330
(01160)
or less
03160
(01800)
or more

0 to 3, 14 to 17
0 to 3, 14 to 17,
100 to 103,
114 to117

Description

For the initial value, reset always enabled,
without disconnected PU detection, and
with PU stop function are set.

⋅The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
⋅The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
* The above parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.

Pr. 75
Setting
0
1
2
3
14
(initial
value)
15
16
17
100
101
102
103
114
115
116
117

186

Reset Selection
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips
Reset input always enabled
Reset input enabled only when the
inverter trips

Disconnected PU
Detection
If the PU is disconnected,
operation will be continued.
When the PU is
disconnected, the inverter
trips.

PU Stop Selection

Pressing

Reset Limit
(FR-F720-03160
(FR-F740-01800)
or more)

decelerates

the motor to a stop only in
the PU operation mode.
Not function

If the PU is disconnected,
operation will be continued.
When the PU is
disconnected, the inverter
trips.
If the PU is disconnected,
operation will be continued.
When the PU is
disconnected, the inverter
trips.
If the PU is disconnected,
operation will be continued.
When the PU is
disconnected, the inverter
trips.

Pressing

decelerates

the motor to a stop in any of
the PU, External and
Network operation modes.

Pressing

decelerates

the motor to a stop only in
the PU operation mode.
Function
Pressing

decelerates

the motor to a stop in any of
the PU, External and
Network operation modes.

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
(1) Reset selection
• You can select the enable condition of reset function (RES signal, reset command through communication) input.
• When Pr. 75 is set to any of "1, 3, 15, 17, 101, 103, 115, 117", a reset can be input only when a fault occurs.
CAUTION
⋅ When the reset signal (RES) is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output.
Also, the cumulative value of the electronic thermal relay function is cleared.
⋅ The reset key of the PU is valid only when a fault occurs, independently of the Pr. 75 setting.

(2) Disconnected PU detection
• This function detects that the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for
longer than 1s and causes the inverter to provide a fault output (E.PUE) and come to trip.
• When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15, 100, 101, 114, 115", operation is continued if the PU is disconnected.
CAUTION
⋅ When the PU has been disconnected since before power-ON, it is not judged as a fault.
⋅ To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter.
⋅ The motor decelerates to a stop when the PU is disconnected during PU Jog operation with Pr. 75 set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15"
(which selects operation is continued if the PU is disconnected).
⋅ When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function
is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid.

(3) PU stop selection
• In any of the PU operation, External operation and Network operation modes, the motor can be stopped by
pressing

of the PU.

• When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, "

" is displayed. A fault signal is not provided.

• When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0 to 3, 100 to 103", deceleration to a stop by

is valid only in the PU operation

mode.
REMARKS
The motor will also decelerate to a stop (PU stop) when

is input during operation in the PU mode through RS-485

communication with Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection set to "1" (PU mode RS-485 terminals).

PARAMETERS

4

187

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
(4) How to restart the motor stopped by

input from the PU in External operation mode (PU

stop (PS) reset method)
(a) When operation panel (FR- DU07) is used
Speed

1)After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn OFF the
STF or STR signal.
Time
Key

Operation
panel
STF ON
(STR) OFF

Key

2)Push "

" three times.

(When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "0 (initial value)
or 6") ...(

release)

(When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "2, 3, or 7"),
Stop/restart example for external operation

pushing "

" once will release

.

3)Turn ON the STF or STR signal.

(b) Connection of the parameter unit
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
1)After the motor has decelerated to a stop, turn OFF the
STF or STR signal.
2)Press

EXT

.••••••(

canceled)

3)Turn ON the STF or STR signal.
• The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal.
CAUTION
⋅ Even if Pr. 250 Stop selection is set to other than "9999" to select coasting to a stop, the motor will not coast to a stop but
decelerate to a stop by the PU stop function during external operation.
To restart after the inverter is stopped by PU with PLC function, reset using a power supply rest or RES signal. (sending stop
signal from GX Developer, can also perform the reset.)

CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter with the start signal ON. Doing so will cause the inverter to start immediately after a
reset, leading to hazardous conditions.

(5) Reset limit
• Setting can be made for the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more.
• You can set Pr. 75 to disable reset operation until the thermal cumulative amount reaches 0 when a thermal trip
(THM, THT) or an overcurrent trip (OC1 to OC3) occurs consecutively twice.
• When Pr. 75 = "100 to 103, 114 to 117", reset limit is valid.
REMARKS
When the power-ON reset (no control power is supplied) is made, the thermal cumulative amount is cleared.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 250 Stop selection

188

Refer to page 119

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
4.17.2 Parameter write selection (Pr. 77)
You can select whether write to various parameters can be performed or not. Use this function to prevent
parameter values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Parameter
Number
77

Name

Setting
Range

Initial Value

Parameter write selection

0
1

0

2

Description
Write is enabled only during a stop.
Parameter write is not enabled.
Parameter write is enabled in any operation
mode regardless of operating status.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)
Pr. 77 can be always set independently of the operation mode and operating status.

(1) Write parameters only at a stop (setting "0", initial value)
⋅ Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode.
⋅ The parameters marked in the parameter list (page 62)
can always be written, regardless of the operation
mode and operating status. However, Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection and Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection can be
written during operation in the PU operation mode, but cannot be written in External operation mode.

(2) Disable parameter write (setting "1")
⋅ Parameter write is not enabled. (Reading is
enabled.)
⋅ Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot
be performed, either.
⋅ The parameters given on the right can be
written if Pr. 77 = "1".

Parameter
Number

Name

22
75
77
79
160
296
297

Stall prevention operation level
Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Parameter write selection
Operation mode selection
User group read selection
Password lock level
Password lock/unlock

(3) Write parameters during operation (setting "2")
⋅ Parameters can always be written.
⋅ The following parameters cannot be written during operation if Pr. 77 = "2". Stop operation when changing their
parameter settings.
Parameter
Number

Name
Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed
Second stall prevention operation current
Second stall prevention operation frequency
Energy saving control selection

66
71
79
80
90
100 to 109
135
136
137
138
139
178 to 196
329

Stall prevention operation reduction starting frequency
Applied motor
Operation mode selection
Motor capacity
Motor constant (R1)
(Adjustable 5 points V/F parameter)
Electronic bypass sequence selection
MC switchover interlock time
Start waiting time
Bypass selection at a fault
Automatic switchover frequency from inverter to bypass operation
(I/O terminal function selection)
Digital input unit selection (Parameter for the plug-in option FR-A7AX)

414

PLC function operation selection

415

Inverter operation lock mode setting

570

Multiple rating setting

4
PARAMETERS

23
48
49
60

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection

Refer to page 195

189

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Parameter
Number
78

Name

Initial Value

Reverse rotation prevention
selection

Setting Range

0

Description

0

Both forward and reverse rotations
allowed

1
2

Reverse rotation disabled
Forward rotation disallowed

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

⋅ Set this parameter when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
⋅ This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the operation panel (FR-DU07),
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and reverse
rotation commands through communication.

4.17.4 Display of applied parameters and user group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)
Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted.
In the initial setting, only the simple mode parameters are displayed.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range
9999

160 *1, 3

User group read selection

0

0
1

172 *1

*1
*2
*3

User group registered display/
batch clear

(0 to 16)

0

9999

173 *1, 2

User group registration

9999

0 to 999, 9999

174 *1, 2

User group clear

9999

0 to 999, 9999

Description
Only the simple mode parameters can
be displayed.
The simple mode and extended
parameters can be displayed
Only parameters registered in the user
group can be displayed.
Displays the number of cases registered
as a user group (Read only)
Batch clear the user group registration
Set the parameter numbers to be
registered to the user group.
Set the parameter numbers to be cleared
from the user group.

They can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0".
The values read from Pr. 173 and Pr. 174 are always "9999".
The above parameter allows its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.

(1) Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr. 160)
⋅ When Pr. 160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). (Refer to the parameter list, pages 62 to 74, for the simple mode parameters.)
⋅ Set "0" in Pr. 160 to display of the simple mode parameters and extended parameters. In the initial setting (Pr. 160 =
"0") status, simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.
REMARKS
⋅ When a plug-in option is fitted to the inverter, the option parameters can also be read.
⋅ When reading the parameters using the communication option, all parameters can be read regardless of the Pr. 160 setting.
⋅ When reading the parameters using the RS-485
terminals, all parameters can be read regardless of the
Pr. 160 setting by setting Pr.550 NET mode operation
command source selection and Pr. 551 PU mode operation
command source selection.

Pr.551

Pr.550

1 (RS-485)

⎯
0(OP)
1(RS-485)

2
(PU)
(initial
value)
*

9999
(auto-detect)
(initial value)

Pr.160 Valid/Invalid
Valid
Valid
Invalid (all readable)
With OP: valid
Without OP: invalid
(all readable)

OP indicates a communication option

⋅ Pr. 15 Jog frequency, Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time, Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment are displayed as simple mode
parameters when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is mounted.

190

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
(2) User group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)
⋅ The user group function is designed to display only the parameters necessary for setting.
⋅ From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters can be registered to a user group. When Pr. 160 is set to
"1", only the parameters registered to the user group can be accessed. (Reading of parameters other than the user
group registration is disabled.)
⋅ To register a parameter to the user group, set its parameter number to Pr. 173.
⋅ To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter number to Pr. 174. To batch-delete the registered
parameters, set Pr. 172 to "9999".

(3) Registration of parameter to user group (Pr. 173)
When registering Pr. 3 to user group

Operation
1.Confirm the operation display and operation

Indication

mode display.
The inverter must be at a stop.
The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
(Press
in the External operation mode.)

2.Press

to choose the parameter setting

Parameter setting mode

3.Turn

until

appears.

Pr. 173 User group
registration is displayed.

4.Press

to display. "

"

When Pr. 173 is read,
"
" is displayed.

5.Turn

until Pr. 3 appears.

mode.

6.Press
"

Select the parameter
number to be registered.

to set.
" and " " are displayed alternately.

To continue parameter registration, repeat
steps 3 to 6.

Flicker

··· Registration

completed!!

of Pr. 3 to user group

(4) Deletion of parameter from user group (Pr. 174)
When deleting Pr. 3 from user group

Operation
1.Confirm the operation display and operation

Indication

mode display.
The inverter must be at a stop.
The inverter must be in the PU operation mode.
(Press
in the External operation mode.)

2.Press

to choose the parameter setting

Parameter setting mode

3.Turn

until

Pr. 174 User group
clear is displayed.

4.Press

to display. "

mode.

6.Press
"

When Pr. 174 is read,
"
" is displayed.

"

4

Select the parameter
number to be deleted.

until Pr. 3 appears.

PARAMETERS

5.Turn

appears.

to clear.
" and " " are displayed alternately.

To continue parameter registration, repeat
steps 3 to 6.

Flicker

of Pr. 3 from user group
completed!!

··· Deletion

REMARKS
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 991 can always be read, independently of the user group setting.
Pr. 77, Pr. 160 and Pr. 172 to Pr. 174 cannot be registered to the user group.
When Pr. 174 is read, "9999" is always displayed. Although "9999" can be written, no function is available.
When any value other than "9999" is set to Pr. 172, no function is available.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection

Refer to page 204
Refer to page 204

191

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)
Registering 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/writing.
Parameter
Number
296

Name

Initial Value

Password lock level

9999

Setting Range

Description

0 to 6, 99, 100 to
106, 199

Select restriction level of parameter reading/
writing when a password is registered.

9999
1000 to 9998

297

Password lock/unlock

9999

(0 to 5) *
9999 *

No password lock
Register a 4-digit password
Displays password unlock error
(Reading only)
(Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to "106")
No password lock

count.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0".
When Pr. 296 ≠ "9999" (with password lock), note that Pr. 297 is always available for setting regardless of Pr. 160 setting.
* "0 or 9999" can be set to Pr. 297 at any time although the setting is invalid (the displayed value does not change).

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr. 296 )
Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation command can be selected by Pr. 296.
PU Mode Operation Command
Pr. 296 Setting
9999
0, 100
*6

1, 101
2, 102
3, 103
4, 104
5, 105
6, 106
99, 199

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

*3

Read *1

Write *2

×

×

NET Mode Operation Command *4
RS-485 Terminal
Communication Option
Read
Write *2
Read
Write *2
×

×
×
×
×

×
×

×

×

×

×

×

×

×
×

×
×

×
×
×
Only parameters registered in the user group can be read/written. *5
(For the parameters not registered in the user group, same restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)
: enabled, ×: restricted

If the parameter reading is restricted by the Pr. 160 setting, those parameters are unavailable for reading even when " " is indicated.
If the parameter writing is restricted by the Pr. 77 setting, those parameters are unavailable for writing even when " " is indicated.
Parameter access from unit where parameter is written in PU operation mode (initially set to operation panel (FR-DU07), parameter unit) is
restricted. (Refer to page 204 for PU mode operation command source selection)
This restricts parameter access from the command source that can write a parameter under Network operation mode (initially RS-485 terminal or
a communication option). (Refer to page 204 for NET mode command source.)
Read/write is enabled only in the simple mode parameters registered in the user group when Pr.160 User group read selection = "9999". Pr.296 and
Pr.297 are always read/write enabled whether registered to a user group or not.
If a communication option is installed, option fault (E.OPT) occurs, and inverter trips. (Refer to page 342.)

192

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
(2) Password lock/unlock (Pr.296, Pr.297 )

1) Set parameter reading/writing restriction level.(Pr. 296 ≠ 9999)
Pr.296 Setting Restriction of Password
Pr.297 Display
Unlock Error
Value
0 to 6, 99

No restriction

100 to 106, 199

Restricted at fifth error

Always 0
Displays error count (0 to
5)

* During [Pr. 296 = any of "100 to 106, 199"], if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password
will not unlock the restriction. All parameter clear can unlock the restriction.
(In this case, parameter settings are cleared.)
2) Write a four-digit number (1000 to 9998) in Pr. 297 as a password.
(When Pr. 296 = "9999", Pr. 297 cannot be written.)
When password is registered, parameter reading/writing is restricted with the restriction level set in Pr. 296 until
unlocking.

REMARKS
⋅ After registering a password, a read value of Pr. 297 is always one of "0" to "5".
⋅ When a password restricted parameter is read/written,
is displayed.
⋅ Even if a password is registered, parameters which the inverter itself writes, such as inverter parts life, are overwritten as
needed.
⋅ Even if a password is registered, Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment can be read/written when a parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
is connected.


There are two ways of unlocking the password.
Enter a password in Pr. 297.
Unlocked when a password is correct. If a password is incorrect, an error occurs and not unlocked.
During [Pr. 296 = any of "100 to 106, 199"], if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock
the restriction. (During password lock)
Perform all parameter clear.

CAUTION
⋅ If the password has been forgotten, perform all parameter clear to unlock the parameter restriction. In that case, other
parameters are also cleared.
⋅ Parameter all clear can not be performed during the operation.
⋅ Do not use the FR Configurator when parameter read is restricted (Pr. 296 = any of "0, 4, 5, 99, 100, 104, 105, 199").
FR Configurator may not function properly.

REMARKS
⋅ The password unlock method is different for operation panel/FR-PU07, RS-485 communication, and communication option.

RS-485
communication

×

×

Communication
option

:Password can be unlocked. ×:Password cannot be unlocked.

4
PARAMETERS

All parameter clear
(data format H9966, H55AA)
Parameter clear
(data format H9696, H5A5A)

Operation panel/
FR-PU07

193

Misoperation prevention and parameter
setting restriction
(3) Parameter operation during password lock/unlock
Unlocked
Parameter operation
Read
Write
Read
Pr. 297
Write
Performing parameter clear
Performing parameter all clear
Performing parameter copy
Pr. 296

*1
*2
*3
*4

Pr. 296 = 9999
Pr. 297 = 9999

Pr. 296 ≠ 9999
Pr. 297 = 9999

Password registered
Pr. 296 ≠ 9999
Pr. 297 = 0 to 4
(Read value)

Locked
Pr. 296 = 100 to 106, 199
Pr. 297 = 5
(Read value)

×

×

× *4

× *4

*1
*1

*1

*1

×

*3
*2

×

*2

×
: enabled, ×: restricted

Reading/writing is unavailable when there is restriction to reading by the Pr. 160 setting. (Reading is available in NET mode regardless of Pr. 160
setting.)
Unavailable during the operation.
Correct password will not unlock the restriction.
Parameter clear is available only from the communication option.

REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 296 = any of "4, 5, 104, 105" (password lock), the setting screen for PU JOG frequency is not displayed in the
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
⋅ During password lock, parameter copy of the operation panel (FR-DU07)/the parameter unit (FR-PU07) cannot be performed.
⋅ Parameter settings in the inverter can be read/written using GX Developer even when the password function (Pr.296, Pr.297) is
valid. To use the password function and the PLC function at the same time, apply a lock to reading/writing of the ladder program
by registering a keyword.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection
Refer to page 189
Refer to page 190
Pr. 160 Extended function display selection
Refer to page 204
Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection
Refer to page 204

194

Selection of operation mode and
operation location

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location
Purpose

Parameter that must be set

Operation mode selection
Started in network operation mode

Operation mode selection
Operation mode at power ON
Selection of start command source, speed
command source and operation location
during communication operation

Selection of operation location

Refer to page

Pr. 79
Pr. 79, Pr. 340

195
203

Pr. 338, Pr. 339,
Pr. 550, Pr. 551

204

4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)
Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external command signals (external operation), operation
from the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FR-PU07), combined operation of PU operation and external operation (external/PU
combined operation, and network operation (when RS-485 terminals or a communication option is used).
Parameter
Number

Name

79

Operation mode selection

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

0

0 to 4, 6, 7

The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.

POINT
• Use the simple setting mode to set Pr. 79 in simple steps. (Refer to page 60)

Pr.79
Setting

LED Indication
: OFF
: ON

Description

Refer
to

PU operation mode

Use external/PU switchover mode (press

operation mode.
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.

Operation mode
1

to switch between the PU and External

PU operation mode (fixed)

Frequency command
Setting by the operation
panel (FR-DU07) and PU
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07)

2

External operation mode (fixed)
External signal input (from
The operation can be
terminal 2, 4, and 1, JOG,
performed by switching
between the External and NET multi-speed selection, etc.)
operation modes.

3

PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/FRPU07) setting or external
signal input (multi-speed
setting, across terminals 4
and 5 (valid when AU signal
turns ON)). *

4

6

7

External/PU combined
operation mode 1

External/PU combined
operation mode 2

External signal input
(Terminal 2, 4, 1, JOG,
multi-speed selection, etc.)

External operation mode

198

NET operation mode

Start command
Input by

and

on

PU operation mode

198

PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07)
External operation mode

External signal input (from
terminal STF and STR)

NET operation mode

External signal input
(terminal STF, STR)

198

199

4
Input by

and

on

PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU04/
FR-PU07)

PU operation mode
Switchover mode
Switch among PU operation, External operating, and NET operation while keeping the
same operating status.
External operation mode
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)
X12 signal ON: Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode.
NET operation mode
(output stop during external operation)
X12 signal OFF: Operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode.

199

200

200

* The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog
input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".

REMARKS
If switching of the operation mode is invalid even though Pr. 79 is set, refer to page 351.

195

PARAMETERS

0

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(1) Operation mode basics
⋅ The operation mode specifies the source of the start
command and the frequency command for the
inverter.

PU operation
mode
Operation
panel

Inverter

Personal
computer

Network operation mode

RS-485
terminals

Personal
computer

Communication
option

Programmable
controller

Network operation
mode

External terminal

3
2
1

4

5 6
7
8

⋅ Basically, there are following operation modes.
⋅ External operation mode: For inputting start
command and frequency command by an external
potentiometer and switches which are connected
to the control circuit terminal.
⋅ PU operation mode: For inputting start command
and frequency command by operation panel (FRDU07), parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and
RS-485 communication with PU connector.
⋅ Network operation mode (NET operation
mode): For inputting start command and
frequency command by RS-485 terminal and
communication options.

9

External
operation
mode

10

Potentiometer Switch

⋅ The operation mode can be selected from the
operation panel or with the communication
instruction code.

REMARKS
⋅ Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/external combined operation, and these settings differ in starting method.
⋅ In the initial setting, the stop function by

of the PU (FR-DU07/FR-PU07) (PU stop selection) is valid also in other than the

PU operation mode. (Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. Refer to page 186.)

(2) Operation mode switching method
External operation

When "0, 1, or 2" is set in Pr. 340

Switching from the PU

Switching from the network
Switch to the External
operation mode from
the network.

Press
Press
Switch to the Network operation
mode from the Network.

the PU to light

of

the PU to light

Network operation

When "10 or 12" is set in Pr. 340

PU operation

Press

of the PU to light

Network operation

PU operation

Press

of the PU to light

REMARKS
⋅ For switching of operation by external terminals, refer to the following:
PU operation external interlock signal (X12 signal)
PU-external operation switch-over signal (X16)

. page 200
page 201

PU-NET operation switchover signal (X65), External-NET operation switchover signal (X66)
Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection

196

of

page 203

page 202

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(3) Operation mode selection flow
In the following flowchart, select the basic parameter setting and terminal connection related to the operation mode.
START

Connection

Parameter setting

Operation

Where is the start command
source?
From external (STF/STR terminal)
Where is the frequency set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4,
JOG, multi-speed, etc.)

STF (forward rotation)/STR
(reverse rotation)
(Refer to page 122.)
Terminal 2, 4 and 5 (analog), RL,
RM, RH, JOG, etc.

From PU (Digital setting)

STF (forward rotation)/STR
(reverse rotation)
(Refer to page 122.)

Frequency setting terminal ON
STF(STR) ON

Pr. 79 = "3"
(External/PU combined
operation 1)

DU digital setting
STF(STR) ON

Pr. 338 = "1"
Pr. 340 = "1, 2"

Communication frequency setting
command sending
STF(STR) ON

Pr. 338 = "1"
Pr. 340 = "1"

Communication frequency setting
command sending
STF(STR) ON

Pr. 79 = "4"
(External/PU combined
operation 2)

Frequency setting terminal ON
FWD/REV key ON

Pr. 79 = "1"
(Fixed to PU operation)

Digital setting
FWD/REV key ON

Pr. 339 = "1"
Pr. 340 = "1, 2"

Frequency setting terminal ON
Communication start command
sending

From communication (RS-485 terminals/communication option)
RS-485 terminals or
communication option?
RS-485 terminals

Communication option
From PU (FWD/REV key)

STF (forward rotation)/STR
(reverse rotation)
(Refer to page 122.)
Connection of RS-485 terminals
(Refer to page 211.)
Connection of communication
option

(Refer to the corresponding communication
option instruction manual)

Where is the frequency set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG,
multi-speed, etc.)

Terminal 2, 4 and 5 (analog), RL,
RM, RH, JOG, etc.

From PU (Digital setting)
From communication
(RS-485 terminals/communication option)

Disabled

From communication (RS-485 terminals/communication option)
RS-485 terminals or
communication option?
RS-485 terminals
Where is the frequency
set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.)

From PU (Digital setting)

Disabled

From communication
RS-485 terminals

Communication option

Connection of RS-485 terminals
(Refer to page 211.)

Pr. 340 = "1, 2"

Communication frequency setting
command sending
Communication start command
sending

Pr. 339 = "1"
Pr. 340 = "1"

Frequency setting terminal ON
Communication start command
sending

Where is the frequency
set?
From external (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed, etc.)
Connection of communication option

(Refer to the corresponding communication
option instruction manual)

Terminal 2, 4 and 5 (analog), RL,
RM, RH, JOG, etc.

From PU (Digital setting)
From communication (communication option)
Connection of communication option

(Refer to the corresponding communication
option instruction manual)

Disabled
Pr. 340 = "1"

Communication frequency setting
command sending
Communication start command
sending

197

4
PARAMETERS

Connection of RS-485 terminals
(Refer to page 211.)
Terminal 2, 4 and 5 (analog), RL,
RM, RH, JOG, etc.

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(4) External operation mode (setting "0" (initial value), "2")

3

4

5 6
7
8
9
10

Hz

Inverter
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start

Frequency setting
potentiometer

STF
STR
SD
10
2
5

⋅ Select the External operation mode when the start
command and the frequency command are applied
from a frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc.
externally and connecting them to the control circuit
terminals of the inverter.
⋅ Generally, parameter change cannot be performed in
the External operation mode. (Some parameters can be
changed. Refer to the detailed description of each
parameter.)
⋅ When "0" or "2" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters
the External operation mode at power ON. (When using
the Network operation mode, refer to page 203.)
⋅ When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting
"2" fixes the operation mode to External operation
mode. When frequent parameter changing is
necessary, setting "0" (initial value) allows the operation
mode to be changed easily to PU operation mode by
pressing

of the operation panel. When you

switched to PU operation mode, always return to
External operation mode.
⋅ The STF and STR signal are used as a start command,
and the voltage or current signal to terminal 2, 4, multispeed signal, JOG signal, etc. are used as frequency
command.

(5) PU operation mode (setting "1")

Operation panel
(FR-DU07)

198

⋅ Select the PU operation mode when applying start and
speed command by the key operation of the operation
panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07) alone. Also select the PU operation mode when
making communication using the PU connector.
⋅ When "1" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the
PU operation mode at power ON. You cannot change to
the other operation mode.
⋅ The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for
setting like a potentiometer. (Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key
lock operation selection, refer to page 315.)
⋅ When PU operation mode is selected, the PU operation
mode signal (PU) can be output.
For the terminal used for the PU signal output, assign
the function by setting "10 (positive logic) or 110
(negative logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output
terminal function selection).

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(6) PU/External combined operation mode 1 (setting "3")

Inverter
STF
STR

Forward rotation
start
Reverse rotation
start

⋅ Select the PU/external combined operation mode 1
when applying frequency command from the operation
panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07) and inputting the start command with the
external start switch.
⋅ Select "3" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other
operation mode.
⋅ When a frequency is input from the external signal by
multi-speed setting, it has a higher priority than the
frequency setting from the PU. When AU is ON, the
command signal to terminal 4 is used.

SD

Operation panel
(FR-DU07)

(7) PU/External combined operation mode 2 (setting "4")
3

4

⋅ Select the PU/External combined operation mode 2
when applying frequency command from the external
potentiometer, multi-speed or JOG signal and inputting
the start command by key operation of the operation
panel (FR-DU07) or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FRPU07).
⋅ Select "4" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other
operation mode.

5 6
7
8
9
10

Hz

Inverter
10
2
5

Operation panel
(FR-DU07)

4
PARAMETERS

Frequency setting
potentiometer

199

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(8) Switch-over mode (Setting "6")
⋅ While continuing operation, you can switch among PU operation, External operation and Network operation (when
RS-485 terminals or communication option is used).
Operation Mode Switching
External operation → PU
operation

External operation → NET
operation
PU operation → external
operation

Switching Operation/Operating Status
Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.
⋅ Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
⋅ The frequency set with the potentiometer (frequency setting command), etc. is used unchanged. (Note
that the setting will disappear when power is switched OFF or the inverter is reset.)
Send the mode change command to Network operation mode through communication.
⋅ Rotation direction is the same as that of external operation.
⋅ The value set with the setting potentiometer (frequency setting command) or like is used unchanged.
(Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched OFF or the inverter is reset.)
Press the external operation key of the operation panel, parameter unit.
⋅ The rotation direction is determined by the input signal of the external operation.
⋅ The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.

PU operation → NET
operation

Send the mode change command to Network operation mode through communication.
⋅ Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation.

NET operation → external
operation

Send the mode change command to External operation mode through communication.
⋅ Rotation direction is determined by the external operation input signal.
⋅ The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.

NET operation → PU
operation

Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.
⋅ The rotation direction and frequency command in Network operation mode are used unchanged.

(9) PU operation interlock (Setting "7")
⋅ The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode to External operation mode
when the PU operation interlock signal (X12) input turns OFF. This function prevents the inverter from being
inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left unswitched from the PU operation mode.
⋅ Set "7" (PU operation interlock) in Pr. 79.
⋅ For the terminal used for X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input
terminal function selection) to assign the function. (Refer to page 122 for Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.)
⋅ When the X 12 signal has not been assigned, the function of the MRS signal switches from MRS (output stop) to
the PU operation interlock signal.
Function/Operation

X12 (MRS)
Signal
ON

OFF

Operation mode

Parameter write

Operation mode (external, PU, NET) switching
enabled
Output stop during external operation
Forcibly switched to External operation mode
External operation allowed.
Switching to PU or NET operation mode disabled

Parameter write enabled (Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection, depending on the corresponding parameter
write condition (Refer to page 62 for the parameter list))
Parameter write disabled with exception of Pr. 79


Operating Condition
Operation
Status
mode
PU/NET

X12 (MRS)
Signal

During stop

ON→OFF *1

Running

ON→OFF *1
OFF→ON
ON→OFF
OFF→ON
ON→OFF

During stop
External
Running

Operation
Mode

Operating Status

External *2

If external operation frequency setting and start signal
are entered, operation is performed in that status.
During stop

External *2

During operation → output stop
Output stop → operation

Switching to
PU, NET
Operation Mode
Disallowed
Disallowed
Enable
Disallowed
Disallowed
Disallowed

*1

The operation mode switches to External operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is ON or OFF. Therefore,
the motor is run in External operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is turned OFF with either of STF and STR ON.

*2

At fault occurrence, pressing

of the operation panel resets the inverter.

CAUTION
⋅ If the X12 (MRS) signal is ON, the operation mode cannot be switched to PU operation mode when the start signal (STF, STR) is ON.
⋅ When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the MRS signal serves as the normal MRS function (output stop) by
turning on the MRS signal and then changing the Pr. 79 value to other than "7" in the PU operation mode. Also as soon as "7"
is set in Pr. 79, the signal acts as the PU interlock signal.
⋅ When the MRS signal is used as the PU operation interlock signal, the logic of the signal is as set in Pr. 17. When Pr. 17 = "2",
read ON as OFF and OFF as ON in the above explanation.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

200

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(10) Switching of operation mode by external signal (X16 signal)
⋅ When external operation and operation from the operation panel are used together, use of the PU-external
operation switching signal (X16) allows switching between the PU operation mode and External operation mode
during a stop (during a motor stop, start command OFF).
⋅ When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 6, 7", the operation mode can be switched between the PU operation mode and External
operation mode. (Pr. 79 = "6" At switchover mode, operation mode can be changed during operation)
⋅ For the terminal used for X16 signal input, set "16" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to
assign the function.
Pr. 79
Setting

1

External operation
PU operation mode
mode
PU operation mode

2

External operation mode

3, 4

External/PU combined operation mode
External operation
PU operation mode
mode
External operation
PU operation mode
mode

0 (initial value)

6

7

X16 Signal State Operation Mode
ON (external)
OFF (PU)

X12(MRS)
ON
X12(MRS)
OFF

External operation mode

Remarks
Can be switched to External, PU or NET operation mode
Fixed to PU operation mode
Fixed to External operation mode (Can be switched to NET
operation mode)
External/PU combined mode fixed
Can be switched to External, PU or NET operation mode with
operation continued
Can be switched to External, PU or NET operation mode (Output
stop in External operation mode)
Fixed to External operation mode (Forcibly switched to External
operation mode)

REMARKS
⋅ The operation mode status changes depending on the setting of Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF
states of the X65 and X66 signals. (For details, refer to page 202.)
⋅ The priorities of Pr. 79, Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

PARAMETERS

4

201

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(11) Switching of operation mode by external signal (X65, X66 signals)
⋅ When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 2, 6", the operation mode switching signals (X65, X66) can be used to change the PU or
External operation mode to Network operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop or start command OFF).
(Pr. 79 = "6" switch-over mode can be changed during operation)
⋅ When switching between the Network operation mode and PU operation mode
1) Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value) or "6".
2) Set "10 or 12" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection.
3) Set "65" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the PU-NET operation switchover signal (X65) to the terminal.
4) The operation mode changes to PU operation mode when the X65 signal turns ON, or to Network operation mode
when the X65 signal turns OFF.
Pr. 340
Setting

Pr. 79
Setting
0 (initial value)
1
2
3, 4

10, 12

6
7

X12(MRS)ON
X12(MRS)OFF

*1
*2

ON (PU)

X65 Signal State
OFF (NET)

PU operation mode *1
NET operation mode *2
PU operation mode
NET operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode
PU operation mode *1

NET operation mode *2

Switching among the external and PU operation mode is
enabled *3
External operation mode

Remarks

Fixed to PU operation mode
Fixed to NET operation mode
External/PU combined mode fixed
Switching operation mode is enabled while
running.
Output stop in External operation mode
Forcibly switched to External operation mode

NET operation mode when the X66 signal is ON.
PU operation mode when the X16 signal is OFF. PU operation mode also when Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0"
(communication option command source) and the communication option is not fitted.
External operation mode when the X16 signal is ON.

⋅ When switching between the network operation mode and External operation mode
1) Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value), "2", "6" or "7". (At the Pr. 79 setting of "7", the operation mode can be switched when the
X12 (MRS) signal turns ON.)
2) Set "0 (initial value), 1 or 2" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection.
3) Set "66" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 to assign the External-NET operation switching signal (X66) to the terminal.
4) The operation mode changes to network operation mode when the X66 signal turns ON, or to External operation
mode when the X66 signal turns OFF.
Pr. 340
Setting

Pr. 79
Setting

X66 Signal State
ON (NET)
OFF(external)

0 (initial value)

NET operation mode *1
External operation mode *2
PU operation mode

1
2

0

3, 4

(initial value),

1, 2

6
7

*1
*2

X12(MRS)ON
X12(MRS)OFF

External operation mode
NET operation mode *1
External/PU combined operation mode
NET operation mode *1

External operation mode *2

NET operation mode *1
External operation mode *2
External operation mode

Remarks

Fixed to PU operation mode
Switching to PU operation mode is disabled.
External/PU combined mode fixed
Switching operation mode is enabled while
running.
Output stop in External operation mode
Forcibly switched to External operation mode

PU operation mode is selected when Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = "0" (communication option command source) and
the communication option is not fitted.
PU operation is selected when the X16 signal is OFF. When the X65 signal has been assigned, the operation mode changes with the ON/OFF
state of the X65 signal.

REMARKS
⋅ The priorities of Pr. 79, Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79 > X12 > X66 > X65 > X16 > Pr. 340.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 15 Jog frequency
Refer to page 95.
Pr. 4 to 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Multi-speed operation
Refer to page 93.
Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Refer to page 186.
Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
Refer to page 315.
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122.
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (Output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 128.
Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection
Refer to page 203.
Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
Refer to page 204.

202

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
4.18.2 Operation mode at power ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)
When power is switched ON or when power comes back on after instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be
started up in Network operation mode.
After the inverter has started up in the Network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be performed
from a program.
Set this mode for communication operation using the RS-485 terminals or communication option.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

79

Operation mode selection

0

0 to 4, 6, 7
0
1, 2

340 *

Communication startup
mode selection

0
10, 12

Description
Select the operation mode. (Refer to page 197.)
As set in Pr. 79.
Started in network operation mode.
When the setting is "2", it will resume the pre-instantaneous
power failure operation mode after an instantaneous power
failure occurs.
Started in network operation mode. Operation mode can be
changed between the PU operation mode and Network
operation mode from the operation panel. When the setting is
"12", it will resume the pre-instantaneous power failure
operation mode after an instantaneous power failure occurs.

The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
* The parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". However, the parameters can be set whenever the communication option is
connected. (Refer to page 190.).

(1) Specify operation mode at power ON (Pr. 340)
⋅ Depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings, the operation mode at power ON (reset) changes as described below.

0
(initial
value)
1
0
(initial
value)

2
3, 4
6

Operation Mode at Power ON, Power
Restoration, Reset
External operation mode
PU operation mode
External operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode
External operation mode
External operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal ON

7
External operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal OFF

1, 2 *1

0
1
2
3, 4
6
7
0

10, 12
*1

*1

1
2
3, 4

NET operation mode
PU operation mode
NET operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode
NET operation mode
NET operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal ON
External operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal OFF
NET operation mode
PU operation mode
NET operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode

6

NET operation mode

7

External operation mode

Operation Mode Switching
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode
is enabled *2
Fixed to PU operation mode
Switching between the External and Net operation mode is
enabled
Switching to PU operation mode is disabled
Operation mode switching is disabled
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode
is enabled while running
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode
is enabled *2
Fixed to External operation mode (Forcibly switched to
External operation mode.)

Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"

4
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is
enabled *3
Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
Fixed to NET operation mode
Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is
enabled while running *3
Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"

*2

The Pr. 340 setting "2" or "12" is mainly used for communication operation using the inverter RS-485 terminals. When a value other than "9999" (selection
of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure) is set in Pr. 57 Restart coasting time, the inverter will resume the same operation state which was in
before after power has been restored from an instantaneous power failure.
When Pr. 340 = "1, 10", a start command turns OFF if power failure has occurred and then restored during a start command is ON.
The operation mode cannot be switched directly between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode.

*3

Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode with

key of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and X65 signal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time
Refer to page 152.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195.

203

PARAMETERS

Pr. 340
Pr. 79
Setting Setting

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
4.18.3 Start command source and speed command source during
communication operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551)
When the RS-485 terminals or communication option is used, the external start command and frequency
command can be valid. Also, the command source in the PU operation mode can be selected.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

338

Communication operation
command source

0

0
1

Start command source communication
Start command source external

0
1

Frequency command source communication
Frequency command source external
Frequency command source external (Frequency command from
communication is valid, frequency command from terminal 2 is
invalid)

339

Communication speed
command source

0
2
0

550 *

1

NET mode operation
command source
selection

9999

Description

The communication option is the command source when NET
operation mode.
RS-485 terminals are the command source when NET operation mode.
Automatic communication option recognition

9999

Normally, RS-485 terminals are the command source. When a
communication option is mounted, the communication option is the
command source.

551 *

PU mode operation
command source selection

2

1
2

RS-485 terminals are the command source when PU operation mode.
PU connector is the command source when PU operation mode.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". However, the parameters can be set whenever the communication
option is connected. (Refer to page 190.)
* Pr 550 and Pr. 551 are always write-enabled.

(1) Select the command source of the Network operation mode (Pr. 550)
⋅ Either the RS-485 terminals or communication option can be specified as the command source in Network
operation mode.
⋅ For example, set Pr. 550 to "1" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency command from the
inverter RS-485 terminals in the Network operation mode independently of whether the communication option is
connected or not.
CAUTION
⋅ Since Pr. 550 = "9999" (automatic recognition of the communication option) in the initial setting, parameter write, start command
and frequency command cannot be executed by communication using the inverter RS-485 terminals when the communication
option is fitted. (Monitor and parameter read can be performed.)

(2) Select the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr. 551)
⋅ Either the PU connector or RS-485 terminals can be specified as the source in the PU operation mode.
⋅ When performing parameter write, giving start command and frequency command from communication with the
RS-485 terminals in PU operation mode, set "1" in Pr. 551.
CAUTION
⋅ The PU operation mode has a higher priority when Pr. 550 = "1" (NET mode RS-485 terminals) and Pr. 551 = "1" (PU mode RS-485
terminals). When the communication option is not fitted, therefore, the operation mode cannot be switched to Network operation
mode.

Pr. 550
Setting
0
1

Pr. 551
Setting

PU connector

1

×

2 (initial value)

NET operation mode *2

PU operation mode

PU operation mode *1
×

1

×

PU operation mode *1

×

2 (initial value)
1

PU operation mode
×

NET operation mode
PU operation mode *1
×

×
NET operation mode *2
NET operation mode

2 (initial value)

PU operation mode

NET operation mode

×

9999
(initial value)

*1
*2

Command Source
RS-485 terminals
Communication option

Remarks

NET operation mode *2
Switching to NET
operation mode disabled

Communication option fitted
Communication option not
fitted

The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. When using the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr. 551 to "2".
When the communication option is not fitted, the operation mode cannot be switched to Network operation mode.

204

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(3) Controllability through communication

Control by communication from
RS-485 terminals

Control by RS-485 communication from PU connector

Operation
Location

Condition
(Pr. 551
Setting)

Operation
Mode

PU
Operation

Item

×

Run command (start)
Run command (stop)
2
(PU
connector)

External/PU
Combined
External
Operation Mode
Operation
1
(Pr. 79 = 3)
*3

Running frequency
setting

External/PU
Combined
Operation
Mode 2
(Pr. 79 = 4)

NET Operation
(when RS-485
terminals are
used) *6

×

×

*3

×

NET Operation
(when
communication
option is used) *7

*3

×

×

Monitor
Parameter write

*4

× *5

*4

× *5

*4

Parameter read
Inverter reset
Run command (start)
Run command (stop)
Running frequency
setting
Except for 2

×
*3

×
*3

×
*3

×

×

*3

*3

×

×

×

×

×

× *5

× *5

× *5

× *5

× *5

Run command(start,
stop)

×

×

Running frequency
setting

×

Monitor
Parameter write
Parameter read
Inverter reset

1
(RS-485
terminals)

×
×

×

Monitor
Parameter write

*4

× *5

*4

× *5

*4

Parameter read
Inverter reset

Except for 1

Run command
(start, stop)

×

×

×

×

*1

×

Running frequency
setting

×

×

×

×

*1

×

× *5

× *5

× *5

× *5

*4

× *5

Inverter reset

×

×

×

×

*2

×

Run command
(start, stop)

×

×

×

×

×

*1

Running frequency
setting

×

×

×

×

×

*1

× *5

× *5

× *5

× *5

× *5

*4

×

×

×

×

×

*2

Monitor
Parameter write

⎯

Monitor
Parameter write
Parameter read
Inverter reset
Inverter reset

⎯

Run command
(start, stop)

×

Frequency setting

×

×
×

× *1

: Enabled, ×: Disabled,
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7

4

× *1

: Some are enabled

As set in Pr. 338 Communication operation command source and Pr. 339 Communication speed command source. (Refer to page 204)
At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.
Enabled only when stopped by the PU. At a PU stop, PS is displayed on the operation panel. As set in Pr. 75 PU stop selection . (Refer to page 186)
Some parameters may be write-disabled according to the Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting and operating status. (Refer to page 189)
Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. When Pr. 77 = 2, write is
enabled. (Refer to page 62 for the parameter list)Parameter clear is disabled.
When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 1 (RS-485 terminals valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection =
9999 and the communication option is not fitted.
When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 0 (communication option valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
= 9999 and the communication option is fitted.

205

PARAMETERS

Control circuit
Control by communication
external terminals from communication option

Parameter read

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(4) Operation at error occurrence
Error
Definition
Inverter fault

Operation
Mode
Condition
(Pr. 551 setting)
2 (PU connector)

Communication
error of PU
connector

2 (PU connector)

Communication
error of
communication
option
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

External
Operation

External/PU
Combined
Operation
Mode 1
(Pr. 79 =3)

Stop/
continued

Continued

*2

Stop/
continued

Continued

*2

⎯

NET Operation
(when
communication
option is used)
*6

Stop/continued

Continued

*2

Continued

1 (RS-485 terminals)

2 (PU connector)

NET Operation
(when RS-485
terminals are
used) *5

Stop/continued *1

1 (RS-485 terminals)

1 (RS-485 terminals)

External/PU
Combined
Operation Mode
2
(Pr. 79 =4)

Stop
Stop/continued *1, 4

⎯

PU
disconnection
of the PU
connector

Communication
error of RS-485
terminals

PU
Operation

Stop/continued

Continued

*2

Continued

Stop/continued

Continued

Stop/continued

*2

*3

Continued
Continued

Can be selected using Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Can be selected using Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval, Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval, Pr. 502 Stop mode selection at
communication error or Pr. 539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval.
As controlled by the communication option.
In the PU jog operation mode, operation is always stopped when the PU is disconnected. Whether fault (E.PUE) occurrence is allowed or not is as
set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 1 (RS-485 terminals valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection =
9999 and the communication option is not fitted
When Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection = 0 (communication option valid) or Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
= 9999 and the communication option is fitted

206

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
(5) Selection of command source in Network operation mode (Pr. 338, Pr. 339)
⋅ There are two control sources: operation command source, which controls the signals related to the inverter start
command and function selection, and speed command source, which controls signals related to frequency setting.

⋅ In Network operation mode, the commands from the external terminals and communication (RS-485 terminals or
communication option) are as listed below.
Pr. 339 Communication speed command source 0: NET

Running frequency from communication
Fixed function
Terminal 2
(Terminalequivalent
Terminal 4
function)
Terminal 1

Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 setting

1: External

1:External 2:External 0: NET

1:External 2:External

NET

⎯

NET

NET

⎯

NET

⎯
⎯

External

⎯

⎯
⎯

External

⎯

External

Compensation

0

RL

1

RM

Middle-speed operation command/
remote setting deceleration

NET

External

NET

External

2

RH

High speed operation command/
remote setting acceleration

NET

External

NET

External

3

RT

Second function selection

4

AU

Terminal 4 input selection

NET

External

NET

External

NET

⎯

Combined

CS

Selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure

External

7

OH

External thermal relay input

External

8

REX 15-speed selection

10

X10

Inverter run enable signal

External

11

X11

FR-HC or MT-HC connection,
instantaneous power failure detection

External

12

X12

PU operation external interlock

External

13

X13

External DC injection brake
operation is started

14

X14

PID control valid terminal

16

X16

PU/External operation switchover

25

STOP Start self-holding selection

NET

NET
NET

External

Pr. 59 = "0"
(multi-speeds)

External
NET

Combined

External

PU operation interlock

External

⎯

Pr. 79 ≠ "7"
Pr. 79 = "7"
When X12 signal
is not assigned

External
External

50

SQ

Sequence start

51

X51

Fault clear signal

60

STF

61
62

RES Reset

63

PTC PTC thermistor input

64

X64

PID forward action switchover

65

X65

PU/NET operation switchover

External

66

X66

External/NET operation switchover

External

67

X67

Command source switchover

70
71

X70 DC feeding operation permission
X71 DC feeding cancel
X72 PID integral value reset
X77 Pre-charge end command
X78 Second pre-charge end command

72
77
78

External

External

Output stop
MRS

External

Combined
External

6

NET

Pr. 59 = "0" (multispeeds)
Pr. 59 = "1 , 2"
(remote)

External

⎯

⎯

JOG Jog operation selection

24

Remarks

External

Low speed operation command/
remote setting clear

5

Selective function

0: NET

Pr. 338 Communication operation command source

NET

External

Combined

External

Forward rotation command

NET

External

STR Reverse rotation command

NET

External
External
External

NET

External

NET

External

4

External

NET
NET

PARAMETERS

Operation
Location
Selection

External
External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

NET

External

[Explanation of table]
External
NET
Combined

: Command only from control terminal signal is valid.
: Command only from communication is valid
: Command from either of external terminal and communication is valid.
⎯
: Command from either of external terminal and communication is invalid.
Compensation : Command by signal from external terminal is only valid when Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection = "1"

207

Selection of operation mode and
operation location
REMARKS
⋅ The command source of communication is as set in Pr. 550 and Pr. 551.
⋅ The Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr. 77 = "2". Note that the setting change is
reflected after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, communication operation command source and
communication speed command source before the setting change are valid.

(6) Switching of command source by external terminal (X67)
⋅ In Network operation mode, the command source switching signal (X67) can be used to switch the start command
source and speed command source. This signal can be utilized to control the signal input from both the control
terminal and communication.
⋅ Set "67" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) to assign the X67 signal to the control terminal.
⋅ When the X67 signal is OFF, the start command source and speed command source are control terminal.
X67 Signal State

Start Command Source

Speed Command Source

According to Pr. 338

According to Pr. 339

No signal assignment
ON
OFF

Command is valid only from control terminal signal.

REMARKS
⋅ The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is reflected only during a stop. It is reflected after a stop when the terminal is switched while
the inverter is running.
⋅ When the X67 signal is OFF, a reset via communication is disabled.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Please
set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 28 Multi-speed input compensation selection
Refer to page 97.
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 98.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195.

208

Communication operation and setting

4.19 Communication operation and setting
Purpose
Communication operation from PU
connector

Communication operation from RS485 terminals

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set
Initial setting of computer link
communication (PU connector)
Initial setting of computer link
communication (RS-485
terminals)
Modbus-RTU communication
specifications

Pr. 117 to Pr. 124
Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 502,
Pr. 779

BACnet MS/TP protocol
Restrictions on parameter write
through communication
Operation selection the at a
communication error

Communication EEPROM write
selection
Stop mode selection at
communication error

Operation by PLC function

PLC function

Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343,
Pr. 502, Pr. 549, Pr. 779
Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 390, Pr. 549,
Pr. 726 to Pr. 729

214

232
247

Pr. 342

216

Pr. 502, Pr. 779

216

Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498,
Pr. 506 to Pr. 515,
Pr. 826 to Pr. 865

260

4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector
Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program
can run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.

(1) PU connector pin-outs

Inverter
(Receptacle side)
Front view

8)
to
1)

Pin Number

Name

1)

SG

2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

⎯
RDA
SDB
SDA
RDB

7)

SG

8)

⎯

Description
Ground
(connected to terminal 5)
Operation panel power supply
Inverter receive+
Inverter sendInverter send+
Inverter receiveGround
(connected to terminal 5)
Operation panel power supply

CAUTION
⋅ Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the operation panel or parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
⋅ Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector. The
product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.

209

PARAMETERS

4

Communication operation and setting
(2) PU connector communication system configuration and wiring
z System configuration

FR-DU07

PU
connector

Operation
panel
connector
FR-ADP
(option)

Inverter
PU
connector

RS-485
interface/
terminals

RJ-45 connector
RJ-45 connector

Station 0

Computer

Station 0

Computer

Inverter

RS-232C
cable

Inverter

RS-232C
connector

Maximum
15m
RS-232C-RS-485
converter

PU
connector

RJ-45
connector

Communication cable 1)

Communication cable 1)

RJ-45
connector

Communication cable 1)

z Connection with RS-485 computer
Inverter
Computer Side Terminals

Cable connection and signal direction

PU connector
RS-485 terminal

Signal name

Description

RDA

Receive data

SDA

RDB

Receive data

SDB

SDA

Send data

RDA

SDB

Send data

RDB

RSA

Request to send

RSB

Request to send

CSA

Clear to send

CSB

Clear to send

SG

Signal ground

FG

Frame ground

Communication cable

*

0.2mm2 or more

SG

* Make connections in accordance with the manual of the computer used. Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since
they change with the model.

REMARKS
⋅ Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Commercially available product examples (as of October 2008)

Product
1)

Communication

cable

Type

Maker

SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m)
24AWG × 4P *

Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.

* Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the communication cable.

CAUTION
When performing RS-485 communication with multiple inverters, use the RS-485 terminals. (Refer to page 212)

210

Communication operation and setting
4.19.2 Wiring and arrangement of RS-485 terminals
(1) RS-485 terminal layout
Name

OPEN
Terminating resistor switch
Factory-set to "OPEN".
Set only the terminating resistor switch of
the remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

100Ω

RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2
(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)

TXD

RXD

SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2
(TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)

P5S SG
P5S
SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND)

VCC

Description

RDA1
(RXD1+)
RDB1
(RXD1-)
RDA2
(RXD2+)
RDB2
(RXD2-)
SDA1
(TXD1+)
SDB1
(TXD1-)
SDA2
(TXD2+)
SDB2
(TXD2-)
P5S
(VCC)

Inverter send+
(for branch)
Inverter send(for branch)
5V
Permissible load current 100mA

SG
(GND)

Ground
(connected to terminal SD)

Inverter receive+
Inverter receiveInverter receive+
(for branch)
Inverter receive(for branch)
Inverter send+
Inverter send-

(2) Connection of RS-485 terminals and wires
Loosen the terminal screw and insert the cable into the terminal.
Screw size
Tightening
torque

M2

Cable size

0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2

Screwdriver

Small
flathead screwdriver
(Tip thickness: 0.4mm /tip width: 2.5mm)

Wire the stripped cable after twisting it to prevent it from
becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.

0.22N•m to 0.25N•m

5mm
(0.2inches)

Use a blade terminal as necessary.

CAUTION
Undertightening can cause signal loss or malfunction. Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to damage to
the screw or unit.

REMARKS
Information on blade terminals
Blade terminals available on the market: (as of March 2008)

zPhoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
without insulation sleeve

Blade terminal
crimping tool

0.3, 0.5

AI 0,5-6WH

A 0,5-6

CRIMPFOX ZA3

Terminal Screw
Size

Wire Size (mm2)

Blade terminal product
number

Insulation product
number

Blade terminal
crimping tool

M2

0.3 to 0.75

BT 0.75-7

VC 0.75

NH 67

Wire Size (mm2)

M2

4

zNICHIFU Co.,Ltd.

Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and power circuits
(including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
When using the blade terminal (without insulation sleeve), use care so that the stranded wires do not come out.

211

PARAMETERS

Blade Terminal Model
with insulation sleeve

Terminal Screw
Size

Communication operation and setting
(3) RS-485 terminal system configuration
z Connection of a computer to the inverter (1:1 connection)
Computer

Computer
Inverter

Inverter

RS-485
terminals
*

RS-485
interface/
terminals

RS-485
RS-232C
cable

terminals
Maximum
15m (49.2 feet)
*
Converter

Twisted pair cable

Twisted pair cable
*Set the terminating resistor switch to the "100Ω" position.

z Combination of computer and multiple inverters (1:n connection)
Station 0

Computer

RS-485
interface terminals

Station 1

Station number n

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

RS-485
terminals

RS-485
terminals

RS-485
terminals

*

*

*
*Set only the terminating resistor switch of the
remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

Twisted pair cable
Station 0

Computer
RS-232C
Converter
RS-232C
cable

Maximum
15m (49.2 feet)

Station number n

Inverter

Inverter

Inverter

RS-485
terminals

RS-485
terminals

RS-485
terminals

*

*

*

Converter

Twisted pair cable

212

Station 1

*Set only the terminating resistor switch of the
remotest inverter to the "100Ω" position.

Communication operation and setting
(4) RS-485 terminal wiring method
z Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
+
+

RSA
RSB

*2

*1
SDB1
SDA1
RDB1
RDA1

CSA
CSB

SG

SG
FG

z Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" inverters (several inverters)
Computer
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB

CSB
SG
FG
*1
*2

SG

SG
Station 0

SG

+
+

+
+
+
+

SG

*2

SDB1
SDA1
RDB1
RDA1

*1

RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2

CSA

SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2

RSB

SDB1
SDA1
SDB2
SDA2
RDB1
RDA1
RDB2
RDA2

+
+
+
+

RSA

SG

Station 1

Station n

Make connections in accordance with the manual of the computer used.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since they change with the model.
For the inverter farthest from the computer, set the terminating resistor switch to ON (100Ω side).

REMARKS
For branching, connect the wires as shown below.

+ - + To computer send
TXD

+ - + -

RXD

+ - + -

TXD

RXD

To receiving terminal
of the next inverter

+ - + -

To computer receive
SG

SG VCC

SG

SG VCC

To receiving terminal
of the next inverter
To next inverter
To earth
ground
terminal
terminal

To computer ground

4
If the computer is 2-wire type, pass wires across receiving terminals and transmission terminals of the RS-485
terminals to enable 2-wire type connection with the inverter.
Computer

Inverter
TXD+
TXD-

Transmission
enable
Reception
enable

RXD+
Pass a wire
SG

RXDSG

REMARKS
A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception is
disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.

213

PARAMETERS

(5) 2-wire type connection

Communication operation and setting
4.19.3 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 124, Pr. 331 to Pr. 337, Pr. 341, Pr. 549)
Used to perform required settings for communication between the inverter and personal computer.
There are two different communications: communication using the PU connector of the inverter and
communication using the RS-485 terminals.
You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link
communication), Modbus-RTU protocol and BACnet MS/TP protocol.
To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, initialization of the communication
specifications must be made to the inverter.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error.

[PU connector communication related parameter]
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

117

PU communication station
number

0

0 to 31

118

PU communication speed

192

48, 96, 192, 384

119

PU communication stop bit
length

1

120

PU communication parity
check

2

121

Number of PU
communication retries

1

0
1
10
11
0
1
2
0 to 10

9999
0
122

PU communication check
time interval

9999

0.1 to 999.8s
9999

123

124

PU communication waiting
time setting

9999

PU communication CR/LF
selection

1

0 to 150ms
9999
0
1
2

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

214

Description
Specifies the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or
more inverters are connected to one personal
computer.
Set the communication speed.
The setting value × 100 equals the
communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is
19200bps when the setting value is "192".
Stop bit length
Data length
1bit
8bit
2bit
1bit
7bit
2bit
Without parity check
With odd parity check
With even parity check
Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error. If the
number of consecutive errors exceeds the
permissible value, the inverter trips.
If a communication error occurs, the inverter
will not come to trip.
No PU connector communication
Set the interval of communication check time.
If a no-communication state persists for
longer than the permissible time, the inverter
trips.
No communication check
Set the waiting time between data
transmission to the inverter and response.
Set with communication data.
Without CR/LF
With CR
With CR/LF

Communication operation and setting
[RS-485 terminal communication related parameter]

331

332

333 *1*2
334 *1
335 *1*3

Name

RS-485 communication
station number

RS-485 communication
speed

RS-485 communication
stop bit length
RS-485 communication
parity check selection
RS-485 communication
retry count

Initial
Value

0

96

Setting Range
Pr. 549
0
(Mitsubishi
protocol)
1
(Modbus-RTU)
2
(BACnet)
Pr. 549
0
(Mitsubishi
protocol)
1
(Modbus-RTU)
2
(BACnet)

0 to 31 *6
0 to 247

RS-485 communication
check time interval

3, 6, 12, 24,
48, 96, 192,
384 *6
96, 192,
384, 768 *6

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

Select stop bit length and data length.
(same specifications as Pr. 119)

0, 1, 10, 11

2

0, 1, 2

Select the parity check specifications.
(same specifications as Pr. 120)

1

0 to 10, 9999

Set the permissible number of retries at
occurrence of a data receive error.
(same specifications as Pr. 121)

0s

0.1 to 999.8s

337 *1*3

RS-485 communication
waiting time setting

9999

0 to 150ms, 9999

341 *1*3

RS-485 communication
CR/LF selection

1

0, 1, 2

1

0
1
2

Protocol selection

Used to select the communication speed.
(same specifications as Pr. 118 )

1

9999

549

Set the inverter station number. (same
specifications as Pr. 117 )

0 to 127 *6

0
336 *3

Description

RS-485 communication is available, but the
inverter trips in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of communication check
time. (same specifications as Pr. 122)
No communication check
Set the waiting time between data
transmission to the inverter and response.
(same specifications as Pr. 123)
Select presence/absence of CR/LF.
(same specifications as Pr. 124)
Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
Modbus-RTU protocol *4
BACnet MS/TP protocol *4

Invalid during the BACnet MS/TP protocol.
For the Modbus-RTU protocol, the data length is always 8 bits and the stop bit depends on the Pr. 334 setting. (Refer to page 232)
For the BACnet MS/TP protocol, the data length is always 8 bits and the stop bit is always 8 bit.
Invalid during the Modbus-RTU protocol.
The Modbus-RTU protocol and BACnet MS/TP protocol are valid for only communication from the RS-485 terminals.
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
The inverter works with the initial parameter setting if a value other than the setting range is set.
...... The specification differs according to the manufacture date. Refer to page 400 and check the SERIAL.

4

CAUTION
⋅ If communication is made without Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval being changed from "0" (initial value), monitor,
parameter read, etc. can be performed, but the inverter results in an alarm as soon as it is switched to the NET operation mode.
If the operation mode at power ON is the Network operation mode, a communication fault (E.SER) occurs after first
communication.
When performing operation or parameter write through communication, set "9999" or more to Pr. 336. (The setting depends on
the computer side program.) (Refer to page 224)
⋅ Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After you have changed the communication-related
parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.

215

PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

Communication operation and setting
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)
When parameter write is performed from PU connector, RS-485 terminal, and communication option connected
to the inverter, parameter’s storage device can be changed from EEPROM + RAM to only RAM. Set this
parameter when frequent parameter changes are required.
Parameter
Number

Name

342

Communication EEPROM write
selection

Initial Value

Setting
Range

Description

0

Parameter values written by communication
are written to the EEPROM and RAM.

1

Parameter values written by communication
are written to the RAM.

0

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". However, it can be set any time when the communication
option is connected. (Refer to page 190)

⋅ When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write them to the RAM. The life of the EEPROM
will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial value)" (EEPROM
write).
REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 342 is set to "1" (only RAM write), the new values of the parameters will be cleared at power supply-OFF of the inverter.
Therefore, the parameter values available when power is switched ON again are the values stored in EEPROM previously.

4.19.5 Operation selection at communication error (Pr.502, Pr.779)
For communication using RS-485 terminals or a communication option, operation at a communication error can
be selected. The operation is active under the Network operation mode.
Parameter
number

Name

Initial
value

Setting
range

Description
At error
occurrence

Indication

779

Stop mode selection at
communication error

0

Operation frequency
during communication
error

9999

* E.OP1 or E.OP2 appears when using a communication option.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0." (Refer to page 190.)
...... The specification differs according to the manufacture date. Refer to page 400 and check the SERIAL.

216

At error
removal

Stops
Coasts to
E.SER*
Output
(E.SER)*
stop
Decelerates E.SER after Output after
Stops
1
to stop
stop*
stop
(E.SER)*
Decelerates E.SER after
Without
2
Restarts
to stop
stop*
output
Continues
Without
Operates
3
running at
⎯
output
normally
Pr. 779
Motor runs at the specified frequency at a communication
0 to 400Hz
error.
Motor runs at the frequency used before the
9999
communication error.
0

502

Fault
output

Communication operation and setting
⋅ Select the stop operation at the retry count excess (Pr. 335, only with Mitsubishi inverter protocol) or at a signal loss
detection (Pr. 336, Pr. 539).
⋅ Operation at an error
Pr. 502 setting
Operation
Indication
Fault output
0
(Initial setting)
1
2
3

Coasts to stop

E.SER is lit*

Output

Decelerates to stop

E.SER is lit after stop*

Output after stop
Not output

Operates at the
frequency set in Pr.779.

Normal indication

Not output

Indication

Fault output

Stop status continues

E.SER continues*

Output continues

Restarts
Operates normally

Normal indication
Normal indication

Not output
Not output

⋅ Operation after the error is removed
Pr. 502 setting
Operation
0
(Initial setting)
1
2
3

* E.OP1 or E.OP2 appears when using a communication option.

Pr. 502 ="0 (initial setting)"

Pr. 502 ="1"
Fault removal

Fault recognition
ON

OFF

Fault removal

Fault recognition
Communication
fault

OFF

ON

Output frequency

Motor coasting

Output frequency

Communication
fault

OFF

OFF

Decelerates to stop

Time
Fault display
(E.SER *1)
Fault output
(ALM)

Display
OFF

Display

Fault display
(E.SER *1)
Fault output
(ALM)

ON

Pr. 502 ="2"

OFF

ON

Pr. 502 ="3"

OFF

Fault recognition

Fault removal

Fault recognition
Communication
fault

Time

ON

Communication
fault

OFF

OFF

Fault removal
ON

OFF

Pr.779 "9999"
(Runs at the frequency setting of Pr. 779 )
Time

Time
Fault display
(E.SER *1)
Fault output
(ALM)

*1
*2

Display
OFF

Fault display

Not displayed

Fault output
(ALM)

OFF

Alarm output
(LF *2)

OFF

ON

OFF

E.OP1 or E.OP2 appears when using communication through communication option.
When a communication error is detected while Pr.502 = "3," the alarm (LF) is output to an output terminal of the inverter. To use the LF signal,
assign the function to an output terminal by setting "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in any of Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function
selection).

217

4
PARAMETERS

Output frequency

Output frequency

Pr. 779 = "9999"
Decelerates
to stop

Communication operation and setting
REMARKS
⋅ Fault output indicates the fault output signal (ALM signal) and an alarm bit output.
⋅ When the fault output setting is active, a fault record is saved in the faults history. (A fault record is written to the faults history at a
fault output. )
When the fault output setting is not active, a fault record is overwritten to the faults history temporarily but not stored.
After the error is removed, the fault indication goes back to normal indication in the monitor, and the faults history goes back to the
previous status.
⋅ If Pr. 502 is set to "1, 2, or 3," the normal deceleration time setting (settings like Pr. 8, Pr. 44, and Pr. 45) is applied as the
deceleration time. Normal acceleration time setting (settings like Pr. 7 and Pr. 44) is applied as the acceleration time for restart.
⋅ When Pr.502 = "2 or 3," the inverter operates with the start command and the speed command, which were used before the error.
⋅ If a communication line error occurs, then the error is removed during deceleration while Pr. 502 = "2," the motor re-accelerates
as soon as the error is removed.
⋅ These parameters are valid when communication is performed from the RS-485 terminals or a communication option.
⋅ These parameters are valid under the Network operation mode. When performing communication with RS-485 terminals, set Pr.
551 PU mode operation command source selection="2 (initial setting)."
⋅ Pr. 502 is valid for the device that has the command source under the Network operation mode. If a communication option is
installed while Pr. 550 = "9999 (initial setting)," a communication error in RS-485 terminals occurs and Pr. 502 becomes invalid.
⋅ If the communication error setting is disabled with Pr. 502 = "3," Pr. 335 = "9999," and Pr. 539 = "9999," the inverter does not
continue its operation with the frequency set by Pr. 779 at a communication error.
⋅ If a communication error occurs while continuous operation at Pr. 779 is selected with Pr. 502 = "3," the inverter operates at the
frequency set in Pr. 779 even though the speed command source is at the external terminals.
Example) If a communication error occurs while Pr. 339 = "2" and the external terminal RL is ON, the operation is continued at the
frequency set in Pr. 779.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 7 Acceleration time Pr. 8 Deceleration time
Refer to page 101
Refer to page 214
Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
Refer to page 214
Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval
Pr. 539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval
Refer to page 232
Refer to page 204
Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection
Refer to page 204

218

Communication operation and setting
4.19.6 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
You can perform parameter setting, monitor, etc. from the PU connector or RS-485 terminals of the inverter
using the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication).

(1) Communication specifications
⋅ The communication specifications are given below.
Item

Description

Communication protocol
Conforming standard

Mitsubishi protocol (computer link)
EIA-485 (RS-485)

Number of inverters connected
Communication
speed

1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations

PU connector

Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400bps
Can be selected from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and
38400bps
Asynchronous system
Half-duplex system

RS-485 terminal

Control protocol
Communication method
Character system

ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected)

Start bit
Communication
specifications

1bit

Stop bit length

1 bit or 2 bits can be selected

Parity check

Check (with even or odd parity) or no check can be selected

Error check

Sum code check

Terminator

CR/LF (presence or absence can be selected)

Waiting time setting

Selectable between presence and absence

Related
Parameters
Pr. 551
⎯
Pr. 117
Pr. 331
Pr. 118
Pr. 332
⎯
⎯
Pr. 119
Pr. 333
⎯
Pr. 119
Pr. 333
Pr. 120
Pr. 334
⎯
Pr. 124
Pr. 341
Pr. 123
Pr. 337

(2) Communication procedure
Computer
(Data flow)

*2
1)

Inverter

4)
2)

Inverter

3)

*1
(Data flow)
Computer

*1
*2

When data is written

5)

⋅ Data communication between the computer and
inverter is made in the following procedure.
1) Request data is sent from the computer to the
inverter. (The inverter will not send data unless
Time
requested.)
2) After waiting for the waiting time
3) The inverter sends reply data to the computer in
response to the computer request.
4) After having waited for the time taken for inverter
processing
5) Answer from computer in response to reply data
3) is sent. (Even if 5) is not sent, subsequent
communication is made property.)

If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to trip if the number of
consecutive retries exceeds the parameter setting.
On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns "reply data 3)" to the computer again. The inverter comes to trip if the number of
consecutive data errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.

219

4
PARAMETERS

When data is read

Communication operation and setting
(3) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types
⋅ Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).
⋅ Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
Run
Running
Multi
Parameter
Command Frequency command
Write

Operation

Symbol

Communication request is sent to the
inverter in accordance with the user
program in the computer.
Inverter data processing time

1)
2)

No error

Reply data from the
inverter (Data 1) is
checked for error)

3)

A

A

B

B

Present

Present

Present

Present

Absent

Present

C

C

C1 *3

C

C *2

Present
E, E1,
E2, E3

D

D

D

D

D *2

D

D

(Request rejected)

5)

*1

A2

With error.

No error *1
Answer from
(No
inverter
computer in response
processing)
to reply data 3)
With error
(Data 3) is checked
(Inverter refor error)
outputs 3))

Parameter
Read

A

*1

Computer processing delay time

Monitor

A, A1

(Request accepted)

4)

Inverter
Reset

E

10ms or more
Absent

Absent

Absent
(C)

Absent

Absent

Absent
(C)

Absent (C)

Absent

Absent

F

Absent

Absent

F

F

In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to
page 222)
The inverter response to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 227)
At mode error, and data range error, C1 data contains an error code. (Refer to page 231) Except for those errors, the error is returned with data
format D.

*2
*3

Data writing format
Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
Format

1

2

A

ENQ

A1

ENQ

A2

ENQ

*1

*1

*1

3

Inverter
station
number *2
Inverter
station
number *2
Inverter
station
number *2

4

5

6

7

8

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

Instruction
code

*3

Instruction
code

*3

Data

Instruction
code

*3

Send Receive
data data
type type

Sum
check

Data
Sum
check

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

*4

*4

Data1

Sum
check

Data2

*4

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format

1

2

C

ACK

C1

STX

*1

*1

3

Inverter
station
number *2
Inverter
station
number *2

4

5

6

7

8

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

*4

Send Receive
Error Error
data data
code 1 code 2
type type

Data1

Data2

ETX
*1

Sum
check

*4

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format

D
*1
*2
*3
*4

1

Number of Characters
2
3
4
5

NAK
*1

Inverter
station
number *2

Error
code

*4

Indicate a control code
Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
When Pr.123 and Pr.337 (Waiting time setting) ≠ 9999, create a communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The
number of characters decreases by 1.)
CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a
data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF
codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 PU communication CR/LF selection.

220

Communication operation and setting
Data reading format
Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
Format
B

1

2

ENQ
*1

3

Inverter
station number *2

Number of Characters
4
5
6
Instruction code

7

*3

8
Sum
check

9
*4

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format

1

2

E

STX

E1

STX

E2

STX

Format
E3

*1
*1
*1

1

Inverter
station number *2
Inverter
station number *2
Inverter
station number *2

2

STX
*1

3

4

5

Number of Characters
6
7
8

Read data
Read data

ETX
*1

Sum
check

Number of Characters
4 to 23

Inverter
station number *2

Read data (Inverter model information)

10
Sum
check

*1

Read data

3

9

ETX

11

12

13

*4

*4

ETX

Sum
check

*1

24

ETX
*1

25

*4

26
Sum
check

27
*4

Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format

D

Number of Characters
2
3
4

1

NAK
*1

Inverter
station number *2

Error
code

5
*4

Send data from the computer to the inverter 5)
Format

C
(Without
data error)

F
(With data
error)

*4

Number of Characters
2
3
4

ACK
*1

NAK
*1

Inverter
station number *2

*4

Inverter
station number *2

*4

Indicate a control code
Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
When Pr.123 and Pr.337 (Waiting time setting) ≠ 9999, create a communication request data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The
number of characters decreases by 1.)
CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a
data group on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF
codes will be present or absent can be selected using Pr. 124 PU communication CR/LF selection.

4
PARAMETERS

*1
*2
*3

1

221

Communication operation and setting
(4) Data definitions
1) Control codes
Signal Name

ASCII Code

STX
ETX
ENQ

H02
H03
H05

Start Of Text (start of data)
End Of Text (end of data)
Enquiry (communication request)

Description

ACK
LF
CR
NAK

H06
H0A
H0D
H15

Acknowledge (no data error detected)
Line Feed
Carriage Return
Negative Acknowledge (data error detected)

2) Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request, e.g. operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the
inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 62)
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and
ranges of set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 62)
5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of
reply data. Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in
10ms increments (e.g. 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer

Inverter data processing time
+ data check time
= Waiting time
(setting 10ms)
(About 10 to 30ms,
which depends on the
instruction code)

Inverter
Inverter
Computer

REMARKS
⋅ When Pr. 123, Pr. 337 (waiting time setting) ≠ "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time" in the data
format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
⋅ The data check time changes depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 223)

6) Sum check code
The sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary)
derived from the checked ASCII data

Computer

Inverter

ASCII Code

ENQ

H05

Sum
Instruction
check
Station
code
Data
code
number
1
E
1
1
0
7
A
D
F
4
0
H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
*Waiting
time

(Example 1)

Binary code

H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
=H1F4

Sum
* When the Pr. 123 "waiting time setting" "9999", create the communication request
data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
(Example 2)
Inverter

Computer

ASCII Code

STX

H02

Sum
check
code
0
7
1
1
7
0
3
0
H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
Station
number

Data read

H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30
= H130

Sum

222

ETX

Binary code

Communication operation and setting
7) Error Code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the
NAK code.
Error
Code
H0
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
HA
HB
HC
HD
HE
HF

Error Item

Error Definition

Inverter Operation

The number of errors consecutively detected in communication
Computer NAK error request data from the computer is greater than allowed number of
retries.
Parity error
The parity check result does not match the specified parity.
The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the
Sum check error
data received by the inverter.
The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake.
Protocol error
Alternatively, data receive is not completed within the
predetermined time. CR or LF is not as set in the parameter.
Framing error
The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter
Overrun error
completes receiving the preceding data.
⎯
⎯

Brought to trip if error
occurs continuously
more than the allowable
number of retries.
(E.PUE/E.SER)

⎯
Does not accept
The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control
Character error
received data but is not
code).
brought to trip.
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link
Mode error
operation mode, when operation command source is not selected
Does not accept
or during inverter operation.
received data but is not
Instruction code error The specified command does not exist.
brought to trip.
Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, frequency
Data range error
setting, etc.
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯

(5) Response time
Data sending time (Refer to the following formula)
Waiting time
Data check time
(setting 10ms) (depends on the
instruction code (see the
following table))
Time
10ms or more necessary
Data sending time (Refer to the following formula)

Inverter data processing time
Computer
Inverter
Inverter
Computer

[Formula for data sending time]
Number of data
characters
(Refer to page 220)

Communication specifications
× (total number of bits) = Data send time (s)
(See below.)

Communication specifications

Name

Number of
Bits

1 bit
2 bits
7 bits
Data length
8 bits
Yes
1 bit
Parity check
No
0
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.
Minimum number of total bits....... 9 bits
Maximum number of total bits...... 12 bits
Stop bit length

4

Data check time

Item
Various monitors, run command, frequency
setting (RAM)
Parameter read/write, frequency setting
(EEPROM)
Parameter clear/all clear
Reset command

Check Time
<12ms
<30ms
<5s
No answer

223

PARAMETERS

1
Communication ×
speed (bps)

Communication operation and setting
(6) Retry count setting (Pr. 121, Pr. 335)
⋅ Set the permissible number of retries at occurrence of a data receive error. (Refer to page 223 for data receive error
for retry)
⋅ When data receive errors occur consecutively and exceed the permissible number of retries set, an inverter trip
(E.PUE) may occur and stops the motor.
⋅ When "9999" is set, an inverter will not trip even if data receive error occurs but an alarm output signal (LF) is output.
For the terminal used for the LF signal output, assign the function by setting "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative
logic)" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).

NAK

ENQ

NAK

Inverter

ACK

ENQ

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "1" (initial value)
Computer
Fault (E.PUE)
Wrong
Wrong
Inverter
Computer
Reception error

Reception error
ON

ALM

ENQ

ENQ

ACK

Normal

NAK

NAK

Inverter

ACK

ENQ

Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "9999"
Computer
Wrong
Wrong
Inverter
Computer
Reception error
LF

OFF

ON

Reception error
ON

REMARKS
When using RS-485 terminal communication, inverter behavior at fault occurrence varies depending on Pr. 502 Stop mode selection
at communication error setting. (Refer to page 216)

(7) Signal loss detection (Pr. 122, Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval)
⋅ If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and computer as a result of signal loss
detection, a communication fault (PU connector communication: E.PUE, RS-485 terminal communication: E.SER)
occurs and the inverter trips.
⋅ Signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1s" to "999.8s". To make a signal loss detection, it is
necessary to send data (control code refer to page 222) from the computer within the communication check time
interval. (The send data has nothing to do with the station number)
⋅ Communication check is started at the first communication in the operation mode having the command source (PU
operation mode for PU connector communication in the initial setting or Network operation mode for RS-485 terminal
communication).
⋅ When the setting is "9999", communication check (a signal loss detection) is not made.
⋅ When the setting is "0", communication from the PU connector cannot be performed. For communication via the RS485 terminals, monitor, parameter read, etc. can be performed, but a communication error (E.SER) occurs as soon
as the inverter is switched to Network operation mode.
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"

Computer
Inverter
Inverter

External

PU

ENQ

Operation Mode

Computer
Pr.122

Fault (E.PUE)
Check start

Communication
check counter

ALM

Time
ON

REMARKS
When using RS-485 terminal communication, inverter behavior at fault occurrence varies depending on Pr. 502 Stop mode selection
at communication error setting. (Refer to page 216)

224

Communication operation and setting
(8) Instructions for the program
1) When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program,
always insert a retry program for data error.
2) All data communication, e.g. run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication
request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that
the computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
3) Program example
To change the operation mode to computer link operation

Programming example of Microsoft® Visual C++® (Ver.6.0)
#include 
#include 
void main(void){
HANDLE
hCom;
DCB
hDcb;
COMMTIMEOUTS
char
char
char
int
int
BOOL
int
int

hTim;

// Communication handle
// Structure for communication setting
// Structure for time out setting

szTx[0x10];
// Send buffer
szRx[0x10];
// Receive buffer
szCommand[0x10];// Command
nTx,nRx;
// For buffer size storing
nSum;
// For sum code calculation
bRet;
nRet;
i;

//∗∗∗∗ Opens COM1 port∗∗∗∗
hCom = CreateFile ("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);
if (hCom != NULL) {
//∗∗∗∗ Makes a communication setting of COM1 port∗∗∗∗
GetCommState(hCom,&hDcb);
// Retrieves current communication information
hDcb.DCBlength = sizeof(DCB);
// Structure size setting
hDcb.BaudRate = 19200;
// Communication speed=09200bps
hDcb.ByteSize = 8;
// Data length=8bit
hDcb.Parity = 2;
// Even parity
hDcb.StopBits = 2;
// Stop bit=2bit
bRet = SetCommState(hCom,&hDcb);
// Sets the changed communication data
if (bRet == TRUE) {
//∗∗∗∗ Makes a time out setting of COM1 port∗∗∗∗
Get CommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);
// Obtains the current time out value
hTim.WriteTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000;
// Write time out 1s
hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000;
// Read time out 1s
SetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim);
// Changed time out value setting
//∗∗∗∗ Sets the command to switch the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to the network operation mode ∗∗∗∗
sprintf(szCommand,"01FB10000");
// Send data (NET operation write)
nTx = strlen(szCommand);
//Send data size
//∗∗∗∗ Generates sum code∗∗∗∗
nSum = 0;
// Initialization of sum data
for (i = 0;i < nTx;i++) {
nSum += szCommand[i];
// Calculates sum code
nSum &= (0xff);
// Masks data
}
//∗∗∗∗ Generates send data∗∗∗∗
memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx));
// Initialization of send buffer
memset(szRx,0,sizeof(szRx));
// Initialization of receive buffer
sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum);// ENQ code+send data+sum code
nTx = 1 + nTx + 2;
// Number of ENQ code+number of send data+number of sum code

}
CloseHandle(hCom);

4
PARAMETERS

nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL);
//∗∗∗∗ Sending ∗∗∗∗
if(nRet != 0) {
nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL);
//∗∗∗∗ Receiving ∗∗∗∗
if(nRet != 0) {
//∗∗∗∗ Displays the receive data ∗∗∗∗
for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) {
printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Consol output of receive data
// Displays ASCII coder in hexadecimal. Displays 30 when "0"
}
printf("\n\r");
}
}
// Close communication port

}
}

225

Communication operation and setting
General flowchart
Port open
Communication setting
Time out setting
Send data processing
Data setting
Sum code calculation
Data transmission
Receive data waiting
Receive data processing
Data retrieval
Screen display

CAUTION
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a
communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal loss etc., the inverter cannot
be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come to trip (E.PUE,
E.SER). The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching ON its RES signal or by switching power OFF.
If communication is broken due to signal loss, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect such a fault. This
should be fully noted.

226

Communication operation and setting
(9) Setting items and set data
After completion of parameter setting, set the instruction codes and data then start communication from the computer
to allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
No.

2

Read Instruction
Code
/write
Read

H7B

Write

HFB

Output
frequency/
speed

Read

H6F

Output current

Read

H70

Output voltage

Read

H71

Special
monitor

Read

H72

Read

H73

Write

HF3

Operation Mode

Monitor

1

Item

Special
monitor
selection No.

Number of
Data Digits
(format)

Data Description

H0000: Network operation
H0001: External operation
H0002: PU operation
(RS-485 communication operation via PU connector)
H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01Hz increments
Speed in 1r/min increments (when Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144
= 2 to 10, 102 to 110)
H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A
increments (FR-F720-02330(FR-F74001160) or less) / 0.1A increments (FR-F72003160(FR-F740-01800) or more)
H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V
increments
H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3
H01 to H4A: Monitor selection data
Refer to the special monitor No. table (page 229)

4 digits
(B,E/D)
4 digits
(A,C/D)
4 digits
(B,E/D)
4 digits
(B,E/D)
4 digits
(B,E1/D)
4 digits
(B,E/D)
2digits
(B,E1/D)
2digits
(A1,C/D)

H0000 to HFFFF: Two most recent fault records
b15

Fault definition

Read

H74 to
H77

b8 b7

b0

H74

Second fault in past

Latest fault

H75

Fourth fault in past

Third fault in past

H76

Sixth fault in past

Fifth fault in past

H77

Eighth fault in past

Seventh fault in past

4 digits
(B,E/D)

Refer to the fault data table (page 230)

4

5

Write

HF9

Run command

Write

HFA

Read

H79

Read

H7A

Inverter status
monitor (extended)
Inverter status
monitor
Set frequency
(RAM)
Set frequency
(EEPROM)

Read
H6E

Set frequency
(RAM)
Set frequency
(RAM, EEPROM)

6

H6D

Inverter reset

HED
Write
HEE

Write

HFD

You can set the control input commands such as the forward
rotation signal (STF) and reverse rotation signal (STR). (Refer
to page 230 for details)
You can monitor the states of the output signals such as
forward rotation, reverse rotation and inverter running (RUN).
(Refer to page 231 for details)
Read the set frequency/speed from the RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01Hz increments
Speed in 1r/min increments (When Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144
= 2 to 10, 102 to 110)
Write the set frequency/speed into the RAM or EEPROM.
H0000 to H9C40 (0 to 400.00Hz) : frequency in 0.01Hz
increments
H0000 to H270E (0 to 9998) : speed in r/min increments (when
Pr. 37 = 1 to 9998 or Pr. 144 = 2 to 10, 102 to 110)
⋅ To change the running frequency consecutively, write data to
the inverter RAM. (Instruction code: HED)
H9696: Inverter reset
⋅ As the inverter is reset at start of communication by the
computer, the inverter cannot send reply data back to the
computer.
H9966: Inverter reset
⋅ When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to the computer
and then the inverter is reset.

4 digits
(A,C/D)
2digits
(A1,C/D)
4 digits
(B,E/D)
2digits
(B,E1/D)
4 digits
(B,E/D)

4
4 digits
(A,C/D)

4 digits
(A,C/D)
4 digits
(A,D)

Refer to page 220 for data formats (A, A1, A2, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3, F)

227

PARAMETERS

3

Run command
(extended)

Communication operation and setting
No.

Item

7

Faults history batch
clear

Read Instruction
Code
/write
Write

HF4

Number of
Data Digits
(format)

Data Description

4 digits
(A,C/D)

H9696: clears the faults history in batch
All parameters return to the initial values.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be
selected according to data. ( : clear, ×: not clear)
Refer to page 390 for parameter clear, all clear, and
communication parameters.
Clear type

8

Parameter clear
All parameter clear

Data

H9696

Parameter clear
Write

HFC
All parameter clear

9

Read
Parameters

10

11

12

13

Write
Link parameter
extended setting

Second parameter
changing
(instruction code
HFF=1)
Multi command

H00 to
H63
H80 to
HE3

Read

H7F

Write

HFF

Read

H6C

Write

HEC

Read

HF0

×

H5A5A
H9966
H55AA

Parameter description is changed according to the H00 to H09
setting.
For details of the setting, refer to the instruction code (page 390).
When setting the calibration parameters
H00:Frequency *2
H01: Parameter-set analog value
H02: Analog value input from terminal
*2

4 digits
(A,C/D)

×

When clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communicationrelated parameter settings also return to the initial values.
When resuming operation, set the parameters again.
Executing clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and
HFF settings.
Only H9966 and H55AA (all parameter clear) are valid during
the password lock.
Refer to the instruction code (page 390) and write and/or read
the values as required.
When setting Pr.100 and later, link parameter expansion setting
must be set.

*1

Write/

Communication
parameters

4 digits
(B,E/D)
4 digits
(A,C/D)
2digits
(B,E1/D)
2digits
(A1,C/D)

*1

Refer to the list of calibration parameters on the next page for
calibration parameters.
The gain frequency can also be written using Pr. 125 (instruction
code H99) or Pr. 126 (instruction code H9A).

Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for
reading data (Refer to page 231 for detail)

2digits
(B,E1/D)
2digits
(A1,C/D)
10 digits
(A2,C1/D)

Reading inverter type in ASCII code.

14

Inverter type monitor

Inverter type

Read

H7C

"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area

20 digits

Example of FR-F720

(B,E3/D)

H46, H52, H2D, H46, H37, H32, H30, H20.. H20
Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1kW, and rounds down to 0.01kW
Capacity

Read

H7D

6 digits

increments
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area

(B,E2/D)

Example
0.75K................"

7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

Refer to page 220 for data formats (A, A1, A2, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3, F)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

REMARKS
⋅ Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
⋅ For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all
clear is performed.

Example) When reading the C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) settings from the inverter of station No. 0
Computer Send Data
1)
2)
3)
4)

Inverter Send Data

Description

ENQ 00 FF 0 01 82
ACK 00
Set "H01" in the extended link parameter.
ENQ 00 EC 0 01 7E
ACK 00
Set "H01" in second parameter changing.
ENQ 00 5E 0 0F
STX 00 0000 ETX 25
C3 (Pr. 902) is read. 0% is read.
ENQ 00 60 0 FB
STX 00 0000 ETX 25
C6 (Pr. 904) is read. 0% is read.
To read/write C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from 1) again.

228

Communication operation and setting
List of calibration parameters
Para
meter

Instruction code

Name

Read

C2
(902)
C3
(902)
125
(903)
C4
(903)
C5
(904)

Terminal 2 frequency
setting bias frequency
Terminal 2 frequency
setting bias
Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain frequency
Terminal 2 frequency
setting gain
Terminal 4 frequency
setting bias frequency

C6
(904)
126
(905)
C7
(905)

Terminal 4 frequency
setting bias
Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency
setting gain

Write

Extended

5E

DE

1

5E

DE

1

5F

DF

1

5F

DF

1

60

E0

1

60

E0

1

61

E1

1

61

E1

1

Para
meter

C8
(930)
C9
(930)
C10
(931)
C11
(931)
C42
(934)
C43
(934)
C44
(935)
C45
(935)

Instruction code

Name

Read

Write

Extended

Current output bias signal

1E

9E

9

Current output bias current

1E

9E

9

Current output gain signal

1F

9F

9

Current output gain current

1F

9F

9

PID display bias coefficient

22

A2

9

PID display bias analog
value

22

A2

9

PID display gain coefficient

23

A3

9

PID display gain analog
value

23

A3

9

[Special monitor selection No.]
Refer to page 141 for details of the monitor description.
Data
Description
H01 Output frequency/speed *4
H02
H03
H05
H06
H08
H09
H0A
H0B
H0C
H0D
H0E
H0F
H10
H11
H14
H17
H18

Unit
0.01Hz/1
Output current
0.01A/0.1A *1
Output voltage
0.1V
Frequency setting value/speed setting *4
0.01Hz/1
Running speed
1r/min
Converter output voltage
0.1V
Regenerative brake duty
0.1%
Electronic thermal relay function load factor
0.1%
Output current peak value
0.01A/0.1A *1
Converter output voltage peak value
0.1V
Input power
0.01kW/0.1kW *1
Output power
0.01kW/0.1kW *1
Input terminal status *2
⎯
Output terminal status *3
⎯
Load meter
0.1%
Cumulative energization time
1h
Actual operation time
1h
Motor load factor
0.1%

....Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Unit
1kWh
Variable
Variable
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%

H3A Option input terminal status 1

*5

⎯

H3B Option input terminal status 2

*6

⎯

H3C Option output terminal status
32-bit cumulative power
(lower 16-bit)
32-bit cumulative power
H4E
(upper 16-bit)

1kWh

H4D

1kWh

H4F

32-bit cumulative power
(lower 16-bit)

0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *1

H50

32-bit cumulative power
(upper 16-bit)

0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *1

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

⎯

⎯

⎯

CS

RES

STOP

MRS

JOG

RH

RM

RL

RT

AU

STR

b0
STF

4

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

ABC2

ABC1

FU

OL

IPF

SU

b0
RUN

X1

b0
X0

⎯

b0
DY

Y1

b0
Y0

Output terminal monitor details

b15
⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

*4

When Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" or Pr. 144 = "2 to 10, 102 to 110," the unit is an integral value (one increment). (Refer to page 139)

*5

Option input terminal 1 monitor details (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)-all terminals are OFF when an option is not fitted

b15
X15
*6

X14

X13

X12

X11

X10

X9

X8

X7

X6

X5

X4

X3

X2

Option input terminal 2 monitor details (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)-all terminals are OFF when an option is not fitted

b15
⎯
*7

⎯

*7

The setting depends on capacities. (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less/FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)
Input terminal monitor details

b15
⎯
*3

Description
Cumulative power
Power saving effect
Cumulative saving power
PID set point
PID measured value
PID deviation

PARAMETERS

*1
*2

Data
H19
H32
H33
H34
H35
H36

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

Option output terminal monitor details (output terminal status of FR-A7AY)-all terminals are OFF when an option is not fitted

b15
⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

RA3

RA2

RA1

Y6

Y5

Y4

Y3

Y2

229

Communication operation and setting
[Fault data]
Refer to page 333 for details of fault description.
Data

Description

Data

Description

Data

Description

Data

Description

H00
H10
H11
H12

No fault
OC1
OC2
OC3

H51
H52
H60
H70

UVT
ILF
OLT
BE

HB0
HB1
HB2
HB3

PE
PUE
RET
PE2

HE4
HE5
HE6
HF1

LCI
PCH
PID
E.1

H20
H21
H22
H30
H31
H40
H50

OV1
OV2
OV3
THT
THM
FIN
IPF

H80
H81
H90
H91
HA0
HA1
HA2

GF
LF
OHT
PTC
OPT
OP1
OP2

HC0
HC1
HC2
HC4
HC5
HC6
HC7

CPU
CTE
P24
CDO
IOH
SER
AIE

HF2
HF5
HF6
HF7
HFD

E.2
E.5
E.6
E.7
E.13

Fault record display example
(instruction code H74)
For read data H30A0
(Previous fault ...... THT)
(Latest fault ...... OPT)

b15

b8 b7

b0

0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Previous fault
(H30)

Latest fault
(HA0)

[Run command]
Item

Run
command

Run
command
(extended)

*1
*2

*3

Instruction
Code

HFA

HF9

Bit
Length

8bit

16bit

Description

b0: AU (current input selection) *1 *3
b1: Forward rotation command
b2: Reverse rotation command
b3: RL (low speed operation
command) *1 *3
b4: RM (middle speed operation
command) *1 *3
b5: RH (high speed operation
command) *1 *3
b6: RT (second function selection) *1 *3
b7: MRS (output stop) *1 *3
b0:AU (current input selection) *1 *3
b1:Forward rotation command
b2:Reverse rotation command
b3:RL (low speed operation command) *1 *3
b4:RM (middle speed operation
command) *1 *3
b5: RH (high speed operation
command) *1 *3
b6:RT (second function selection) *1 *3
b7:MRS (output stop) *1 *3
b8:JOG (Jog operation) *2 *3
b9:CS (selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure) *2 *3
b10: STOP (start self-holding) *2 *3
b11:RES (reset) *2 *3
b12:⎯
b13:⎯
b14:⎯
b15:⎯

Example

[Example 1] H02 Forward rotation

b7
0

b0
0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

[Example 2] H00 Stop

b7
0

b0
0

0

0

0

0

[Example 1] H0002 Forward rotation
b15
0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

b0
0

0

0

0

1

0

[Example 2] H0800 low speed operation
(When Pr. 189 RES terminal function selection is set to "0")
b15
0

b0
0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 184, Pr. 187 (input terminal
function selection) (page 122).
The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. Since Jog operation/selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/start selfholding/reset cannot be controlled by the network, bit 8 to bit 11 are invalid in the initial status. When using bit 8 to bit 11, change the signals with
Pr. 185, Pr. 186, Pr. 188, Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) (page 128). (Reset can be executed with the instruction code HFD.)
Only forward rotation command and reverse rotation command are available for RS-485 communication using PU connector.

230

Communication operation and setting
[Inverter status monitor]
Instruction
Code

Item

Inverter
status
monitor

Bit
Length

Description

8bit

b0:RUN (inverter running)*
b1:Forward rotation
b2:Reverse rotation
b3:SU (up to frequency) *
b4:OL (overload) *
b5:IPF (instantaneous power failure) *
b6:FU (frequency detection)*
b7:ABC1 (fault) *

H7A

Inverter
status
monitor
(extended)

H79

Example
[Example 1] H02

0

0

0

0

[Example 2] H80

0

0

1

1

b0
0

Stop at fault
occurrence

b7

b0
0

b0:RUN (inverter running) *
b1:Forward rotation
b2:Reverse rotation
b3:SU (up to frequency) *
b4:OL (overload) *
b5:IPF (instantaneous power failure) * [Example 1] H0002
b15
b6:FU (frequency detection) *
0 0 0 0 0
b7:ABC1 (fault) *
b8:ABC2 (⎯)*
[Example 2] H8080
b9:⎯
b15
b10:⎯
1 0 0 0 0
b11:⎯
b12:⎯
b13:⎯
b14:⎯
b15: Fault occurrence

16bit

During forward
rotation

b7

0

0

0

0

0

0

During forward rotation
b0
0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

Stop at fault occurrence
b0
0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

* The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function
selection).

[Multi command (HF0)]
Sending data format from computer to inverter
Format
A2

1

ENQ

2

3

Inverter
station
number

4

5

6

7

8

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

Instruction
Send Receive
Waiting
Code
data data
time
(HF0)
type *1 type *2

13

14

15

16

18

Sum
check

Data2

Data1 *3

17

*3

19
CR/LF

Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
Format
C1

STX

0
1

Inverter
station
number

4

5

6

7

8

Number of Characters
9
10
11
12

Send Receive Error Error
data data code 1 code 2
*5
type *1 type *2 *5

Data1 *4

13

14

15

Data2
*4

16

ETX

17

18

Sum
check

19
CR/LF

Data 1

Data 2

Run command

Set frequency

(expansion)
Run command

(RAM)
Set frequency

(expansion)

(RAM, EEPROM)

Remarks
Run command (expansion) is same as instruction code HF9
(Refer to page 230)

Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply

Data Type
0
1
*5

3

Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter).
Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer).
Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending

Data Type

*4

2

Data 1

Data 2

Inverter status

Output frequency

monitor (expansion)
Inverter status

(speed)

monitor (expansion)

Special monitor

Remarks
Inverter status monitor (expansion) is same as instruction code
H79 (Refer to page 230)
Replies the monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 for
special monitor. (Refer to page 229)

Error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2.
Mode error (HA), instruction code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is replied.

231

4
PARAMETERS

*1
*2
*3

1

Communication operation and setting
4.19.7 Modbus-RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 331, Pr. 332, Pr. 334, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 539, Pr. 549, Pr.779)
Using the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, communication operation or parameter setting can be
performed from the RS-485 terminals of the inverter.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

0

RS-485
communication
station number

0

332

RS-485
communication
speed

96

334

RS-485
communication parity
check selection

331

Setting Range

1 to 247 *
3, 6, 12, 24, 48,
96, 192, 384 *
0
2

1
2

343

Communication error
count

⎯

0

Description
Broadcast communication is selected.
Specifies the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters
are connected to one personal computer.
Set the communication speed.
The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is 9600bps when
the setting value is "96".
Without parity check
Stop bit length 2bits
With odd parity check
Stop bit length 1bit
With even parity check
Stop bit length 1bit
Displays the number of communication errors during
Modbus-RTU communication. Reading only
At Fault

Indication

Occurrence

502

Stop mode selection
at communication
error

Modbus-RTU
communication check
time interval

Coasts to
stop.

E.SER

Output

Stop
(E.SER)

1

Decelerates
to stop

After stop
E.SER

Output after
stop

Stop
(E.SER)

2

Decelerates
to stop

After stop
E.SER

Without
output

Automatic
restart
functions

3

Continues
running at
Pr.779

0

9999

0.1 to 999.8s
9999

549

779

Protocol selection

Operation frequency
during
communication error

1

Removal

0

0
539

At Fault

Fault Output

0
1
2
0 to 400Hz

9999
9999

⎯

Without
output

Operates in
normal
condition

Modbus-RTU communication is available, but the inverter
trips in the NET operation mode.
Set the interval of communication check time.
(same specifications as Pr. 122)
No communication check (signal loss detection)
Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
Modbus-RTU protocol
BACnet MS/TP protocol
Motor runs at the specified frequency at a communication
error.
Motor runs at the frequency used before the communication
error.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

* The inverter works with the initial parameter setting if a value other than the setting range is set.

CAUTION
When Modbus-RTU communication is performed from the master with address 0 (station 0) set, broadcast communication is
selected and the inverter does not send a response message to the master.
When response from the inverter is necessary, set a value other than "0" in Pr. 331.
Some functions are invalid for broadcast communication. (Refer to page 235.)

REMARKS
⋅ When using the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr. 549 Protocol selection to "1".
⋅ When the communication option is fitted with Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection set to "9999" (initial value), the
command source (e.g. run command) from the RS-485 terminals is invalid. (Refer to page 204)

232

Communication operation and setting
(1) Communication specifications
⋅ The communication specifications are given below.
Item
Communication protocol
Conforming standard

Description

Related
Parameters

Modbus-RTU protocol

Pr. 549

EIA-485 (RS-485)

⎯

Number of inverters connected
1: N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations
Communication speed
Can be selected from 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400bps
Control protocol
Asynchronous system
Communication method
Half-duplex system
Character system
Binary(fixed to 8 bits)
Start bit
1bit
Communication
specifications

Stop bit length
Parity check

Error check
Terminator
Waiting time setting

Pr. 331
Pr. 332
⎯
⎯
⎯
⎯

Select from the following three types
⋅ No parity, stop bit length 2 bits
⋅ Odd parity, stop bit length 1 bit
⋅ Even parity, stop bit length 1 bit

Pr. 334

CRC code check
Not used
Not used

⎯
⎯
⎯

(2) Outline
The Modbus protocol is the communication protocol developed by Modicon for programmable controller.
The Modbus protocol performs serial communication between the master and slave using the dedicated message
frame. The dedicated message frame has the functions that can perform data read and write. Using the functions,
you can read and write the parameter values from the inverter, write the input command of the inverter, and check
the operating status. In this product, the inverter data are classified in the holding register area (register addresses
40001 to 49999). By accessing the assigned holding register address, the master can communicate with the inverter
which is a slave.
REMARKS
There are two different serial transmission modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and RTU
(Remote Terminal Unit) mode. This product supports only the RTU mode in which 1-byte (8-bit) data is transmitted as-is.
Only the communication protocol is defined by the Modbus protocol, and the physical layer is not stipulated.

PARAMETERS

4

233

Communication operation and setting
(3) Message format

Query communication
Programmable controller (Master)

Query Message

Inverter (slave)
Broadcast communication
Programmable controller (Master)

Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)

Inverter response time
(Refer to the following table for the
data check time)

Response Message

Query Message

Inverter (slave)

No Response

Data check time

Item
Various monitors, operation command,
frequency setting (RAM)
Parameter read/write, frequency
setting (EEPROM)
Parameter clear/all clear
Reset command

Check Time
< 12ms
< 30ms
< 5s
No answer

1) Query
The master sends a message to the slave (= inverter) at the specified address.
2) Normal Response
After receiving the query from the master, the slave executes the requested function and returns the corresponding
normal response to the master.
3) Error Response
If an invalid function code, address or data is received, the slave returns it to the master.
When a response description is returned, the error code indicating that the request from the master cannot be
executed is added.
No response is returned for the hardware-detected error, frame error and CRC check error.
4) Broadcast
By specifying address 0, the master can send a message to all slaves. All slaves that received the message from the
master execute the requested function. In this communication, the slaves do not return a response to the master.
REMARKS
The slave executes the function independently of the inverter station number setting (Pr. 331) during broadcast communication.

234

Communication operation and setting
(4) Message frame (protocol)
Communication method
Basically, the master sends a query message (question) and the slave returns a response message
(response). When communication is normal, Device Address and Function Code are copied as they are, and
when communication is abnormal (function code or data code is illegal), bit 7 (= 80h) of Function Code is
turned on and the error code is set to Data Bytes.
Query message from Master
Device Address
Function Code

Device Address
Function Code

Eight-Bit
Data Bytes

Eight-Bit
Data Bytes

Error Check

Error Check
Response message from slave

The message frame consists of the four message fields as shown above.
By adding the no-data time (T1: Start, End) of 3.5 characters to the beginning and end of the message data,
the slave recognizes it as one message.
Protocol details
The four message fields will be explained below.
1) ADDRESS

T1

8bit

2) FUNCTION

3) DATA
n × 8bit

8bit

Message Field
1) ADDRESS field

L
8bit

H
8bit

End
T1

Description
Is 1 byte long (8 bits), and can be set to any of 0 to 247. Set 0 to send a broadcast message
(all-address instruction) or any of 1 to 247 to send a message to each slave.
When the slave responds, it returns the address set from the master.
The value set to Pr. 331 RS-485 communication station number is the slave address.
The function code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and can be set to any of 1 to 255. The master sets the
function that it wants to request from the slave, and the slave performs the requested
operation. The following table gives the supported function codes. An error response is
returned if the set function code is other than those in the following table.
When the slave returns a normal response, it returns the function code set by the master.
When the slave returns an error response, it returns H80 + function code.

Code
2) FUNCTION field

4) CRC CHECK

H03
H06
H08
H10
H46

Function Name

Outline

Read Holding Register
Preset Single Register

Reads the holding register data.
Writes data to the holding register.
Makes a function diagnosis.
Diagnostics
(communication check only)
Writes data to multiple consecutive
Preset Multiple Registers
holding registers.
Reads the number of registers that
Read Holding Register
succeeded in communication last
Access Log
time.

Broadcast
Communication
Disallowed
Allowed
Disallowed
Allowed
Disallowed

Table 1: Function code list
3) DATA field

4) CRC CHECK field

4

The format changes depending on the function code (refer to page236). Data includes the byte
count, number of bytes, description of access to the holding register, etc.
The received message frame is checked for error. CRC check is performed, and 2 byte long
data is added to the end of the message. When CRC is added to the message, the low-order
byte is added first and is followed by the high-order byte.
The CRC value is calculated by the sending side that adds CRC to the message. The receiving
side recalculates CRC during message receiving, and compares the result of that calculation
and the actual value received in the CRC CHECK field. If these two values do not match, the
result is defined as error.

235

PARAMETERS

Start

Communication operation and setting
(5) Message format types
The message formats corresponding to the function codes in Table 1 on page 235 will be explained.
z Read holding register data (H03 or 03)
Can read the description of 1) system environment variables, 2) real-time monitor, 3) faults history, and 4)
inverter parameters assigned to the holding register area (refer to the register list (page 241)).
Query Message
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H03
(8bit)

3) Starting Address
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

4) No. of Points
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Response message
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H03
(8bit)

5) Byte Count
(8bit)

6) Data
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
...
(n × 16bit)

L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

⋅ Query message setting
Message

Setting Description
Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast
communication cannot be made (0 is invalid)
Set H03.
Set the address at which holding register data read will be started.
Starting address = starting register address (decimal) − 40001
For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the
holding register 40002.
Set the number of holding registers from which data will be read. The
number of registers from which data can be read is a maximum of 125.

1)Slave Address
2) Function
3)Starting Address

4)No. of Points

⋅ Description of normal response
Message

Setting Description
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
Twice greater than the No. of Points specified at 4) is set.
The number of data specified at 4) is set. Data are read in order of Hi byte
and Lo byte, and set in order of starting address data, starting address + 1
data, starting address + 2 data, ...

5)Byte Count
6)Data

Example) To read the register values of 41004 (Pr. 4) to 41006 (Pr. 6) from the slave address 17 (H11)

Query message
Slave Address Function
H11
(8bit)

H03
(8bit)

Starting Address
H03
(8bit)

No. of Points

HEB
(8bit)

H00
(8bit)

CRC Check

H03
(8bit)

H77
(8bit)

H2B
(8bit)

Normal response (Response message)
Slave Address Function Byte Count
H11
(8bit)

H03
(8bit)

H06
(8bit)

Read value
Register 41004 (Pr. 4): H1770 (60.00Hz)
Register 41005 (Pr. 5): H0BB8 (30.00Hz)
Register 41006 (Pr. 6): H03E8 (10.00Hz)

236

Data
H17
(8bit)

H70
(8bit)

H0B
(8bit)

HB8
(8bit)

CRC Check
H03
(8bit)

HE8
(8bit)

H2C
(8bit)

HE6
(8bit)

Communication operation and setting
Write multiple holding register data (H06 or 06)
You can write the description of 1) system environment variables and 4) inverter parameters assigned to the
holding register area (refer to the register list (page 241)).
Query message
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H06
(8bit)

3) Register Address
H (8bit)

L (8bit)

4) Preset Data
H (8bit)

L (8bit)

CRC Check
L (8bit)

H (8bit)

Normal response (Response message)
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H06
(8bit)

3) Register Address
H (8bit)

L (8bit)

4) Preset Data
H (8bit)

L (8bit)

CRC Check
L (8bit)

H (8bit)

⋅ Query message setting
Message

Setting Description
Set the address to which the message will be sent. Setting of address 0
enables broadcast communication
Set H06.
Set the address of the holding register to which data will be written.
Register address = holding register address (decimal) − 40001
For example, setting of register address 0001 writes data to the holding
register address 40002.
Set the data that will be written to the holding register. The written data is
always 2 bytes.

1) Slave Address
2) Function
3) Register Address

4) Preset Data

⋅ Description of normal response
1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
No response is made for broadcast communication.
Example) To write 60Hz (H1770) to 40014 (running frequency RAM) at slave address 5 (H05).

Query message
Slave Address

Function

H05
(8bit)

H06
(8bit)

Register Address
H00
(8bit)

H0D
(8bit)

Preset Data
H17
(8bit)

H70
(8bit)

CRC Check
H17
(8bit)

H99
(8bit)

Normal Response (Response message)
Same data as the query message
CAUTION
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be made
when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.

PARAMETERS

4

237

Communication operation and setting
Function diagnosis (H08 or 08)
A communication check is available since the query message sent is returned unchanged as a response
message (function of subfunction code H00). Subfunction code H00 (Return Query Data)
Query Message
1) Slave Address 2) Function
H08
(8bit)

(8bit)

3) Subfunction
H00
(8bit)

H00
(8bit)

4) Date
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Normal Response (Response message)
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H08
(8bit)

3) Subfunction
H00
(8bit)

H00
(8bit)

4) Date
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

⋅ Query message setting
Message

Setting Description

Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast
communication cannot be made (0 is invalid)
Set H08.
Set H0000.
Any data can be set if it is 2 bytes long. The setting range is H0000
to HFFFF.

1) Slave Address
2) Function
3) Subfunction
4) Data

⋅ Description of normal response
1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
CAUTION
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be made when
the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.

Write multiple holding register data (H10 or 16)
You can write data to multiple holding registers.
Query message
1) Slave
Address

2)
Function

(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

3)
Starting Address
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

4) No. of
Registers
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

5)
ByteCount
(8bit)

6) Data
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check

...
(n × 2 × 8bit)

L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Normal Response (Response message)
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

3) Starting Address 4) No. of Registers
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

⋅ Query message setting
Message
1) Slave Address
2) Function
3) Starting Address

4) No. of Points
5) Byte Count
6) Data

238

Setting Description
Set the address to which the message will be sent. Setting of address 0
enables broadcast communication
Set H10.
Set the address where holding register data write will be started.
Starting address = starting register address (decimal) − 40001
For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the
holding register 40002.
Set the number of holding registers where data will be written. The number of
registers where data can be written is a maximum of 125.
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
Set twice greater than the value specified at 4).
Set the data specified by the number specified at 4). The written data are set
in order of Hi byte and Lo byte, and arranged in order of the starting address
data, starting address + 1 data, starting address + 2 data ...

Communication operation and setting
⋅ Description of normal response
1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
Example) To write 0.5s (H05) to 41007 (Pr. 7) at the slave address 25 (H19) and 1s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr. 8).

Query Message
Slave
Address

Function

H19
(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

Starting
Address
H03
(8bit)

No. of Points

HEE
(8bit)

H00
8bit)

H02
(8bit)

Byte
Count
H04
(8bit)

Data
H00
(8bit)

H05
(8bit)

H00
(8bit)

CRC Check
H0A
(8bit)

H86
(8bit)

H3D
(8bit)

Response message (Response message)
Slave
Address

Function

H19
(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

Starting
Address
H03
(8bit)

HEE
(8bit)

No. of Points

CRC Check

H00
(8bit)

H22
(8bit)

H02
(8bit)

H61
(8bit)

Read holding register access log (H46 or 70)
A response can be made to a query made by the function code H03 or H10.
The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access during previous communication and the
number of successful registers are returned.
In response to the query for other than the above function code, 0 is returned for the address and number of
registers.
Query Message
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H46
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Normal Response (Response message)
1) Slave Address

2) Function

(8bit)

H46
(8bit)

3) Starting Address
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

4) No. of Points
H
(8bit)

L
(8bit)

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

⋅ Query message setting
Message

Setting Description
Set the address to which the message will be sent. Broadcast
communication cannot be made (0 is invalid)
Set H46.

1) Slave Address
2) Function

⋅ Description of normal response
Message

Setting Description

3) Starting Address

4) No. of Points

Example) To read the successful register starting address and successful count from the slave address 25 (H19).

Query Message
Slave Address Function
H19
(8bit)

H46
(8bit)

CRC Check
H8B
(8bit)

HD2
(8bit)

Normal Response (Response message)
Slave Address Function
H19
(8bit)

H10
(8bit)

Starting Address
H03
(8bit)

HEE
(8bit)

No. of Points
H00
(8bit)

H02
(8bit)

CRC Check
H22
(8bit)

4
PARAMETERS

The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access is
returned.
Starting address = starting register address (decimal) − 40001
For example, when the starting address 0001 is returned, the address of the
holding register that succeeded in access is 40002.
The number of holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.

H61
(8bit)

Success of two registers at starting address 41007 (Pr. 7) is returned.

239

Communication operation and setting
Error response
An error response is returned if the query message received from the master has an illegal function, address or
data. No response is returned for a parity, CRC, overrun, framing or busy error.
CAUTION
No response message is sent in the case of broadcast communication also.

Error response (Response message)
1) Slave Address

2) Function

3) Exception Code

(8bit)

H80 + Function
(8bit)

(8bit)

Message

CRC Check
L
(8bit)

H
(8bit)

Setting Description

1) Slave address
2) Function
3) Exception code

Set the address received from the master.
The master-requested function code + H80 is set.
The code in the following table is set.

Error code list
Code

*1

Error Item

01

ILLEGAL FUNCTION

02

ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS

03

ILLEGAL DATA VALUE

Error Definition

*1

The set function code in the query message from the master cannot be
handled by the slave.
The set register address in the query message from the master cannot be
handled by the inverter.
(No parameter, parameter read disabled, parameter write disabled)
The set data in the query message from the master cannot be handled by
the inverter.
(Out of parameter write range, mode specified, other error)

An error will not occur in the following cases.
1) Function code H03 (Read Holding Register Data )
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is one or more holding registers from which data can be read
2) Function code H10 (Write Multiple Holding Register Data)
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is 1 or more holding registers to which data can be written
Namely, when the function code H03 or H10 is used to access multiple holding registers, an error will not occur if a non-existing holding
register or read disabled or write disabled holding register is accessed.

REMARKS
An error will occur if all accessed holding registers do not exist.
Data read from a non-existing holding register is 0, and data written there is invalid.

⋅ Message data mistake detection
To detect the mistakes of message data from the master, they are checked for the following errors. If an error
is detected, a trip will not occur.
Error check item
Error Item
Parity error
Framing error
Overrun error
Message frame
error
CRC check error

240

Error Definition
The data received by the inverter differs from the
specified parity (Pr. 334 setting).
The data received by the inverter differs from the
specified stop bit length (Pr. 334).
The following data was sent from the master before
the inverter completes data receiving.
The message frame data length is checked, and the
received data length of less than 4 bytes is regarded
as an error.
A mismatch found by CRC check between the
message frame data and calculation result is
regarded as an error.

Inverter Side Operation

1) Pr. 343 is increased by 1 at error
occurrence.
2) The terminal LF is output at error
occurrence.

Communication operation and setting
(6) Modbus registers
System environment variable
Register

Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
*1

*2

Read/Write

Remarks

Inverter reset
Parameter clear
All parameter clear
Parameter clear *1
All parameter clear *1
Inverter status/control input instruction *2
Operation mode/inverter setting *3

Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Read/write
Read/write

Any value can be written
Set H965A as a written value.
Set H99AA as a written value.
Set H5A96 as a written value.
Set HAA99 as a written value.
See below.
See below.

40014

Running frequency (RAM value)

Read/write

40015

Running frequency (EEPROM value)

According to the Pr. 37 and Pr. 144 settings, the
frequency and selectable speed are in 1r/min
increments.

Write

The communication parameter values are not cleared.
For write, set the data as a control input instruction. For read, data is read as an inverter operating status.
For write, set data as the operation mode setting. For read, data is read as the operation mode status.


Definition
Control input instruction
Inverter status
Stop command
Forward rotation command
Reverse rotation command
RH (high speed operation command) *1
RM (middle speed operation command) *1
RL (low speed operation command) *1
JOG (Jog operation) *1
RT (second function selection) *1
AU (current input selection) *1
CS
(selection of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure) *1
MRS (output stop) *1
STOP (start self-holding) *1
RES (reset) *1
0
0
0

RUN (inverter running) *2
Forward rotation
Reverse rotation
SU (up to frequency) *2
OL (overload) *2
IPF (instantaneous power failure) *2
FU (frequency detection) *2
ABC1 (fault) *2
ABC2 (⎯) *2
0
0
0
0
0
0
Fault occurrence


Read
Written
Mode
Value
Value
EXT
PU
EXT
JOG
PU
JOG
NET
PU+
EXT

H0000
H0001

H0010 *
H0011 *

H0002

⎯

H0003

⎯

H0004

H0014

H0005

⎯

* Writing is available depending on the
Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 setting. Refer to
page 203 for details.

The restrictions depending on the
operation mode changes according
to the computer link specifications.

The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 189 (input
terminal function selection) (page122).
Each assigned signal is valid or invalid depending on NET. (Refer to page 204)
The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output
terminal function selection) (page128).

4
PARAMETERS

*1
*2
*3

Definition

40002
40003
40004
40006
40007
40009
40010

241

Communication operation and setting
Real-time monitor
Refer to page 141 for details of the monitor description.
Register
40201
40202
40203
40205
40206
40208
40209
40210
40211
40212
40213
40214
40215
40216
40217
40220
40223
40224
40225
40250

Description
Increments
Register
Description
Output frequency/Speed *4
0.01Hz/1
40251 Cumulative saving power
Output current
40252 PID set point
0.01A/0.1A *1
Output voltage
0.1V
40253 PID measured value
Frequency setting value/Speed setting *4
0.01Hz/1
40254 PID deviation
Running speed
1r/min
Option input terminal status 1
40258
Converter output voltage
0.1V
*5
Regenerative brake duty
0.1%
Option input terminal status 2
40259
Electronic thermal relay function
*6
0.1%
load factor
Option output terminal status
40260
Output current peak value
0.01A/0.1A *1
*7
Converter output voltage peak value
0.1V
40267 PID measured value 2
Input power
0.01kW/0.1kW *1
32-bit cumulative power
Output power
0.01kW/0.1kW *1
40277
(lower 16-bit)
Input terminal status *2
⎯
32-bit cumulative power
Output terminal status *3
⎯
40278
(upper 16-bit)
Load meter
0.1%
32-bit cumulative power
Cumulative energization time
1h
40279
Actual operation time
1h
(lower 16-bit)
Motor load factor
0.1%
32-bit cumulative power
40280
Cumulative power
1kWh
(upper 16-bit)
Power saving effect
Variable

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.
*1
*2

⎯
⎯
⎯
0.1%

1kWh
1kWh
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *1
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *1

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

The setting depends on capacities. (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less/FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)
Input terminal monitor details

b15
⎯
*3

Increments
Variable
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%

⎯

⎯

⎯

CS

RES

STOP

MRS

JOG

RH

RM

RL

RT

AU

STR

b0
STF

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

ABC2

ABC1

FU

OL

IPF

SU

b0
RUN

Output terminal monitor details

b15
⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

*4

When Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" or Pr. 144 = "2 to 10, 102 to 110," the unit is an integral value (one increment). (Refer to page 139)

*5

Option input terminal 1 monitor details (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)

b15
X15
*6

X13

X12

X11

X10

X9

X8

Option input terminal 2 monitor details (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)

b15
⎯
*7

X14

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

Option output terminal monitor details (output terminal status of FR-A7AY)

b15
⎯

242

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

RA3

RA2

All OFF if option is not installed.

X7

X6

X5

X4

X3

X2

X1

b0
X0

⎯

⎯

⎯

b0
DY

Y3

Y2

Y1

b0
Y0

All OFF if option is not installed.

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

All OFF if option is not installed.

RA1

Y6

Y5

Y4

Communication operation and setting
Parameter

0 to 999

41000 to
41999

C2(902)

41902
42092

C3(902)
43902

125(903)

41903
42093

C4(903)
43903

C5(904)

41904
42094

C6(904)
43904

126(905)

41905
42095

C7(905)
43905

C8(930)
C9(930)
C10(931)
C11(931)
C42(934)

Read/Write
Read/write

Read/write
Read

The analog value (%) set to C3 (902) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the voltage (current)
applied to the terminal 2 is read.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

The analog value (%) set to C4 (903) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the voltage
(current) applied to the terminal 2 is read.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

The analog value (%) set to C6 (904) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
applied to the terminal 4 is read.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

Current output bias signal

42120

Current output bias current

Read/write

41931

Current output gain signal

Read/write

42121

Current output gain current

Read/write

41934

PID display bias coefficient

Read/write

42124

PID display bias analog value

Read/write

43934

PID display bias analog value
(terminal analog value)

Read

41935

PID display gain coefficient

Read/write

42125

PID display gain analog value

Read/write

43935

PID display gain analog value
(terminal analog value)

Read

C45(935)

Remarks
The parameter number + 41000 is the
register number.

Read/write

41930

C43(934)
C44(935)

Parameter Name
Refer to the parameter list (page
62) for the parameter names.
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias (frequency)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias (analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias (terminal analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain (frequency)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain (analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain (terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias (frequency)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias (analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias (terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain (frequency)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain (analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain (terminal analog value)

The analog value (%) set to C7 (905) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
applied to the terminal 4 is read.

Read/write

The analog value (%) set to C43 (934) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
applied to the terminal 4 is read.
The analog value (%) set to C45 (935) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current
(voltage) applied to the terminal 4 is read.

4
PARAMETERS

Parameters Register

243

Communication operation and setting
Faults history
Register

Definition

Read/Write

40501
40502
40503

Fault history 1
Fault history 2
Fault history 3

Read/write
Read
Read

40504
40505
40506
40507
40508

Fault history 4
Fault history 5
Fault history 6
Fault history 7
Fault history 8

Read
Read
Read
Read
Read

Remarks

Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as
"H00
". Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the fault
code.
Performing write using the register 40501 batchclears the faults history. Set any value as data.

Fault code list
Data
H00
H10
H11
H12
H20
H21
H22
H30
H31
H40
H50
H51

Description
No fault
OC1
OC2
OC3
OV1
OV2
OV3
THT
THM
FIN
IPF
UVT

Data
H52
H60
H70
H80
H81
H90
H91
HA0
HA1
HA2
HA4
HA5

Description
ILF
OLT
BE
GF
LF
OHT
PTC
OPT
OP1
OP2
E.16 *
E.17 *

Data
HA6
HA7
HA8
HB0
HB1
HB2
HB3
HC0
HC1
HC2
HC4
HC5

Description
E.18 *
E.19 *
E.20 *
PE
PUE
RET
PE2
CPU
CTE
P24
CDO
IOH

Data
HC6
HC7
HE4
HE5
HE6
HF1
HF2
HF5
HF6
HF7
HFD

Description
SER
AIE
LCI
PCH
PID
E.1
E.2
E.5
E.6
E.7
E.13

* Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.

Model information monitor
Register

Definition

Read/Write

Remarks
Reading inverter type in ASCII code.

44001 to
44010

Inverter type

Read

"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area
Example of FR-F720-NA
H46, H52, H2D, H46, H37, H32, H30, H2D, H4E, H41, H20 .......H20
Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1kW, and rounds down to 0.01kW

44011 to
44013

Capacity

Read

increments
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area
Example
0.75K............... "

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

244

7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

Communication operation and setting
(7) Pr. 343 Communication error count
You can check the cumulative number of communication errors.
Parameters

Setting Range

Minimum Setting Range

Initial Value

343

(Read only)

1

0

CAUTION
The number of communication errors is temporarily stored into the RAM. As it is not stored into the EEPROM, performing
a power supply reset or inverter reset clears the value to 0.

(8) Output signal LF "alarm output (communication error warnings)"
During a communication error, the alarm signal (LF signal) is output by open collector output. The LF signal
can be assigned to the output terminal using any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
Master

Alarm data

Alarm data

Alarm data

Normal data

Normal data

Reply data

Slave

Reply data

Not increased
Communication
Error count
(Pr.343)
Signal LF

0

OFF

1

2

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

Turns OFF when normal data is received
Communication error count is increased in
synchronization with leading edge of LF signal

Alarm data : Data resulting in
communication error.

CAUTION
Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

PARAMETERS

4

245

Communication operation and setting
(9) Signal loss detection (Pr. 539 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval)
If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and master as a result of a signal loss
detection, a communication error (E.SER) occurs and the inverter output is shut off.
· When the setting is "9999", communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
· When the setting value is "0", monitor, parameter read, etc. can be performed. However, a communication error
(E.SER) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the Network operation mode.
· A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1s to 999.8s". To make a signal loss detection, it is
necessary to send data from the master within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes
communication check (clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data
sent from the master.)
· Communication check is started from the first communication after switching to the Network operation mode (use Pr.
551 PU mode operation command source selection to change).
· Communication check time of query communication includes data absence time (3.5 byte).
Since this data absence time differs according to the communication speed, make setting considering this absence
time.
Example: RS-485 terminal communication, Pr. 539 = "0.1 to 999.8s"
Query communication
Operation mode

External

NET
Query Message 1

Programmable controller (master)

Query Message 2

Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)

Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave)
Programmable controller (master)

Response Message1

Response Message2

Fault
(E.SER)

Pr.539
Communication
check counter

Time

Check start
ON

ALM

Broadcast communication
Operation mode

External

NET
Query Message 1

Query Message 2

Programmable controller (master)
Inverter (slave)
Inverter (slave)
Programmable controller (master)

Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)

Fault
(E.SER)

Pr.539
Communication
check counter
ALM

Time

Check start
ON

REMARKS
When using RS-485 terminal communication, inverter behaviour at fault occurrence is different depending on Pr. 502 Stop mode
selection at communication error setting. (Refer to page 216)

246

Communication operation and setting
4.19.8 BACnet MS/TP protocol
Using BACnet MS/TP protocol, communication operation and parameter setting are available from the RS-485
terminals of the inverter.
Parameter
Number

52

774
775
776

Name

DU/PU main
display data
selection
PU/DU monitor
selection 1
PU/DU monitor
selection 2

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

0
(output
frequency)

0, 5, 6,
8 to 14, 17,
20, 23 to 25,
50 to 57, 67,
81 to 86, 100

9999

1 to 3, 5, 6, 8
to 14, 17, 20,
23 to 25,
40 to 42,
50 to 57, 67,
81 to 86,
100, 9999

0

0 to 127 *1

96

96, 192, 384,
768 *1 *2

PU/DU monitor
selection 3

Description
81: BACnet reception status
82: BACnet token pass counter
(Displays the count of received token)
83: BACnet valid APDU counter
(Displays the count of valid APDU detection)
84: BACnet communication error counter
(Displays the count of communication error)
85: Terminal CA output level
(Same display as AnalogOutput0)
86: Terminal AM output level
(Same display as AnalogOutput1)
The monitor of setting value "82 and 83" return to 0 if the count
exceeds 9999. For the monitor of setting value "84", 9999 is
the maximum.

331

RS-485
communication
station number

332

RS-485
communication
speed

390

% setting reference
frequency

60Hz

1 to 400Hz

Set a reference frequency of the set frequency.

Protocol selection

1

0
1
2

Auto Baudrate/Max
Master

255

0 to 255

Mitsubishi inverter (computer link) protocol
Modbus-RTU protocol
BACnet MSTP protocol
Auto baud rate (bit7)
Setting range: 0 (Inactive)
1 (Active)
Max Master (bit0 to bit6) setting range: 0 to 127
Maximum address for master node

1

1 to 255

0

0 to 419
(0 to 418)

0

0 to 9999
(0 to 4302)

549

726

727
728

729

Max Info Frames
Device instance
number (Upper 3
digit)
Device instance
number (Lower 4
digit)

Set the inverter station number (node).
Set the communication speed.
The setting value × 100 equals the communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is 9600bps when the
setting value is "96".

Set the maximum number of messages that the inverter can
transmit while it owns the token.
Device identifier (Duplicated setting available)
Setting range of the combination of Pr. 728 and Pr. 729 are "0 to
4194302".
When Pr.728 = "419", setting range of Pr. 729 is "0 to 4302"
When Pr.729 = "4303" or more, setting range of Pr. 728 is "0 to
418"

4

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

PARAMETERS

..... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
*1
*2

The inverter works with the initial parameter setting if a value other than the setting range is set.
When using Auto baudrate, the communication speed is changed to the detected communication speed.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval
Refer to page 214
Pr. 338 Communication operation command source
Refer to page 204
Pr. 339 Communication speed command source
Refer to page 204
Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection
Refer to page 203
Pr. 342 Communication EEPROM write selection
Refer to page 216
Pr. 502 Modbus-RTU communication check time interval
Refer to page 216
Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection
Refer to page 204

Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection

Refer to page 204

247

Communication operation and setting
(1) Specifications
Communication specifications (conforming to BACnet standard of physical medium EIA-485)
Item
Physical medium
Connection port
Data transfer method
Baud rate
Start bit
Data length
Parity bit
Stop bit
Network topology
Communication method
Communication protocol
Maximum connection
Node number
Master
Supported property of BACnet
standard object type
Supported BIBBs (Annex K)
BACnet standard device profile
(Annex L)
Segmentation
Device address binding

Description
EIA-485 (RS-485)
RS-485 terminal (PU connector is not available)
NRZ encoding
9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 76800bps
Fixed to 1Bit
Fixed to 8Bit
Fixed to none
Fixed to 1Bit
Bus topology
Token passing (token bus)
Master-slave (only the master is available for this product)
MS/TP (master-slave/token passing LAN)
255 (up to 32 for one segment, addition with a repeater is available)
0 to 127
0 to 127 (this product is the master)
Refer to page 250
Refer to page 258
Refer to page 258
Not supported
Not supported

REMARKS
• This product conforms to BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
• This product is designed for multiple master network, therefore 2-wire type connection is supported.

Node with network bias resistors
This product is a node with local bias resistors. Therefore at least one node must be a node with network bias resistors
in the network configuration.
When configuring the network with only this products, refer to the following, and make the node with network bias
resistors. (When using two sets in one segment, insert them into both end of the network.)

Other node
RDA1 RDB1 RDA2 RDB2
(RXD1+)(RXD1-)(RXD2+)(RXD2-)

510

SDA1 SDB1 SDA2 SDB2
(TXD1+)(TXD1-) (TXD2+) (TXD2-)

510

TXD

RXD

P5S SG
P5S
SG
(VCC) (GND) (VCC) (GND)

VCC

Connect two 510

248

(1/4W) resistor.

Communication operation and setting
(2) BACnet reception status monitor (Pr.52)
Set Pr. 52 = "81" to monitor BACnet communication status on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07).
Status

Data

Description

LF signal

Idle
Automatic baud rate
recognition
Not joined the network

0

Never had BACnet communication
During automatic baud rate recognition
(Communication error during automatic baud rate recognition is not counted)
Waiting for a token to the own node
Received a token to the own node
Received a supported request to the own node (including broadcasting)
Received an unsupported request to the own node (including broadcasting)
Received a token to other nodes
Separated from token passing after joined in it
Detected a communication error
Protocol error (LPDU, NPDU, APDU are not following the format
regulations.)

OFF

Data to the own node
Data to the other node
Node separated
Error data

1
2
10
11
12
20
30
90
91

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

(3) % setting reference frequency (Pr. 390)
Setting of a reference frequency to the set frequency is available.
The setting value of Pr. 390 % setting reference frequency is 100% reference. The reference to the frequency command is
converted to the set frequency in the following formula.
• Set frequency = Pr. 390 % setting reference frequency × Speed scale (Refer to page 252)
Pr. 390 % setting reference frequency
Set frequency written to the inverter

0.00Hz
0%
100.00%
Set frequency (Speed scale)

REMARKS
• The % setting reference frequency cannot be set at less than the minimum frequency resolution of the inverter.
• The set frequency is written to RAM.
• The set frequency is applied at the writing of Speed scale. (The set frequency is not applied at the setting of Pr. 390.)

(4) Automatic baud rate recognition (Pr. 726 Auto Baudrate/Max Master)
Automatic changing of baud rate is available with Pr. 726 setting. When Pr. 726 = "128 to 255", turn the power ON from
OFF or reset the inverter to start automatic baud rate recognition.

0 to 127
128 to 255

Description
Automatic baud rate recognition is invalid
(Using Pr. 332 setting for baud rate)
Inverter monitors the data on the communication bus, and changes the baud rate from Pr. 332
setting. The recognized baud rate is written to Pr. 332.

4

REMARKS
• After the baud rate recognition, the recognised baud rate is written in EEPROM of Pr. 332 regardless of Pr. 342 Communication
EEPROM write selection setting.
• BACnet status monitor displays "1" during automatic baud rate recognition.
• Communication error count monitor is not performed during automatic baud rate recognition.

CAUTION
• During automatic baud rate recognition, inverter does not transmit data, but only accepts data.
• Automatic baud rate recognition cannot finish if inverter is not connected to the communication bus. (BACnet protocol will not
be established.)
• Automatic baud rate recognition cannot finish if inverter is receiving abnormal data continuously. (BACnet protocol will not be
established.)

249

PARAMETERS

Pr. 726 setting

Communication operation and setting
(5) Supported property of BACnet standard object type

APDU Timeout
Application Software Version
Database Revision
Device Address Binding
Event State
Firmware Revision
Max APDU Length Accepted
Max Info Frames
Max Master
Model Name
Number of APDU Retries
Object Identifier
Object List
Object Name
Object Type
Out Of Service
Polarity
Present Value
Priority Array
Protocol Object Types Supported
Protocol Revision
Protocol Services Supported
Protocol Version
Relinquish Default
Segmentation Supported
Status Flags
System Status
Unit
Vendor Identifier
Vendor Name
*1
*2

Device

Binary Value

Binary Output

Binary Input

Analog Value

Property

Analog Output

Object

Analog Input

R: Read only W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported) C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)

R
R
R
R
R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R
R
R

R
R
R

R
R
R

C
R

C *1
R *2

R
R
R
R
C
R

R
R
R

R

R
R
R
R
R

R
R
W
W
R
R
R
R
R
R

C *1
R *2
R
R
R
R

R

R *2

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R *2

R

R

R
R

R
R
R

This property is commandable for some instances of this object. Otherwise it is read/write.
This property is supported only for instances of this object where the Present Value property is commandable.

250

Communication operation and setting
(6) Supported BACnet object
ANALOG INPUT
Object
Identifier

*1

Object Name

Present Value
Access Type *1

0

Terminal 1

R

1

Terminal 2

R

2

Terminal 4

R

R: Read only

Description
Represents actual input voltage of terminal 1.
(The range varies depending on the Pr. 73 and Pr. 267 settings.
-10 to +10V (-100% to +100%),
-5 to +5V (-100% to +100%) )
Represents actual input voltage (or input current) of terminal 2.
(The range varies depending on the Pr. 73 and Pr. 267 settings.
0 to 10V (0% to 100%),
0 to 5V (0% to 100%),
0 to 20mA (0% to 100%) )
Represents actual input voltage (or input current) of terminal 4.
(The range varies depending on the Pr. 73 and Pr. 267 settings.
2 to 10V (0% to 100%),
1 to 5V (0% to 100%),
4 to 20mA (0% to 100%) )

W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported)

Unit
percent
(98)

percent
(98)

percent
(98)

C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)

ANALOG OUTPUT
Object
Identifier

Present Value
Access Type *1

0

Terminal CA

C

1

Terminal AM

C

Description
Controls actual output current level of terminal CA.
Control is available when Pr. 54 CA terminal function selection =
"85" *2.
(Setting range: 0.0% to 100.0% (0 to 20mA))
Controls actual output voltage level of terminal AM.
Control is available when Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection =
"86" *2.
(Setting range: 0.0% to 100.0% (0 to 10V))

Unit
percent
(98)

percent
(98)

R: Read only W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported) C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Available regardless of the operation mode, operation command source and speed command source.

4
PARAMETERS

*1
*2

Object Name

251

Communication operation and setting
ANALOG VALUE
Object
Identifier

Present Value
Access Type *1

Description

1
2
3

Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage

R
R
R

Represents the output frequency monitor.
Represents the output current monitor.
Represents the output voltage monitor.

6

Running speed

R

Represents the running speed monitor.

R

Represents the converter output voltage monitor.

R
R

Represents the output power monitor.
Represents the load meter monitor.
Represents the cumulative energization time
monitor.
Represents the actual operation time monitor.
Represents the cumulative power monitor.
Represents the PID set point monitor.
Represents the PID deviation monitor.
(minus display is available with reference to 0%,
0.1% increment)
Represents the PID measured value 2 monitor.
Represents the fault history 1 (the latest fault)
monitor.
Represents the fault history 2 (second fault in past)
monitor.
Represents the fault history 3 (third fault in past)
monitor.
Represents the fault history 4 (fourth fault in past)
monitor.
Controls the ratio to the frequency command.
(Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00)
(Refer to page 249)
Controls the PID set point.
This object is the PID set point during PID operation
if Pr. 128 (Pr. 753) = "60 or 61"
(Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00) *3
Controls the PID measured value.
This object is the PID measured value during PID
operation if Pr. 128 (Pr. 753) = "60 or 61"
(Setting range: 0.00 to 100.00) *3

23
25
52

Converter output
voltage
Output power
Load meter
Cumulative
energization time
Actual operation time
Cumulative power
PID set point

R
R
R

54

PID deviation

R

67

PID measured value 2

R

200

Alarm history 1

R

201

Alarm history 2

R

202

Alarm history 3

R

203

Alarm history 4

R

300

Speed scale *2

C

310

PID set point CMD *2

C

311

PID measured value
CMD *2

C

8
14
17
20

312
398
399
10007
10008
*1
*2
*3

Object Name

R

PID deviation CMD *2

C

Mailbox parameter
Mailbox value
Acceleration time
Deceleration time

W
W
W
W

Controls the PID deviation.
This object is the PID deviation during PID operation
if Pr. 128 (Pr. 753) = "50 or 51"
(Setting range: -100.00 to 100.00)
Access to the properties which are not defined as
objects are available. (Refer to page 255)
Sets Pr.7 Acceleration time
Sets Pr.8 Deceleration time

Unit
hertz (27)
amperes (3)
volts (5)
revolution-perminute
(104)
volts (5)
kilowatts (48)
percent (98)
hours (71)
hours (71)
kilowatt-hours (19)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
percent (98)

no-units (95)

no-units (95)

percent (98)
no-units (95)
no-units (95)
seconds (73)
seconds (73)

R: Read only W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported) C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
If communication speed command source is except for NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied.
When both C42 (Pr. 934 ) and C44 (Pr. 935 ) ≠ "9999", setting range is smaller coefficient to larger coefficient of C42 (Pr. 934 ) and C44 (Pr. 935 ).
Depending on a value, the writing value and the reading value may not be same at the minimum digit.

252

Communication operation and setting
BINARY INPUT
Object
Identifier

Terminal STF

R

1

Terminal STR

R

2

Terminal AU

R

3

Terminal RT

R

4

Terminal RL

R

5

Terminal RM

R

6

Terminal RH

R

7

Terminal JOG

R

8

Terminal MRS

R

9
10

Terminal STOP
Terminal RES

R
R

11

Terminal CS

R

Terminal RUN
Terminal SU
Terminal IPF
Terminal OL
Terminal FU
Terminal ABC1
Terminal ABC2

R
R
R
R
R
R
R

R: Read only

Description
(0: Inactive
1: Active)

Present Value
Access Type *1

0

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
*1

Object Name

Represents actual input of terminal STF.
(Represents actual input of terminal X1 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal STR.
(Represents actual input of terminal X2 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal AU.
Represents actual input of terminal RT.
(Represents actual input of terminal X6 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal RL.
(Represents actual input of terminal X3 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal RM.
(Represents actual input of terminal X4 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal RH.
(Represents actual input of terminal X5 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal JOG.
Represents actual input of terminal MRS.
(Represents actual input of terminal X8 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual input of terminal STOP.
Represents actual input of terminal RES.
Represents actual input of terminal CS.
(Represents actual input of terminal X7 when FR-A7AC is installed.)
Represents actual output of terminal RUN.
Represents actual output of terminal SU.
Represents actual output of terminal IPF.
Represents actual output of terminal OL.
Represents actual output of terminal FU.
Represents actual output of terminal ABC1.
Represents actual output of terminal ABC2.

W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported)

C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)

BINARY OUTPUT

*1
*2

Object Name

Present Value
Access Type *1

0

Terminal RUN CMD

C

1

Terminal SU CMD

C

2

Terminal IPF CMD

C

3

Terminal OL CMD

C

4

Terminal FU CMD

C

5

Terminal ABC1 CMD

C

6

Terminal ABC2 CMD

C

Description
(0: Inactive
1: Active)
Controls actual output of terminal RUN.
Available when Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2
Controls actual output of terminal SU.
Available when Pr. 191 SU terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2
Controls actual output of terminal IPF.
Available when Pr. 192 IPF terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2
Controls actual output of terminal OL.
Available when Pr. 193 OL terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2
Controls actual output of terminal FU.
Available when Pr. 194 FU terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2
Controls actual output of terminal ABC1.
Available when Pr. 195 ABC1 terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2
Controls actual output of terminal ABC2.
Available when Pr. 196 ABC2 terminal function selection = "82 or 182". *2

R: Read only W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported) C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
Available regardless of operation mode, operation command source and speed command source.

253

4
PARAMETERS

Object
Identifier

Communication operation and setting
BINARY VALUE
Object
Identifier
0
11
98
99
200

*1
*2

*3

Object Name
Inverter running
Inverter operation
ready
Alarm output
Fault output
Inverter running
reverse

Present Value
Access Type *1

Description

R

Represents inverter running (RUN signal) status.

R

Represents inverter operation ready (RY signal) status.

R
R

Represents alarm output (LF signal) status.
Represents fault output (ALM signal) status.

R

Represents inverter reverse running status.

300

Control input instruction
AU

C

301

Control input instruction
RT

C

302

Control input instruction
RL

C

303

Control input instruction
RM

C

304

Control input instruction
RH

C

305

Control input instruction
JOG *2

C

306

Control input instruction
MRS

C

307

Control input instruction
STOP *2

C

308

Control input instruction
RES *2

C

309

Control input instruction
CS *2

C

400

Run/Stop

C

401

Forward/Reverse

C

402

Fault reset

C

Controls the function assigned to terminal AU.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 184 AU terminal
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RT.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 183 RT terminal
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RL.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 180 RL terminal
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RM.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 181 RM terminal
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RH.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 182 RH terminal
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal JOG.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 185 JOG
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal MRS.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 187 MRS
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal STOP.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 188 STOP
terminal function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal RES.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 189 RES terminal
function selection.
Controls the function assigned to terminal CS.
Setting 1 of this object turns ON the signal assigned to Pr. 186 CS terminal
function selection.
Controls start/stop command. Start command is written after Speed scale
is applied. *3
1: Run
0: Stop
Controls forward/reverse rotation. *3
1: Reverse rotation
0: Forward rotation
Clears fault output status.
(Release of an inverter fault without inverter reset is available.)

R: Read only W: Read/Write (Commandable values not supported) C: Read/Write (Commandable values supported)
The following signals cannot be controlled by the network: Jog operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, start self-holding
and reset. Therefore control input instruction JOG, STOP, RES, and CS are invalid in the initial status. When using Control input instruction JOG,
STOP, RES, and CS, change the signals with Pr. 185, Pr. 186, Pr. 188, Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection). (Refer to page 122) (Reset is
available with ReinitializeDevice. )
If communication speed command source is except for NET, the setting value can be written, but not to be applied.

254

Communication operation and setting
(7) Mailbox parameter/Mailbox value
Access to the properties which are not defined as objects are available by using "Mailbox parameter" and "Mailbox
value".
To read a property, write the register of the intended property to "Mailbox parameter", and then read "Mailbox value".
To write a property, write the register of the intended property to "Mailbox parameter", and then write a value to
"Mailbox value".

BACnet registers
System environment variable
Register

Definition

Read/Write

Remarks
For write, set data as the operation mode setting. For read,
data is read as the operation mode status.

Operation mode/
inverter setting

40010

Read/write

Mode

Read Value

Written Value

EXT

H0000

H0010 *

PU

H0001

H0011 *

EXT JOG

H0002

⎯

PU JOG

H0003

⎯

NET

H0004

H0014

PU+EXT

H0005

⎯

* Writing is available depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings. Refer
to page 203 for details.

The restrictions depending on the operation mode changes
according to the computer link specifications.

Real-time monitor
Refer to page 141 for details of the monitor description.
Description

Increments

40201
40202
40203

0.01Hz/1
0.01A/0.1A *1
0.1V

40211
40212

Output frequency/Speed *4
Output current
Output voltage
Frequency setting value/Speed
setting *4
Running speed
Converter output voltage
Regenerative brake duty
Electronic thermal relay function
load factor
Output current peak value
Converter output voltage peak value

40213

Input power

0.01A/0.1A *1
0.1V
0.01kW/0.1kW

40214

Output power

0.01kW/0.1kW

40215
40216
40217
40220

Input terminal status *2
Output terminal status *3
Load meter
Cumulative energization time

40205
40206
40208
40209
40210

*1
*2

0.1%

40277

*1

40278

*1

⎯
⎯
0.1%
1h

40279
40280

⎯

⎯

⎯

1h
0.1%
1kWh
Variable
Variable
0.1%
0.1%
0.1%
⎯
⎯
⎯
0.1%
1kWh
1kWh
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *1
0.01kWh/
0.1kWh *1

CS

RES

STOP

MRS

JOG

RH

RM

RL

RT

AU

STR

b0
STF

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

ABC2

ABC1

FU

OL

IPF

SU

b0
RUN

X14

X13

X12

X2

X1

b0
X0

⎯

⎯

b0
DY

Y2

Y1

b0
Y0

X11

X10

X9

X8

X7

Option input terminal 2 monitor details (input terminal status of FR-A7AX)

b15
⎯
*7

1r/min
0.1V
0.1%

Increments

When Pr.37 = "1 to 9998" or Pr. 144 = "2 to 10, 102 to 110," the unit is an integral value (one increment). (Refer to page 139)
Option input terminal 1 monitor details (input terminal status of FR-A7AX) All OFF if option is not installed.

b15
X15
*6

0.01Hz/1

Description
Actual operation time
Motor load factor
Cumulative power
Power saving effect
Cumulative saving power
PID set point
PID measured value
PID deviation
Option input terminal status 1 *5
Option input terminal status 2 *6
Option output terminal status *7
PID measured value 2
32-bit cumulative power
(lower 16-bit)
32-bit cumulative power
(upper 16-bit)
32-bit cumulative power
(lower 16-bit)
32-bit cumulative power
(upper 16-bit)

Output terminal monitor details

b15
⎯
*4
*5

40223
40224
40225
40250
40251
40252
40253
40254
40258
40259
40260
40267

The setting depends on capacities. (FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less/FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more)
Input terminal monitor details

b15
⎯
*3

Register

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

Option output terminal monitor details (output terminal status of FR-A7AY)

b15
⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

RA3

RA2

RA1

X6

X5

X4

X3

All OFF if option is not installed.

⎯

⎯

⎯

⎯

All OFF if option is not installed.

Y6

Y5

Y4

Y3

255

4
PARAMETERS

Register

Communication operation and setting
Parameter
Parameters Register
0 to 999

41000 to
41999

C2(902)

41902
42092

C3(902)
43902

125(903)

41903
42093

C4(903)
43903

C5(904)

41904
42094

C6(904)
43904

126(905)

41905
42095

C7(905)
43905

C8(930)
C9(930)
C10(931)
C11(931)
C42(934)

Read/write

Remarks
The parameter number + 41000 is the
register number.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

The analog value (%) set to C3 (902) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the voltage
(current) applied to the terminal 2 is read.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

The analog value (%) set to C4 (903) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the voltage
(current) applied to the terminal 2 is read.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

The analog value (%) set to C6 (904) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current
(voltage) applied to the terminal 4 is read.

Read/write
Read/write
Read

Current output bias signal

Read/write

42120

Current output bias current

Read/write

41931

Current output gain signal

Read/write

42121

Current output gain current

Read/write

41934

PID display bias coefficient

Read/write

42124

PID display bias analog value

Read/write

43934

PID display bias analog value
(terminal analog value)

Read

41935

PID display gain coefficient

Read/write

42125

PID display gain analog value

Read/write

43935

PID display gain analog value
(terminal analog value)

Read

C45(935)

256

Read/Write

41930

C43(934)
C44(935)

Parameter Name
Refer to the parameter list (page
62) for the parameter names.
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias (frequency)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias (analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
bias (terminal analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain (frequency)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain (analog value)
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain (terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias (frequency)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias (analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
bias (terminal analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain (frequency)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain (analog value)
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain (terminal analog value)

The analog value (%) set to C7 (905) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current
(voltage) applied to the terminal 4 is read.

The analog value (%) set to C43 (934) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current
(voltage) applied to the terminal 4 is read.
The analog value (%) set to C45 (935) is
read.
The analog value (%) of the current
(voltage) applied to the terminal 4 is read.

Communication operation and setting
Faults history
Register

Definition

Read/Write

40501
40502
40503

Fault history 1
Fault history 2
Fault history 3

Read/write
Read
Read

40504
40505
40506
40507
40508

Fault history 4
Fault history 5
Fault history 6
Fault history 7
Fault history 8

Read
Read
Read
Read
Read

Remarks

Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as
"H00
". Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the fault
code.
Performing write using the register 40501 batchclears the faults history. Set any value as data.

Fault code list
Data

Description

Data

Description

Data

Description

Data

Description

No fault
OC1
OC2
OC3
OV1
OV2
OV3
THT
THM
FIN
IPF
UVT

H52
H60
H70
H80
H81
H90
H91
HA0
HA1
HA2
HA4
HA5

ILF
OLT
BE
GF
LF
OHT
PTC
OPT
OP1
OP2
E.16 *
E.17 *

HA6
HA7
HA8
HB0
HB1
HB2
HB3
HC0
HC1
HC2
HC4
HC5

E.18 *
E.19 *
E.20 *
PE
PUE
RET
PE2
CPU
CTE
P24
CDO
IOH

HC6
HC7
HE4
HE5
HE6
HF1
HF2
HF5
HF6
HF7
HFD

SER
AIE
LCI
PCH
PID
E.1
E.2
E.5
E.6
E.7
E.13

H00
H10
H11
H12
H20
H21
H22
H30
H31
H40
H50
H51

* Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.

Model information monitor
Register
44001 to
44010

Definition
Inverter type

Read/Write
Read

Remarks
Reading inverter type in ASCII code.
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area
Example of FR-F720-NA
H46, H52, H2D, H46, H37, H32, H30, H2D, H4E, H41, H20 ...... H20

Capacity

Read

0.75K ............... "

7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)

4
PARAMETERS

44011 to
44013

Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1kW, and rounds down to 0.01kW
increments
"H20" (blank code) is set for blank area
Example

257

Communication operation and setting
(8) ANNEX A - PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (NORMATIVE)
(This annex is part of this Standard and is required for its use.)

BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
Date: 1st Aug 2010
Vendor Name: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Product Name: Inverter
Product Model Number: FR-F720-NA, FR-F740-NA
Application Software Version: 8290*
Firmware Revision: 1.00
BACnet Protocol Revision: 4

Product Description:

BACnet Standardized Device Profile (Annex L):
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)
BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)

List all BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks Supported (Annex K):
DS-RP-B, DS-WP-B, DM-DDB-B, DM-DOB-B, DM-DCC-B , DM-RD-B

Segmentation Capability:
Segmented requests supportedWindow Size
Segmented responses supportedWindow Size

258

Communication operation and setting
Standard Object Types Supported:
An object type is supported if it may be present in the device. For each standard Object Type supported provide the
following data:
1) Whether objects of this type are dynamically creatable using the CreateObject service
2) Whether objects of this type are dynamically deletable using the DeleteObject service
3) List of the optional properties supported
4) List of all properties that are writable where not otherwise required by this standard
5) List of proprietary properties and for each its property identifier, datatype, and meaning
6) List of any property range restrictions
Dynamic object creation and deletion is not supported.
Refer to page 250 for the supported object type of FR-F700-NA series.

Data Link Layer Options:
BACnet IP, (Annex J)
BACnet IP, (Annex J), Foreign Device
ISO 8802-3, Ethernet (Clause 7)
ANSI/ATA 878.1, 2.5 Mb. ARCNET (Clause 8)
ANSI/ATA 878.1, RS-485 ARCNET (Clause 8), baud rate(s)
MS/TP master (Clause 9), baud rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800
MS/TP slave (Clause 9), baud rate(s):
Point-To-Point, EIA 232 (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
Point-To-Point, modem, (Clause 10), baud rate(s):
LonTalk, (Clause 11), medium:
Other:

Device Address Binding:
Is static device binding supported? (This is currently necessary for two-way communication with MS/TP slaves and
certain other devices.) Yes
No

Networking Options:
Router, Clause 6 - List all routing configurations, e.g., ARCNET-Ethernet, Ethernet-MS/TP, etc.
Annex H, BACnet Tunneling Router over IP
BACnet/IP Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
Does the BBMD support registrations by Foreign Devices? Yes
No

Character Sets Supported:

If this product is a communication gateway, describe the types of non-BACnet equipment/
networks(s) that the gateway supports:

259

PARAMETERS

4

Indicating support for multiple character sets does not imply that they can all be supported simultaneously.
ANSI X3.4 IBMTM/MicrosoftTM DBCS ISO 8859-1
ISO 10646 (UCS-2) ISO 10646 (UCS-4) JIS C 6226

Communication operation and setting
4.19.9 Operation by PLC function
(Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498, Pr. 506 to Pr. 515, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865)
I/O data read, write, etc. can be performed by accessing the inverter in the predetermined method using special
relays, special registers, etc.
Operation, parameter read/write, etc. can be performed in accordance with the created sequence programs (built
in the inverter) using input data from the control input terminals.
With the output signals, output data can be output to outside the inverter from the control output terminals as not
only the inverter's status signals but also pilot lamp ON/OFF, interlock and other control signals set freely by the
user.
Parameter
Number
414

Name
PLC function operation
selection

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
0

0

1
0

415

498

506 to 515

826 to 865

Inverter operation lock
mode setting

0

PLC function flash memory
clear

0

0 to 9999

0

0 to 65535

1

Parameter 1 to 10 for user

Parameter 11 to 50 for user

Description
PLC function is invalid
PLC function is valid
(Inverter reset is necessary to make this setting valid.)
The inverter start signal is valid regardless of the
sequence program execution key.
The inverter start signal is valid only when the sequence
program execution key is set to RUN.
When the sequence program execution key is in the
STOP position, the inverter does not start if the inverter
start signal STF or STR is turned ON. (If the key is
switched from RUN to STOP during inverter operation,
the inverter is decelerated to a stop.)
9696: Flash memory clear
Other than 9696:
Flash memory is not cleared
Inverter parameters Pr. 506 to Pr. 515, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865
are used as user parameters.
Since this parameter area and the devices used with the
PLC function, D110 to D159, are accessible to each
other, the values set in Pr. 506 to Pr. 515, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865
can be used in a sequence program.
The result of operation performed in the sequence
program can also be monitored using Pr. 506 to Pr. 515,
Pr. 826 to Pr. 865.

...... The specification differs according to the manufacture date. Refer to page 400 and check the SERIAL.

Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.

260

PID control

4.20 PID control
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Perform process control such as pump and
air volume.
Calibrate the measured value input and PID
display coefficient
Drive a motor at a constant speed before
starting to PID control
Switch between two PID control settings
Pump function by multiple motors

Outline of PID control
Bias and gain calibration for
PID displayed values

Refer
to Page

Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 553, Pr. 554,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577
Pr. 241, Pr. 759,
C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr. 935)

261
273

Pre-charge function

Pr. 760 to Pr. 769

275

Second PID function

Pr. 753 to Pr. 758, Pr. 765 to Pr. 769

281

Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 591

283

Advanced PID function

4.20.1 Outline of PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 241, Pr. 553, Pr. 554,
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577)
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure.
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a
feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.

127

128

Name
PID control automatic
switchover frequency

PID action selection

Initial
Value
9999

Setting
Range
0 to 400Hz
9999
10, 110 *2
11, 111 *2
20, 120 *2
21, 121 *2

10

PID proportional band

100%

50 *2

PID reverse action
PID forward action

60 *2

PID reverse action

61 *2

PID forward action

70 *6
71 *6
80 *6
81 *6
90 *6

PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action

100

*6

101

*6

0.1 to 1000%

9999

130 *1

PID integral time

1s

0.1 to 3600s

9999
131

PID upper limit

9999

Set the frequency at which the control is automatically
changed to PID control.
Without PID automatic switchover function
PID reverse action
Deviation value signal input
(terminal 1 *4)
PID forward action
PID reverse action
Measured value (terminal 4 *5)
Set point (terminal 2 *4 or Pr. 133)
PID forward action

51 *2

91 *6

129 *1

Description

0 to 100% *3
9999

Deviation value signal input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link, BACnet)
Measured value, set point input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link, BACnet)

Deviation value signal input
(PLC function)
Measured value, set point input
(PLC function)
Deviation value signal input
(PLC function)
PID forward action
(Not applied to the inverter frequency)
PID reverse action
Measured value, set point input
(PLC function)
PID forward action
(Not applied to the inverter frequency)
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the
manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the
measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the
response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates,
e.g. hunting occurs.
Gain Kp = 1/proportional band
No proportional control
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time required for
integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as
proportional (P) action.
As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier but
hunting occurs more easily.
No integral control.
Set the upper limit value. If the feedback value exceeds the
setting, the FUP signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/
10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
No function

261

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

PID control
Parameter
Number

132

Name

Initial
Value

PID lower limit

9999

133 *1

PID action set point

9999

134 *1

PID differential time

9999

PID deviation limit

9999

553

554

575

576
577

PID signal operation
selection

0

Output interruption
detection time

1s

Output interruption
detection level
Output interruption
cancel level

0Hz
1000%

Setting
Range

Description

Set the lower limit value. If the measured value falls below the
setting range, the FDN signal is output. The maximum input
0 to 100% *3
(20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
equivalent to 100%.
9999
No function
0 to 100% *3 Used to set the set point for PID control.
9999
Terminal 2 input is the set point.
When deviation lamp is input, time (Td) is the time required to
0.01 to
provide the manipulated variable of only the proportional (P)
10.00s
action. As the differential time increases, greater response is
made to a deviation change.
9999
No differential control.
Y48 signal is output when the absolute value of deviation
0 to 100.0%*3
amount exceeds the deviation limit value.
9999
No function
Select the operation to be performed at the detection of upper,
0 to 3,
lower, and deviation limit for the measured value input. The
10 to 13
operation for PID output suspension function can be selected.
The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID
0 to 3600s
operation remains at less than the Pr. 576 setting for longer
than the time set in Pr. 575.
9999
Without output interruption function
Set the frequency at which the output interruption processing is
0 to 400Hz
performed.
Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) to release the PID output
900 to 1100%
interruption function.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.
PID control is available without turning X14 signal ON when Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, 61, 110, 111, 120, 120".
Setting values of Pr.131 to Pr.133, Pr.553, Pr.577 are without unit when "9999" is set to both of C42(Pr.934) and C44(Pr.935). (The values set to
Pr.553 and Pr.577 indicate deviation range whether the unit is % or is not indicated.)
Input specification for the terminals are determined by Pr.73 Analog input selection.
Input specification for the terminal is determined by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.

(1) PID control basic configuration
⋅ Pr. 128 (Pr. 753) = "10, 11, 110, 111" (Deviation value signal input)
Inverter circuit
Set point

Deviation signal
+Terminal 1*
0 to 10VDC
(0 to 5V)
To outside

PID operation
1
Kp 1+ Ti S +Td S

Manipulated Motor
variable
M

Feedback signal (measured value)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time

⋅ Pr. 128 (Pr. 753) = "20, 21, 120, 121" (Measured value input)
Inverter circuit
Pr. 133 or
terminal 2 *1
+Set point
0 to 5VDC
(0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA)
Terminal 4 *2

PID operation
Kp 1+ Ti

1

Feedback signal (measured value)

S +Td

S

Manipulated Motor
variable
M

4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)

Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time

262

PID control
(2) PID action overview
1) PI action
A combination of P action (P) and I action (I) for providing a manipulated
variable in response to deviation and changes with time.

Deviation Set point
Measured value

[Operation example for stepped changes of measured value]
(Note) PI action is the sum of P and I actions.

P action

Time
I action

Time

PI action

Time

2) PD action
A combination of P action (P) and differential control action (D) for
providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation speed to improve
the transient characteristic.
[Operation example for proportional changes of measured value]

Set point
Deviation
Measured value
P action

Time

(Note) PD action is the sum of P and D actions.

D action

Time

PD
action

Time

3) PID action
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both
actions for control.

Set point
Deviation

(Note) PID action is the sum of P, I and D actions.

Measured value
P action

Time

I action

Time

D action

Time

4

PID action

PARAMETERS

Time

263

PID control
4)Reverse action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is positive, and
decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
Deviation

Set point

[Heating]
+

Set
point

X>0
X<0

-

Cold
Hot

Increase
Decrease
Measured value

Feedback signal
(measured value)

5)Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is negative, and
decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
Measured value

[Cooling]
X>0

+

Set
point

X<0

-

Too cold
Hot

Set point

Decrease
Increase

Feedback signal
(measured value)

Deviation

Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)
Deviation
Positive
Negative
Reverse action
Forward action

(3) Connection diagram
⋅ Sink logic
⋅ Pr. 128 = 20
⋅ Pr. 183 = 14
⋅ Pr. 191 = 47
⋅ Pr. 192 = 16
⋅ Pr. 193 = 14
⋅ Pr. 194 = 15

MCCB

Inverter

MC

Power supply

Forward
rotation
Reverse
rotation
PID control
selection

U
V
W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

(Set point setting)

Pump

IM

P

STF
STR
RT(X14)*3
SD

*2(PID)SU

10

*2(FDN)OL

*2(FUP)FU

Setting
Potentiometer

Motor

2

*2(RL)IPF

5
1
4*4

SE

2-wire type
3-wire
During PID action
Detector type
Upper limit
Lower limit
+
+ +
Forward rotation output
Reverse rotation
(OUT)
(24V)
output
(COM)
Output signal common

(Measured value) 4 to 20mA
0 24V
Power
supply

*1

AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
*1
*2
*3
*4

The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used.
The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal selection) setting.
The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal selection) setting.
The AU signal need not be input.

264

PID control
(4) I/O signals and parameter setting
⋅ Turn ON the X14 signal to perform PID control. When this signal is OFF, PID action is not performed and normal
inverter operation is performed. (However, turning X14 ON is not necessary when Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, 61, 110,
111, 120, 121".)
⋅ Enter the set point across inverter terminals 2-5 or into Pr. 133 and enter the measured value signal across inverter
terminals 4 and 5. At this time, set any of "20, 21, 120, 121" in Pr. 128.
⋅ When entering the externally calculated deviation signal, enter it across terminals 1 and 5. At this time, set any of
"10, 11, 110, 111" in Pr. 128.

Input signals
Terminal
Used

Signal

Function

X14

PID control
selection

X64

PID forward/
reverse action
switchover
Depending on
Pr. 178 to Pr. PID integral value
reset
189

X72

Pre-charge end
command
Second precharge end
command

X77
X78

Description
Turn ON X14 to perform PID control.
By turning ON X64, forward action can be
selected for PID reverse action (Pr. 128 =
10, 20, 110, 120), and reverse action for
forward action (Pr. 128 = 11, 21, 111, 121).
ON: Integral and differential values are
reset
OFF: Normal processing
Turn ON X77 to end the pre-charge
operation and start PID control.
Turn ON X78 while RT is ON to end the
pre-charge operation and start PID
control.

Parameter Setting
Set 14 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.

Set 64 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.

Set 72 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.
Set 77 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.
Set 78 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189.

Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 120, 121
Pr. 133 =9999
Pr. 73 = 1 *1, 3, 5, 11, 13, 15
0 to 5V................0 to 100%
Pr. 73 = 0, 2, 4, 10, 12, 14
0 to 10V..............0 to 100%
Pr. 73 = 6, 7, 16, 17
0 to 20mA...........0 to 100%
Set the set value (Pr. 133) from the Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 120, 121
operation panel or parameter unit.
Pr. 133 = 0 to 100%
Input the deviation signal calculated
Pr. 128 = 10 *1, 11, 110, 111
externally.
Pr. 73 = 2, 3, 5, 7, 12, 13, 15, 17
-5V to +5V ..........-100% to +100%
Pr. 73 = 0, 1 *1, 4, 6, 10, 11, 14,
-10V to +10V ......-100% to +100%
16
Input the signal from the detector
Pr. 128 = 20, 21, 120, 121
(measured value signal).
Pr. 267 = 0 *1
4 to 20mA...........0 to 100%
Pr. 267 = 1
0 to 5V................0 to 100%
Pr. 267 = 2
0 to 10V..............0 to 100%
Input the deviation value from LONWORKS,
Pr. 128 = 50, 51
CC-Link, or BACnet communication.
Input the set value and measured value
Pr. 128 = 60, 61
from LONWORKS , CC-Link, or BACnet
communication.
Input the deviation value from PLC
Pr. 128 = 70, 71, 90, 91
function.
Input the set value and measured value
Pr. 128 = 80, 81, 100, 101
from PLC function.

2

2

Set point input

PU

⎯

Set point input

1

1

Deviation signal
input

4

4

Measured value
input

Communication

⎯

*2

PLC
*1
*2

⎯

Deviation value
input
Set value,
measured value
input
Deviation value
input
Set value, measured
value input

The shaded area indicates the parameter initial value.
When Pr. 128 = "50, 51, 60, 61" and the operation mode is not NET, input method is same as when Pr. 128 = "10, 11, 20, 21" respectively.
Input from BACnet communication is available when the operation mode is NET, Pr. 549 = "2" (BACnet), and RS-485 terminal has the
command source. Input from LonWorks or CC-Link communication is available when BACnet communication is inactive and the operation
mode is NET.
For the setting method via LONWORKS communication, refer to the LONWORKS communication option (FR-A7NL) instruction manual.
For the setting method via CC-Link communication, refer to the CC-Link communication option (FR-A7NC) instruction manual.
For the setting method via BACnet communication, refer to page 247.

265

4
PARAMETERS

Input

Enter the set point for PID control.

PID control
Output signals
Signal

FUP

FDN

RL

PID

Output

SLEEP

Y48
Y49
Y50
Y51
Y52
Y53
Y54
SE

*1

Terminal
Used

Function

Description

Parameter Setting

Pr. 128 =20, 21, 60, 61, 120, 121
Output to indicate that the measured
Pr. 131 ≠ 9999
Upper limit output value signal exceeded the upper limit
Set 15 or 115 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
value (Pr. 131).
196. *1
Pr. 128 =20, 21, 60, 61, 120, 121
Output when the measured value signal Pr. 132 ≠ 9999
Lower limit output
falls below the lower limit (Pr. 132).
Set 14 or 114 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
196. *1
"Hi" is output to indicate that the output
Forward (reverse)
indication of the parameter unit is forward Set 16 or 116 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
rotation direction
rotation (FWD), and "Low" to indicate that 196. *1
output
it is reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).
Set 47 or 147 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
During PID
Turns ON during PID control.
196. *1
control activated
Pr. 575 ≠ 9999
PID output
Turns ON when the PID output
Set 70 or 170 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
Depending on interruption
interruption function is performed.
196. *1
Pr. 190 to Pr.
Pr. 553 ≠ 9999
196
Output when the absolute value of
PID deviation limit
Set 48 or 148 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
deviation exceeds the limit value.
196. *1
During preSet 49 or 149 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
charge operation
196. *1
Output during the pre-charge operation
During second
Set 50 or 150 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
pre-charge
196. *1
operation
Pre-charge time
Set 51 or 151 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
over
196. *1
Output when the pre-charged time
exceeds the time set in Pr.764 or Pr.769.
Second preSet 52 or 152 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
charge time over
196. *1
Pre-charge level
Set 53 or 153 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
over
196. *1
Output when the pre-charged amount
exceeds the set level in Pr.763 or Pr.768.
Second preSet 54 or 154 in any of Pr. 190 to Pr.
charge level over
196. *1
Common terminal for terminals assigned
Output terminal
SE
to FUP signal, FDN signal, RL signal, PID
common
signal, SLEEP signal, and Y48 signal

When 100 or larger value is set to any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to
page 128 for details)

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, 190 to Pr. 196 may affect the other functions. Please set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

266

PID control
(5) PID control automatic switchover control (Pr. 127)
⋅ The inverter can be started up without PID control mode only at a start.
⋅ When the frequency is set to Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency within the range 0 to 400Hz, the
system starts up without PID operation from a start until output frequency is reached Pr. 127, and then it shifts to
PID control operation mode. Once the system has entered PID control operation, it continues PID control if the
output frequency falls to or below Pr. 127.
Output frequency
Without
PID control PID control
Pr.127

Time
STF
PID

(6) Selecting operation to be performed at the output of Upper limit signal, Lower limit signal,
and PID deviation limit signal (FUP signal, FDN signal, Y48 signal, Pr.554)
You can select the operation to be performed at the detection of upper, lower and deviation limit for the measured
value input. With Pr. 554 PID signal operation selection, signal output or signal output + alarm stop (E.PID) can be
selected for each of upper limit output signal (FUP signal), lower limit output signal (FDN signal), and PID
deviation limit signal (Y48 signal).
Pr. 554 Setting

FUP Signal, FDN Signal *

0 (Initial value)
1
2
3
10
11
12
13

Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)

Y48 Signal *
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault
(E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault
(E.PID)

SLEEP Function
Inverter coasts to a stop at the
start of SLEEP operation

Inverter decelerates to a stop at
the start of SLEEP operation

* When the settings for Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, and Pr.553 PID deviation limit, which corresponds with FUP, FDN, and Y48 signals, are
"9999" (no function), the signal is not output, or the alarm stop is not performed.

PARAMETERS

4

267

PID control
(7) PID output suspension function (SLEEP function) (SLEEP signal, Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 )
⋅ The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID control remains at less than the Pr. 576 Output
interruption detection level setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575 Output interruption detection time. (At this time,
if "0 to 3" is set to Pr. 554 PID signal operation selection, output is shut off (the inverter coasts to stop) when SLEEP
operation starts. If "10 to 13" is set, the inverter decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set in Pr.8 when
SLEEP operation starts.)
This function can reduce energy consumption in the low-efficiency, low-speed range.
Pr.554 Setting
0 (Initial value)
1
2
3
10
11
12
13

SLEEP Function

FUP Signal, FDN Signal

Inverter coasts to a stop at the
start of SLEEP operation

Inverter decelerates to a stop at
the start of SLEEP operation

Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)

Y48 Signal
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault
(E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault
(E.PID)

⋅ When the deviation (= set value - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff cancel level (Pr. 577 setting 1000%) while the PID output suspension function is ON, the PID output suspension function is canceled and PID
control operation is resumed automatically.
⋅ While the PID output suspension function is ON, the PID output suspension signal (SLEEP) is output. At this time,
the inverter running signal (RUN) is OFF and the PID control operating signal (PID) is ON.
⋅ For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal output, assign the function by setting "70" (positive logic) or "170"
(negative logic) in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
Deviation

When Pr.554 = "0 to 3", reverse action (Pr.128 = "10")
Cancel
level

Pr.577 - 1000%

Output frequency

Pr.576
Less than Pr. 575
Pr. 575 or more SLEEP period
Time
OFF

RUN
PID
SLEEP

Deviation

ON
When Pr.554 = "10 to 13", reverse action (Pr.128 = "10")
Cancel
level

Pr.577 - 1000%

Output frequency

Decelerates
to a stop*

Pr.576
Less than Pr. 575

RUN

Pr. 575 or more

SLEEP period

Time

OFF

PID
SLEEP
*

ON

When the output rises to the output interruption cancel level during deceleration to a stop, output interruption gets cancelled, and the inverter
accelerates again to continue PID control. Pr.576 Output interruption detection level is invalid during deceleration.

268

PID control
(8) PID monitor function
⋅ The PID control set value, measured value and deviation value can be displayed on the operation panel and output
from terminal CA, AM.
⋅ Integral value indicating a negative % can be displayed on the deviation monitor. 0% is displayed as 1000. (The
deviation monitor cannot be output from the terminal CA, AM.)
⋅ For the monitors, set the following values in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection, Pr. 54 CA terminal function
selection, and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection.
Setting Monitor Description
52

*

Minimum Terminal CA, AM
Increments*
Full Scale*

Remarks

PID set point

53

PID measured value

67

PID measured value 2

54

PID deviation

0.1

0.1

For deviation input (Pr. 128 = 10, 11, 110, 111), the monitor
100%/C42(Pr.934) or value is always displayed as 0.
C44(Pr.935)
For the setting value "67", monitoring is available even
when PID control is inactive.

—

Value cannot be set to Pr. 54 or Pr. 158.
The PID deviation value of 0% is displayed as 1000.

When neither of C42(Pr.934) nor C44(Pr.935) setting is "9999", minimum increment changes from % to no unit, and the full scale value for
terminal CA/AM changes from 100% to the larger value between C42(Pr.934) PID display bias coefficient and C44(Pr.935) PID display gain
coefficient. (The smaller value between C42(Pr.934) and C44(Pr.935) becomes the minimum value.)

(9) Adjustment procedure
Parameter setting

Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 553, Pr. 554, and
Pr. 575 to Pr. 577.

Terminal setting

Set the I/O terminals for PID control. (Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal
function selection), Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection))

Turn ON the X14 signal.

PID control is available without turning X14 signal ON when Pr.128 =
"50, 51, 60, 61, 110, 111, 120, 121".

Operation

PARAMETERS

4

269

PID control
(10) Calibration example
(A detector of 4mA at 0°C and 20mA at 50°C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25°C under PID control.
The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2 and 5 (0 to 5V).)
Start

Set the room temperature to 25 C.
Set Pr. 128 and turn ON the X14 signal to enable PID control.

Determination of set point
Determine the set point of
what is desired to be adjusted.

Detector specifications
When 0 C 4mA and 50 C 20mA are used, the set point 25 C is 50%
on the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.
(Converting set point to % is unnecessary when both of C42(Pr.934) and
C44(Pr.935) "9999".)

Conversion of set point into %

Calculate the ratio of the set
point to the detector output.

Make the following calibration* when the target setting input (0 to 5V) and
detector output (4 to 20mA, 0 to 100%) must be calibrated.

Make calibration.

When setting 50% as the set point with voltage input
In the specification of terminal 2, 0V converts to 0% and 5V to 100%.
Thus, set 2.5V for 50% to terminal 2.
When setting 50% as the set point with parameter
Set "50" to Pr.133.
(When both of C42(Pr.934) and C44(Pr.935) are set other than "9999", set
"25" as the set point (no % conversion) directly to the Pr.133.)

Setting of set point
Input the set point.

Operation

When the parameter unit is used for operation, input the set point to
Pr. 133.
When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129) to a
slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer time, and
the differential time (Pr. 134) to "9999" (no function), and while looking at
the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129) and
increase the integral time (Pr. 130). For slow response system where a
deadband exists, differential control (Pr. 134) should be turned ON and
increased slowly.

Set the proportional band (Pr.
129) to a slightly larger value,
the integral time (Pr. 130) to a
slightly longer time, and the
differential time (Pr. 134) to
"9999" (no function), and turn
ON the start signal.

Is the set point stable?

Yes

No
Parameter adjustment
To stabilize the measured value,
change the proportional band (Pr.
129) to a larger value, the integral
time (Pr. 130) to a slightly longer
time, and the differential time (Pr.
134) to a slightly shorter time.

Parameter optimization
While the measured value is stable
throughout the operation status, the
proportional band (Pr. 129) may be
decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130)
decreased, and the differential time
(Pr. 134) increased.

Adjustment end
*

When calibration is required

To perform calibration for detector output and set point input, set calibration parameters Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal
2), or Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal 4). However, use Pr. 934 and Pr. 935 instead of Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 when both of C42
(Pr. 934) and C44(Pr. 935) ≠ "9999". Make calibration in the PU mode during an inverter stop.
(For the details of Pr. 902 to Pr. 905, refer to page 177. For the details of Pr. 934 and Pr. 935, refer to page 271.)

270

PID control

1) Setting with terminal 2 input
1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) across terminals 2 and 5.
2. Enter in C2 (Pr. 902) the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. In C3 (Pr. 902), set the voltage value at 0%.
4. Apply the voltage of 100% set point (e.g. 5V) to across terminals 2 and 5.
5. Enter in Pr. 125 the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 60Hz).
6. In C4 (Pr. 903), set the voltage value at 100%.
2) Setting with Pr. 133
When both or one of C42 (Pr. 934) and C44 (Pr. 935) is "9999".
For the set point, set a % converted value in the range of 0 to 100%.
When both of C42 (Pr. 934) and C44 (Pr. 935) ≠ "9999".
For the set point, set PID coefficient, which corresponds with 0 to 100%.


1) When both or one of C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) is "9999".
1. Apply the input current of 0% measured value (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4 and 5.
2. Make calibration using C6 (Pr. 904).
3. Apply the input current of 100% measured value (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4 and 5.
4. Make calibration using C7 (Pr. 905).
2) When both of C42 (Pr.934) and C44 (Pr.935) ≠ "9999".
1. Apply the input current of 0% measured value (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4 and 5.
2. Set PID display value at 0% measured value (example: 15(°C)) to C42 (Pr. 934) , and calibrate C43 (Pr. 934).
3. Apply the input current of 100% measured value (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4 and 5.
4. Set PID display value at 100% measured value (example: 35(°C)) to C44 (Pr. 935), and calibrate C45 (Pr. 935).
REMARKS
⋅ The frequency set in C5 (Pr. 904) and Pr. 126 should be the same as set in C2 (Pr. 902) and Pr. 125.

The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
Pr. 133
Setting

Pr. 934,
Pr. 935
Setting

Set Point Setting

Measured Value
(Terminal 4)

Manipulated Variable

(Terminal 2)
Set point
(%)
100

9999

—
0
0

5 (V)
Set point signal input

Measured
Value
(%)
100

(Pr.133)

4

0
0 4
C6(Pr.904)

0
C5(Pr.904)

Other than
9999

20 (mA)
C7(Pr.905)
Measured value
input signal

Manipulated
Variable(Hz)
60
(Pr.125)

PARAMETERS

Both or one
is 9999

Set point
(%)
100

0
C2(Pr.902)

Pr.126
Set point setting

0

100
Deviation(%)

(Pr.133)
Measured
value
(%)

Set point
(%)
100

100

Other than
9999
0
C42(Pr.934)

0

C44(Pr.935)

Set PID coefficient
corresponding with 0 to 100%.

0 4
C43(Pr.934)

20 (mA)
C45(Pr.935)
Measured value
input signal

271

PID control
CAUTION
⋅ If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL signal) or Jog operation (JOG signal) is entered with the X14 signal ON, PID control is stopped
and multi-speed or Jog operation is started.
⋅ If the setting is as follows, PID control becomes invalid.
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level = "9999" (analog variable)
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "6" (switchover mode))
⋅ When the Pr. 128 setting is "20, 21, 120, 121", note that the input across inverter terminals 1 and 5 is added to the set value
across terminals 2 and 5.
⋅ Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 may affect the other functions. Please set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
⋅ When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is the
frequency set in Pr. 903. (Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency settings are also valid.)
⋅ The remote operation function is invalid during PID operation.
⋅ When the control is switched to PID control during
normal operation, the frequency command value
PID set point
calculated by PID operation using 0Hz as standard is
used without the frequency during the operation.
Frequency
command

PID action
Normal operation

Frequency command
during normal operation

ON
PID operation

Normal operation

Operation when control is switched to PID control during normal operation

272

PID control
4.20.2 Bias and gain calibration for PID displayed values
(Pr. 241, Pr. 759, C42(Pr. 934) to C45(Pr. 935))
⋅ When both of C42(Pr. 934) and C44(Pr. 935) ≠ "9999", bias/gain calibration is available for analog value of set
point, measured value, deviation value to perform PID control.
⋅ "Bias" / "gain" function can adjust the relation between PID displayed coefficient and measured value input
signal. Examples of measured value input signals are 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, or 4 to 20mADC, and they are
externally input.
Parameter
Number
241 *1
759 *1
C42
(934) *2
C43
(934) *2
C44
(935) *2
C45
(935) *2

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

0

0
1

Displayed in %
Select the unit of analog input display.
Displayed in V/mA

PID unit selection

9999

0 to 43, 9999

This parameter changes unit of parameters and monitored
items that are related to PID control. Refer to page 320.

PID display bias
coefficient

9999

PID display bias
analog value

20%

PID display gain
coefficient

9999

PID display gain
analog value

100%

Name
Analog input display
unit switchover

0 to 500.00
9999

Description

Set the coefficient on bias (minimum) side of terminal 4 input.
Displayed in %.

0 to 300.0%

Set the converted % on bias (minimum) side current /voltage of
terminal 4 input.

0 to 500.00

Set the coefficient on gain (maximum) side of the terminal 4
input.

9999

Displayed in %.

0 to 300.0%

Set the converted % on gain (maximum) side of current/
voltage of terminal 4 input.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
*1
*2

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.
The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07(-01)).

(1) Calibration for PID displayed values (C42(Pr. 934) to C45(Pr. 935))
⋅ Set PID display bias coefficient for terminal 4 input with C42(Pr. 934).
(Initial value is the coefficient for 4mA.)
⋅ Set PID display gain coefficient for 20mA of the frequency command current (4 to 20mA) with C44(Pr. 935).
⋅ When both of C42(Pr. 934) and C44(Pr. 935) ≠ "9999" and Pr.133 is set as the set point, the setting of C42(Pr. 934) is
treated as 0%, and C44(Pr. 935) as 100%.
Initial value

Coefficient

100

4

0
20
0
4
C43(Pr.934)

PARAMETERS

Bias
C42(Pr.934)

Gain
C44(Pr.935)

100%
20mA
Frequency setting signal
C45(Pr.935)

⋅ Three methods of bias/gain adjustment for PID displayed values are the following.
(a)Method to adjust any point by application of voltage (current) across the terminals 4 and 5.
(b)Method to adjust any point without application of voltage (current) across terminals 4 and 5.
(c)Method to adjust only the frequency without adjusting the voltage (current).
(For the detail of (a) to (c), refer to page 177.
Make adjustment by assuming C7 (Pr. 905) as C45 (Pr. 935), and Pr. 126 as C44 (Pr. 935).)
CAUTION
⋅ When the voltage/current input specifications are changed with voltage/current input switch and using Pr. 73 and Pr. 267, be sure
to make calibration.

273

PID control
⋅ Take caution when the following condition is satisfied because the inverter recognizes the deviation value as a
negative (positive) value even though a positive (negative) deviation is given:
Pr. 934 PID display bias coefficient > Pr. 935 PID display gain coefficient
To perform a reverse operation, set the forward operation in Pr. 128 PID action selection. To perform a forward
operation, set the reverse operation in Pr. 128. In this case, the PID output shutoff release level is (1000 - Pr. 577).
Pr. 934 < Pr. 935 (normal setting)
Reverse operation
Forward operation

Pr. 934 ≥ Pr. 935

Reverse operation
setting to Pr. 128
Forward operation
setting to Pr. 128

Forward operation
setting to Pr. 128
Reverse operation
setting to Pr. 128

Reverse operation
Forward operation

PID output shutoff release
Pr. 577 - 1000
level

PID output shutoff release
level

(Example) Set the following: Pr. 934 = "500" or 20%
(4mA is applied), Pr. 935 = "100" or
100% (20mA is applied).
When the set point=400 and the
measured value=360, the deviation is
+40 (>0), but the inverter recognizes the
deviation with -10% (<0). Because of
this, operation amount does not
increase in the reverse operation
setting.
The operation amount increases when
the forward operation is set.
To perform PID output shutoff release at
deviation of +40 or higher, set Pr. 577 =
"960."

1000 - Pr. 577

500

Deviation +40

Set point
400
Measured value 360

100
0

20%
100%
(0%) (25%)(35%)
(100%)
↓
Deviation -10%
* ( ) indicates the deviation value
which the inverter can
recognize

(2) Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)
⋅ You can change the analog input display unit (%/V, mA) for analog input bias/gain calibration.
⋅ Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and voltage/current input switch the display units
of C3(Pr. 902), C4(Pr. 903), C43(Pr. 934), C45(Pr. 935) change as shown below.
Analog Command (Terminal 4)
(according to Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and Voltage/Current
Input Switch)

274

Pr. 241 = 0 (Initial Value)

Pr. 241 = 1

0 to 5V input

0 to 5V →
displayed in 0 to 100%(0.1%).

0 to 100% →
displayed in 0 to 5V(0.01V).

0 to 10V input

0 to 10V →
displayed in 0 to 100%(0.1%).

0 to 100% →
displayed in 0 to 10V(0.01V).

4 to 20mA input

0 to 20mA →
displayed in 0 to 100%(0.1%).

0 to 100% →
displayed in 0 to 20mA(0.01mA).

PID control
4.20.3 Pre-charge function (Pr.760 to Pr. 769)
This function is to drive the motor at a certain speed before starting PID control. The motor is operated at Pr. 127
PID control automatic switchover frequency at start until a pre-charge ending condition is satisfied. PID control starts
after a pre-charge ending condition is satisfied. (This function is useful for a pump with a long hose. Without this
function, PID control would start before the pump is filled with water, and proper control would not be performed. )
Pre-charge function is also valid for a start after the PID output suspension (SLEEP). PID output suspension
(SLEEP) function is not performed until the pre-charge operation ends.
Parameter
Number
760

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
0

Pre-charge fault
selection

0
1

761
762

763

Pre-charge ending
level
Pre-charge ending time
Pre-charge upper
detection level

9999
9999

9999

0 to 100% *1
9999
0.0 to 3600s
9999
0 to 100% *1
9999

764

Pre-charge time limit

9999

0.0 to 3600s
9999

765

0
Second pre-charge
fault selection

0
1

766

767

768

Second pre-charge
ending level

9999

Second pre-charge
ending time

9999

Second pre-charge
upper detection level

9999

0 to 100% *1
9999
0.0 to 3600s
9999
0 to 100% *1
9999

769

Second pre-charge
time limit

9999

0.0 to 3600s
9999

Description
When the pre-charged amount exceeds Pr. 763 or the precharged time exceeds Pr. 764, the output is immediately
shutoff, and the fault (E.PCH) is output.
When the pre-charged amount exceeds Pr. 763 or the precharged time exceeds Pr. 764, the motor decelerates to stop,
and the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Set the measurement level to end the pre-charge operation.
Without pre-charge ending level
Set the time to end the pre-charge operation.
Without pre-charge ending time
Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount. If the precharged amount exceeds the set level, the fault (E.PCH) is
output.
Without pre-charge upper detection level
Set the time limit for the pre-charge operation. If the precharged time exceeds the set level, the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Without pre-charge time limit
When the pre-charged amount exceeds Pr. 768 or the precharged time exceeds Pr. 769 while the RT signal is ON, the
fault (E.PCH) is output.
When the pre-charged amount exceeds Pr. 768 or the precharged time exceeds Pr. 769 while the RT signal is ON, the
motor decelerates to stop, and the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Set the measurement level to end the pre-charge operation,
which is performed while the RT signal is ON.
Without second pre-charge ending level
Set the time to end the pre-charge operation, which is
performed while the RT signal is ON.
Without second pre-charge ending time
Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount, which is
charged while the RT signal is ON. If the pre-charged amount
exceeds the set level, the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Without second pre-charge ending level
Set the time limit for the pre-charge operation, which is
performed while the RT signal is ON. If the pre-charged time
exceeds the set level, the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Without second pre-charge time limit

4

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
Setting values of Pr. 761, Pr. 763, Pr. 766, Pr. 768 are without unit when "9999" is set to both of C42(Pr. 934) and C44(Pr. 935).

PARAMETERS

*1

275

PID control
(1) Operation selection for the pre-charge function
The pre-charge function ends when any of the following conditions is satisfied. It also ends when the start signal turns
OFF or the output is shutoff (except for the PID output suspension function (SLEEP)).
Pre-charge ending condition
Measured
amount
Time
Signal

Related parameter

The measured amount reaches Pr. 766 Pre-charge ending level or higher.

Pr. 761

The pre-charge operation lasts Pr. 767 Pre-charge ending time or longer.
The pre-charge end command (X78) is input.

Pr. 762
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189

Using parameters, set the pre-charge ending conditions and the pre-charge function to be valid or invalid.
Pr. 127
PID control
automatic
switchover
frequency
9999

Pre-charge ending condition *
Pre-charge
Pr. 761
Pr. 762
end
Pre-charge
Pre-charge
command
ending level
ending time
(X77)
-

9999

9999

Other than
9999

Not assigned
Assigned

Pre-charge
function

Valid pre-charge ending condition

Invalid

-

Not assigned
Assigned
Not assigned

Other than
9999

9999
Assigned

Other than
9999
Other than
9999

Not assigned
Assigned

Valid

-

-

X77

Measured
amount
Measured
amount
Measured
amount
Measured
amount

Time
Time

X77

-

-

-

X77

Time

-

Time

X77

* When two or more conditions are satisfied, the pre-charge operation ends by the first-satisfied condition.
⋅ Starting the pre-charge operation
Pre-charge operation starts when a start command is given (after the PID output suspension (SLEEP) or the MRS
(output shutoff) signal cancellation) while the pre-charge operation is set active by parameters.
⋅ Ending the pre-charge operation
The pre-charge operation ends and PID control starts when any of the ending conditions in the above table is satisfied.
REMARKS
⋅ If the X77 or X78 signal is ON at start after the PID output suspension (SLEEP) or the output shutoff cancellation, PID control
starts without performing the pre-charge operation.
⋅ PID output suspension (SLEEP) is not performed until the pre-charge operation ends.
⋅ During the pre-charge operation, it is regarded as integrated value = estimated value. The motor speed may drop shortly from
the automatic switchover frequency depending on the parameter settings.
⋅ Parameter changes and switchover to the second PID control are applied immediately. If PID control has not started when the
settings were changed, PID control starts with changed settings. (If PID control has already started, these settings do not apply.
If the changed settings already satisfy a condition to start PID control, the PID control starts as soon as these are changed. )

276

PID control
Pre-charge operation
⋅ When the measured amount reaches the pre-charge ending level
Measured value[PSI]
Pr.761
Ending level

Time
PID control

Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127

When the measured amount reaches the Pr. 761
setting or higher, the pre-charge operation
ends, and PID control starts.
Pr. 761 Pre-charge ending level ≠ 9999

Time

0 Hz
STF
Output signal
Y49

Pre-charge

⋅ When the elapsed time reaches the pre-charge ending time
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127

Ending time
Pr.762

When the pre-charging time reaches the Pr. 762
setting or higher, the pre-charge operation
ends, and PID control starts.

PID control

0 Hz
Time

Pr. 761 Pre-charge ending level = 9999
Pr. 762 Pre-charge ending time ≠ 9999

STF
Pre-charge

When the X77 signal turns ON, the pre-charge
operation ends, and the PID control starts.
(If a start command is given while the X77
signal is ON, the pre-charge operation is not
performed, and PID control is performed from
the beginning. )

⋅ When the signal is input to end the pre-charge operation
Output frequency[Hz]

Pr.127

Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 = X77 assigned

PID control
Time
0 Hz
STF
20ms or more

Pre-charge end
command
X77
Output signal
Y49

Pre-charge

REMARKS
⋅ If the X77 signal stays ON, the pre-charge
operation is not performed after the PID
output suspension (SLEEP). To enable the
X77 signal function after the PID output
suspension (SLEEP), confirm the during precharge operation signal (Y49) = OFF, and
turn OFF the X77 signal.
⋅ To perform PID control immediately after the
PID output suspension (SLEEP), keep the
X77 signal ON until the PID control ends.

277

4
PARAMETERS

Output
signal
Y49

PID control
Pre-charge operation at output shutoff
When the pre-charge operation is valid, the pre-charge operation is performed at the output shutoff cancellation.
(The pre-charge operation is also performed even if the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is valid.)
When the output is shutoff during PID control, which is performed after the pre-charge operation
Output frequency[Hz]
Pre-charges again.

Pr.127
Pr.762

Output
shutoff

Pr.762

0Hz
Time

STF

MRS
Output signal
Y47

PID control

PID control

Pre-charge

Pre-charge
Y49
X77
OFF

When the output is shutoff during the pre-charge operation
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127

Pre-charge
Pr.762

Pr.762
Output shutoff

0Hz

Time
STF

MRS
Output signal
Y47

PID control

Pre-charge

Pre-charge

Y49

REMARKS
If the output shutoff is canceled while the X77 signal is ON, the pre-charge operation is not performed and PID control is
performed.

278

PID control
When the operation method is changed to PID control from another control
When the control method is changed to PID control from a control with higher priority in frequency command (multispeed setting, Jog operation, etc.), the motor is accelerated/decelerated until its speed reaches the automatic
switchover frequency, and the pre-charge is performed.
Pr.127
Multi-speed operation

Pr.762

0Hz
Time

STF

RH
Output signal
Y47

PID control

Pre-charge
Y49

PARAMETERS

4

279

PID control
(2) Pre-charge protective function
The protective function is activated when the elapsed time or measured amount reaches the set level during the precharge operation. When the level is exceeded, Y51 to Y54 signals are turned ON depending on the control method, the
output is shutoff, and the fault (E.PCH) is output. For Pr. 760 Pre-charge fault selection, select to shutoff the output and
output the fault immediately after a fault occurrence (Pr. 760 = 0), or to output the fault after deceleration to a stop (Pr.
760 = 0). (Pre-charge protective function is effective whether the pre-charge ending conditions are set or not.)
Pre-charge limit level setting is available when the following conditions are satisfied:
⋅ Ending time (Pr. 762) < Time limit (Pr. 764)
⋅ Ending level (Pr. 761) < Upper detection level (Pr. 763)
REMARKS
When the protective function activates (including during deceleration to stop), Y51 to Y54 signals are kept ON once they are
output whether PID control is valid or invalid. If a fault occurs after deceleration to stop, the fault is output after the stop whether
PID control is valid or invalid.
The output of signal Y51 to Y54 can be released by a reset or the retry operation.

Limit by time
Measured value[PSI]
Ending level

Pr.761

Time
When Pr. 760 =0,
the output is immediately
shutoff and the fault is output.

Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127
Pr.764

When Pr. 760 =1,
the fault is output after
deceleration to a stop.

Time limit

0 Hz

Time

STF
Output signal

Pre-charge

Y49
Y51

Over time limit

ALM

E.PCH
When Pr. 760 =0,
the output is immediately
shutoff and the fault is output.

The fault (E.PCH) is output
when the elapsed time reaches
Pr. 764 Pre-charge time limit. With
Pr. 760 Pre-charge fault selection,
you can select to shut off the
output and output the fault
immediately after E.PCH, or to
output
the
fault
after
deceleration to a stop.
Retry operation is performed at
the fault output (E.PCH) only if
Pr. 65 = "0 or 4."

When Pr. 760 =1,
the fault is output after
deceleration to a stop.

Limit by the measured amount
Measured value[PSI]
Pr.763

Time
Output frequency[Hz]
Pr.127

Pr.762

When Pr.760 =0,
the output is immediately
shutoff and the fault is output.
When Pr.760 =1, the fault is output after
deceleration to a stop.
Time

0 Hz
STF
Output signal
Y49
Y53

Pre-charge
Exceeding measured amount

ALM
E.PCH
When Pr.760 =0,
the output is immediately
shutoff and the fault is output.

280

When Pr.760 =1, the fault is output after
deceleration to a stop.

The fault (E.PCH) is output
when the measured amount
exceeds Pr. 763 Pre-charge upper
detection level. With Pr. 760 Precharge fault selection, you can
select to shut off the output and
output the fault immediately
after E.PCH, or to output the
fault after deceleration to a stop.
Retry operation is performed at
the fault output (E.PCH) only if
Pr. 65 = "0 or 4."

PID control
4.20.4 Second PID function (Pr.753 to Pr. 758, Pr.765 to Pr.769)
When the RT signal is ON and Pr. 753 Second PID action selection ≠ 9999, PID control is commanded by the
second function parameters.
When Pr. 753 = 9999, normal PID control is performed even if the second functions are valid.
When the control method is switched from the second PID control to the normal PID control, the integral value is
estimated. The integral value is estimated by calculating the integral term with the output frequency and the P
term. This method is same as when the control method changes to PID control when the frequency reaches the
automatic switchover frequency.

753

Name

Second PID action
selection

Initial
Value

9999

Setting
Range
10, 110 *2
11, 111 *2
20, 120 *2
21, 121 *2
50 *2
51 *2
60 *2
61 *2
70 *6
71 *6
80 *6
81 *6
90 *6
91 *6
100

*6

101

*6

9999
754

755 *1

756 *1

Second PID control
automatic switchover
frequency

9999

Second PID action set
point

9999

Second PID
proportional band

100%

0 to 400Hz
9999
0 to 100% *3
9999

0.1 to 1000%

9999

757 *1

Second PID integral
time

1s

0.1 to 3600s

9999

758 *1

Second PID differential
time

9999

0.01 to
10.00s

9999

Description
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action
PID forward action
PID reverse action

Deviation value signal input
(terminal 1 *4)
Measured value (terminal 4 *5)
Set point (terminal 2 *4 or Pr. 133)
Deviation value signal input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link, BACnet)
Measured value, set point input
(LONWORKS, CC-Link, BACnet)
Deviation value signal input
(PLC function)
Measured value, set point input
(PLC function)
Deviation value signal input
(PLC function)
PID forward action
(Not reflected to the inverter frequency)
PID reverse action
Measured value, set point input
(PLC function)
PID forward action
(Not reflected to the inverter frequency)
Normal PID control is performed regardless of the second PID
control parameter settings.
Set the frequency at which the control is automatically
changed to PID control while the RT signals is ON.
Without second PID control automatic switchover function
Set the set point for PID control, which is performed while the
RT signal is ON.
Terminal 2 input is the set point while the RT signal is ON.
Set the proportional band for PID control, which is performed
while the RT signal is ON.
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small),
the manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of
the measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows,
the response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability
deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs.
Gain Kp = 1/proportional band
Without second proportional band
Set the PID integral time for PID control, which is performed
while the RT signal is ON.
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time required for
integral (I) action to provide the same manipulated variable as
proportional (P) action.
As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier
but hunting occurs more easily.
Without second integral control
Set the PID differential time for PID control, which is performed
while the RT signal is ON.
When deviation lamp is input, time (Td) is the time required to
provide the manipulated variable of only the proportional (P)
action. As the differential time increases, greater response is
made to a deviation change.
Without second differential control

281

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

PID control
Parameter
Number
765

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
0

Second pre-charge
fault selection

0
1

766

767

768

Second pre-charge
ending level

9999

Second pre-charge
ending time

9999

Second pre-charge
upper detection level

9999

0 to 100% *3
9999
0.0 to 3600s
9999
0 to 100% *3
9999

769

Second pre-charge
time limit

9999

0.0 to 3600s
9999

Description
When the pre-charged amount exceeds Pr. 768 or the precharged time exceeds Pr. 769 while the RT signal is ON, the
fault (E.PCH) is output.
When the pre-charged amount exceeds Pr. 768 or the precharged time exceeds Pr. 769 while the RT signal is ON, the
motor decelerates to stop, and the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Set the measurement level to end the pre-charge operation,
which is performed while the RT signal is ON.
Without second pre-charge ending level
Set the time to end the pre-charge operation, which is
performed while the RT signal is ON.
Without second pre-charge ending time
Set the upper limit for the pre-charged amount, which is
charged while the RT signal is ON. If the pre-charged amount
exceeds the set level, the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Without second pre-charge ending level
Set the time limit for the pre-charge operation, which is
performed while the RT signal is ON. If the pre-charged time
exceeds the set level, the fault (E.PCH) is output.
Without second pre-charge time limit

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter
write selection.
PID control is available without turning X14 signal ON when Pr.128 = "50, 51, 60, 61, 110, 111, 120, 120".
Setting values of Pr.755, Pr.766, Pr.768 are without unit when "9999" is set to both of C42(Pr.934) and C44(Pr.935).
Input specification for the terminals are determined by Pr.73 Analog input selection.
Input specification for the terminal is determined by Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection.
Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.
Normal PID control (RT signal is OFF)

Pr.128 PID action selection
Pr.127 PID control automatic switchover frequency
Pr.133 PID action set point
Pr.129 PID proportional band
Pr.130 PID integral time
Pr.134 PID differential time
Pr.760 Pre-charge fault selection
Pr.761 Pre-charge ending level
Pr.762 Pre-charge ending time
Pr.763 Pre-charge upper detection level
Pr.764 Pre-charge time limit

Second PID control (RT signal is ON)
Pr.753 Second PID action selection
Pr.754 Second PID control automatic switchover
frequency
Pr.755 Second PID action set point
Pr.756 Second PID proportional band
Pr.757 Second PID integral time
Pr.758 Second PID differential time
Pr.765 Second pre-charge fault selection
Pr.766 Second pre-charge ending level
Pr.767 Second pre-charge ending time
Pr.768 Second pre-charge upper detection level
Pr.769 Second pre-charge time limit

REMARKS
⋅ The control switches between PID control and second PID control by the following operation:
⋅ Turning ON/OFF the RT signal while Pr. 753 ≠ 9999
⋅ Setting "9999" or a value other than "9999" in Pr. 753 while the RT signal is ON.
⋅ The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 125)
⋅ In the initial setting, the RT signal is assigned to the RT terminal. By setting "3" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function
selection), you can assign the RT signal to the other terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 98
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 171
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 128
Pr. 759 PID unit selection
Refer to page 261
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain

282

Refer to page 177

PID control
4.20.5 Advanced PID function (pump function) (Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 591)
PID control function can adjust the volume of water, etc. by controlling a pump. Multiple motors (4 motors
maximum) can be controlled by switching between the inverter-driven operation and commercial powerdriven operation. Use Pr. 579 Motor connection function selection to select switchover operation of the motor. Up
to three auxiliary motors can be connected.

554

Name

Initial
Value

PID signal operation selection

0

575

Output interruption detection
time

1s

576

Output interruption detection
level

577

Output interruption cancel level

578

Auxiliary motor operation selection

Setting
Range
0 to 3,
10 to 13

0 to 3600s
9999

0Hz

0 to 400Hz

1000%

900 to 1100%
0

0

1 to 3

579

Motor connection function
selection

0

0
1
2
3

580

MC switching interlock time

1s

0 to 100s

581

Start waiting time

1s

0 to 100s

0 to 3600/360s
582

Auxiliary motor connection-time
deceleration time

1s

*1

9999
0 to 3600/360s
583

Auxiliary motor disconnectiontime acceleration time

1s

*1

9999
584
585
586
587
588
589

Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency
Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency
Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency
Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency
Auxiliary motor 2 stopping frequency
Auxiliary motor 3 stopping frequency

60Hz
60Hz
60Hz
0Hz
0Hz
0Hz

0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz
0 to 400Hz

590

Auxiliary motor start detection time

5s

0 to 3600s

591

Auxiliary motor stop detection time

5s

0 to 3600s

Description
Select the operation to be performed at
the detection of upper, lower, and
deviation limit for the measured value
input. The operation for PID output
suspension function can be selected.
The inverter stops operation if the output
frequency after PID operation remains at
less than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than
the time set in Pr. 575.
Without output interruption function
Set the frequency at which the output
interruption processing is performed.
Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) to
release the PID output interruption
function.
No auxiliary motor operation
Set the number of auxiliary motors to be
run
Basic system
Alternative system
Direct system
Alternative-direct system
You can set the time until MC switchover
interlock time when Pr. 579 = "2, 3" is set.
You can set the time from when the MC is
switched until it starts when Pr. 579 = "2,
3". Set this time a little longer than the MC
switching time.
You can set the deceleration time for
decreasing the output frequency of the
inverter if a motor connection occurs
under advanced PID control.
The output frequency is not forcibly
changed.
You can set the acceleration time for
increasing the output frequency of the
inverter if a motor disconnection occurs
under advanced PID control.
The output frequency is not forcibly
changed.
Set the frequency to connect an auxiliary
motor.
Set the frequency to open an auxiliary
motor.
You can set the delay time until the
auxiliary motor is started.
You can set the delay time until the
auxiliary motor is stopped.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.
*1

Depends on the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. The initial value for the setting range is "0 to 3600s" and the setting
increments is "0.1s".

283

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

PID control
(1) Operation
· Set the number of commercial power supply operation motors in Pr. 578 Auxiliary motor operation selection and
motor switching method in Pr. 579 Motor connection function selection.
Pr.579
Setting

Name

0

Basic system

1

Alternative
system

2

Direct system

3

Alternativedirect system

Description
The motor to be inverter-driven is always fixed and you can increase/decrease the number of
motors commercial power-driven by turning on and off the MC between the power supply and
motor with the output frequency.
As same as basic system (Pr. 579 = "0"), the motor to be driven by the inverter is fixed during
operation and you can control the number of motors operated by the commercial power with the
output frequency. When the inverter stops by the sleep function, the MC between the inverter and
motor is switched to switch motors to be inverter-driven.
When the start signal is entered, the motor is started by the inverter. When the conditions to start the
next motor are established, switching MCs between the inverter and motor and the power supply and
motor will change the inverter driven motor to commercial power-supply operation and start the next
motor by the inverter. Adversely, when conditions to stop the motor is established while multiple motors
are running, motors stop in order of first started motor (in the commercial power-supply operation).
When the start signal is entered, the motor is started by the inverter. When the conditions to start
the next motor are established, switching MCs between the inverter and motor and the power
supply and motor will change the inverter driven motor to commercial power-supply operation and
start the next motor by the inverter. Conversely, when the conditions for stopping the motors are
enabled during running of several motors, the inverter-driven motor is decelerated to s stop and
the motors under commercial power supply operation are switched over to inverter-driven
operation after frequency search. Since frequency search is performed when the motor running
with commercial power-supply is switched to the inverter-driven operation, set a value other than
"9999" in Pr. 57 Restart coasting time. When Pr. 57 is set, the CS signal need not be turned ON.

Flow rate Q
Qmax
Q3
Q2
Q1

1) Pr. 579 = 0

Time

Motor 1 (M1)
Motor 2 (M2)
Motor 3 (M3)
Motor 4 (M4)

2) Pr. 579 = 1

*1

*1

*2

*2

Motor 1 (M1)
Motor 2 (M2)
Motor 3 (M3)
Motor 4 (M4)

3) Pr. 579 = 2
Motor 1 (M1)
Motor 2 (M2)
Motor 3 (M3)
Motor 4 (M4)

4) Pr. 579 = 3
Motor 1 (M1)

Time
Inverter operation drive

Motor 2 (M2)
Motor 3 (M3)
Motor 4 (M4)

*1
*2

Commercial power supply
operation drive

Stop
The starting order of motors is M2 → M3 → M1 if the last order is M1 → M2 → M3. (Pr. 579 = "1")
The motor status in the order of elapsed time after the last inverter driving completion, from the longest (has not inverter-driven for the longest
time) to the shortest. The motor 1 (M1) starts first when power is turned ON for the first time or after reset. (Pr. 579 = "3")

REMARKS
· The starting order of motors to be driven returns to the initial status at an inverter reset. (Pr. 579 = "1, 2, 3")
· For Pr. 578 and Pr. 579, parameter write is disabled during operation. In addition, when the Pr. 578 or Pr. 579 setting has been
changed during stop, the starting order of motors also returns to the initial status.

284

PID control
(2) System configuration
· Basic system (Pr. 579 = "0")

Example Distributed water
MC

M4
PUMP4

RO4
M3

PUMP3

RO3
M2
Inverter
Power
supply

RST

Supplied water

STR
X64

RT
JOG

FU

SD

OL

10

IPF

2

SE

RO2

MC
RO2

RO3
RO4

MC
RO3
MC
RO4

24VDC

For 2-wire type Detector

Sink logic
When Pr. 183 = 14, Pr. 185 = 64,
Pr. 194 = 72, Pr. 193 = 73, Pr. 192 = 74

1

-

+

4

(Measured value) 4 to 20mA

0

Power 24V
supply

4
PARAMETERS

X14

5
Deviation signal

M1

STF

Reverse rotation

Setting potentiometer
(Set point setting)

UVW

PUMP1

Forward rotation

Advanced PID
control selection
PID forward-reverse
action switching

PUMP2

RO2

285

PID control
· Alternative system (Pr. 579 = "1"), direct system (Pr. 579 = "2"), alternative-direct system (Pr. 579 = "3")

Example

Inverter
Power
supply
Forward rotation

RST

Advanced PID
control selection
PID forward
-reverse
action switching

Setting
potentiometer
(Set point setting)
Deviation signal

M1
RIO1

STF

Reverse rotation

FU

STR
X14
X64

Distributed water

MC *2

UVW

OL

RT
JOG

IPF

SD

SU

RIO1
RO1
RIO2
RO2

RUN RIO3

10
2

SE

5

FR-A7AR
(Option) *1

1

1A

4

1C
2A

MC
RIO1

RO1

RO1

M2
RIO2

RIO2

PUMP3

RO2

RO2

RIO3

M3
RIO3
PUMP2

RO3

24VDC

MC
RO3

RO3
M4
RIO4

RIO4

PUMP1

RIO4

For 2-wire Detector
type
Supplied water
+

RO4

2C
3A

PUMP4

RO4

RO4

3C
(Measured value) 4 to 20mA
0

24V
Power
supply

Sink logic
When Pr. 183 = 14, Pr. 185 = 64
Pr. 194 = 75, Pr. 193 = 71, Pr. 192 = 76
Pr. 191 = 72, Pr. 190 = 77, Pr. 320 = 73
Pr. 321 = 78, Pr. 322 = 74

*1
*2

When driving three or more motors, use the plug-in option (FR-A7AR).
Always provide mechanical interlocks for the MC.

(3) I/O signals
· Turn the X14 signal ON when performing advanced PID control. Set "14" in Pr. 186 to Pr. 189 (input terminal
function selection) to assign a function to the X14 signal.
· PID control depends on the Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, C42 to C45 settings. (Refer to page 261)
· Use Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection) or relay output option (FR-A7AR) to assign functions of motor
control signal to Pr.320 to Pr.322 (RA1, RA2, RA3 output selection). (Only positive logic is available for output terminals.)

Signal
SLEEP
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RIO1
RIO2
RIO3
RIO4
SE

286

Output Terminal Function
Selection Setting
Positive
Negative
logic
logic
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
—

170 *1
— *2
— *2
— *2
— *2
— *2
— *2
— *2
— *2
— *2

Function
During PID output interruption
Commercial-power supply side motor 1 connection
Commercial-power supply side motor 2 connection
Commercial-power supply side motor 3 connection
Commercial-power supply side motor 4 connection
Inverter side motor 1 connection
Inverter side motor 2 connection
Inverter side motor 3 connection
Inverter side motor 4 connection
Output terminal common

*1

*2

This value cannot be set in Pr. 320
to Pr. 322 (RA1, RA2, RA3 output
selection), parameters for relay
output option (FR-A7AR).
Negative logic cannot be set.

PID control
(4) Motor switchover timing
· Switchover timing at a start (stop) of an auxiliary motor 1 in the basic system (Pr. 579 = "0") and alternative
system (Pr. 579 = "1").
Output frequency

Pr. 590:
Motor start detection time

Maximum
frequency
Pr. 584:
Motor starting
frequency

Pr. 587:
Motor stopping
frequency

Variation
Pr. 584-Pr. 587

Minimum
frequency
Flow

Pr. 591

Motor stop detection time

Relay output

ON

When the number of
motors increases

OFF

Relay output

ON

When the number of
motors decreases

OFF

· Switchover timing at a start (stop) of an auxiliary motor 1 in the direct system (Pr. 579 = "2") and alternativedirect system (Pr. 579 = "3").
Pr. 590:
Motor start detection time

Output frequency
Maximum
frequency
Pr. 584:
Motor starting
frequency

Variation
Pr. 584-Pr. 587

4

Minimum
frequency
Pr. 580 + Pr. 581

Pr. 591

"Motor stop detection time"

Relay output

Flow

"Interlock time" + "start waiting time"

ON

When the number of
motors increases

OFF
START
Relay output

ON

When the number of
motors decreases

OFF
STOP

287

PARAMETERS

Pr. 587:
Motor stopping
frequency

PID control
(5) Waiting time setting at MC switchover (Pr. 580, Pr. 581)
· Set a switching time of MC (e.g. time until RIO1 turns ON after RO1 turns OFF) in Pr. 580 MC switching interlock
time in the direct system (Pr. 579 = "2"). You can set the time from MC switch-over to a start (time from when
RIO1 turns OFF and RIO2 turns ON until inverter output starts). Set this time a little longer than the MC
switching time.
· You can set the time from MC switch-over to a start (time from when RIO1 turns OFF and RIO2 turns ON until
inverter output starts) in Pr. 581 Start waiting time in the direct system (Pr. 579 = "2"). Set this time a little longer
than the MC switching time.

(6) Acceleration/deceleration time when an auxiliary motor is connected and disconnected
(Pr. 582, Pr.583)
· You can set the deceleration time in Pr. 582 Auxiliary motor connection-time deceleration time for decreasing the
output frequency of the inverter if an auxiliary motor connection occurs. Set the deceleration time in Pr. 582 from
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency to stop.
The output frequency is not forcibly changed when "9999" is set.
· You can set the acceleration time in Pr. 583 Auxiliary motor disconnection-time acceleration time for accelerating the
output frequency of the inverter if an auxiliary motor disconnection occurs. Set the deceleration time in Pr. 583
from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency to stop.
The output frequency is not forcibly changed when "9999" is set.
Output frequency
Motor connection occurs
Pr.20

Motor disconnection
occurs

Pr.583

Pr.582

Pr.591

Pr.583

Time

REMARKS
Pr. 582 and Pr. 583 are not affected by the Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments setting. (Setting range and setting
increments do not change.)

(7) Start of auxiliary motor (Pr. 584 to Pr. 586, Pr. 590)
· You can set the output frequency of the inverter-operated motor in Pr. 584 to Pr. 586 at which the commercialpower supply operation motors start. When the output frequency equal to or higher than the setting continues
for longer than the time set in Pr. 590 Auxiliary motor start detection time, the commercial-power supply motors
start. In this case, the starting sequence depends on the pattern in Pr. 579 Motor connection function selection.
· Pr. 584 Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency value means the frequency at which the first commercial-power supply
motor starts when the number of commercial-power supply motors. When starting the second commercialpower supply motor when one commercial-power supply motor is running, set Pr. 585 Auxiliary motor 2 starting
frequency.

(8) Start of auxiliary motor (Pr. 587 to Pr. 589, Pr. 591)
· You can set the output frequency of the inverter-operated motor in Pr. 587 to Pr. 589 at which the commercialpower supply operation motors stop. When the output frequency equal to or lower than the setting continues for
longer than the time set in Pr. 591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time, the commercial-power supply motors stop.
In this case, the stopping sequence depends on the pattern in Pr. 579 Motor connection function selection.
· Use Pr. 587 Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency to set the frequency at which one commercial-power supply
motor running stops. When stopping one commercial-power supply motor when two commercial-power supply
motors are running, set Pr. 588 Auxiliary motor 2 stopping frequency.

288

PID control
(9) PID output suspension function (SLEEP function) (SLEEP signal, Pr. 554, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 )
⋅ The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID control remains at less than the Pr. 576 Output
interruption detection level setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575 Output interruption detection time. (At this
time, if "0 to 3" is set to Pr.554 PID signal operation selection, output is shut off (the inverter coasts to stop) when
SLEEP operation starts. If "10 to 13" is set, the inverter decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set in Pr.8
when SLEEP operation starts.)
This function can reduce energy consumption in the low-efficiency, low-speed range.
Pr.554 Setting

SLEEP Function

FUP Signal, FDN Signal

0 (Initial value)
1
Inverter coasts to a stop at the
start of SLEEP operation
2
3
10
11
Inverter decelerates to a stop at
the start of SLEEP operation
12
13

Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault (E.PID)

Y48 Signal
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault
(E.PID)
Only signal output
Signal output + stop by fault
(E.PID)

⋅ When the deviation (= set value - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff cancel level (Pr. 577 setting 1000%) while the PID output interruption function is ON, the PID output interruption function is canceled and
PID control operation is resumed automatically.
⋅ While the PID output interruption function is ON, the PID output interruption signal (SLEEP) is output. At this
time, the inverter running signal (RUN) is OFF and the PID control operating signal (PID) is ON.
⋅ For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal output, assign the function by setting "70" (positive logic) or "170"
(negative logic) in Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
Deviation

When Pr.554 = "0 to 3", reverse action (Pr.128 = "10")
Cancel
level

Pr.577 - 1000%

Output frequency

Pr.576
Less than Pr. 575
Pr. 575 or more SLEEP period
Time
OFF

RUN
PID
SLEEP

When Pr.554 = "10 to 13", reverse action (Pr.128 = "10")
Cancel
level

Pr.577 - 1000%

Output frequency

4
PARAMETERS

Deviation

ON

Decelerates
to a stop*

Pr.576
Less than Pr. 575

RUN

Pr. 575 or more

SLEEP period

Time

OFF

PID
SLEEP
*

ON

When the output rises to the output interruption cancel level during deceleration to a stop, output interruption gets cancelled, and the
inverter accelerates again to continue PID control. Pr.576 Output interruption detection level is invalid during deceleration.

289

PID control
(10) Timing diagram
· When using four motors in the basic system (Pr. 579 = "0")
STF
(STR)
RO2
RO3
RO4
Pr. 590

Pr. 590

Pr. 590
Pr. 126

Pr. 126

Pr. 584

Pr. 126

Pr. 586

Pr. 585

Inverter
M1 operation

Pr. 591

Pr. 591

Pr. 591

Pr. 589

Pr. 588

Pr. 587

Pr. 575

Pr. 576
C2 (902)

M2

Commercial
power supply
operation

M3

Commercial
power supply
operation

C2 (902)

Sleep

C2 (902)

Commercial
power supply
operation

M4

· When using two motors in the alternative system (Pr. 597 = "1")
STF
(STR)
SLEEP
RIO1
RIO2
RO1
RO2
Pr. 584

Pr. 590

60Hz
M1

Inverter
operation

Pr. 575

Pr. 125
Pr. 591

Pr. 576
Pr. 587

60Hz
M2

290

Commercial power
supply operation

Commercial power
supply operation

C2 (902) Sleep

Pr. 590

Pr. 584
Inverter
operation

Pr. 125

PID control
· When using two motors in the direct system (Pr. 597 = "2")
RIO1
RIO2
RO1
RO2
Pr. 580

Pr. 580

Commercial power
supply operation

Pr. 581

Pr. 590
Pr. 125
Pr. 584
M1

Inverter
operation

Pr. 590
Pr. 125
Pr. 584

60Hz
M2

Pr. 581

Commercial power
supply operation

Pr. 591

Pr. 587
Inverter
operation

Inverter operation

C2 (902)

Inverter
operation

CAUTION
· When a start signal is turned OFF while running, MC (RO1 to RO4) turns OFF and the inverter decelerates.
· When an error occurs while running, MC (RO1 to RO4) turns OFF and the inverter output is shut off.

PARAMETERS

4

291

PID control
· When using two motors in the alternative-direct system (Pr. 579 = "3")
RIO1
RIO2
RO1
RO2
Pr. 580

Pr. 580
Pr. 581

Pr. 590
Pr. 125
Pr. 584
Speed of
motor 1(M1)

Commercial
Motor power
coasting supply

Motor
coasting

Pr. 57 + Pr. 58
Pr. 577

Pr. 581

operation
Inverter
operation

sleep
Pr. 581

Speed of
motor 2(M2)

Pr. 591

Pr. 584

Pr. 590

Motor
coasting

Pr. 580
Commercial
power
supply
operation

Inverter
Pr. 587
operation
Inverter
operation Pr. 902 The motor is
The starting motor is
inverter-driven switched over from M1
after frequency to M2 after sleep.
search.

CAUTION
· If the start signal is turned OFF during operation, the inverter-driven motor is decelerated to stop, and the motors under
commercial power supply operation are switched over to inverter-driven operation one at a time and decelerated to a stop
after frequency search in order from the longest operation time.
· When an error occurs while running, MC (RO1 to RO4) turns OFF and the inverter output is shut off.
· If the MRS signal is turned ON during operation, the inverter-driven motor is shut off. Although the motor with the longest
operating time of the commercial power supply operation is switched to the inverter operation after elapse of time set in Pr.
591 Auxiliary motor stop detection time , the motor remains in the output shut off status. Frequency search is made after the
MRS signal turns OFF and inverter operation is started.
· If the starting signal is turned ON during deceleration to stop regardless of the Pr. 579 setting, operation by the advanced PID
control is performed again at the point when the signal is turned ON.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments
Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, C42 to C45 (PID control)
Refer to page 261
Pr.178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 128

292

Refer to page 101

Special operation and frequency control

4.21 Special operation and frequency control
Purpose

Parameter that must be Set

Switch between the inverter operation and
bypass operation to operate.
Avoid overvoltage alarm due to regeneration by
automatic adjustment of output frequency

Bypass-inverter switchover
function
Regeneration avoidance
function

Refer
to Page

Pr. 57, Pr.58, Pr. 135 to Pr. 139,
Pr. 159

293

Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886

298

4.21.1 Bypass-inverter switchover function (Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 135 to Pr. 139, Pr. 159)
The complicated sequence circuit for bypass operation is built in the inverter. Hence, merely inputting the start,
stop or automatic switchover selection signal facilitates the interlock operation of the switchover magnetic
contactor.

Name

Initial
Value

Setting Range
200V class
(400V class)

0

57

Restart coasting time

9999

58

Restart cushion time

1s

135

Electronic bypass sequence
selection

0

136

MC switchover interlock time

1s

02330
0.1 to
(01160)
5s
or less
03160
0.1 to
(01800)
30s
or more
9999
0 to 60s
0
1
0 to 100s

137

Start waiting time

0.5s

0 to 100s
0

138

Bypass selection at a fault

0

139

Automatic switchover
frequency from inverter to
bypass operation

9999

1

0 to 60Hz

9999

0 to 10Hz
159

Automatic switchover
frequency range from bypass
to inverter operation

9999

9999

Description
⋅ FR-F720-00077 (FR-F740-00038) or less ............ 0.5s,
⋅ FR-F720-00105 to 00340
(FR-F740-00052 to 00170) ................................... 1s,
⋅ FR-F720-00490 to 02330
(FR-F740-00250 to 01160).................................... 3.0s,
⋅ FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more........... 5.0s,
The above times are coasting time.

Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after an
instantaneous power failure.

No restart
Set a voltage starting time at restart.
Without electronic bypass sequence
With electronic bypass sequence
Set the operation interlock time of MC2 and MC3.
Set the time slightly longer (0.3 to 0.5s or so) than the time
from when the ON signal enters MC3 until it actually turns ON.
Inverter output is stopped (motor coast) at inverter fault.
Operation is automatically switched to bypass operation at
inverter fault (Not switched when an external thermal relay
operation (E.OHT) or CPU fault (E.CPU) occurs).
Set the frequency to switch inverter operation to bypass
operation.
Inverter operation is performed from a start until Pr. 139 is
reached, and when the output frequency is at or above Pr.
139, inverter operation is automatically switched to bypass
operation.
Without automatic switchover
Valid during automatic switchover operation (Pr. 139 ≠ 9999)
When the frequency command decreases below (Pr. 139 - Pr.
159) after operation is switched from inverter operation to
bypass operation, the inverter automatically switches
operation to inverter operation and operates at the frequency
of frequency command. When the inverter start command
(STF/STR) is turned OFF, operation is switched to inverter
operation also.
Valid during automatic switchover operation (Pr. 139 ≠ 9999)
When the inverter start command (STF/STR) is turned OFF
after operation is switched from inverter operation to bypass
operation, operation is switched to inverter operation and the
motor decelerates to stop.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

293

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

Special operation and frequency control
⋅ When the motor is operated at 60Hz (or 50Hz), more efficient operation can be performed by the commercial power
supply than by the inverter. When the motor cannot be stopped for a long time for the maintenance/inspection of the
inverter, it is recommended to provide the commercial power supply circuit.
⋅ To avoid commercial power supply being applied to the inverter output side when switching between inverter
operation and commercial power supply operation, provide an interlock which the MC of the commercial power
supply side turns ON only when the MC of the inverter output side is OFF. Using the electronic bypass sequence
function that outputs the timing signal for operation of the magnetic contactor, a complicated commercial power
supply switchover interlock can be provided by the inverter.

(1) Connection diagram
⋅ The following shows the connection diagram of a typical electronic bypass sequence. Sink logic, Pr. 185 = "7", Pr.
192 = "17", Pr. 193 = "18", Pr. 194 = "19"
MC2
*1

MCCB

MC1
U
V
W

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

Inverter start
(forward rotation)
Inverter/bypass
operation
interlock
External
thermal reset
Frequency
setting signal

MC3

External
thermal relay

Output Terminal Capacity

IM

(MC1)IPF

*3

JOG(OH)
RES
SD
10
2
5

(MC2)OL

(MC3)FU

*1

*1

*1

MC
1

MC3

MC2

MC
2

Output Terminal
Permissible Load

Inverter open collector output
24VDC 0.1A
(RUN, SU, IPF, OL, FU)
Inverter relay output (A1 and C1,
230VAC 0.3A
B1 and C1, A2 and B2, B2 and C2)
30VDC 0.3A
Relay output option (FR-A7AR)

R1/L11
S1/L21
STF
CS
MRS

Take caution for the capacity of the sequence output terminal.
The used terminal changes depending on the setting of Pr. 190 to
Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).

*2

24VDC

MC
3

*2

*3

SE

When connecting a DC power supply, insert a protective diode.
When connecting an AC power supply, connect a relay output
option (FR-A7AR) and use a contact output.
The used terminal changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to
Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).

Electronic bypass sequence connection diagram
CAUTION
⋅ Use the bypass operation function in External operation mode. Be sure to connect the other power supply since the function is
not performed normally unless the connection terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 are not connected to the other power supply (power
supply that does not pass MC1).
⋅ Be sure to provide mechanical interlocks for MC2 and MC3.

⋅ Operations of magnetic contactors (MC1, MC2, MC3)
Magnetic
Contactor
MC1

Installation Place
Between power supply and
inverter input

Operation ({: Shorted, ×: Open)
During inverter
At an inverter fault
Bypass operation
operation
occurrence
×
(Shorted by reset)

×

294

MC2

Between power supply and
motor

MC3

Between inverter output and
motor

×

×

(Can be selected using
Pr. 138, always open
when external thermal
relay is ON)

×

Special operation and frequency control
⋅ The input signals are as indicated below.
Signal

Terminal Used

MRS

MRS

CS

CS

STF
(STR)

STF(STR)

Operation enable/disable
selection *1

Inverter/bypass *2

RES

RES

Operation

MC Operation

Inverter operation command
(Invalid for bypass) *3

Operating status initialization
*4

*6

MC2

MC3

ON ..... Bypass-inverter operation
enabled

⎯

⎯

OFF ... Bypass-inverter operation
disabled

×

No
change

ON...... Inverter operation

×

MC1 *5

×

OFF ... Bypass operation

Set "7" in any of
External thermal relay input
Pr. 180 to Pr. 189.

OH

*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6

Function

ON...... Forward rotation (reverse
rotation)

×

OFF .... Stop

×

ON ..... Motor normal

⎯

⎯

×

×

×

No
change

×

No
change

⎯

⎯

OFF .... Motor abnormal
ON...... Initialization
OFF .... Normal operation

Unless the MRS signal is turned ON, neither bypass operation nor inverter operation can be performed.
The CS signal functions only when the MRS signal is ON.
STF (STR) functions only when both the MRS signal and CS signal are ON.
The RES signal enables reset input acceptance selection using Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
MC1 turns OFF when an inverter fault occurs.
MC operation
: MC-ON
× : MC-OFF
⎯ : Inverter operation................................................... MC2 is OFF and MC3 is ON
Bypass operation ................................................... MC2 is ON and MC3 is OFF
No change : The status before the signal turns ON or OFF is held.

⋅ The output signals are as indicated below.
Terminal Used
(Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 setting)

MC1

17

MC2

18

MC3

19

Description
Control signal output of inverter input side magnetic
contactor MC1
Control signal output of bypass operation magnetic
contactor MC2
Control signal output of inverter output side
magnetic contactor MC3

4
PARAMETERS

Signal

295

Special operation and frequency control
(2) Electronic bypass operation sequence
⋅ Operation sequence example when there is no automatic switchover sequence (Pr. 139 = "9999")
Power supply

ON
OFF
ON : Operation enabled

Operation interlock ON

OFF: Operation disabled

(MRS) OFF

ON : Forward rotation

Inverter run command ON

OFF: Stop

(STF) OFF

ON : Inverter operation

Inverter/bypass (CS) ON
OFF

OFF: Bypass operation

Inverter input side MC ON
(MC1) OFF

Off only at inverter fault

Inverter output side MC ON
(MC3) OFF
MC for bypass ON
operation (MC2) OFF
Pr.137

Pr.137

Pr.58

Pr.58

Indicates the delay time until
the MC turns ON (OFF).

Each timer
Pr.136

Pr.136

Pr.136

Pr.57

Pr.136

Pr.57

Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time
Pr.137 MC3 start (waiting time)
Pr.57 reset time
Pr.58 Switchover cushion time

Operating status
(motor speed)
Coasting

INV
operation

Coasting Bypass
operation

INV
Coasting operation Stop

Bypass
operation

⋅ Operation sequence example when there is automatic switchover sequence (Pr. 139 ≠ "9999", Pr. 159 = "9999")
STF

ON
OFF

Output frequency Pr.139
Frequency command
Time
Actual motor speed

Time
INV
operation

ON
MC3
OFF

Bypass
operation

MC2

ON
OFF
C

A

A

A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time

B : Pr.137 Start waiting time

C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time

D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time

B

C

D

⋅ Operation sequence example when there is automatic switchover sequence (Pr. 139 ≠ "9999", Pr. 159 ≠ "9999")
STF

ON
OFF

Output frequency Pr.139

Pr.159

Frequency command
Time
Actual motor speed

Time
INV
operation

ON
MC3
OFF

Bypass
operation

MC2

ON
OFF
C

296

A

A

B

C

D

A : Pr.136 MC switchover interlock time

B : Pr.137 Start waiting time

C : Pr.57 Restart coasting time

D : Pr.58 Restart cushion time

A

A

B

C

D

Special operation and frequency control
(3) Operating procedure
⋅ Procedure for operation
Operation pattern
⋅ Pr. 135 = "1" (open collector output terminal of inverter)
⋅ Pr. 136 = "2.0s"
⋅ Pr. 137 = "1.0s" (Set the time longer than the time from when
MC3 actually turns ON until the inverter and motor are
connected. If the time is short, a restart may not function
properly.)
⋅ Pr. 57 = "0.5s"
⋅ Pr. 58 = "0.5s" (Be sure to set this parameter when bypass
operation is switched to inverter operation.)

Power supply ON
Setting the parameters
Start inverter operation
Constant-speed bypass
operation
Deceleration (stop)
inverter operation

2)Signal ON/OFF after parameter setting

Power supply
ON
At start
(inverter)
At constant
speed
(commercial
power supply)

MRS

CS

STF

MC1

MC2

MC3

OFF
(OFF)

OFF
(OFF)

OFF
(OFF)

OFF → ON
(OFF → ON)

OFF
(OFF)

OFF → ON
(OFF → ON)

OFF → ON

OFF → ON

OFF → ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON → OFF

ON

ON

OFF → ON

Remarks
External operation mode
(PU operation mode)

ON → OFF

MC2 turns ON after MC3
turns OFF
(coasting status during this
period)
Waiting time 2s
MC3 turns ON after MC2
turns OFF
(coasting status during this
period)
Waiting time 4s

Switched to
inverter for
deceleration
(inverter)

ON

OFF → ON

ON

ON

ON → OFF

OFF → ON

Stop

ON

ON

ON → OFF

ON

OFF

ON

CAUTION

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 11 DC injection brake operation time
Refer to page 112
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time
Refer to page 152
Pr. 58 Restart cushion time
Refer to page 152
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (Input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (Output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 128

297

4
PARAMETERS

⋅ Connect the control power supply (R1/L11, S1/L21) in front of input side MC1. If the control power supply is connected behind
input side MC1, the electronic bypass sequence function is not executed.
⋅ The electronic bypass sequence function is valid only when Pr. 135 = "1" in the external operation or combined operation mode
(PU speed command, external operation command Pr. 79 = "3"). When Pr. 135 = "1" in the operation mode other than the above,
MC1 and MC3 turn ON.
⋅ When the MRS and CS signals are ON and the STF (STR) signal is OFF, MC3 is ON, but when the motor was coasted to a stop
from bypass operation last time, a start is made after the time set to Pr. 137 has elapsed.
⋅ Inverter operation can be performed when the MRS, STF (STR) and CS signals turn ON. In any other case (MRS signal - ON),
bypass operation is performed.
⋅ When the CS signal is turned OFF, the motor switches to bypass operation. However, when the STF (STR) signal is turned
OFF, the motor is decelerated to a stop in the inverter operation mode.
⋅ When both MC2 and MC3 are OFF and either MC2 or MC3 is then turned ON, there is a waiting time set in Pr. 136.
⋅ If electronic bypass sequence is valid (Pr. 135 = "1"), the Pr. 136 and Pr. 137 settings are ignored in the PU operation mode. The
input terminals (STF, CS, MRS, OH) of the inverter return to their normal functions.
⋅ When the electronic bypass sequence function (Pr. 135 = "1") and PU operation interlock function (Pr. 79 = "7") are used
simultaneously, the MRS signal is shared by the PU operation external interlock signal unless the X12 signal is assigned.
(When the MRS and CS signals turn ON, inverter operation is enabled)
⋅ Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189, 190 to Pr. 196 may affect the other functions. Please set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

Special operation and frequency control
4.21.2 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882 to Pr. 886)
This function detects a regeneration status and increases the frequency to avoid the regeneration status.
Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the frequency and continue operation if the fan
happens to rotate faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range
0
1

882

Regeneration
avoidance operation
selection

0

883

Regeneration
avoidance operation
level

380VDC/
760VDC *

884

Regeneration
avoidance at
deceleration
detection sensitivity

0

885

886
665

Regeneration avoidance
compensation
frequency limit value
Regeneration avoidance
voltage gain
Regeneration
avoidance frequency
gain

Description

Regeneration avoidance function invalid
Regeneration avoidance function valid
Regeneration avoidance function is valid only during a constant
2
speed operation
Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance
operates. When the bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage
error will be less apt to occur. However, the actual deceleration
300 to 800V time increases. The set value must be higher than the power
supply voltage × 2 .
* The initial value differs according to the voltage level. (200V / 400V)
0
Regeneration avoidance by bus voltage change ratio is invalid
Set sensitivity to detect the bus voltage change ratio
Setting
1
5
1 to 5
Detection sensitivity low
high
0 to 30Hz

6Hz

9999
100%

0 to 200%

100%

0 to 200%

Set the limit value of frequency which rises at activation of
regeneration avoidance function.
Frequency limit invalid
Adjust responsiveness at activation of regeneration avoidance. A
larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage
change. However, the output frequency could become unstable.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886
setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) What is regeneration avoidance function? (Pr. 882, Pr. 883)
⋅ When the regeneration status is serious, the DC bus voltage rises and an overvoltage fault (E. OV ) may occur.
When this bus voltage rise is detected and the bus voltage level reaches or exceeds Pr. 883, increasing the
frequency avoids the regeneration status.
⋅ The regeneration avoidance operation, you can select whether it is always activated or activated only a constant speed.
Regeneration avoidance operation
example for deceleration

Pr.883

Time
During regeneration
avoidance function operation

Time

Output
Bus voltage
frequency(Hz)
(VDC)

Time

Bus voltage
(VDC)

Output
frequency(Hz)

Pr.883

Output
Bus voltage
frequency(Hz)
(VDC)

Regeneration avoidance operation
example for constant speed

Regeneration avoidance operation
example for acceleration

Pr.883

Time

During regeneration
avoidance function operation

Time

Time
During regeneration
avoidance function operation

⋅ Setting Pr. 882 to "1, 2" validates the regeneration avoidance function.
REMARKS
⋅ The inclination of the frequency increased or decreased by the regeneration avoidance function changes depending on the
regeneration status.
⋅ The DC bus voltage of the inverter is normally about 2 times greater than the input voltage.
When the input voltage is 220VAC, the bus voltage is about 311VDC.
When the input voltage is 440VAC, the bus voltage is about 622VDC.
However, it varies with the input power waveform.
⋅ The Pr. 883 setting should be kept higher than the DC bus voltage level. Otherwise, the regeneration avoidance function is
always ON even in the non-regeneration status and the frequency increases.
⋅ While overvoltage stall (
) is activated only during deceleration and stops the decrease in output frequency, the regeneration
avoidance function is always ON (Pr. 882 = 1) or activated only during a constant speed (Pr. 882 = 2) and increases the
frequency according to the regeneration amount.
⋅ Note that when coping parameters to the inverter without this function (inverter assembled in and before September 2005),
copied Pr.882 ="2" is regarded as Pr.882 ="0"(regeneration avoidance function invalid).

298

Special operation and frequency control
(2) To detect the regeneration status during deceleration faster (Pr. 884)
⋅ As the regeneration avoidance function cannot respond to an abrupt voltage change by detection of the bus
voltage level, the ratio of bus voltage change is detected to stop deceleration if the bus voltage is less than Pr. 883
Regeneration avoidance operation level.
Set that detectable bus voltage change ratio to Pr. 884 as detection sensitivity.
Increasing the setting raises the detection sensitivity
CAUTION
Too small setting (low detection sensitivity) will disable detection, and too large setting will turn ON the regeneration avoidance
function if the bus voltage is varied by an input power change, etc.

Output
frequency(Hz)

(3) Limit regeneration avoidance operation frequency
(Pr. 885)

Limit level
Output frequency (Hz)
Pr.885

Pr.885/2
Time

You can limit the output frequency compensated for (increased) by
the regeneration avoidance function.
⋅ The frequency is limited to the output frequency (frequency prior to
regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance
compensation frequency limit value during acceleration or constant
speed. If the frequency increased by regeneration avoidance
function exceeds the limit value during deceleration, the limit value
is held until the output frequency falls to 1/2 of Pr. 885.
⋅ When the frequency increased by regeneration avoidance function
has reached Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, it is limited to the maximum
frequency.
⋅ Pr. 885 is set to "9999", regeneration avoidance function operation
frequency setting is invalid.

(4) Regeneration avoidance function adjustment (Pr. 665, Pr. 886)
⋅ If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain. Reversely, if sudden regeneration causes an overvoltage fault, increase the
setting.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665 Regeneration
avoidance frequency gain.
CAUTION
⋅ When regeneration avoidance operation is performed,
(overvoltage stall) is displayed and the OL signal is output. Set
theoperation pattern at an OL signal output using Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection. Set the output timing of the OL
signalusing Pr. 157 OL signal output timer.
⋅ When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, stall prevention is also activated.
⋅ The regeneration avoidance function cannot shorten the actual deceleration time taken to stop the motor. The actual
deceleration time depends on the regenerative energy consumption capability. When shortening the deceleration time,
consider using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, MT-BU5, FR-CV, FR-HC, MT-HC) to consume regenerative energy
at constant speed.
⋅ When using a regeneration unit (FR-BU2, BU, FR-BU, MT-BU5, FR-CV, FR-HC, MT-HC) to consume regenerative energy at
constant speed, set Pr. 882 = "0 (initial value)" (Regenerative avoidance function invalid). When using the regeneration unit, etc.
to consume regenerative energy at deceleration, set Pr. 882 = "2" (regeneration avoidance function valid only at a constant
speed).

PARAMETERS

♦ Parameters referred to ♦

4

Pr. 1 Maximum frequency
Refer to page 87
Pr. 8 Deceleration time
Refer to page 101
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level
Refer to page 81

299

Useful functions

4.22 Useful functions
Purpose

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set

Increase cooling fan life
To determine the maintenance time
of parts.
Freely available parameter
To initiate a fault alarm
To save time for parameter setting

Cooling fan operation selection
Inverter part life display
Maintenance output function
Current average value monitor
signal
Free parameter
Fault initiation
Automatic parameter setting

Pr. 244
Pr. 255 to Pr. 259
Pr. 503, Pr. 504

300
301
304

Pr. 555 to Pr. 557

305

Pr. 888, Pr. 889
Pr. 997
Pr. 999

307
308
309

4.22.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)
You can control the operation of the cooling fan (FR-F720-00105 or more, FR-F740-00083 or more) built in the
inverter.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range
0

244

Cooling fan operation selection

1
1

Description
Operates at power ON
Cooling fan ON/OFF control invalid (The
cooling fan is always ON at power ON)
Cooling fan ON/OFF control valid
The fan is always ON while the inverter is
running. During a stop, the inverter status
is monitored and the fan switches ONOFF according to the temperature.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

⋅ In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty, [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan
alarm output (FAN) and alarm (LF) signals are output.
⋅Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power ON.
⋅Pr. 244 = "1"
When the fan stops during the fan ON command while the inverter is running.
⋅ For the terminal used for the FAN signal output, set "25" (positive logic) or "125" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to
Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection), and for the LF signal, set "98" (positive logic) or "198" (negative logic).
CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)

300

Refer to page 128

Useful functions
4.22.2 Display of the life of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr .259)
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit
circuit can be diagnosed by monitor.
When any part has approached the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life except the main circuit capacitor is calculated
theoretically.)
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of
(4) is not performed.
Parameter
Number

255

256
257

Name

Life alarm status display

Inrush current limit circuit
life display
Control circuit capacitor life
display

Initial Value

Setting Range

0

(0 to 15)

100%

(0 to 100%)

100%

(0 to 100%)

258

Main circuit capacitor life
display

100%

(0 to 100%)

259

Main circuit capacitor life
measuring

0

0, 1
(2, 3, 8, 9)

Description
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor,
main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each
parts of the inrush current limit circuit has
reached the life alarm output level or not.
Reading only
Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush
current limit circuit. Reading only
Displays the deterioration degree of the control
circuit capacitor. Reading only
Displays the deterioration degree of the main
circuit capacitor. Reading only
Displays the value measured by Pr. 259.
Setting "1" and switching the power supply OFF
starts the measurement of the main circuit
capacitor life.
When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after powering ON
again, the measuring is completed. Reads the
deterioration degree in Pr. 258.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

REMARKS
⋅ Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the
magnetic contactor must be avoided.

PARAMETERS

4

301

Useful functions
(1) Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr. 255)
⋅ Whether any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit has reached
the life alarm output level or not can be checked by Pr. 255 Life alarm status display and life alarm signal (Y90).
bit 15
7
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

• Pr.255 read

• Pr.255 setting read

bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life

Bit image is displayed
in decimal

bit2 Cooling fan life
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life

Pr. 255
(decimal)

Bit
(binary)

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

1111
1110
1101
1100
1011
1010
1001
1000
0111
0110
0101
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000

Inrush
Current Limit
Circuit Life

Cooling
Fan Life

Main Circuit
Capacitor Life

Control Circuit
Capacitor Life
×

×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

×
×

×
×

×
×

×
×
×
×
×
×

×

×
×
×
×
: With warnings, ×: Without warnings

⋅ The life alarm signal (Y90) turns ON when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and
inrush current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
⋅ For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196
(output terminal function selection).
REMARKS
⋅ The digital output option (FR-A7AY, FR-A7AR, FR-A7NC) allows the control circuit capacitor life signal (Y86), main circuit
capacitor life signal (Y87), cooling fan life signal (Y88) and inrush current limit circuit life signal (Y89) to be output individually.

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

(2) Life display of the inrush current limit circuit (Pr. 256)
⋅ The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr. 259.
⋅ The number of contact (relay, contactor, thyristor) ON times is counted, and it is counted down from 100% (0 times)
every 1%/10,000 times. As soon as 10% (900,000 times) is reached, Pr. 255 bit 3 is turned ON and also an alarm is
output to the Y90 signal.

(3) Control circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 257)
⋅ The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 257 as a life.
⋅ In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature,
and is counted down from 100%. As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10%, Pr. 255 bit 0 is turned
ON and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.

302

Useful functions
(4) Main circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 258, Pr. 259)
⋅ The deterioration degree of the main circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 258 as a life.
⋅ On the assumption that the main circuit capacitor capacitance at factory shipment is 100%, the capacitor life is
displayed in Pr. 258 every time measurement is made. When the measured value falls to or below 85%, Pr. 255 bit 1
is turned ON and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
⋅ Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the
capacitor capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259
3) Switch power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the
inverter is OFF.
4) After making sure that the power lamp is OFF, switch ON the power supply again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, read Pr .258, and check the deterioration degree of the
main circuit capacitor.
0

Description
No measurement

1

Measurement start

2
3
8
9

During measurement
Measurement complete
Forced end
Measurement error

Pr. 259

Remarks
Initial value
Measurement starts when the
power supply is switched OFF.
Only displayed and cannot be
set

REMARKS
⋅ When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 ="9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1").
When measuring, avoid the following conditions beforehand. In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3")
is confirmed under the following conditions, proper measurement cannot be taken.
(a) The FR-HC, MT-HC, FR-CV, MT-RC or sine wave filter is connected
(b) Terminals R1/L11, S1/L21 or DC power supply is connected to the terminal P/+ and N/-.
(c) Switch power ON during measuring.
(d) The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e) The motor is running. (The motor is coasting.)
(f) The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g) The inverter is tripped or a fault occurred while power is OFF.
(h) The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i) The start command is given while measuring.
⋅ Operating environment: Surrounding air temperature (annual average 40°C (104°F) (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil
mist, dust and dirt))
Output current (80% of the inverter rated current)

POINT
For the accurate life measuring of the main circuit capacitor, perform after more than 3h passed since the turn OFF
of the power as it is affected by the capacitor temperature.

WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC
voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering
OFF to prevent an electric shock.

(5) Cooling fan life display
⋅ The cooling fan speed of 50% or less is detected and "FN" is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07) and
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). As an alarm display, Pr. 255 bit 2 is turned ON and also an alarm is output to
the Y90 signal.
REMARKS
⋅ When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50% or less.

CAUTION
⋅ For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.

303

PARAMETERS

4

Useful functions
4.22.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)
When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer
output signal (Y95) is output.
(MT) is displayed on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

503

Maintenance timer

0

504

Maintenance timer alarm output
set time

Setting Range

0 (1 to 9998)

0 to 9998

9999

9999

Description
Displays the cumulative energization time
of the inverter in 100h increments.
Reading only
Writing the setting of "0" clears the
cumulative energization time.
Set the time taken until when the
maintenance timer alarm output signal
(Y95) is output.
No function

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

First power

ON

9998
(999800h)

Set "0" in Pr.503

Maintenance
timer
Pr.504
(Pr. 503)
Time
Y95 signal
MT display

OFF

ON

ON

⋅ The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 503
Maintenance timer in 100h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).
⋅ When the Pr. 503 value reaches the time set in Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time (100h increments), the
maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
⋅ For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95" (positive logic) or "195" (negative
logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection).
CAUTION
⋅ The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. The energization time of less than 1h is not counted.
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196(output terminal function selection)

304

Refer to page 128

Useful functions
4.22.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
The average value of the output current during
constant speed operation and the maintenance
timer value are output as a pulse to the current
average value monitor signal (Y93).
The pulse width output to the I/O module of the
programmable controller or the like can be used as a
guideline due to abrasion of machines and
elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of
devices to know the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is
output as pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly
output during constant speed operation.
Parameter
Number

Name

Programmable
controller

Output Input
unit
unit

Inverter

maintenance
time

parts have
reached their life

Initial
Value

Setting Range
200V class (400V class)

555

Current average time

1s

0.1 to 1.0s

556

Data output mask time

0s

0.0 to 20.0s

557

Current average value
monitor signal output
reference current

Rated
inverter
current

Description

02330 (01160) or less

0 to 500A

03160 (01800) or more

0 to 3600A

Set the time taken to average
the current during start bit
output (1s).
Set the time for not obtaining
(mask) transient state data.
Set the reference (100%) for
outputting the signal of the
current average value.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection= "0". (Refer to page 190)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

From acceleration to constant speed operation
Output
frequency

1 cycle (20s)

Time
Next cycle

Y93 signal

2) Start pulse
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed)
Time set in Pr. 555 and output current are averaged.
3) Output current average value pulse
The averaged current value is output as low pulse shape for
0.5 to 9s (10 to 180%) during start bit output.
output current average value (A)
5s
Signal output time=
Pr. 557 (A)

5) End pulse
output as low pulse
shape for 1 to 16.5s
4) Maintenance timer pulse
The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is output
as Hi output pulse shape for 2 to 9s (16000h to
72000h).
Pr. 503 100h
5s
Signal output time=
40000h

⋅ The pulse output of the current average value monitor signal (Y93) is shown above.
⋅ For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93" (positive logic) or "193" (negative
logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 194 (output terminal function selection). (The function cannot be assigned to Pr. 195 ABC1
terminal function selection and Pr. 196 ABC2 terminal function selection.)
(1) Setting of Pr. 556 Data output mask time
The output current is unstable (transient state) right after the operation is changed from the acceleration/
deceleration state to the constant speed operation. Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data in Pr.
556.
(2) Setting of the Pr. 555 Current average time
The average output current is calculated during Hi output of start bit (1s). Set the time taken to average the current
during start bit output in Pr. 555.

305

4
PARAMETERS

1) Data output mask time
When the speed has changed to constant
from acceleration/deceleration, Y93 signal is
not output for Pr. 556 time.

Useful functions
(3) Setting of Pr. 557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value. Obtain the time to output the signal
from the following calculation.

(4) Output of Pr. 503 Maintenance timer
After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape, the
maintenance timer value is output as high pulse shape. The output time of the
maintenance timer value is obtained from the following calculation.
Pr. 503 × 100
× 5s (maintenance timer value 100%/5s)
40000h
Note that the output time range is 2 to 9s, and it is 2s when Pr. 503 is less than
16000h and 9s when exceeds 72000h.

(s)
9
0.5

Signal output time

Note that the output time range is 0.5 to 9s, and it is 0.5s when the output current
average value is less than 10% of the setting value of Pr. 557 and 9s when exceeds
180%.
Example)When Pr. 557 = 10A and the average value of output current is 15A
As 15A/10A × 5s = 7.5, the current average value monitor signal is output
as low pulse shape for 7.5s.

Signal output time

Output current average value
× 5s (output current average value 100%/5s)
Pr. 557 setting

10
180 (%)
Output current average value

(s)
9
2
16000
72000 (h)
Maintenance timer value

REMARKS
⋅ Mask of data output and sampling of output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration.
Output frequency

⋅ When the speed is changed to acceleration/deceleration
from constant speed during start bit output, the data is
judged as invalid, the start bit is output as high pulse
shape for 3.5s, and the end signal is output as low pulse
shape for 16.5s.
The signal is output for at least 1 cycle even when
acceleration/deceleration state continues after the start bit
output is completed.

Previous cycle

The speed is changed to deceleration from
the constant speed during start bit output

Invalid cycle (20s)

Time
Next cycle

Y93
signal
2) Start bit
Output as high
pulse shape for
3.5s

5) End signal
Output as low pulse
shape for 16.5s

⋅ When the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0A on completion of the 1 cycle signal output, the signal is not
output until the speed becomes constant next time
⋅ The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as low pulse shape for 20s (without data output) under the following
condition.
(a)When the motor is in the acceleration/deceleration state on completion of the 1 cycle signal output
(b)When 1-cycle signal output was ended during restart operation with the setting of automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure (Pr. 57 ≠ "9999")
(c)When automatic restart operation was being performed with automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selected (Pr.
57 ≠ "9999") on completion of the data output mask

CAUTION
⋅ Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Please set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196(output terminal function selection)
Pr. 503 Maintenance timer
Refer to page 304
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time
Refer to page 152

306

Refer to page 128

Useful functions
4.22.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889)
Parameters you can use for your own purposes.
You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:
⋅ As a unit number when multiple units are used.
⋅ As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
⋅ As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Parameter
Number

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

Description
Desired values can be input. Data is
held even if the inverter power is
turned OFF.

888

Free parameter 1

9999

0 to 9999

889

Free parameter 2

9999

0 to 9999

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

REMARKS
Pr. 888 and Pr. 889 do not influence the inverter operation.

PARAMETERS

4

307

Useful functions
4.22.6 Initiating a fault (Pr.997)
A fault is initiated by setting the parameter.
This function is useful to check how the system operates at a fault.
Parameter
number

997

Name

Initial value

Fault initiation

9999

Setting range

Description

16 to 18, 32 to 34, 48, 49,
64, 80 to 82, 96, 112, 128,
129, 144, 145, 160, 161,
162, 164 to 168,
176 to 179, 192 to 194,
196 to 199, 228 to 230,
241, 242, 245 to 247, 253

The setting range is same with the one for
fault data codes of the inverter (which can
be read through communication).
Written data is not stored in EEPROM.
When "0" is set, nothing happens.
The read value is always "9999."
This setting does not initiate a fault.

9999

.... The specification differ according to the manufacture date. Refer to page 400 and check the SERIAL.
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190)

(1) Fault initiation (Pr. 997)
⋅To initiate a fault, set the assigned number of the fault you want to initiate in Pr. 997 Fault initiation.
⋅The value set in Pr. 997 Fault initiation is not stored in EEPROM.
⋅When a fault occurs, the inverter trips, and the fault is displayed and output (ALM, ALM2).
⋅While the initiated fault is occurring, the fault is displayed as the latest fault in the faults history. After a reset, the
faults history goes back to the previous status. (The fault generated by the fault initiation function is not saved in the
faults history.)
⋅Perform inverter reset to cancel the fault.
⋅Setting for Pr. 997 Fault initiation and corresponding faults
Fault

Setting (Data code)

Fault

Setting (Data code)

Fault

16(H10)
17(H11)

OC1
OC2

144(H90)
145(H91)

OHT
PTC

194(HC2)
196(HC4)

P24
CDO

18(H12)
32(H20)
33(H21)
34(H22)
48(H30)
49(H31)
64(H40)
80(H50)
81(H51)
82(H52)
96(H60)
112(H70)
128(H80)
129(H81)

OC3
OV1
OV2
OV3
THT
THM
FIN
IPF
UVT
ILF
OLT
BE
GF
LF

160(HA0)
161(HA1)
162(HA2)
164(HA4)
165(HA5)
166(HA6)
167(HA7)
168(HA8)
176(HB0)
177(HB1)
178(HB2)
179(HB3)
192(HC0)
193(HC1)

OPT
OP1
OP2
E.16*
E.17*
E.18*
E.19*
E.20*
PE
PUE
RET
PE2
CPU
CTE

197(HC5)
198(HC6)
199(HC7)
228(HE4)
229(HE5)
230(HE6)
241(HF1)
242(HF2)
245(HF5)
246(HF6)
247(HF7)
253(HFD)

IOH
SER
AIE
LCI
PCH
PID
E.1
E.2
E.5
E.6
E.7
E.13

Setting (Data code)

* Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.

REMARKS
⋅ If a fault is already occurring in the inverter, a fault cannot be initiated by Pr. 997.
⋅ The retry function is invalid for the fault initiated by the fault initiation function.
⋅ If another fault occurs after a fault has been initiated, the fault indication does not change.
The fault is not saved in the faults history either.

308

Useful functions
4.22.7 Setting multiple parameters as a batch (Pr.999)
⋅ Parameter settings are changed as a batch. Those include parameter settings for the extended PID display, the
Mitsubishi human machine interface (GOT) connection, rated frequency settings of 50Hz/60Hz, and
acceleration/deceleration time increment settings.
⋅ Multiple parameters are changed automatically. Users do not have to consider each parameter number.
(Parameter setting mode)
Parameter
Number

999

Name

Initial value

Setting range

Description

9999

1
2
10
11
20
21

Normal PID setting
Extended PID setting
GOT initial setting (PU connector)
GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminals)
50Hz rated frequency
60Hz rated frequency
Acceleration/deceleration time
(0.1s increment)
Acceleration/deceleration time
(0.01s increment)
No action

Automatic parameter setting

30
31
9999

....Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

(1) Automatic parameter setting (Pr.999)
⋅Select which parameters to be automatically set, and set that to Pr. 999. Multiple parameter settings are changed
automatically. Refer to page 312 for the list of parameters that are changed automatically.
Pr.999 setting

Description

1

Automatically applies the normal PID display settings in parameters
Automatically applies the extended PID display settings in
parameters
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
connection with a PU connector
Automatically sets the communication parameters for the GOT
connection with RS-485 terminals
50Hz rated
Sets the related parameters of the rated
frequency
frequency according to the power supply
60Hz rated
frequency
frequency
0.1s increment
Changes the setting increments of
acceleration/deceleration time parameters
without changing acceleration/deceleration
0.01s increment
settings

2
10
11
20
21
30
31

Operation in the parameter setting
mode
"AUTO" → "PId" → Write "1"
"AUTO" → "PId" → Write "2"
"AUTO" → "GOT" → Write "1"
—
"AUTO" → "F50" → Write "1"
—
—
"AUTO" → "T0.01" → Write "1"

4

REMARKS

PARAMETERS

If the automatic setting is performed, the selected settings including the changed parameter settings will be changed.

309

Useful functions
(2) Automatic parameter setting using the operation panel (parameter setting mode)
Operation example

Automatically apply the extended PID display settings in parameters

Operation

Display

1.Screen at powering on The monitor display appears.
2.Press

PU indication is lit.

to choose the PU operation mode.

The parameter
number read
previously appears.

3.Press

to choose the
parameter setting mode.

4.Turn

until

(AUTO)

appears.

5.Press

to enter the automatic
parameter setting mode.

6.Turn

until

(PID) appears.

7.Press to read the presentUGV value.
"

" appears.

8.Turn
9.Press

to change it to the set value " ".

to set.

Flicker

Pr.999 setting

Parameter setting complete!!

Turn

to read another parameter.

Press

to show the setting again.

Press

twice to show the next parameter.

Description

Operation in the parameter setting mode

2

Extended PID display increment
setting

(AUTO) →

(PId) → Write "2"

10

GOT initial setting (PU connector)

(AUTO) →

(GOT) → Write "1"

20

50Hz rated frequency

(AUTO) →

(F50) → Write "1"

31

Acceleration/deceleration time
(0.01s increment)

(AUTO) →

(T0.01) → Write "1"

are displayed alternately ... Why?
The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1.Press

.

is lit and the monitor (4-digit LED) displays "0." (When Pr.79="0 (initial setting)")
2.Carry out operation from step 3 again.

310

Useful functions
(3) Parameter setting mode

(Lit)



Always displayed as "0" when the
parameter is read.
Write "1 or 2" to select the automatic
setting. Pressing
in the "0" setting
displays the next parameter.

PARAMETERS

4

Example

Example

Flickers

311

Useful functions
(4) List of automatically-set parameters
The following tables show which parameters are changed in each of the automatic parameter settings.
CAUTION
⋅ If the automatic setting is performed with Pr. 999 or the parameter setting mode, the listed settings including the changed
parameter settings (changed from the initial setting) will be automatically changed. Before performing the automatic setting,
confirm that changing the listed parameters will not cause any problem.

⋅ Normal PID setting
When the PID display increments are not extended
Parameter
759
774
775
776
934
935

Name
PID unit selection
PU/DU monitor selection 1
PU/DU monitor selection 2
PU/DU monitor selection 3
PID display bias coefficient
PID display gain coefficient

Initial
value

Automatically set to

Refer to page

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999

320
322
322
322
273
273

* In this setting, the dedicated parameter list is not displayed while FR-PU07-01 is connected. (However, when another setting is made to activate the PID
control, the list may be displayed according to the setting. (Refer to page 319 for the details. )

⋅ Extended PID display increment setting
When the PID display increments are extended
Parameter

Name

Initial
value

759
774
775
776
934
935

PID unit selection
PU/DU monitor selection 1
PU/DU monitor selection 2
PU/DU monitor selection 3
PID display bias coefficient
PID display gain coefficient

9999
9999
9999
9999
9999
9999

—

3-line monitor start setting

9999

Automatically set to

Refer to page

4
52
53
54
0
100
The 3-line monitor is displayed
first.

320
322
322
322
273
273
319

* Pr. 934 and Pr. 935 settings affect displays of other parameters. Perform automatic setting of the extended PID display increments first. By doing this, the
dedicated parameter list will be displayed when FR-PU07-01 is connected. In the initial status, the Pr. 999 setting is applied for the display. After the setting, the
Pr. 934 and Pr. 935 settings are applied.
The 3-line monitor is displayed first after the automatic setting while a parameter unit (FR-PU07(-01)) is connected.

⋅ GOT initial setting (PU connector) (Pr. 999 = "10")
Parameter
79
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
340

Name
Operation mode selection
PU communication speed
PU communication stop bit length
PU communication parity check
Number of PU communication retries
PU communication check time interval
PU communication waiting time setting
PU communication CR/LF selection
Communication startup mode selection

REMARKS
Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting.

312

Initial
value

Automatically set to

Refer to page

0
192
1
2
1
9999
9999
1
0

1
192
10
1
9999
9999
0ms
1
0

195
214
214
214
214
214
214
214
203

Useful functions

⋅ GOT initial setting (RS-485 terminals) (Pr. 999 = "11")
Parameter

Name

79
332
333

Operation mode selection
RS-485 communication speed
RS-485 communication stop bit length
RS-485 communication parity check
selection
RS-485 communication retry count
RS-485 communication check time interval
RS-485 communication waiting time
setting
Communication startup mode selection
RS-485 communication CR/LF selection
Protocol selection

334
335
336
337
340
341
549

Initial
value

Automatically set to

Refer to page

0
96
1

0
192
10

195
214
214

2

1

214

1
0s

9999
9999

214
214

9999

0ms

214

0
1
0

1
1
0

203
214
232

REMARKS
Always perform an inverter reset after the initial setting.

⋅ Rated frequency (Pr. 999 = "20(50Hz), 21(60Hz)")
Name

Initial value

Pr.999 = "21"

Pr.999 = "20"
Automatic parameter
setting

Refer to
page

3

Base frequency
Multi-speed setting (high
speed)
Acceleration/deceleration
reference frequency
Frequency monitoring
reference
Stall prevention operation
reduction starting frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting
gain frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting
gain frequency
Subtraction starting frequency
Power failure deceleration time
switchover frequency

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

89

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

93

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

101

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

147

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

81

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

177

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

177

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

156

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

156

4
20
55
66
125 (903)
126 (905)
263
266
390*

% setting reference frequency

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

505

Speed setting reference
Auxiliary motor 1 starting
frequency
Auxiliary motor 2 starting
frequency
Auxiliary motor 3 starting
frequency

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

FR-A7NL
manual
139

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

283

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

283

60Hz

60Hz

50Hz

283

584
585
586

* This parameter can be set when the option FR-A7NL is mounted.

313

4

PARAMETERS

Parameter

Useful functions

⋅ Acceleration/deceleration time increment (Pr. 999 ="30(0.1s) or 31(0.01s)")
Parameter

Name

7
8

Acceleration time
Deceleration time
Jog acceleration/deceleration
time
Acceleration/deceleration time
increments
Second acceleration/
deceleration time
Second deceleration time
Power-failure deceleration time
1
Power-failure deceleration time
2
Auxiliary motor connection-time
deceleration time
Auxiliary motor disconnectiontime acceleration time

16
21
44
45
264
265
582
583

Initial set
increment

Pr.999 = "30"

Pr.999 = "31"
Automatic parameter
setting

Refer to
page

0.1s
0.1s

0.1s
0.1s

0.01s
0.01s

101
101

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

95

1

0*

1*

101

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

101

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

101

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

156

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

156

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

283

0.1s

0.1s

0.01s

283

* The set value is changed for Pr. 21.

REMARKS
⋅ When a parameter is set as the acceleration/deceleration time (0.1s), the 0.01s increment is dropped.
⋅ When a parameter is set as the acceleration/deceleration time (0.01s), the parameters are limited at the maximum value of the
parameter setting range. For example, Pr. 7 = "361.0s" when 0.1s increment is selected, and Pr. 7 = "360.00s" when 0.01s
increment is selected.

314

Setting from the parameter unit, operation panel

4.23 Setting from the parameter unit, operation panel
Purpose

Refer to
Page

Parameter that must be Set

Switch the display language of the
parameter unit
Use the setting dial of the operation
panel like a potentiometer for frequency
setting.
Key lock of operation panel
Control of the parameter unit, operation
panel buzzer
Adjust the LCD contrast of the parameter
unit

PU display language
selection

Pr. 145

315

Operation panel operation
selection

Pr. 161

315

PU buzzer control

Pr. 990

317

PU contrast adjustment

Pr. 991

317

4.23.1 PU display language selection (Pr. 145)
The display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be changed to other languages.
Parameter
Number

145

Name

PU display language selection

Initial Value

Setting Range

Definition *

1

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Japanese
English
Germany
French
Spanish
Italian
Swedish
Finnish

* Depending on the parameter unit, some parameter names or fault names etc. may not be displayed at all, or only displayed in English.

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

4.23.2 Setting dial potentiometer mode/key lock selection (Pr. 161)
The setting dial of the operation panel (FR-DU07) can be used like a potentiometer to perform operation.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Name

Initial Value

Setting
Range
0

161

Frequency setting/key lock
operation selection

1
0
10
11

Description
Setting dial frequency
setting mode
Setting dial potentiometer
mode
Setting dial frequency
setting mode
Setting dial potentiometer
mode

Key lock invalid

Key lock valid

4
PARAMETERS

Parameter
Number

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

315

Setting from the parameter unit, operation panel
(1) Using the setting dial like a potentiometer to set the frequency.
Operation example Changing the frequency from 0Hz to 60Hz during operation

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

to choose the PU operation

PU indication is lit.

mode.

3. Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

4. Turn

The parameter number
previously read appears.

(Pr. 161) appears.

until

5. Press
"

to read the present set value.
" (initial value) appears.

6. Turn

to change it
to the setting value " ".

7. Press

to set.

Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!

8. Mode/monitor check
Press
twice to choose
monitor/frequency monitor.

9.

Press

(or

) to start the inverter.

10. Turn

until "
" appears.
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press
.
The frequency flickers for about 5s.

REMARKS
⋅ If the display changes from flickering "60.00" to "0.00", the setting of Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection may not
be "1".
⋅ Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning the dial.
⋅ When the frequency is changed, it will be stored in EEPROM as the set frequency after 10s.

CAUTION
⋅ When using setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency (initial value :120Hz (FR-F720-02330
(FR-F740-01160) or less) /60Hz (FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more ).

316

Setting from the parameter unit, operation panel
(2) Disable the setting dial and key operation of the operation panel (Press [MODE] long (2s))
⋅ Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be made invalid to prevent parameter change,
and unexpected start or frequency setting.
⋅ Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press

for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.

⋅ When the setting dial and key operation are invalid,

appears on the operation panel. If dial or key

operation is attempted while dial and key operation are invalid,
touched for 2s, monitor display appears. )
⋅ To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press

appears (When dial or key is not
for 2s.

REMARKS
⋅ Even if the setting dial and key operation are disabled, the monitor display

is valid.

4.23.3 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press key of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FRPU04/FR-PU07).
Parameter
Number
990

Name

Initial Value

Setting Range

1

0
1

PU buzzer control

Description
Without buzzer
With buzzer

The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.

4.23.4 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991)
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light.
Parameter
Number
991

Name
PU contrast adjustment

Initial Value

Setting Range

58

0 to 63

Description
0 : Light
↓
63: Dark

The above parameters are displayed as simple mode parameters only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
When the operation panel is connected, they can be set only when Pr. 160 User group read selection = "0". (Refer to page 190.)

PARAMETERS

4

317

Setting of FR-PU07-01

4.24 Setting of FR-PU07-01
Purpose

Refer
to Page

Parameter that must be Set

To set bias and gain for the PID display in simple
steps
To change unit of parameters and monitored
items that are related to PID control
To input the PID set point from FR-PU07-01 in
simple steps
To change the displayed items on the 3-line
monitor

PID display bias/gain
setting menu
Unit selection for the PID
parameter/PID monitored
items
PID set point direct setting
menu
Monitor name display on 3line monitor

-

319

Pr. 759

320

-

321

Pr. 774, Pr. 775, Pr. 776

322

The following functions are available when using FR-PU07-01 with FR-F700-NA series produced after June 2010.
(For product assembled date, check the SERIAL number indicated on the inverter rating plate or package. Refer to page
400 )
• PID display bias/gain setting menu
• Unit selection for the PID parameter/PID monitored items
• PID set point direct setting menu
• Monitor name display on 3-line monitor
Operation key name and operation mode indication on LCD are partly different with FR-PU07 and FR-PU07BB.
Operation key
FR-PU07-01
FR-PU07
AUTO key,
HAND key

EXT key,
PU key

Operation mode indication on LCD
FR-PU07-01
FR-PU07
Indication of AUTO, HAND
READ:List

0.00 Hz

--- STOP AUTO

318

READ:List

0.00 Hz

--- STOP HAND

Indication of EXT, PU
READ:List

0.00 Hz

--- STOP EXT

READ:List

0.00 Hz

--- STOP PU

Setting of FR-PU07-01
4.24.1 PID display bias/gain setting menu
The parameters, which need to be set first when FR-PU07-01 is connected, are displayed as a list. The bias and
gain for the PID display (Pr. 934 and Pr. 935 ) and setting for Pr. 999 Automatic parameter setting can be set in these
simple steps.
Pressing
while the FR-PU07-01 is in the monitor mode brings up the dedicated menu screen.
Pr. 999 is displayed at the first turn ON of the inverter, or at the first turn ON after parameter clear. After
Pr. 999 is set, Pr. 934 and Pr. 935 are displayed on the dedicated parameter menu.
(This function is valid under PID control. If
parameter setting mode.)

is pressed while PID control is invalid, the monitor goes into the

PIDset

SETTING MODE
0 ~ 9 :S e r P r .N o .

0. 0

PSI
- - - STOP HAND

Select Oper

Parameter setting mode

Monitor mode

to

934 P I D b i a s
935 P I D g a i n

to

PrSET:PrSET

Dedicated menu

SETTING MODE
Pr.No..
133


Parameter setting mode

934 P ID b i a s
9999
S e t< WR IT E >
E x t< R E A D >

934 P I D b i a s
935 P I D g a i n
PrSET:PrSET

Dedicated menu

Parameter setting screen (Pr.934)

Example when setting value "2" is set once in Pr. 999

Display of the dedicated parameter menu differs depending on Pr. 999 setting and PID control condition.

Pr.999 setting
Never set before
1 (normal PID)
2 (extended PID)

Dedicated parameter menu
When PID control is unavailable
When PID control is available
(Pr. 128 < 50, and Pr. 753 < 50, and
X14 signal not assigned)

(Pr. 128 ≥ 50, or Pr. 753 ≥ 50, or
X14 signal assigned)

Pr. 999
No display
Pr. 934, Pr. 935

Pr. 999, Pr. 934, Pr. 935
Pr. 934, Pr. 935
Pr. 934, Pr. 935

4

REMARKS
The parameters, which are displayed in the dedicated parameter menu, can be always read regardless of the Pr. 160 setting. For
writing, the same restriction as for the normal parameters is applied.

319

PARAMETERS

Condition

Setting of FR-PU07-01
4.24.2 Unit selection for the PID parameter/PID monitored items (Pr. 759)
For the parameter unit (FR-PU07/FR-PU07-01), the display unit of parameters and monitored items, which are
related to PID control, can be changed. When the displayed bias coefficient and gain coefficient for PID control
are changed by Pr. 934 and Pr. 935, the unit setting of Pr. 759 is applied to the direct setting mode display,
parameters and monitored items.
* The direct setting mode is available only for FR-PU07-01.

Parameter
Number

Name

759

PID unit selection

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

9999

0 to 43, 9999

Description
Change the display unit of the parameters and monitored
items, which are related to PID control.


Setting

Unit
display

9999

%

Unit name

Setting

Unit
display

Unit name

Setting

Unit
display

Unit name

16

CFH

Cubic Feet per Hour

31

fWG

Feet of Water Gauge

17

CFM

Cubic Feet per
Minute

32

mWG

Meter of Water
Gauge

18

CFS

Cubic Feet per
Second

33

iHg

34

mHg

19

CMH

Cubic Meter per
Hour

35

kgH

Kilo Gram per Hour

%

Not displayed

0
1

K

Kelvin

2

C

Degree Celsius

3

F

Degree Fahrenheit

Inch of Mercury
Millimeter of Mercury

4

PSI

Pound-force per
Square Inch
Mega Pascal

CMM

6

kPa

Kilo Pascal

Cubic Meter per
Minute

kgM

MPa

20

36

5

Kilo Gram per
Minute

22

ftM

Feet per Minute

37

kgS

Kilo Gram per
Second

23

ftS

Feet per Second

38

ppm

Pulse per Minute

24

m/M

Meter per Minute

39

pps

Pulse per Second

25

m/S

Meter per Second

40

kW

Kilo Watt

26

lbH

Pound per Hour

41

hp

Horse Power

27

lbM

Pound per Minute

42

Hz

Hertz

28

lbS

Pound per Second
Inch of Water
Column

rpm

iWC

Revolution per
Minute

iWG

Inch of Water Gauge

7

Pa

Pascal

8

bar

Bar

9

mbr

Milli Bar

10

GPH

Gallon per Hour

11

GPM

Gallon per Minute

12

GPS

Gallon per Second

13

L/H

Liter per Hour

14

L/M

Liter per Minute

29

15

L/S

Liter per Second

30

43

[Parameters of which display units are
changed]

[Monitored items of which display units are
changed]

Pr.

Pr.52
setting

Parameter name

Monitor item

131
132

PID upper limit
PID lower limit

52
53

DU/PU main display data selection
PID measured value

133
553
577
755
761
763
766
768

PID action set point
PID deviation limit
Output interruption cancel level
Second PID action set point
Pre-charge ending level
Pre-charge upper detection level
Second pre-charge ending level
Second pre-charge upper detection level

54

FM terminal function selection
2+&UGV

00


25+
5612*#0&

How PID set value is
displayed when Pr. 759 = "4"

2+&UGVRPV
    25+

~    

How Pr. 133 is displayed when
Pr. 759 = "4"

REMARKS
The Pr. 759 setting is also applied for the display unit of parameters and monitored items when using FR-PU07.

320

Setting of FR-PU07-01
4.24.3 PID set point direct setting menu
The setting menu is used to input the PID set point (Pr. 133, Pr. 755) in simple steps under PID control.
Pressing

while the FR-PU07-01 is in the monitor mode starts the direct setting mode for the PID set point.

(Valid under PID control. If

is pressed while the PID control is invalid, the function menu is displayed.)

1 MONITOR
2 PU Oper
3 Pr.List
4 Pr.Clear

PIDset

0. 0

PSI
- - - S T OP HAND

Function menu

Monitor mode

SET

PIDset pnt1
80.0PSI

to

FUNC:FUNC MENU

PI D s e t p n t 1
SET
8 0 .0 P S I
4 0 .0 P S I
S ET
0~ 5 0 0

Direct setting mode 1 (Pr. 133)
Change the value with the numeric keypad.

Direct setting mode 1 (Pr. 133)

(Using
PIDset pnt2
SET 40.0PSI
FUNC:FUNC MENU

Direct setting mode 2 (Pr. 755)

Writing of the set value is completed.
The setting is applied to the PID action.

to

/

, change the value.)

PI D s e t p n t 2
SET
4 0 .0 P S I
2 0 .0 P S I
S ET
0~ 5 0 0

Writing of the set value is completed.
The setting is applied to the PID action.

Direct setting mode 2 (Pr. 755)
Change the value with the numeric keypad.
(Using

/

, change the value.)

REMARKS
In the direct setting mode, parameters can be always read or written regardless of the Pr. 77 and Pr. 160 settings.

PARAMETERS

4

321

Setting of FR-PU07-01
4.24.4 3-line monitor selection (Pr. 774 to Pr.776)
For the parameter unit (FR-PU07)/operation panel (FR-DU07), the first, second, and third monitors can be
changed. When using FR-PU07-01, the monitored items, which are set by Pr.774 to Pr.776, can be displayed in
the 3-line monitor.
The Pr.52 DU/PU main display data selection setting is invalid when Pr.774 to Pr.776 ≠ 9999. Monitored item names
are displayed during monitoring (Monitor name display in the 3-line monitor is available only for FR-PU07-01).

Parameter
Number
774
775
776

Setting
1
2
3
5
6
8
9

PU/DU monitor
selection 1
PU/DU monitor
selection 2
PU/DU monitor
selection 3

Monitor item
Output frequency
Output current
Output voltage
Frequency setting value
Running speed
Converter output voltage
Regenerative brake duty
Electronic thermal relay
function load factor
Output current peak value
Converter output voltage peak
value
Input power
Output power
Load meter
Cumulative energization time
Actual operation time
Motor load factor

10
11
12
13
14
17
20
23
24
*1
*2
*3

Name

Initial
Value

Setting
Range

Description

9999

1 to 3, 5, 6, 8 to
14, 17, 20,
23 to 25, 40 to
42, 50 to 57,
67, 81 to 86,
100, 9999

Select the monitored item to be displayed on the first monitor
(first row in the 3-line monitor).
Select the monitored item to be displayed on the second
monitor (second row in the 3-line monitor).
Select the monitored item to be displayed on the third monitor
(third row in the 3-line monitor).

Setting

Monitor item

25

Cumulative power

40

PLC function user monitor 1 *3

41

PLC function user monitor 2 *3

42
50
51
52
53
54

PLC function user monitor 3 *3
Power saving effect
Cumulative saving power
PID set point
PID measured value
PID deviation

55 *1

I/O terminal status

56 *1

Option input terminal status

57
67
81
82
83

*1

Option output terminal status
PID measured value 2
BACnet reception status
BACnet token pass counter
BACnet valid APDU counter

Setting
84
85
86
100
9999 *2

Monitor item
BACnet communication error
counter
Terminal CA output level
Terminal AM output level
Set frequency before
operation
No selection

2+&UGV25+
2+&XCN  25+
2 + & F G X      2 5 +
56((9&*#0&

How the monitor is displayed when
Pr. 759 = "4," Pr. 774 = "52," Pr. 775 = "53,"
and Pr. 776 = "54"

The monitor is displayed as Pr. 774 = "1," Pr. 775 = "2," and Pr. 776 = "3" when a parameter unit other than FR-DU07 is used.
The monitor is displayed as Pr. 774 = "1," Pr. 775 = "2," and Pr. 776 = "3" when the monitor selection is valid.
The setting is available when using PLC function. Refer to the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual for details of the PLC function.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection
Refer to page 141
Pr. 59 Remote function selection
Refer to page 98
Pr. 73 Analog input selection
Refer to page 171
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
Refer to page 195
Pr. 133 PID action set point
Refer to page 261
Pr. 160 User group read selection
Refer to page 190
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection)
Refer to page 122
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection)
Refer to page 128
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain
Refer to page 177
C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr. 935) (PID control)
Refer to page 261

322

Parameter clear

4.25 Parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in Pr. CL parameter clear to initialize parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77
Parameter write selection. In addition, calibration parameters are not cleared.)

Operation

Display

1.Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

2.Press

PU indication is lit.

to choose the PU operation

mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.

3.Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

4.Turn

until "

" (parameter clear)

appears.

5.Press
"

to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.

6.Turn

to change it to

the setting value " ".

7.Press

to set.

Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· Turn

to read another parameter.

· Press

to show the setting again.

· Press

twice to show the next parameter.

Setting

Description

0

Not executed.
Returns all parameters to the initial values except for calibration parameters, terminal function selection
parameters, etc.
Refer to the list of parameters on page 390 for availability of parameter clear.

1

and

4

are displayed alternately ... Why?

The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
.

PARAMETERS

1. Press

is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.

323

All parameter clear

4.26 All parameter clear
POINT
· Set "1" in ALLC all parameter clear to initialize all parameters. (Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr.
77 Parameter write selection.)

Display

Operation
1.Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

2.Press

PU indication is lit.

to choose the PU operation

mode.
The parameter
number read
previously appears.

3.Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

4.Turn

until

(all parameter

clear) appears.

5.Press

to read the present set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.

6.Turn

to change it to

the setting value " ".

7.Press

to set.

Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!
· Press

to read another parameter.

· Press

to show the setting again.

· Press

twice to show the next parameter.

Setting
0
1

and

Description
Not executed.
All parameters return to the initial values. Refer to the list of parameters on page 390 for
availability of parameter clear.

are displayed alternately ... Why?

The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
1. Press

.

is lit and the monitor (4 digit LED) displays "0" (Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value)).
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.

324

Parameter copy and parameter verification

4.27 Parameter copy and parameter verification
PCPY Setting

Description

0
1
2
3

Cancel
Copy the source parameters to the operation panel.
Write the parameters copied to the operation panel into the destination inverter.
Verify parameters in the inverter and operation panel. (Refer to page 326.)

REMARKS
· When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-F700 series or parameter copy write is performed after parameter copy read is
stopped, "model error (
)" is displayed.
· Refer to the parameter list on page 390 and later for availability of parameter copy.
· When the power is turned OFF or an operation panel is disconnected, etc. during parameter copy write, perform write again or check
the values by parameter verification.

4.27.1 Parameter copy
Parameter settings can be copied to multiple inverters.

Display

Operation
1.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.
• Connect it during a stop.

The parameter
number previously
read appears.

2.Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

3.Turn

until

(parameter copy)

appears.

4.Press
"

to to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.

5.Turn

to change it to

the setting value " ".

6.Press

The frequency flickers
for about 30s

to copy the source parameters

to the operation panel.
About 30s later

Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!

7.Connect the operation panel to the
copy source inverter.

4

turn

to change it to "

9.Press

PARAMETERS

8.After performing steps 2 to 5,
".
The frequency flickers
for about 30s

to write the parameters copied to

the operation panel to the destination inverter.

10.When copy is completed,
"

" and "

" flicker.

Flicker ··· Parameter copy complete!!

11.After writing the parameter values to the copy
destination inverter, always reset the inverter,
e.g. switch power OFF once, before starting operation.

325

Parameter copy and parameter verification
appears...Why?

Parameter read error. Perform operation from step 3 again.

appears...Why?

Parameter write error. Perform operation from step 8 again.

and

flicker alternately

Appears when parameters are copied between the inverter of FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less and FRF720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more.
1. Set "0" in Pr. 160 User group read selection.
2. Set the following setting (initial value) in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.
FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less

FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more

10

100

Pr. 989 Setting

3. Reset Pr. 9, Pr. 30, Pr. 51, Pr. 52, Pr. 54, Pr. 56, Pr. 57, Pr. 70, Pr. 72, Pr. 80, Pr. 90, Pr. 158, Pr. 190 to Pr. 196, Pr. 557,
Pr. 893.

4.27.2 Parameter verification
Whether same parameter values are set in other inverters or not can be checked.

Operation

Display

1.Move the operation panel to the
inverter to be verified.
• Move it during a stop.

2.Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

3.Press

The parameter
number read
previously appears.

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

4.Turn

until

(parameter copy)

appears.

5.Press

to read the present set
value.
" "(initial value) appears.

6.Turn

to change it to the set value

" "(parameter copy verification mode).

7.Press

to read the parameter setting
of the verified inverter to the operation panel.

The frequency flickers
for about 30s

• If different parameters exist, different
parameter numbers and
• Hold down

flicker.

to verify.

8.If there is no difference,

Flickering
and

flicker to complete verification.

Flicker ··· Parameter verification complete!!
REMARKS
When the copy destination inverter is not the FR-F700 series, "model error (

)" is displayed.

flickers ... Why?
Set frequencies, etc. may be different. Check set frequencies.

326

Initial value change list

4.28 Initial value change list
Displays and sets the parameters changed from the initial value.
.......The specification differ according to the manufacture date. Refer to page 400 and check the SERIAL.

Operation

Display

1. Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

2. Press

to choose the PU operation mode.

3. Press

to choose the parameter setting

PU indication is lit.
PU

5. Pressing

NET

PRM indication is lit.

mode.

4. Turn

EXT

(The parameter number read previously appears.)
until

appears.

changes to the initial value

change list screen.

6. Turning

displays the parameter number

changed.

Press

Turn

to read the currently set value.

and press

to change the

setting
(refer to step 6 and 7 on page 61)
Turn

to read another parameter.

The display returns to
parameters are displayed.

7. Pressing

Flicker ··· Frequency setting complete!!

in

after all

status returns to

the parameter setting mode.

Turning
Pressing

sets other parameters.
displays the change list again.

4

Calibration parameters (C0 (Pr. 900) to C7 (Pr. 905), C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr. 935)) are not displayed even they are changed from
the initial settings.
Only simple mode parameter is displayed when simple mode is set (Pr. 160 = 9999 (initial value))
Only user group is displayed when user group is set (Pr. 160 = "1").
Pr. 160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.

♦ Parameters referred to ♦
Pr. 160 User group read selection
Refer to page 190
Refer to page 149
C0 (Pr. 900) CA terminal calibration
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) (Frequency setting bias/gain parameter)
Refer to page 261
C42 (Pr. 934) to C45 (Pr. 935) (PID control)

Refer to page 177

327

PARAMETERS

REMARKS

Check and clear of the faults history

4.29 Check and clear of the faults history
(1) Check for the faults history

Monitor/frequency setting

Parameter setting

[Operation panel is used
for operation]

Faults history

[Parameter setting change]

[Operation for displaying faults history]
Eight past faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists,

is displayed.

Output frequency

Flickering

Output current

Flickering

Flickering

Energization time *

Flickering

Output voltage

Flickering

Faults history number
(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Press the
setting
dial.
Flickering

Flickering

*

328

Press the
setting
dial.

Press the
setting
dial.

The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again
from 0. When the operation panel (FR-DU07) is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and
thereafter, it is added up from 0.

Check and clear of the faults history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
· The faults history can be cleared by setting "1" in Er.CL Faults history clear.

Display

Operation
1.Screen at powering ON
The monitor display appears.

The parameter
number previously
read appears.

2.Press

to choose the parameter
setting mode.

3.Turn

until

(faults history clear)

appears.

4.Press
"

to read the present set value.
"(initial value) appears.

5.Turn

to change

it to the setting value " ".

to set.

Flicker ··· Faults history clear complete!!
· Press

to read another parameter.

· Press

to show the setting again.

· Press

twice to show the next parameter.

4
PARAMETERS

6.Press

329

MEMO

330

5 PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the basic "PROTECTIVE FUNCTION" for
use of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

Reset method of protective function ....................... 332
List of fault or alarm display .................................... 333
Causes and corrective actions ............................... 334
Correspondences between digital and actual
characters............................................................... 346
Check first when you have a trouble ...................... 347

1

2

3

4

5

6

7
331

Reset method of protective function
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to one of the following
fault or alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales
representative or distributor.
• Retention of fault output signal ................ When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the
inverter is opened when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be
lost and the fault output will not be held.
• Fault or alarm indication .......................... When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically
switches to the fault or alarm indication
• Resetting method..................................... When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset,
therefore, the inverter cannot restart. (Refer to page 332.)
• When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly categorized as below.
(1) Error message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FRPU04 /FR-PU07) is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warnings
The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will
lead to a fault.
(3) Alarm
The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
REMARKS
• For the details of fault displays and other troubles, also refer to page 333.
• Past eight faults can be displayed using the setting dial. (Refer to page 59 for the operation.)

5.1 Reset method of protective function
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value
of the electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Inverter recovers about 1s after the reset is released.
Operation 1: ..... Using the operation panel, press

to reset the inverter.

(This may only be performed when a fault occurs. (Refer to page 338 for
fault.))
Operation 2: ...... Switch OFF the power once. After the indicator of the operation panel
turns OFF, switch it ON again.

ON

OFF

Operation 3: . .... Turn ON the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal is
kept ON, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a
reset status.)

Inverter
RES
SD

REMARKS
• When a fault occurs during PLC function, turning ON of X51 signal can release fault without interrupting PLC function. (Refer to
the FR-F700 PLC function programming manual. )

CAUTION
⋅ OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter fault with the start signal
ON restarts the motor suddenly.

332

List of fault or alarm display

5.2 List of fault or alarm display
fault
Data
code

Refer
to

Faults history

-

328

E.LF

Operation panel lock

-

334

E.OHT

Password locked

-

334

E.PTC*

Er1 to 4 Parameter write error

-

334

E.OPT

rE1 to 4 Copy operation error

-

335

E.OP1
E.OP2

-

335

Error message

HOLD
LOCd

to

to

Err.
OL

Alarm

Warnings

oL
RB
TH

Stall prevention
(overcurrent)
Stall prevention
(overvoltage)
Regenerative brake
prealarm
Electronic thermal
relay function prealarm

336

-

336

-

337

-

337

PU stop

-

336

MT

Maintenance signal
output

-

337

CP

Parameter copy

-

337

FN

Fan alarm

-

337

E.OC2
E.OC3
E.OV1

E.OV2

E.OV3

E.THT

E.THM

Overcurrent trip during
acceleration
Overcurrent trip during
constant speed
Overcurrent trip during
deceleration or stop
Regenerative
overvoltage trip during
acceleration
Regenerative
overvoltage trip during
constant speed
Regenerative
overvoltage trip during
deceleration or stop
Inverter overload trip
(electronic thermal
relay function)
Motor overload trip
(electronic thermal
relay function)

E.FIN

Heatsink overheat

E.IPF

Instantaneous power
failure

E.UVT Undervoltage

Fault

-

PS

E.OC1

Fault

Error

16
(H10)
17
(H11)
18
(H12)

Operation Panel
Indication

E. 1
E. 2

E.PE

Name

129
(H81)
External thermal relay
144
operation *2
(H90)
PTC thermistor
145
operation
(H91)
160
Option fault
(HA0)
161
Communication option (HA1)
fault
162
(HA2)
Output phase loss

Option fault
Parameter storage
device fault

E.PUE PU disconnection
E.RET Retry count excess
E.PE2*

Parameter storage
device fault

E. 5
E. 6
CPU fault
E. 7
E.CPU

338
338
338

32
(H20)

339

33
(H21)

339

34
(H22)

339

48
(H30)

339

Operation panel power
supply short circuit,
RS-485 terminal power
supply short circuit
24VDC power output
E.P24
short circuit
Output current detection
E.CDO*
value exceeded
Inrush current limit
E.IOH*
circuit fault
Communication fault
E.SER*
(inverter)
E.CTE

64
(H40)
80
(H50)
81
(H51)
82
(H52)
96
(H60)

E.ILF*

Input phase loss

E.OLT

Stall prevention stop

E.GF

Output side earth
128
(ground) fault overcurrent (H80)

341
341

342
342

342

343

343
343
343
343

344

344

340

E.13

Internal circuit fault

253
(HFD)

345

5

Pre-charge fault

229
(HE5)

345

4mA input fault

228
(HE4)

346

E. PCH*
E.LCI*

194
(HC2)
196
(HC4)
197
(HC5)
198
(HC6)
199
(HC7)
230
(HE6)

344
344
344
345
345
345

* If an error occurs when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on
the FR-PU04.

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.
341

342

112
(H70)

340

341

193
(HC1)

341

Brake transistor alarm
detection/internal
circuit fault

340

340

241
(HF1)
242
(HF2)
176
(HB0)
177
(HB1)
178
(HB2)
179
(HB3)
245
(HF5)
246
(HF6)
247
(HF7)
192
(HC0)

Refer
to

E.BE

E.AIE* Analog input fault
E.PID* PID signal fault

49
(H31)

fault
Data
code

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

E---

Name

Fault

Operation Panel
Indication

Refer to page

400 to check the SERIAL number.

333

Causes and corrective actions

5.3 Causes and corrective actions
(1) Error Message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

HOLD
Operation panel lock
Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than

Check point
Corrective action

Operation panel
indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

-------------Press

for 2s to release lock.

LOCd
Password locked
Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.
--------------

Enter the password in Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating.
(Refer to page 192).

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

334

is invalid. (Refer to page 317.)

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

Er1
Write disable error
⋅ You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable
parameter write.
⋅ Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
⋅ Adjustable 5 points V/F settings overlapped
⋅ PU and inverter cannot make normal communication
⋅ Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection (Refer to page 189.)
⋅ Check the settings of Pr. 31 to 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 88.)
⋅ Check the settings of Pr. 100 to Pr. 109 (Adjustable 5 points V/F). (Refer to page 92.)
⋅ Check the connection of PU and inverter.

Er2
Write error during operation
When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled
independently of operating status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is ON.
⋅ Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 189.)
⋅ Check that the inverter is not operating.
⋅ Set "2" in Pr. 77.
⋅ After stopping operation, make parameter setting.

Er3
Calibration error
Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page 177.)

Er4
Mode designation error
⋅ You attempted to make parameter setting in the NET operation mode when Pr. 77 is not "2".
⋅ If a parameter write was performed when the command source is not at the operation panel (FRDU07).
⋅ Check that operation mode is "PU operation mode".
⋅ Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 189.)
⋅ Check the Pr. 551 setting.
⋅ After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 189.)
⋅ After setting "2" in Pr. 77, make parameter setting.
⋅ Set Pr.551 = "2 (initial setting)". (Refer to page 204.)

Causes and corrective actions

Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

rE1
Parameter read error
An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy reading.
-------------⋅ Make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 325.)
⋅ Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.

rE2
Parameter write error
⋅ You attempted to perform parameter copy write during operation.
⋅ An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter copy writing.
Is the FWD or REV LED of the operation panel (FR-DU07) lit or flickering?
⋅ After stopping operation, make parameter copy again. (Refer to page 325.)
⋅ Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.

rE3
Parameter verification error
⋅ Data on the operation panel side and inverter side are different.
⋅ An error occurred in the EEPROM on the operation panel side during parameter verification.
Check for the parameter setting of the source inverter and inverter to be verified.
⋅ Press

Make parameter verification again. (Refer to page 326.)
⋅ Check for an operation panel (FR-DU07) failure. Please contact your sales representative.

rE4
Model error
⋅ A different model was used for parameter write and verification during parameter copy.
⋅ When parameter copy write is stopped after parameter copy read is stopped
⋅ Check that the verified inverter is the same model.
⋅ Check that the power is not turned OFF or an operation panel is not disconnected, etc. during
parameter copy read.
⋅ Use the same model (FR-F700 series) for parameter copy and verification.
⋅ Perform parameter copy read again.

Operation Panel
Indication

Description

Corrective action

to continue verification.

Err.
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

The RES signal is ON
PU and inverter cannot make normal communication (contact fault of the connector)
When the voltage drops in the inverter's input side.
When the control circuit power (R1/L11, S1/L21) and the main circuit power(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) are
connected to a separate power, it may appear at turning ON of the main circuit. It is not a fault.
⋅ Turn OFF the RES signal.
⋅ Check the connection of PU and inverter.
⋅ Check the voltage on the inverter's input side.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point

5

335

Causes and corrective actions
(2) Warnings
When the protective function is activated, the output is not shut off.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point

Corrective action

*1

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

OL

OL

Stall prevention (overcurrent)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
acceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function increases the frequency again.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
During
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function lowers the frequency until the
constant
overload current decreases to prevent overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
speed
decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency
operation
up to the set value.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr.
22 Stall prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until
During
the overload current decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip.
deceleration
When the overload current has decreased below stall prevention operation level, this
function decreases the frequency again.
⋅ Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large. (V/F control)
⋅ Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
⋅ Check that the load is not too heavy.
⋅ Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
⋅ Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
⋅ Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate.
⋅ Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost value by 1% and check the motor status. (V/F control)
(Refer to page 78.)
⋅ Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 101.)
⋅ Reduce the load weight. Try Simple magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80).
⋅ Check the peripheral devices.
⋅ Adjust the Pr.13 setting. Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting. (V/F control)
⋅ Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is 110%
*1.) The acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation
selection. (Use Pr. 156 to set either operation continued or not at OL operation.)

120% when LD is selected

Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

oL

oL

Stall prevention (overcurrent)
⋅ If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive and exceeds the
regenerative energy consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in
frequency to prevent overvoltage trip. As soon as the regenerative energy has
During
decreased, deceleration resumes.
deceleration
⋅ If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration
avoidance function is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to
prevent overvoltage trip. (Refer to page 189.)
⋅ Check for sudden speed reduction.
⋅ Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886) is being used? (Refer to page 298.)
The deceleration time may change.
Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

PS

PS

PU stop
Stop with

of PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr. 75,

refer to page 186.)

Check point
Corrective action

336

Check for a stop made by pressing
Turn the start signal OFF and release with

of the operation panel.
.

Causes and corrective actions

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

RB

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

RB

Regenerative brake prealarm
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake
duty value. When the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial value (Pr. 70 ="0"), this
warning does not occur. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E.
OV_) occurs.
The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP
signal output, assign the function by setting "7" (positive logic) or "107" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 128)
Appears only for the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more.
⋅ Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
⋅ Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values are
correct.
⋅ Increase the deceleration time.
⋅ Check the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty values.

TH

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

TH

Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the
preset level. If it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E.
THM) occurs.
The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for the THP
signal output, assign the function by setting "8" (positive logic) or "108" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190
to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 128)
⋅ Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
⋅ Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 107.)
⋅ Reduce the load weight or the number of operation times.
⋅ Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 107.)

MT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

————
MT

Maintenance signal output
Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"),
this protective function does not function.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time
setting. (Refer to page 304.)
Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erases the signal.

CP

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

————
CP

Parameter copy
Appears when parameters are copied between models with capacities of FR-F720-02330 (FR-F74001160) or less and FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more.
Resetting of Pr.9, Pr.30, Pr.51, Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.56, Pr.57, Pr.70, Pr.72, Pr.80, Pr.90, Pr.158, Pr.190 to Pr.196,
Pr.557 and Pr.893 is necessary.
Set the initial value in Pr. 989 Parameter copy alarm release.

(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter
setting. (Set "98" in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 128.)
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

FN

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Operation Panel
Indication
Name

5

FN

Fan alarm
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan,
appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan
stops due to a fault or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check the cooling fan for an alarm.
Check for fan failure. Please contact your sales representative.

337

Causes and corrective actions
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

338

E.OC1

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

OC During Acc

Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
acceleration, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
⋅ Check for sudden acceleration.
⋅ Check that the downward acceleration time is not long in vertical lift application.
⋅ Check for output short circuit.
⋅ Check that the Pr. 3 Base frequency setting is not 60Hz when the motor rated frequency is 50Hz.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.
⋅ Check that the regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes
larger than the V/F reference voltage at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to the high
voltage.)
⋅ Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting.
⋅ Increase the acceleration time.
(Shorten the downward acceleration time in vertical lift application.)
⋅ When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
⋅ Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit does not occur.
⋅ Set the Pr. 3 Base frequency to 50Hz. (Refer to page 89.)
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level. (Refer to page 81.)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation.
⋅ Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to page 89.)
⋅ Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 152.)

E.OC2

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Stedy Spd OC

Overcurrent trip during constant speed
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated current during
constant speed operation, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output.
⋅ Check for sudden load change.
⋅ Check for output short circuit.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.
⋅ Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting.
⋅ Keep load stable.
⋅ Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level. (Refer to page 81.)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation.
⋅ Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 152.)

E.OC3

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

OC During Dec

Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 170% of the rated inverter current
during deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated to
stop the inverter output.
⋅ Check for sudden speed reduction.
⋅ Check for output short circuit.
⋅ Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
· Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
· Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.
⋅ Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting.
⋅ Increase the deceleration time.
⋅ Check the wiring to avoid output short circuit.
⋅ Check the mechanical brake operation.
· Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level. (Refer to page 81.)
· Activate the fast-response current limit operation.
⋅ Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 152.)

Causes and corrective actions

Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

*1
*2

E.OV1

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

OV During Acc

Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
· Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during descending acceleration with lifting load)
· Check if Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is set too low like the no-load current.
· Decrease the acceleration time.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886).
(Refer to page 298.)
· Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.

E.OV2

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Stedy Spd OV

Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
· Check for sudden load change.
· Check if Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is set too low like the no-load current.
· Keep load stable.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886).
(Refer to page 298.)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
· Set a value larger than the no load current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level.

E.OV3

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

OV During Dec

Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the
specified value, the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be
activated by a surge voltage produced in the power supply system.
Check for sudden speed reduction.
· Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
· Longer the brake cycle.
· Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 886). (Refer to page 298.)
· Use the brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.

E.THT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Inv. Overload

Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) *1
If a current not less than 110%*2 of the rated output current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur
(170% or less), the electronic thermal relay activates to stop the inverter output in order to protect the
output transistors. (Overload capacity 110%*2 60s inverse-time characteristic)
· Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
· Check that Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large (small). (V/F control)
· Check that Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using
machine. (V/F control)
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
· Adjust the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting.
· Set the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine. (V/F
control)
· Reduce the load weight.

Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.
120% when LD is selected

339

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Operation Panel
Indication
Name

5

Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point
Corrective action
*1

E.THM

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Motor Ovrload

Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) *1
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced
cooling capability during constant-speed operation and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the
integrated value reaches 85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting and the protection circuit is
activated to stop the inverter output when the integrated value reaches the specified value. When
running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the
inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the electronic thermal relay function.
· Check the motor for use under overload.
· Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to page 111.)
· Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
· Reduce the load weight.
· For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor.
· Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to page 81.)

Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point
Corrective action

340

E.FIN

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

H/Sink O/Temp

Heatsink overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated to stop the inverter output.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink
overheat protection operation temperature.
For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26" (positive logic) or
"126" (negative logic) in any of Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 128)
· Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
· Check for heatsink clogging.
·
·
·
·

Check that the cooling fan is stopped. (Check that
is displayed on the operation panel.)
Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Clean the heatsink.
Replace the cooling fan.

E.IPF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Inst. Pwr. Loss

Instantaneous power failure
If a power failure occurs for longer than 15ms (this also applies to inverter input shut-off), the
instantaneous power failure protective function is activated to trip the inverter in order to prevent the
control circuit from malfunctioning. If a power failure persists for longer than 100ms, the fault output is not
provided, and the inverter restarts if the start signal is ON upon power restoration. (The inverter continues
operating if an instantaneous power failure is within 15ms.) In some operating status (load magnitude,
acceleration/deceleration time setting, etc.), overcurrent or other protection may be activated upon power
restoration.
When instantaneous power failure protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 152)
Find the cause of instantaneous power failure occurrence.
· Remedy the instantaneous power failure.
· Prepare a backup power supply for instantaneous power failure.
· Set the function of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57). (Refer to page 152.)

E.BE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Br. Cct. Fault

Brake transistor alarm detection/internal circuit fault
This function stops the inverter output if a fault occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake
transistors when using functions of the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more.
In this case, the inverter must be powered OFF immediately.
For the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less, it appears when an internal circuit error occurred.
· Reduce the load inertia.
· Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
· Check that the brake resistor selected is correct.
For the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more, when the protective function is activated even if the
above measures are taken, replace the brake unit with a new one.
For the FR-F720-02330 (FR-F740-01160) or less, replace the inverter.

Causes and corrective actions

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

E.UVT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Under Voltage

Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions.
In addition, the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if
the power supply voltage decreases below about 150V (300VAC for the 400V class), this function
stops the inverter output.
When a jumper is not connected across P/+ and P1, the undervoltage protective function is activated.
When undervoltage protection is activated, the IPF signal is output. (Refer to page 152)
· Check for start of large-capacity motor.
· Check that a jumper or DC reactor is connected across terminals P/+ and P1.
· Check the power supply system equipment such as the power supply.
· Connect a jumper or DC reactor across terminals P/+ and P1.
· If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

E.ILF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
Input phase loss

Input phase loss
This fault is output when function valid setting (=1) is set in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection
and one phase of the three phase power input is lost.
When the setting of Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection is the initial value (Pr. 872 = "0"), this fault
does not occur. (Refer to page 162.)
Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
· Wire the cables properly.
· Repair a break portion in the cable.
· Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.

E.OLT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Stll Prev STP ( OL shown during stall
prevention operation)

Stall prevention stop
If the frequency has fallen to 0.5Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT)
appears and trips the inverter. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
· Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to page 82.)
· Reduce the load weight.

E.GF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Ground Fault

Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows due to an earth
(ground) fault that occurred on the inverter's output (load) side.
Check for an earth (ground) fault in the motor and connection cable.
Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

E.LF

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

E. LF

Output phase loss
This function stops the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side
(load side) is lost.
· Check the wiring (Check that the motor is normal.)
· Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
⋅ Check if a start command is given to the inverter while the motor is coasting.
· Wire the cables properly.
· Check the Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection setting.
· Input a start command after the motor stops. Alternatively, use the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure/flying start function. (Refer to page 152.)

341

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Operation Panel
Indication
Name

5

Causes and corrective actions
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

E.OHT

Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

E.PTC

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
PTC activated

PTC thermistor operation
Trips when the motor overheat status is detected for 10s or more by the external PTC thermistor input
connected to the terminal AU.
This fault functions when "63" is set in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection and AU/PTC switchover
switch is set in PTC side. When the initial value (Pr. 184 = "4") is set, this protective function does not
function.
· Check the connection between the PTC thermistor switch and thermal relay protector.
· Check the motor for operation under overload.
· Is valid setting ( = 63) selected in Pr. 184 AU terminal function selection ? (Refer to page 110, 122.)
Reduce the load weight.

E.OPT

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Option Fault

Option fault
· Appears when the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 accidentally when
a high power factor converter is connected.
· Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Appears when a communication option is connected while Pr. 296 = "0 or 100".
· Check that the AC power supply is not connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 when a high
power factor converter (FR-HC, MT-HC) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) is
connected.
· Check if password lock is activated by setting Pr. 296 = "0, 100"
· Check the parameter (Pr. 30) setting and wiring.
· The inverter may be damaged if the AC power supply is connected to the terminal R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
when a high power factor converter is connected. Please contact your sales representative.
· Return the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer to
instruction manual of each option)
· To apply the password lock when installing a communication option, set Pr.296 ≠ "0,100". (Refer to
page 192).
· If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

E.OP1
E.OP2

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Option 1 Fault
Option 2 Fault

Communication option fault
Stops the inverter output when a communication line fault occurs in the communication option.
· Check for a wrong option function setting and operation.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
· Check for a break in the communication cable.
· Check that the terminating resistor is fitted properly.
· Check the option function setting, etc.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Check the connection of communication cable.

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.

342

OH Fault

External thermal relay operation
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection, or the internally mounted
temperature relay in the motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Functions when "7" (OH signal) is set to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection).
When the initial value (without OH signal assigned) is set, this protective function does not function.
· Check for motor overheating.
· Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function
selection).
· Reduce the load and operating duty.
· Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.
Operation Panel
Indication

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

Causes and corrective actions

Name
Description

Check point

Corrective action

E. 1
E. 2

Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Fault 1, Fault2

Option fault
Stops the inverter output when a contact fault is found between the inverter and the plug-in option, or
when the communication option is connected to a connector other than the bottom connector.
Appears when the switch for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option is changed.
· Check that the plug-in option is plugged into the connector securely.
(1 and 2 indicate the option connector numbers.)
· Check for excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Check that the communication option is not fitted to the connector other than the bottom connector.
· Connect the plug-in option securely.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative
or distributor.
· Fit the communication option to the connector other than the bottom connector.
· Return the switch position for the manufacturer setting of the plug-in option to the initial status. (Refer
to instruction manual of each option)

... Specifications differ according to the date assembled.
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

E.PE

Refer to page 400 to check the SERIAL number.

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Corrupt Memry

Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable
RAM write. Note that powering OFF returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.

E.PE2

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
PR storage alarm

Parameter storage device fault (main circuit board)
Trips when a fault occurred in the parameter stored. (EEPROM failure)
——————
Please contact your sales representative.

E.PUE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

PU Leave Out

PU disconnection
· This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended,
e.g. the operation panel and parameter unit is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17", "102", "103",
"116" or "117" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
· This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more
than permissible number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU
communication retries during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· This function stops the inverter output if communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 122
PU communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
· Check that the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted tightly.
· Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Fit the FR-DU07 or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) securely.

E.RET

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Operation Panel
Indication

Retry No Over

Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter.
Functions only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set. When the initial value (Pr. 67 = "0")
is set, this fault does not occur.
Find the cause of fault occurrence.
Eliminate the cause of the fault preceding this error indication.

343

5

Causes and corrective actions
E. 5
Operation Panel
Indication

E. 6
E. 7

Fault 5
FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

E.CPU
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check point

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point

Corrective action

344

Fault 6
Fault 7
CPU Fault

CPU fault
Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
· Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the
inverter.
· Please contact your sales representative.

E.CTE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

E.CTE

Operation panel power supply short circuit, RS-485 terminal power supply short circuit
When the operation panel power supply (PU connector) is shorted, this function shuts off the power
output and stops the inverter output. At this time, the operation panel (parameter unit) cannot be used
and RS-485 communication from the PU connector cannot be made. When the internal power supply
for RS-485 terminals are shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, communication from the RS-485 terminals cannot be made.
To reset, enter the RES signal or switch power OFF, then ON again.
· Check for a short circuit in the PU connector cable.
· Check that the RS-485 terminals are connected correctly.
· Check the PU and cable.
· Check the connection of the RS-485 terminals

E.P24

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

E.P24

24VDC power output short circuit
When the 24VDC power output from the PC terminal is shorted, this function shuts off the power output.
At this time, all external contact inputs switch OFF. The inverter cannot be reset by entering the RES
signal. To reset it, use the operation panel or switch power OFF, then ON again.
· Check for a short circuit in the PC terminal output.
· Remedy the earth (ground) fault portion.

E.CDO

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
OC detect level

Output current detection value exceeded
This functions stops the inverter output when the output current exceeds the setting of Pr.150 Output
current detection level, or the output current falls below the setting of Pr.152 Zero current detection level.
This function is active when Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection is set to "1, 10, 11".
When the initial value (Pr. 167 = "0") is set, this fault does not occur.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay
time, Pr. 152 Zero current detection level, Pr. 153 Zero current detection time, Pr. 166 Output current detection
signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (Refer to page 135.)

E.IOH

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
Inrush overheat

Inrush current limit circuit fault
Trips when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit fault
· Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
· Check that no meltdown is found in the primary side fuse (5A) in the power supply circuit of the
inrush current suppression circuit contactor (FR-F740-03250 or more) or no fault is found in the
power supply circuit of the contactor.
· Check that the power supply circuit of inrush current limit circuit contactor is not damaged.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

Causes and corrective actions

Description
Check point
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Check point
Corrective action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description

Check Point
Corrective Action

Operation Panel
Indication
Name
Description
Corrective action
Operation Panel
Indication
Name

Description

Check point

Corrective action

E.SER

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
VFD Comm error

Communication fault (inverter)
This function stops the inverter output when communication error occurs consecutively for more than
permissible retry count when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 335 RS-485 communication retry count
during RS-485 communication from the RS-485 terminals. This function also stops the inverter output if
communication is broken for the period of time set in Pr. 336 RS-485 communication check time interval.
Check the RS-485 terminal wiring.
Perform wiring of the RS-485 terminals properly.

E.AIE

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 14
Analog in error

Analog input fault
Stops the inverter output when 30mA or higher current is input to terminal 2 or 4 while current input is
selected with Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. The function also stops the
inverter output when voltage (7.5V or higher) is input.
Check the setting of Pr. 73 Analog input selection and Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection. (Refer to page 171.)
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 73 Analog input selection or Pr. 267 Terminal
4 input selection to voltage input.

E.PID

FR-PU04
FR-PU07
FR-PU07-01

Fault 14
Fault
PID Signal Error

PID signal fault
If any of PID upper limit (FUP), PID lower limit (FDN), and PID deviation limit (Y48) turns ON during PID
control, inverter shuts off the output. This function is active under the following parameter settings: Pr.554 PID
signal operation selection ≠ "0,10", Pr.131 PID upper limit ≠ "9999", Pr.132 PID lower limit ≠ "9999", and Pr.553 PID
deviation limit ≠ "9999". This protective function is not active in the initial setting (Pr.554 = "0", Pr.131 = "9999",
Pr.132 = "9999", Pr.553 = "9999").
Check if the measured PID value is greater than the upper limit (Pr.131) or smaller than the lower limit (Pr.132).
Check if the absolute PID deviation value is greater than the limit value (Pr.553).
Make correct settings for Pr.131 PID upper limit, Pr.132 PID lower limit, Pr.553 PID deviation limit. (Refer to page
261)

E.13

FR-PU04
FR-PU07(-01)

Fault 13

Internal circuit fault
Trips when an internal circuit error occurred.
Please contact your sales representative.

E.PCH

FR-PU04
FR-PU07
FR-PU07-01

Fault 14
Fault
Precharge Error

Pre-charge fault
When the pre-charged time exceeds the Pr.764 (Pr.769) Pre-charge time limit, or the pre-charged amount
exceeds Pr. 763 (Pr. 768) Pre-charge upper detection level, the protective circuit activates, and the inverter
output is shutoff. This function is available when Pr.764 (Pr.769) Pre-charge time limit or Pr. 763 (Pr. 768)
Pre-charge upper detection level is set. This protective function is not available in the initial status. (Refer
to page 261)
· Check if the Pr.764 (Pr.769) Pre-charge time limit setting is too low.
· Check if the Pr. 763 (Pr. 768) Pre-charge upper detection level setting is too low.
· Check if the automatic switchover frequency set in Pr.127 (Pr.754) is too low.
· Check if there is a break in the connection with a pump.
· Set the Pr.764 (Pr.769) Pre-charge time limit setting higher.
· Set the Pr. 763 (Pr. 768) Pre-charge upper detection level setting higher.
· Set the automatic switchover frequency higher in Pr.127 (Pr.754).
· Check the connection with a pump.

345

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Operation Panel
Indication
Name

5

Correspondences between digital and
actual characters
Operation Panel
Indication

FR-PU04
FR-PU07
FR-PU07-01

E.LCI

Name

Fault 14
Fault
Lost mA Input

4mA input fault
When the analog input current stays at 2mA or lower for the time period set in Pr.778 Current input check
filter, the protective circuit activates, and the inverter output is shutoff. The function is available when
Pr.573 4mA input check selection ="2 or 3." This protective function is not available in the initial status.
(Refer to page 182 )
· Check if the wire used for the analog current input has a break.
· Check if the Pr.778 Current input check filter setting is too low.
· Check the wiring for the analog current input.
· Set the Pr.778 Current input check filter setting higher.

Description
Check point
Corrective action

CAUTION
• If protective functions of E.ILF, E.PTC, E.PE2, E.CDO, E.IOH, E.SER, E.AIE, E.PID, E.PCH, E.LCI are activated when using
the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" appears.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
• If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.

5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters
displayed on the operation panel.
Actual

Digital

Actual

Actual

0

A

M

1

B

N

2

C

O

3

D

o

4

E

P

5

F

S

6

G

T

7

H

U

8

I

V

9

J

r

L

346

Digital

-

Digital

Check first when you have a trouble

5.5

Check first when you have a trouble

5.5.1

Motor does not start
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Power ON a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic
contactor (MC).

—

Appropriate power supply voltage is not applied.

Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss,

(Operation panel display is not provided.)

and wiring.
If only the control power is ON when using a separate
power source for the control circuit, turn ON the main

Main

25

circuit power.

Circuit

Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor.
If commercial power supply-inverter switchover function

Motor is not connected properly.

is active, check the wiring of the magnetic contactor

16

connected between the inverter and the motor.
The jumper across P/+ and P1 is disconnected.
(FR-F720-02330 (01160) or less)

Securely fit a jumper across P/+ and P1.
When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper

16

across P/+ and P1, and then connect the DC reactor.
Check the start command source, and input a start
signal.

Start signal is not input.

PU operation mode:

/

197

External operation mode : STF/STR signal
Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation
Both the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF,

start signals (STF or STR).

STR) are input simultaneously.

If STF and STR signals are turned ON simultaneously in

Frequency command is zero.

Check the frequency command source and enter a

(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)

frequency command.

27

the initial setting, a stop command is given.

frequency setting.
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)

Turn ON the AU signal.
Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input.

171

Turn MRS or RES signal OFF.
Output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is ON.

Input

(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)

Signal

Inverter starts the operation with a given start command
and a frequency command after turning OFF MRS or

152

RES signal.
Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.

CS signal is OFF when automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure function is selected (Pr. 57
≠ "9999").
(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering. )

Turn ON the CS signal.
Restart operation is enabled when restart after

152

instantaneous power signal (CS) is ON.
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector

Jumper connector of sink - source is wrongly selected.

is correctly installed.

(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)

If it is not installed correctly, input signal is not

30

recognized.
Voltage/current input switch is not correctly set for analog

Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch

input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA).

correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with

(FWD or REV LED on the operation panel is flickering.)

the setting.

(Operation panel indication is

5
27

During the External operation mode, check the method

was pressed.
(PS).)

Two-wire or three-wire type connection is wrong.

of restarting from a

input stop from PU.

Check the connection.
Connect STOP signal when three-wire type is used.

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used for

197

336

126

347

Check first when you have a trouble
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is improper when V/F control is
used.

Increase Pr. 0 setting by 0.5% increments while
observing the rotation of a motor.

78

If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Check the Pr. 78 setting.

Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set.

Set Pr. 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to

190

only one direction.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is wrong.

Check the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7)

are improper.

settings.

running frequency.

Setting

methods of start command and frequency command.

Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings

Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is greater than the

Parameter

Select the operation mode which corresponds with input

The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal
Set the frequency command according to the
application.

Especially, Pr. 1 Maximum frequency is zero.

Set Pr. 1 higher than the actual frequency used.

Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is lower than Pr. 13 Starting

Set Pr. 15 Jog frequency higher than Pr. 13 Starting

frequency.

frequency.

87

95

Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select

195,

an operation mode suitable for the purpose.

204

Start signal operation selection is set by the Pr. 250 Stop

Check Pr. 250 setting and connection of STF and STR

selection

signals.

deceleration stop function is selected.

104

is less than the value set in Pr. 13.

as multi-speed operation) are zero.

Inverter decelerated to a stop when power failure

177

Set running frequency higher than Pr. 13.

Frequency settings of various running frequency (such

Operation mode and a writing device do not match.

195

126

When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn
OFF the start signal once, then turn ON again to restart.

156

Inverter restarts when Pr. 261="2, 22".
Set Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1"

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function or power failure stop function is activated.
(Performing overload operation during input phase loss
may cause voltage insufficiency, and that may result in
detection of power failure.)

(input phase failure protection active).
Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure function and power failure stop function.
Reduce the load.
Increase the acceleration time if the automatic restart

152,
156,
162

after instantaneous power failure function or power
failure stop function occurred during acceleration.

DC feeding mode 1 or mode 2 is not selected in Pr.30
Regenerative function selection even though the DC is fed
through terminal P and N.

Load

348

Set the DC feeding mode in Pr.30 Regenerative function
selection.

114

Load is too heavy.

Reduce the load.

—

Shaft is locked.

Inspect the machine (motor).

—

Check first when you have a trouble
5.5.2

Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise

When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3kHz or more set in Pr. 72, the carrier frequency will automatically
decrease if the output current of the inverter exceeds the value in parenthesis of the rated output current on page 370. This
may cause the motor noise to increase. But it is not a fault.
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Input
signal
Parameter

Disturbance due to EMI when frequency command is
given from analog input (terminal 1, 2, 4).

Take countermeasures against EMI.
Increase the Pr. 74 Input filter time constant if steady
operation cannot be performed due to EMI.

Setting

46
176

In the initial setting, Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection is
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are
generated.

enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending
complex tone. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises

169

(metallic noises) are generated.
Set Pr. 240 = "0" to disable this function.
Set Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (Frequency jump).

Resonance occurs. (output frequency)

Parameter

When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the
natural frequency of a mechanical system, these

88

parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.

Setting
Resonance occurs. (carrier frequency)

Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect
on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical

169

system or a motor.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional
band (Pr. 129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130)
Gain adjustment during PID control is insufficient.

to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134)

261

to a slightly shorter time.
Check the calibration of set point and measured value.
Mechanical looseness

Others

Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no
mechanical looseness.

—

Contact the motor manufacturer.

5.5.3

Operating with output phase loss

Refer
Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Fan cover was not correctly installed when a cooling fan

Fan

was replaced.

Install a fan cover correctly.

360

Motor generates heat abnormally

Check
points

Motor
Main
Circuit
Parameter
Setting
—

—

Inverter generates abnormal noise

Check

5.5.4

Check the motor wiring.

Refer
Possible Cause

Countermeasures

to
page

Motor fan is not working

Clean the motor fan.

(Dust is accumulated.)

Improve the environment.

Phase to phase insulation of the motor is insufficient.

Check the insulation of the motor.

The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are unbalanced.

Check the output voltage of the inverter.
Check the insulation of the motor.

—
—
357

The Pr. 71 Applied motor setting is wrong.

Check the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting.

111

Motor current is large.

Refer to "5.5.11 Motor current is too large"

352

349

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Motor

5

Check first when you have a trouble
5.5.5

Motor rotates in the opposite direction
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Main
Circuit
Input

Phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is

Connect phase sequence of the output cables (terminal

incorrect.

U, V, W) to the motor correctly

The start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are

Check the wiring. (STF: forward rotation , STR: reverse

connected improperly.

rotation)

16
27

The polarity of the frequency command is negative

signal

during the polarity reversible operation set by Pr. 73

Check the polarity of the frequency command.

171

Analog input selection.

5.5.6

Speed greatly differs from the setting
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

to
page

Frequency setting signal is incorrectly input.

Input

The input signal lines are affected by external EMI.

signal
Parameter
Setting

Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings
are improper.
Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are improper.

Load
Parameter

Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.

Setting

Measure the input signal level.
Take countermeasures against EMI such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 2
Minimum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.

—
48
87

Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings.

177

Narrow down the range of frequency jump.

88

Reduce the load weight.

—

Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in

81

frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC ).)

Motor

5.5.7

Countermeasures

Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.

—

Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Parameter
Setting

Countermeasures

to
page

Acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

Increase acceleration/deceleration time.

Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F

Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by

control, so the stall prevention function is activated.

0.5% increments to the setting.

The base frequency does not match the motor

Set Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 47 Second V/F (base

characteristics.

frequency).

101
78
89

If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration
Regeneration avoidance operation is performed

avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886

298

Regeneration avoidance voltage gain.

Load
Parameter
Setting
Motor

350

Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.

—

Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in

81

frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC ).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.

—

Check first when you have a trouble
5.5.8

Speed varies during operation
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Load

Load varies during an operation. (V/F Control)

Select Simple magnetic flux vector control

79

Frequency setting signal is varying.

Check the frequency setting signal.

—

Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input
The frequency setting signal is affected by EMI.

Input

filter time constant.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.

signal
Malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable current
generated when the transistor output unit is connected.
Multi-speed command signal is chattering.
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large.

176
48

Use terminal PC (terminal SD when source logic) as a
common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by

31

undesirable current.
Take countermeasures to suppress chattering.
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about
3%) under V/F control.

—
89

Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting is improper for the
capacities of the inverter and the motor for Simple

Check the Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting.

79

magnetic flux vector control.
Wiring length is too long for V/F control, and a voltage
drop occurs.

Adjust Pr. 0 Torque boost by increasing with 0.5%
increments for low-speed operation.
Change to Simple magnetic flux vector control.

Parameter

78
79

Disable automatic control functions, such as energy

Setting

saving operation, fast-response current limit function,
regeneration avoidance function, Simple magnetic flux
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for example,
when structural rigidity at load side is insufficient.

vector control and stall prevention.
For PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID

—

proportional band and Pr.130 PID integral time.
Adjust so that the control gain decreases and the level of
safety increases.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.

Operation mode is not changed properly
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points
Input
signal

Countermeasures

to
page

Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
Start signal (STF or STR) is ON.

When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be

195

changed.
When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial
value), the inverter is placed in the External operation
mode at input power ON. To switch to the PU operation

Parameter

Pr. 79 setting is improper.

mode, press

on the operation panel (press

195

when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used) .

Setting

At other settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

5.5.9

169

limited accordingly.
Operation mode and a writing device do not

Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select

195,

correspond.

an operation mode suitable for the purpose.

204

351

5

Check first when you have a trouble
5.5.10 Operation panel (FR-DU07) display is not operating
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Main
Circuit,
Control
Circuit

Power is not input.

Input the power.

14

Check if the inverter front cover is installed securely.

Front

Operation panel is not properly connected to the

cover

inverter.

The inverter cover may not fit properly when using wires
whose size are 1.25mm2 or larger, or when using many

6

wires, and this could cause a contact fault of the
operation panel.

5.5.11

Motor current is too large
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F

Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by

control, so the stall prevention function is activated.

0.5% increments to the setting.

78

Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
V/F pattern is improper.

Parameter

(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)

Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
characteristic. (V/F control)

Setting

Reduce the load weight.
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.

91
—

Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in

81

frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC ).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.

352

89

(e.g. rated motor voltage).

—

Check first when you have a trouble
5.5.12 Speed does not accelerate
Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Countermeasures

to
page

Start command and frequency command are chattering.

Input

The wiring length used for analog frequency command

signal

is too long, and it is causing a voltage (current) drop.
Input signal lines are affected by external EMI.

Check if the start command and the frequency
command are correct.
Perform analog input bias/gain calibration.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
shielded wires for input signal lines.

—
177
48

Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings

Minimum frequency. If you want to run the motor at 120Hz

are improper.

or higher, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings.

87
177

Check the Pr.125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
The maximum voltage (current) input value is not set
during the external operation. (Pr.125, Pr.126, Pr.18)

frequency and Pr.126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency settings.

87, 177

To operate at 120Hz or higher, set Pr.18 High speed
maximum frequency.

Parameter

Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F

Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by

control, so the stall prevention function is activated.

0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur.

78

Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.

Setting
V/F pattern is improper.
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)

Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
characteristic. (V/F control)
Reduce the load weight.

Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.

89

(e.g. rated motor voltage).
91
—

Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in

81

frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC ).)
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor.

During PID control, output frequency is automatically controlled to make measured value = set point.

—
261

Refer

Check

Possible Cause

points

Operation is being performed (signal STF or STR is

signal

ON).

Stop the operation.
When Pr. 77 = "0" (initial value), write is enabled only

189

during a stop.

You are attempting to set the parameter in the External
operation mode.

Setting

to
page

Input

Parameter

Countermeasures

Choose the PU operation mode.
Or, set Pr. 77 = "2" to enable parameter write regardless

189

of the operation mode.

Parameter is disabled by the Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection setting.

Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting.

189

Key lock is activated by the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key

Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection

lock operation selection setting.

setting.

Operation mode and a writing device do not

Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 550, Pr. 551, and select

195,

correspond.

an operation mode suitable for the purpose.

204

315

5.5.14 Power lamp is not lit
Check
points
Main
Circuit,
Control
Circuit

Refer
Possible Cause

Countermeasures

to
page

Check for the wiring and the installation.
Wiring or installation is improper.

Power lamp is lit when power supply is input to the

16

control circuit (R1/L11, S1/L21).

353

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

5.5.13 Unable to write parameter setting

5

MEMO

354

6

PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

This chapter describes the "PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE
AND INSPECTION" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

6.1
6.2

Inspection item ....................................................... 356
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and
powers .................................................................... 363

1

2

3

4

5

6

7
355

Inspection item
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent
any fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust,
dirt and vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.

• Precautions for maintenance and inspection
For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When
accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and
then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/− of the inverter is not more than 30VDC
using a tester, etc.

6.1 Inspection item
6.1.1

Daily inspection

Basically, check for the following faults during operation.
(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Unusual vibration and noise
(5) Unusual overheat and discoloration

6.1.2

Periodic inspection

Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
Consult us for periodic inspection.
1) Check for cooling system fault .............. Clean the air filter, etc.
2) Tightening check and retightening ........ The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature
changes, etc.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque. (Refer to page 21.)
3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
4) Measure insulation resistance.
5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.

356

Inspection item

General Overall unit

Check the surrounding air temperature, humidity,
dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist , etc

Improve environment

Check for unusual vibration and noise

Check alarm location and
retighten

Check that the main circuit voltages and control
voltages are normal *1
(1)Check with megger (across main circuit
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts.
General
(3)Check for overheat traces on the parts.
(4)Check for stain
(1)Check conductors for distortion.
Conductors, cables (2)Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)
Check for unusual odor and abnormal increase in
Transformer/reactor
whining sound.
Power supply
voltage

Main
circuit

Terminal block

Check for damage.

Smoothing
aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor

(1)Check for liquid leakage.
(2)Check for safety valve projection and bulge.
(3)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
main circuit capacitor (Refer to page 358)
Check that the operation is normal and no chatter
is heard.
(1)Check that the output voltages across phases
with the inverter operated alone is balanced
(2)Check that no fault is found in protective and
display circuits in a sequence protective
operation test.

Relay/contactor

Control
circuit
protective
circuit

Parts check

Operation check

Overall
Aluminum
electrolytic
capacitor

Corrective Action at
Alarm Occurrence

(1)Check for unusual odor and discoloration.
(2)Check for serious rust development
(1)Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor and
deformation trace
(2)Visual check and judge by the life check of the
control circuit capacitor. (Refer to page 358.)
(1)Check for unusual vibration and noise.

Inspect the power supply
Contact the manufacturer
Retighten
Contact the manufacturer
Clean
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer

Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer
Stop the device and contact
the manufacturer.
Contact the manufacturer
Contact the manufacturer

Replace the fan
Fix with the fan cover fixing
Cooling fan
(2)Check for loose screws and bolts
screws
(3)Check
for
stain
Clean
Cooling
system
(1)Check for clogging
Clean
Heatsink
(2)Check for stain
Clean
(1)Check for clogging
Clean or replace
Air filter, etc.
(2)Check for stain
Clean or replace
(1)Check that display is normal.
Contact the manufacturer
Indication
(2)Check for stain
Clean
Display
Stop the device and contact
Meter
Check that reading is normal
the manufacturer.
Stop the device and contact
Check for vibration and abnormal increase in
Load
Operation check
motor
the manufacturer.
operation noise
*1 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
*2 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
Consult us for periodic inspection.

357

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Surrounding
environment

Inspection Item

*2

Inspection Item

Periodic

Interval

Customer's
Check

Daily and periodic inspection

Daily

Area of
Inspection

6.1.3

6

Inspection item
6.1.4

Display of the life of the inverter parts

The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan, each parts of the
inrush current limit circuit is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time .
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts

Judgement level

Main circuit capacitor
Control circuit capacitor
Inrush current limit circuit
Cooling fan

85% of the initial capacity
Estimated 10% life remaining
Estimated 10% life remaining (Power ON: 100,000 times left)
Less than 50% of the predetermined speed

Refer to page 301 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.

6.1.5

Checking the inverter and converter modules


(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a tester. (Use 100Ω range.)


Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+ and N/−, and check
for electric continuity.
CAUTION
1.
2.

Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
At the time of electric discontinuity, due to the smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate ∞. At the time of electric
continuity, the measured value is several to several ten-of ohms depending on the module type, circuit tester type, etc. If all
measured values are almost the same, the modules are without fault.


Tester Polarity

Converter
module

D1
D2
D3

Inverter
module

TR1
TR3
TR5

Tester Polarity

Measured
Value

R/L1

P/+

Discontinuity

P/+

R/L1

S/L2

P/+

Discontinuity

P/+

S/L2

Continuity

T/L3

P/+

Discontinuity

P/+

T/L3

Continuity

U

P/+

Discontinuity

P/+

U

V

P/+

P/+

V

W

P/+

Discontinuity

P/+

W

Continuity

Continuity

Continuity
Discontinuity
Continuity

D4
D5
D6
TR4
TR6
TR2

Measured
Value

R/L1

N/−

Continuity

N/−

R/L1

Discontinuity

S/L2

N/−

Continuity

N/−

S/L2

Discontinuity

T/L3

N/−

Continuity

N/−

T/L3

Discontinuity

U

N/−

Continuity

N/−

U

V

N/−

N/−

V

W

N/−

N/−

W

Discontinuity

Converter module

P/+

TR1
D1

D2

TR3

TR5

D3

R/L1

U

C

S/L2

V

T/L3

W

D4

D5

D6

Continuity
Discontinuity

Inverter module

TR4

TR6

TR2

N/−

Continuity
Discontinuity

(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)

6.1.6

Cleaning

Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
CAUTION
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as they will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel (FR-DU07) and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and
alcohol. Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.

358

Inspection item
6.1.7

Replacement of parts

The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.
The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.

*1
*2

Part Name

Standard Replacement Interval *1

Description

Cooling fan
Main circuit smoothing capacitor
On-board smoothing capacitor

10 years
10 years *2
10 years

Replace (as required)
Replace (as required)
Replace the board (as required)

Relays

−

as required

Fuse (FR-F740-04320 or more)

10 years

Replace the fuse (as required)

Replacement years for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40°C (104°F)
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc)
Output current : 80% of the inverter rated current

CAUTION
For parts replacement, consult the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.

(1) Cooling fan
The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit
semiconductor is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed
during inspection, the cooling fan must be replaced immediately.

FR-F720-00105 to 00250
FR-F740-00083, 00126

FR-F720-00340 to 01250
FR-F740-00170 to 00620

FR-F720-01540 or more
FR-F740-00770 to 03610

2) Disconnect the fan connectors.
3) Remove the fan.

Fan cover

Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan connection
connector
Fan

FR-F720-00105 to 00250
FR-F740-00083, 00126

Fan *
Fan connection
connector

FR-F720-00340 to 01250
FR-F740-00170 to 00620

Fan *

Fan connection
connector

FR-F720-01540 or more
FR-F740-00770 to 03610

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

• Removal (FR-F720-00105 to 04750, FR-F740-00083 to 03610)
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan cover.

6

* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.

359

Inspection item
• Reinstallation (FR-F720-00105 to 04750, FR-F740-00083 to 03610)
1)After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces up.

AIR FLOW



2)Reconnect the fan connectors.

FR-F720-00340 to 00630
FR-F740-00170 to 00380

FR-F720-00105 to 00250
FR-F740-00083, 00126

FR-F720-01250

FR-F720-00770, 00930
FR-F740-00470, 00620

FR-F720-01540 to 04750
FR-F740-00770 to 03610
3) Reinstall the fan cover.
2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click 1. Insert hooks into
sound.
holes.

FR-F720-00105 to 00250
FR-F740-00083, 00126

1. Insert hooks into
2. Insert hooks until
holes.
you hear a click
sound.

FR-F720-00340 to 01250
FR-F740-00170 to 00620

1. Insert hooks into
holes.

2. Insert hooks until
you hear a click
sound.

FR-F720-01540 to 04750
FR-F740-00770 to 03610

CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
• Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after power
OFF, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.

360

Inspection item
• Removal (FR-F740-04320 or more)
1) Remove a fan cover.
2) After removing a fan connector, remove a fan block.
3) Remove a fan.

Fan *

3)

Fan connection
connector

2)

1)

• Reinstallation (FR-F740-04320 or more)
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW" faces
up.

AIR FLOW



2) Install fans referring to the above figure.
CAUTION
• Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
• When installing the fan, use care to prevent wires from being caught between the inverter and fan.
• Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after
power OFF, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock accident.

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

* The number of cooling fans differs according to the inverter capacity.

6

361

Inspection item
(2) Replacement procedure of the cooling fan when using a heatsink protrusion attachment
(FR-A7CN)
When replacing a cooling fan, remove a top cover of the
heatsink protrusion attachment and perform replacement.
After replacing the cooling fan, replace the top cover in the
original position.
Top cover

(3) Smoothing capacitors
A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated
by the adverse effects of ripple currents, etc.
The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and operating conditions. When the
inverter is operated in air-conditioned, normal environment conditions, replace the capacitors about every 10 years.
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, fluid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.

Refer to page 359 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
(4) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times
(switching life).

6.1.8

Inverter replacement

The inverter can be replaced with the control circuit wiring kept connected. Before replacement, remove the wiring
cover of the inverter.
1) Loosen the two installation screws in both ends of the control circuit terminal block. (These screws cannot be removed.)
Pull down the terminal block from behind the control circuit terminals.

2) Using care not to bend the pins of the inverter's control circuit connector, reinstall the control circuit terminal block
and fix it with the mounting screws.

CAUTION
Before starting inverter replacement, switch power OFF, wait for at least 10 minutes, and then check the voltage with a tester
and such to ensure safety.

362

Measurement of main circuit voltages,
currents and powers

6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
6.2.1

Measurement of voltages and currents

Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, measurement
data depends on the instruments used and circuits measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits with the
instruments given on the next page.
When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400V class, small-capacity models, the meters
and CTs may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has
enough allowance for the current rating.
When measuring and indicating the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to utilize
the AM and CA terminal output function of the inverter.

Output voltage

Input voltage

Input current

Output current

W11

Ar
Three
phase
power
supply

R/L1 U

W12

As

W21
Vu

Vr
S/L2 V

Av

To the motor
Vv

Vs
W13

At

T/L3 W

Vt

Aw

W22
Vw

N/-

P/+

+

: Moving-iron type
: Electrodynamometer type

V
Instrument
types

Au

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Inverter

-

: Moving-coil type
: Rectifier type

Examples of Measuring Points and Instruments

6

363

Measurement of main circuit voltages,
currents and powers
Measuring Points and Instruments
Item

Measuring
Point

Measuring Instrument

Remarks (Reference Measured Value)

Across R/L1and
Commercial power supply
Power supply voltage S/L2, S/L2 and T/
Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation
Moving-iron type AC voltmeter *4
L3, T/L3 and R/
V1
Refer to page 370.
L1
Power supply side
R/L1, S/L2, and
current
Moving-iron type AC ammeter *4
T/L3 line currents
I1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and
Digital power meter (designed for
Power supply side
R/L1 and S/L2, S/L2
inverter) or electrodynamic type
P1=W11+W12+W13 (3-wattmeter method)
power
and T/L3, T/L3 and
single-phase wattmeter
P1
R/L1
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power supply side current and power supply side power.
Power supply side
power factor
P1
Pf1 = ————— × 100%
Pf1
3 V1 × I1

Output side current
I2

Across U and V,
V and W and W
and U
U, V and W line
currents

Output side power
P2

U, V, W and U
and V, V and W

Output side voltage
V2

Output side power
factor
Pf2
Converter output
Frequency setting
signal

Frequency setting
power supply

Frequency meter
signal

Start signal
Select signal
Reset
Output stop

Fault signal

*1
*2
*3
*4

Rectifier type AC voltage meter *1 *4 Difference between the phases is within ±1% of
(Moving-iron type cannot measure) the maximum output voltage.
Moving-iron type AC ammeter *2 *4

Difference between the phases is 10% or lower
of the rated inverter current.

Digital power meter (designed for
inverter) or electrodynamic type

P2 = W21 + W22
2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)
single-phase wattmeter
Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.

P2
Pf2 = ————— × 100%
3 V2 × I2
Across P/+ and
Moving-coil type (such as tester)
N/−
Across 2, 4 (positive)
and 5
Across 1 (positive)
and 5
Across 10 (positive)
and 5
Across 10E (positive)
and 5
Across CA (positive)
Moving-coil type
and 5
(Tester and such may be used)
Across AM (positive) (Internal resistance: 50kΩ or larger)
and 5
Across STF, STR,
RH, RM, RL, JOG,
RT, AU, STOP, CS
and SD (positive)
Across RES and SD
(positive)
Across MRS and SD
(positive)
Across A1 and
C1
Moving-coil type
Across B1 and
(such as tester)
C1

Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 × V1
0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mA
0 to ±5VDC, 0 to ±10VDC
5.2VDC

"5" is
common

10VDC
About 20mA at maximum frequency
Approximately 10DVC at maximum
frequency (without frequency meter)

When open
20 to 30VDC
ON voltage: 1V or less

Electric continuity check*3

Across A1 and C1 Discontinuity
Across B1 and C1 Continuity

"SD" is
common


Continuity
Discontinuity

Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. A tester or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately.
When the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy-current losses produced in metal parts
inside the instrument, leading to burnout. If the wiring length between the inverter and motor is long, the instrument and CT may generate
heat due to line-to-line leakage current.
When the setting of Pr. 195 ABC1 terminal function selection is positive logic
A digital power meter (designed for inverter) can also be used to measure.

364

Measurement of main circuit voltages,
currents and powers
6.2.2

Measurement of powers

Use digital power meters (for inverter) for the both of inverter input and output side. Alternatively, measure using
electrodynamic type single-phase wattmeters for the both of inverter input and output side in two-wattmeter or threewattmeter method. As the current is liable to be imbalanced especially in the input side, it is recommended to use the
three-wattmeter method.
Examples of measured value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below.
An error will be produced by difference between measuring instruments, e.g. power calculation type and two- or threewattmeter type three-phase wattmeter. When a CT is used in the current measuring side or when the meter contains a
PT on the voltage measurement side, an error will also be produced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and
PT.
[Measurement conditions]
Constant-torque (100%) load, constant-power at 60Hz
or more.
3.7kW(5HP), 4-pole motor, value indicated in 3wattmeter method is 100%.

%
120

%
120

100

100

3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load)
Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type)

80

60

0

20

40

60

80 100 120Hz

Example of measuring inverter input power

6.2.3

3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load)
Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type)

80

60

0

20

40

60

80 100 120Hz

Example of measuring inverter output power

Measurement of voltages and use of PT

(1) Inverter input side
As the input side voltage has a sine wave and it is extremely small in distortion, accurate measurement can be made
with an ordinary AC meter.

(2) Inverter output side
Since the output side voltage has a PWM-controlled rectangular wave, always use a rectifier type voltmeter. A needle
type tester cannot be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual
value. A moving-iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger
than that of the fundamental wave. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter controlled voltage itself.
Hence, that value is accurate and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation
panel.

(3) PT
No PT can be used in the output side of the inverter. Use a direct-reading meter. (A PT can be used in the input side of
the inverter.)

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

[Measurement conditions]
Constant-torque (100%) load, constant-power at 60Hz
or more.
3.7kW(5HP), 4-pole motor, value indicated in 3wattmeter method is 100%.

6

365

Measurement of main circuit voltages,
currents and powers
6.2.4

Measurement of currents

Use moving-iron type meters on both the input and output sides of the inverter. However, if the carrier frequency
exceeds 5kHz, do not use that meter since an overcurrent losses produced in the internal metal parts of the meter will
increase and the meter may burn out. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
As the inverter input side current is easily imbalanced, measurement of currents in all three phases is recommended.
Correct values cannot be measured in one or two phases. On the other hand, the phase imbalanced ratio of the output
side current must be within 10%.
When a clamp ammeter is used, always use an effective value detection type. A mean value detection type produces a
large error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value. The value monitored on the operation
panel is accurate if the output frequency varies, and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using
the operation panel.
An example of the measured value difference produced by different measuring meters is shown below.
[Measurement conditions]
Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.
%
120
100

Moving-iron
type

[Measurement conditions]
Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.
%
120

Clip AC
power meter

Clip AC
power meter
Moving-iron type

100
80

80

Clamp-on wattmeter
current measurement
60

20

40

0

60Hz

Example of measuring Inverter Input Current

6.2.5

60

Clamp meter Clamp-on wattmeter
current measurement

0

Clamp meter

20

40

60Hz

Example of measuring Inverter Output Current

Use of CT and transducer

A CT may be used in both the input and output sides of the inverter, but the one used should have the largest possible
VA ability because an error will increase if the frequency gets lower.
When using a transducer, use the effective value calculation type which is immune to harmonics.

6.2.6

Measurement of inverter input power factor

Use the effective power and apparent power to calculate the inverter input power factor. A power-factor meter cannot
indicate an exact value.
Total power factor of the inverter

=
=

366

Effective power
Apparent power
Three-phase input power found by 3-wattmeter method
3 × V (power supply voltage) × I (input current effective value)

Measurement of main circuit voltages,
currents and powers
6.2.7

Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ and N/-)

The output voltage of the converter is developed across terminals P/+ and N/- and can be measured with a movingcoil type meter (tester). Although the voltage varies according to the power supply voltage, approximately 270V to 300V
(approximately 540V to 600V for the 400V class) is output when no load is connected and voltage decreases when a
load is connected.
When regenerative energy is returned from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage
rises to nearly 400V to 450V (800V to 900V for the 400V class) maximum.

6.2.8

Insulation resistance test using megger

For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the
test on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)
CAUTION
• Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of the
inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
• For the electric continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or
buzzer.

Power
supply

R/L1 Inverter U
S/L2
V
T/L3
W

Motor
IM

500VDC
megger

6.2.9

PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Ground

Pressure test

Do not conduct a pressure test. Deterioration may occur.

6

367

MEMO

368

7 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter provides the "SPECIFICATIONS" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4

Rating ..................................................................... 370
Common specifications .......................................... 372
Outline dimension drawings ................................... 374
Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure............. 384

1

2

3

4

5

6

7
369

Rating

7.1 Rating
•200V class
SLD is initially set.
Type FR-F720-†††††-NA 00046 00077 00105 00167 00250 00340 00490 00630 00770 00930 01250 01540 01870 02330 03160 03800 04750

Applied motor
capacity (kW(HP))*1

Power supply

Output

Rated capacity
(kVA)*2
Rated current
(A)*3

LD 0.75
SLD (1)
LD
1.6
SLD
4.2
LD

Power
supply
system
capacity
(kVA)*6

*6
*7
*8

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

75

90

110

(7.5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(40)

(50)

(60)

(75)

(100)

(125)

(150)

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

27

32

43

53

65

81

110

132

165

11.8 17.1 22.1

9.6

15.2

23

31

45

58

70

85

114

140

170

212

288

346

432

(8.2)

(12.9)

(20)

(26)

(38)

(49)

(60)

(72)

(97)

(119)

(145)

(180)

(244)

(294)

(367)

4.6

7.7

10.5 16.7

25

34

49

63

77

93

125

154

187

233

316

380

475

(3.9)

(6.5)

(8.9)

(21)

(29)

(42)

(54)

(65)

(79)

(106)

(131)

(159)

(198)

(268)

(323)

(403)

-

-

-

(14.2)

120% 60s, 150% 3s, 50°C (122°F) (inverse time characteristics)
110% 60s, 120% 3s, 40°C (104°F) (inverse time characteristics)
Three-phase 200 to 240V
Three-phase 200 to 220V 50Hz, 200 to 240V 60Hz
170 to 242V 50Hz, 170 to 264V 60Hz
±5%

Without DC
reactor

2.1

4.0

4.8

8.0

11.5

16

20

27

32

41

52

65

79

99

With DC
reactor

1.2

2.6

3.3

5.0

8.1

10

16

19

24

31

41

50

61

74

Approx. mass (kg (lbs))

*5

5.5

(5)

Overload current LD
rating*4
SLD
Rated voltage*5
Rated input AC
voltage/frequency
Permissible AC
voltage fluctuation
Permissible frequency
fluctuation

Cooling system

*4

3.7

(3)

7

Protective structure
(JEM 1030)*8

*1
*2
*3

2.2

(2)

(6.0)

(3.6)

SLD

1.5

Enclosed type (IP20 UL Type 1 Plenum Rated )*7

110 132 165

Open type (IP00)

Selfcooling
1.9 2.3

3.6

3.6

3.6

6.6

6.6

7.9

13

13

14

23

35

35

67

70

70

(4.1)

(7.9)

(7.9)

(7.9)

(14.5)

(14.5)

(17.4)

(28.6)

(28.6)

(30.8)

(50.6)

(77)

(77)

(147.4)

(154)

(154)

(5.0)

Forced air cooling

The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 220V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter
output current exceeds the value in parenthesis of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated
duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting
range. However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and
cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, the inverter changes to an open type (the structure is
no longer NEMA1).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)

370

Rating
•400V class
SLD is initially set.
Type FR-F740-†††††-NA
SLD
LD

Rated capacity
(kVA)*2
Output

LD

SLD
LD

Rated current (A)*3
SLD
Overload current
rating*4

00023 00038 00052 00083 00126 00170 00250 00310 00380 00470 00620 00770 00930 01160
0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

18.5

22

30

37

45

55

(1)

(2)

(3)

(5)

(7.5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(40)

(50)

(60)

(75)

1.6

2.7

3.7

5.8

8.8

12.2

17.5

22.1

26.7

32.8

43.4

53.3

2.1

(1.8)

(3.0)

(4.1)

(6.5)

7.6

11.5
(9.8)

(13.6)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(37)

(48)

(60)

(72)

2.3

3.8

5.2

8.3

12.6

17

25

31

38

47

62

77

93

(2.0)

3.5

(3.2)

SLD

Power supply

Rated input AC voltage/frequency
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

(7.1)

(10.7)

(14.5)

(40)

(53)

70

(65)

85

106
(90)

116

(79)

(99)

4.8

8.0

11.5

16

20

27

32

41

52

65

79

99

With DC reactor

1.2

2.6

3.3

5.0

8.1

10

16

19

24

31

41

50

61

74

Rated capacity (kVA)*2

Enclosed type (IP20 UL Type 1 Plenum Rated)*7
Self-cooling
3.6
3.6
3.6

(7.9)

LD

(7.9)

(7.9)

3.6

(7.9)

3.6

(7.9)

6.6

(14.5)

(14.5)

Forced air cooling
7.6
7.6
13
(16.7)

(16.7)

(28.7)

13

(28.7)

23

(50.7)

35

(77.2)

35

(77.2)

01800 02160 02600 03250 03610 04320 04810 05470 06100 06830 07700 08660 09620 10940 12120
75

90

110

132

160

185

220

250

280

315

355

400

450

500

560

(100)

(150)

(150)

(200)

(250)

(300)

(350)

(400)

(450)

(500)

(550)

(600)

(700)

(750)

(800)

90

110

132

160

185

220

250

280

315

355

400

450

500

560

630

(150)

(200)

(250)

(300)

(350)

(400)

(450)

(500)

(550)

(600)

(700)

(750)

(800)

(850)

LD

110
137
144

137
165
180

165
198
216

198
247
260

247
275
325

275
329
361

329
366
432

366
416
481

416
464
547

464
520
610

520
586
683

586
659
770

659
733
866

733
833
962

833
923
1094

SLD

180

216

260

325

361

432

481

547

610

683

770

866

962

1094 1212

LD
SLD

(122)
(153)

(153)

(221)

(817)

(817)

(929)

165

198

464

(736)

(736)

137

416

(654)

(654)

833

366

(580)

(580)

733

329

(518)

(518)

137

275

(464)

(464)

110

247

(408)

(408)

(1030)

Permissible frequency fluctuation

(367)

(367)

(929)

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

(306)

(306)

120% 60s, 150% 3s, 50°C (122°F) (inverse-time characteristics)
110% 60s, 120% 3s, 40°C (104°F) (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz
±5%
165 198 247 275 329 366 416 464 520 586 659

Rated input AC voltage/frequency

(276)

(276)

(221)

SLD

Power supply Without DC reactor
system
LD
With DC
capacity
reactor
SLD
(kVA)*6
Protective structure
(JEM 1030(NEMA250-1997))*8

(184)

(184)

LD

Voltage*5

520

586

659

733

833

923

Forced air cooling
110 175 175 175

260

260

370

370

370

(572)

(572)

(814)

(814)

(814)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Approx. mass (kg (lbs))

6.6

Open type (IP00)

(150)

SLD

Rated current (A)*3

Overload current rating*4

*8

(32)

57

4.0

Applied motor capacity
(kW(HP))*1

*6
*7

(26)

43

2.1

Type FR-F740-†††††-NA

*5

(21)

35

Without DC reactor

Approx. mass (kg (lbs))

*4

29

±5%

Cooling system

*1
*2
*3

23

Permissible frequency
fluctuation

Power supply
system capacity
(kVA)*6
Protective structure
(JEM 1030)*8

Output

(4.4)

16

120% 60s, 150% 3s, 50°C (122°F) (inverse-time characteristics)
110% 60s, 120% 3s, 40°C (104°F) (inverse-time characteristics)
Three-phase 380 to 480V
Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
323 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz

LD

Rated voltage*5

Power supply

4.8

64.8 80.8

37

50

(81.6)

(110.2)

57

72

72

(125.4) (158.4) (158.4)

110
(242)

(242)

(385)

(385)

(385)

The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 440V.
When operating the inverter with the carrier frequency set to 3kHz or more, the carrier frequency automatically decreases if the inverter
output current exceeds the value in parenthesis of the rated current. This may cause the motor noise to increase.
The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated
duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting
range. However, the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
When the hook of the inverter front cover is cut off for installation of the plug-in option, protective structure of the inverter changes to an open
type (the structure is no longer NEMA1).
FR-DU07: IP40 (except for the PU connector)

SPECIFICATIONS

Applied motor capacity
(kW(HP))*1

7
371

Common specifications

7.2 Common specifications
High carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control)/Optimum excitation control/Simple magnetic
flux vector control
Output frequency range
0.5 to 400Hz
0.015Hz/60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V/12bit)
Frequency
Analog input
0.03Hz/60Hz (terminal 2, 4: 0 to 5V/11bit, 0 to 20mA/11bit, terminal 1: 0 to ±10V/12bit)
setting
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal 1: 0 to ±5V/11bit)
resolution
Digital input
0.01Hz
Analog input
Within ±0.2% of the max. output frequency (25°C ± 10°C (77°F ± 50°F))
Frequency
accuracy
Digital input
Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Speed control range
1:10 under V/F control, 1:15 under Simple magnetic flux vector control
Voltage/frequency
0 to 400Hz of the base frequency can be set from constant-torque/adjustable 5 points V/F can
be selected.
characteristics
Starting torque
120% (at 3Hz) when Simple magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation are set
Acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern
acceleration/deceleration modes are available.
setting
Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) can
DC injection brake
be changed
Operation current level can be set (0 to 150% variable), whether to use the function or not can
Stall prevention operation level
be set.
Terminal 2, 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA are available.
Analog input
Terminal 1: -10 to +10V, -5 to 5V are available.
Frequency
setting signal
Four-digit BCD or16-bit binary using the setting dial of the operation panel or parameter unit
Digital input
(when used with the option FR-A7AX)
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be
Start signal
selected.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.189 (input terminal function selection): multi
speed selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection,
selection of automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, external thermal relay input,
HC connection (inverter operation enable signal), HC connection (instantaneous power failure
detection), PU operation/external interlock signal, External DC injection brake operation start,
Input signals (twelve terminals) PID control enable terminal, PU operation, external operation switchover, output stop, start
self-holding selection, forward rotation command, reverse rotation command, inverter reset,
PTC thermistor input, PID forward reverse operation switchover, PU-NET operation
switchover, External-NET operation switchover, command source switchover, DC feeding
operation permission, DC feeding cancel, and PID integral value reset, Pre-charge end
command, Second pre-charge end command, Fault clear signal, Sequence start
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay
input selection, polarity reversible operation, automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure operation, original operation continuation at an instantaneous power failure, electronic
Operational functions
bypass operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, external DC
injection braking start, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485).
Output signal
The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (output terminal function selection):
inverter running, up-to-speed, instantaneous power failure /undervoltage, overload warning,
Open collector output (five
output frequency detection, second output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm*4,
terminals)
electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU operation mode, inverter operation ready,
Relay output (two terminals)
output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward
rotation reverse rotation output, bypass operation-inverter switchover MC1 to MC3,
commercial power supply side motor 1 to 4 connection, inverter side motor 1 to 4 connection,
fan alarm output, heatsink overheat pre-alarm, inverter running start command on,
deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, PID deviation limit,
during retry, During power failure, During PID output suspension, During pre-charge operation,
Operating status
During second pre-charge operation, Pre-charge time over, Second pre-charge time over, Precharge level over, Second pre-charge level over, pulse train output of output power, DC current
feeding, life alarm, fault output 3 (power-off signal), power savings average value update
timing, current average monitor, fault output 2, maintenance timer alarm, remote output, alarm
output, and fault output.
When used with In addition to above, the following signal can be assigned to Pr.313 to Pr. 319 (extension output
the FR-A7AY,
terminal function selection): control circuit capacitor life, main circuit capacitor life, cooling fan life
and inrush current limit circuit fault. (Only positive logic can be set for extension terminals of
FR-A7AR
the FR-A7AR.)
(option)

Operation specifications

Control specifications

Control method

For meter
Analog output
(Max. 10VDC: one
terminal)
(Max. 20mADC: one
terminal)

372

The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 CA terminal function selection and Pr. 158 AM
terminal function selection: output frequency, motor current (steady or peak value), output
voltage, frequency setting value, running speed, converter output voltage (steady or peak
value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power, output power, load meter,
reference voltage output, motor load factor, power saving effect, regenerative brake duty*4, PID
set value, and PID measured value.

Operation
panel (FRDU07)
Parameter
unit (FRPU07)

Operating
status

Fault definition
Interactive
guidance

Protective/
warning function

Protective
function

Environment

Warning
function
Surrounding LD
air
SLD
temperature (initial setting)
Ambient humidity
Storage temperature*3
Atmosphere
Altitude, vibration

The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, motor current (steady or
peak value), output voltage, alarm indication, frequency setting, running speed, converter
output voltage (steady or peak value), electronic thermal relay function load factor, input power,
output power, load meter, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor load
factor, cumulative power, power saving effect, cumulative saving power, regenerative brake
duty*4,PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation value, inverter I/O terminal monitor,
input terminal option monitor*1, output terminal option monitor*1, option fitting status monitor*2,
terminal assignment status*2
Fault definition is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault definitions (output voltage/current/
frequency/cumulative energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.
Function (help) for operation guide *2
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during
deceleration, overvoltage during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage
during deceleration, inverter protection thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation,
heatsink overheat, instantaneous power failure occurrence, undervoltage, input phase loss *6,
motor overload, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, output phase loss, external thermal
relay operation *6, PTC thermistor operation *6, option fault, parameter error, PU disconnection,
retry count excess *6, CPU fault, operation panel power supply short circuit, 24VDC power output
short circuit, output current detection value excess *6, inrush current limit circuit fault,
communication fault (inverter), analog input fault, PID signal fault *6, internal circuit fault (15V
power supply), brake transistor alarm detection *4, Pre-charge fault *6, 4mA input fault *6
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, regenerative brake
prealarm *6, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm *1*6,
parameter write error, copy operation error, operation panel lock, parameter copy, password
locked
-10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) (non-freezing)
-10°C to +40°C (14°F to 104°F) (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
-20°C to +65°C (-4°F to +149°F)
Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Maximum 1000m (3280.80 feet) above sea level for standard operation. After that derate by 3%
for every extra 500m (1640.40 feet) up to 2500m (8202.10 feet) (91%).
5.9m/s2 or less *5 at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)

*1
*2
*3
*4

Can be displayed only on the operation panel (FR-DU07).
This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
Temperature applicable for a short period in transit, etc.
Only the FR-F720-03160 (FR-F740-01800) or more functions.

*5
*6

2.9m/s2 or less for the FR-F740-04320 or more.
This protective function does not function in the initial status.

SPECIFICATIONS

Indication

Common specifications

7
373

Outline dimension drawings

7.3 Outline dimension drawings

7.5
(0.3)

• FR-F720-00046 and 00077-NA

6 (0.24)
95 (3.74)
110 (4.33)

7.5 (0.3)

245 (9.65)
260 (10.24)

2-φ6 hole

5 (0.2)
D

Inverter Model
FR-F720-00046-NA

D1

FR-F720-00077-NA

D

D1

110
(4.33)
125
(4.92)

21
(0.83)
36
(1.42)

(Unit: mm (inches))

7.5
(0.3)

• FR-F720-00105, 00167, 00250-NA
• FR-F740-00023, 00038, 00052, 00083, 00126-NA

* The FR-F740-00023 to
00052-NA are not
provided with cooling
fans.

125 (4.92)
150 (5.91)

140 (5.51)

5 (0.2)

45.5 (1.79)

6 (0.24)

7.5 (0.3)

245 (9.65)
260 (10.24)

2-φ6 hole

144 (5.67)

(Unit: mm (inches))

374

Outline dimension drawings

7.5
(0.3)

• FR-F720-00340, 00490, 00630-NA
• FR-F740-00170, 00250, 00310, 00380-NA

6 (0.24)

195 (7.68)
220 (8.66)

H

8 (0.31)

H1

2-φ6 hole

10 (0.39)

D

D1

Inverter Model

211 (8.31)

FR-F720-00340, 00490-NA
FR-F740-00170, 00250-NA
FR-F720-00630-NA
FR-F740-00310, 00380-NA

H

H1

D

D1

260
(10.24)
300
(11.81)

245
(9.65)
285
(11.22)

170
(6.69)
190
(7.48)

84
(3.31)
101.5
(4)

(Unit: mm (inches))

10
(0.39)

• FR-F720-00770, 00930, 01250-NA
• FR-F740-00470, 00620-NA

10 (0.39)
230 (9.06)
250 (9.84)

*

400 (15.75)

190 (7.48)

10.5 (0.41)

SPECIFICATIONS

10 (0.39)

380 (14.96)

2-φ10 hole

101.5 (4)

* The FR-F720-01250 is
not provided with a
wiring cover.

250 (9.84)

(Unit: mm (inches))

7
375

Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F720-01540, 01870, 02330-NA
• FR-F740-00770, 00930, 01160-NA

H
550 (21.65)

H1

2-φd hole

3.2 (0.13)

10 (0.39)

W2
W1
W

D

Inverter Model

W

W1

W2

H1

H2

d

D

FR-F720-01540-NA
FR-F740-00770-NA
FR-F720-01870, 02330-NA
FR-F740-00930, 01160-NA

325
(12.8)
435
(17.13)

270
(10.63)
380
(14.96)

10
(0.39)
12
(0.47)

530
(20.87)
525
(20.67)

10
(0.39)
15
(0.59)

10
(0.39)
12
(0.47)

195
(7.68)
250
(9.84)

(Unit: mm (inches))

376

Outline dimension drawings

15
(0.59)

• FR-F740-01800-NA

10 (0.39)

H
H1

2-φ12 hole

12(0.47)
W1
W

Inverter Model
FR-F740-01800-NA

3.2 (0.13)
D

W

W1

H

H1

D

435
(17.13)

380
(14.96)

525
(20.67)

550
(21.65)

250
(9.84)

• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for φ bolt)

P1

P
H 10

H1 10

P1, P

E
4-installation hole
(for S screw)

W1
W

Within D

DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H90K (FR-F740-01800-NA)

W

W1

150
(5.91)

130
(5.12)

H

H1

340
310
(13.39) (12.20)

D

Mass
(kg(lbs))

190
(7.48)

20
(44)

(Unit: mm (inches))

SPECIFICATIONS

Ground terminal
(for S1 screw)

7
377

Outline dimension drawings

H

2-φ12 hole

H1

15
(0.59)

• FR-F720-03160, 03800, 04750-NA
• FR-F740-02160, 02600, 03250, 03610-NA

Inverter Model

465 (18.31)

H1

D

FR-F740-02160, 02600-NA

300
(11.81)

FR-F720-03160, 03800,
04750-NA
FR-F740-03250, 03610-NA

715
740
(28.15) (29.13)

360
(14.17)

3.2
(0.13)

10 (0.39)

400 (15.75)

H

595
620
(23.43) (24.41)

D

• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-terminal
(for φ bolt)

P1
H 10

H1 10

P1

P

P
E
4-installation hole
(for S screw)

W1
W

Within D

Ground terminal
(for S1 screw)

DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-75K(FR-F720-03160-NA)
FR-HEL-90K(FR-F720-03800-NA)
FR-HEL-110K(FR-F720-04750-NA)
FR-HEL-H110K(FR-F740-02160-NA)
FR-HEL-H132K(FR-F740-02600-NA)
FR-HEL-H160K(FR-F740-03250-NA)
FR-HEL-H185K(FR-F740-03610-NA)

W

W1

150
(5.91)
150
(5.91)
175
(6.89)
150
(5.91)
175
(6.89)
175
(6.89)
175
(6.89)

130
(5.19)
130
(5.19)
150
(5.91)
130
(5.19)
150
(5.91)
150
(5.91)
150
(5.91)

H

H1

340
310
(13.39) (12.2)
340
310
(13.39) (12.2)
400
365
(15.74) (14.37)
340
310
(13.39) (12.2)
405
370
(15.94) (14.57)
405
370
(15.94) (14.57)
405
370
(15.94) (14.57)

D
190
(7.48)
200
(7.87)
200
(7.87)
195
(7.68)
200
(7.87)
205
(8.07)
240
(9.44)

S

S1

M6

M6

M6

M6

M8

M6

M6

M6

M8

M6

M8

M6

M8

M6

Mass
(kg(lbs))
17
(37.4)
19
(41.8)
20
(44)
22
(48.4)
26
(57.2)
28
(61.6)
29
(63.8)

(Unit: mm (inches))

378

Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-04320, 04810-NA

10 (0.39)

985 (38.77)
1010 (39.76)

15
(0.59)

3-φ12 hole

12 (0.48)
49
(1.92)

49
200 (7.87)

200 (7.87)

(1.92)

3.2 (0.12)
380 (14.96)

498 (19.6)

214.5
(8.44)

185 (7.28)

148.5
(5.85)

450 (17.72)

• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-S2 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)

P1
H 10

H1 10

P1

P

P
E
W1

4-installation hole
(for S screw)

W

Within D

Ground terminal (for S1 screw)

DC reactor Model

W

W1

H

H1

175
150
405
370
(6.88) (5.9) (15.94) (14.56)
190
165
440
400
FR-HEL-H250K (FR-F740-04810-NA)
(7.48) (6.49) (17.32) (15.74)

FR-HEL-H220K (FR-F740-04320-NA)

D
240
(9.44)
250
(9.84)

S

S1

S2

φ

M8

M6

M6

M12

M8

M8

M8

M12

SPECIFICATIONS

* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.

Mass
(kg(lbs))
30
(66)
35
(77)

(Unit: mm (inches))

7
379

Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-05470, 06100, 06830-NA

1010 (39.76)

984 (38.77)

3-φ12 holes

3.2 (0.12)

12 (0.47 )
300 (11.81)

380 (14.96)
148 (5.82)

300 (11.81)

680 (26.77)

N/-

S/L2

P/+

V

R/L1
U

P1

W
214 (8.25)

T/L3

• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-S2 eye nut
2-terminal (for bolt)

P1
H 10

H1 10

P1

P

P
E
W1

4-installation hole
(for S screw)

W

Within D

Ground terminal (for S1 screw)

* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.

DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H280K (FR-F740-05470-NA)

W

W1

H

H1

190
165
440
400
255
(7.48) (6.49) (17.32) (15.74) (10.03)

210
185
495
450
(8.26) (7.28) (19.48) (17.71)
210
185
495
450
FR-HEL-H355K (FR-F740-06830-NA)
(8.26) (7.28) (19.48) (17.71)

FR-HEL-H315K (FR-F740-06100-NA)

D

250
(9.84)
250
(9.84)

S

S1

S2

φ

Mass
(kg(lbs))

M8

M8

M8

M16

38
(83.6)

M10

M8

M8

M16

M10

M8

M8

42
(92.4)
46
M16
(101.2)

(Unit: mm (inches))

380

Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-07700, 08660-NA

1330 (52.36)

1300 (51.18)

3-φ12 hole

12 (0.47)
315 (12.4)

4.5
(0.18)

315 (12.4)

440 (17.32)

790 (31.1)

T/L3

U
P/+

N/-

W
V

222
(8.74)

185 (7.28)

S/L2

P1

194
(7.63)

R/L1

4.5
(0.18)

• DC reactor supplied
Rating plate
2-M8 eye nut

2-terminal
4- 15 hole

P1
10

10

455(17.91)

500(19.68)

75(2.95)

40(1.57)

40(1.57)

P1

P

P
E
195(7.67)
220(8.66)

4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)

Within 250(9.84)

Within 235(9.25)
Ground terminal (for M8 screw)

DC reactor Model
FR-HEL-H400K (FR-F740-07700-NA)
FR-HEL-H450K (FR-F740-08660-NA)

Mass
(kg(lbs))
50
(110)
57
(125.4)

(Unit: mm (inches))

SPECIFICATIONS

* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.

7
381

Outline dimension drawings
• FR-F740-09620, 10940, 12120-NA

12 (0.47)

300 (11.81)

300 (11.81)

1580(62.2)

1550(61.02)

4-φ12 hole

4.5
(0.18)

300 (11.81)

P/+

V

227
(8.94)

185 (7.28)

P1

189
(7.44)

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/-

4.5
(0.18)

440 (17.32)

995 (39.17)
950 (37.4)

• DC reactor supplied

40

Rating plate

P1

2-terminal
4- 15 hole

Ground terminal (for M12 screw)

P
E

* Remove the eye nut after installation of the product.
75 (2.95)

Within 245 (9.64)
40 (1.57)

P1

P

Within H

2-M12 eye nut

150 (5.9)
215 (8.46)

4-installation hole
(for M10 screw)

DC reactor Model

H

D1

10

D

10

D

D1

Mass
(kg(lbs))

345
455
405
67
(13.5) (17.91) (15.94) (147.4)
360
460
410
85
FR-HEL-H560K (FR-F740-10940-NA)
(14.17) (18.11) (16.14) (187)
360
460
410
95
FR-HEL-H630K (FR-F740-12120-NA)
(14.17) (18.11) (16.14) (209)

FR-HEL-H500K (FR-F740-09620-NA)

(Unit: mm (inches))

382

Outline dimension drawings
• Operation panel (FR-DU07)

3 (0.12)



72 (2.83)
78 (3.07)
81 (3.19)

27.8
(1.09)

6 (0.24)

22
(0.87)

44 (1.73)

21 (0.83)

3
(0.12) 44 (1.73)
50 (1.97)
3 (0.12)

Panel
FR-DU07

3.2 (0.13) max

Airbleeding
hole

20 (0.79)
2-M3 screw
16 (0.63)
25 (0.98)

3 (0.12)

Cable

72 (2.83)

Operation panel connection connector
(FR-ADP option)

(Unit: mm (inches))

• Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)



25.05 (0.97)
(11.45 (0.45))

*1

40 (1.57)

Air-bleeding
hole
4-R1

26.5
(1.04)

80.3 (3.16)

26.5
(1.04)

4-φ4 hole
(Effective depth of the installation
screws hole 5.0 (0.2))
M3 screw *2

*1 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove screws for
fixing the FR-PU07 to the inverter or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with
M3 nuts.
*2 Select the installation screws whose length will not exceed the effective
depth of the installation screw hole.

(Unit: mm (inches))

SPECIFICATIONS

67 (2.64)

*1

57.8 (2.28)

*1

56.8 (2.24)

135 (5.31)

*1

40 (1.57)

51 (2.01)

83 (3.27)

50
(1.97)

2.5
(0.10)

(14.2 (0.56))

7
383

Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure

7.4 Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
When encasing the inverter in an enclosure, the generated heat amount in an enclosure can be greatly reduced by
installing the heatsink portion of the inverter outside the enclosure. When installing the inverter in a compact
enclosure, etc., this installation method is recommended.

7.4.1

When using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN)

For the FR-F720-00105 to 04750, FR-F740-00023 to 03610, a heatsink can be protruded outside the enclosure
using a heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN). (Attachment is not required when protruding the heatsink for
FR-F740-04320 or larger inverter.) For a panel cut dimension drawing and an installation procedure of the heatsink
protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN) to the inverter, refer to a manual of "heatsink protrusion attachment (FR-A7CN01
to 11)".

7.4.2

Protrusion of heatsink of the FR-F740-04320 or more

(1) Panel cutting
Cut the panel of the enclosure according to the inverter capacity.

• FR-F740-04320, 04810

• FR-F740-05470, 06100, 06830
15(0.59)
984(38.74)

200(7.87) 200(7.87)

Hole

662(26.06)
300(11.81)

300(11.81)

Hole

15(0.59)

954(37.56)

985(38.78)

6-M10 screw

18(0.71)

954(37.56)

13(0.51)

6-M10 screw
484(19.06)

(Unit: mm (inches))

Hole

(Unit: mm (inches))

384

21(0.83)
1550(61.02)

315(12.4)

300(11.81) 300(11.81) 300(11.81)

Hole

8-M10 screw

976(38.43)

21(0.83)

1258(49.53)

6-M10 screw

21(0.83)

1300(51.18)

21(0.83)

771(30.35)
315(12.4)

(Unit: mm (inches))

• FR-F740-09620, 10940, 12120

1508(59.37)

• FR-F740-07700, 08660

(Unit: mm (inches))

Heatsink protrusion attachment procedure
(2) Shift and removal of a rear side installation frame

• FR-F740-05470 to 06830
One installation frame is attached to each of the upper and lower
part of the inverter. Change the position of the rear side installation frame on the upper and lower side of the inverter to the front
side as shown on the right. When changing the installation
frames, make sure that the installation orientation is correct.

Shift
Upper
installation
frame

Lower
installation
frame

Shift

• FR-F740-04320/04810, 07700 or more

Removal

Two installation frames each are attached to the upper and lower
parts of the inverter. Remove the rear side installation frame on
the upper and lower side of the inverter as shown on the right.

Upper installation
frame (rear side)

Lower installation
frame (rear side)
Removal

(3) Installation of the inverter
Push the inverter heatsink portion outside the enclosure and fix the enclosure and inverter with upper and lower
installation frame.
Enclosure
Inside the
enclosure Exhausted air

*

* For the FR-F740-05470 or more, there are finger
guards behind the enclosure. Therefore, the
thickness of the panel should be less than
10mm(0.39 inch) (*1) and also do not place anything
around finger guards to avoid contact with the finger
guards.

Inverter

1

140(5.51)

Inverter Model
Dimension of
Cooling
wind the outside of
the enclosure
D1

FR-F740-04320, 04810
FR-F740-05470 to 12120

Finger guard

D1(mm)
(inches)
185(7.28)
184(7.24)

CAUTION
· Having a cooling fan, the cooling section which comes out of the enclosure cannot be used in the environment of water
drops, oil, mist, dust, etc.
· Be careful not to drop screws, dust etc. into the inverter and cooling fan section.

SPECIFICATIONS

10(0.39)*

6 (0.24)

Enclosure
Installation
frame

7
385

MEMO

386

APPENDICES
This chapter provides the "APPENDICES" of this product.
Always read the instructions before using the equipment.

387

For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter

Appendix 1 For customers who are replacing the conventional model
with this inverter
Appendix 1-1 Replacement of the FR-F500 series
(1) Instructions for installation
1)Removal procedure of the front cover was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.)
2)Removal procedure of the operation panel was changed. (with screws) Please note. (Refer to page 6.)
3)Plug-in options of the F500 series are not compatible
4)Operation panel (FR-DU04) cannot be used.
5)Setup software (FR-SW0-SETUP) cannot be used.

(2) Wiring instructions
1)The control circuit terminal block can be used for the FR-F700 series without removing wiring.
Note that the wiring cover (F720-00046 to 00930 (F740-00023 to 00470)) is not compatible.
FR-F500 series

FR-F700 series

(Note that the relay output 2 (A2, B2, C2) specific for the FR-F700 series cannot be used with the FR-F500 series
terminals.)

(3) Instructions for continuous use of the FR-PU04 (parameter unit)
1) For the FR-F700 series, many functions (parameters) have been added. When setting these parameters, the
parameter name and setting range are not displayed. Parameter list, change list, initial value list, initial value list
2 and parameter clear of the HELP function cannot be used.
2) For the FR-F700 series, many protective functions have been added. These functions activate, but all faults are
displayed as "Fault 14". When the faults history has been checked, "E.14" appears. Added faults display will not
appear on the parameter unit.
3) User initial value setting cannot be used.
4) User registration/clear (user group 2) cannot be used.
5) Parameter copy/verification function cannot be used.

388

For customers who are replacing the conventional model with this inverter
(4) Main differences and compatibilities with the FR-F500(L) series
Item

User group

FR-F500(L)

FR-F700

61 parameters

20 parameters

User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16)
(Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175)

User group (16) only
Setting methods were partially changed
(Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 173)

Performing parameter clear and all clear (H5A96,
Communication
HAA99) with the FR-A7ND clears Pr. 345 and Pr. Pr. 345 and Pr. 346 are not cleared.
option
346.
Parameter number change
Advanced PID
Pr. 500 to Pr. 516
Pr. 575 to Pr. 591
(pump function)
00250 to 00770: 2%, 00930, 01160: 1.5%
(When the torque boost value of the FR-F500 series
Pr. 0 Torque
Initial value
used was the initial value, it is not necessary to change
boost
the torque boost value from the initial value when
replacing with the FR-F700 series.)
User initial
Not available
value setting Available
Substitutable with the copy function of the operation
(Pr. 199 )
panel (FR-DU07)
Intelligent
Not available
optimum
Available
For deceleration time, overvoltage fault can be avoided
acceleration/ (Pr. 60 setting "3" and Pr. 61 to Pr. 63)
with regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882 to Pr. 885).
deceleration
Automatic
Automatic torque boost was cleared because of addition
Pr. 38, Pr. 39
torque boost
of "Simple magnetic flux vector" (Pr. 80)
Removable terminal block
Terminal block
Removable terminal block
Upward compatibility (Terminal block of the F500 can be
mounted)
FR-PU07
FR-DU07
PU
FR-PU04, DU04
FR-DU04 unavailable (Partly restricted when the FRPU04 is used. Refer to page 388.)
Dedicated plug-in option (not compatible)
Computer link, relay output option
Built into the inverter
Plug-in option
FR-A5NR
(RS-485 terminal, relay output 2 points)

Deleted functions

Changed
initial value

Changed functions

Simple mode
parameters

Three boards can be mounted
Installation size

Two board can be mounted

FR-F720-00046, 00105, 00167, 00340, 00770, 00930, 01250, 01870, FR-F740-00023 to 00083, 00170,
00470, 00770 to 01160 are compatible in mounting dimensions
For other capacities, an optional intercompatibility attachment (FR-AAT) is necessary.

Appendix 1-2 Replacement of the FR-A100  series
Instructions for installation
• When using the installation holes of the FR-A100(E) series, FR-A5AT (intercompatibility attachment) is necessary.

389

Appendix 2 Parameter clear, parameter copy and instruction code list
*1

These instruction codes are used for parameter read and write by using Mitsubishi inverter protocol with the RS-485 communication.
(Refer to page 214 for RS-485 communication)
*2 " " indicates valid and "×" indicates invalid of "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
*3 These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication.
(Refer to page 214 for RS-485 communication)
*4 When a communication option is installed, parameter clear (lock release) during password lock (Pr. 297 ≠ 9999) can be performed only from the
communication option.
Symbols in the table indicate parameters which function when an option is mounted.
....... FR-A7AX,

........FR-A7AY,

........ FR-A7AR,

....... FR-A7NL,

........FR-A7NP,

........ FR-A7NF

Parameter
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
41
42
43

390

Name

....... FR-A7NC,

........FR-A7ND,

....... FR-A7AC,

....... FR-A7AN,

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

Torque boost

00

80

Maximum frequency

01

81

0

Minimum frequency

02

82

0

Base frequency
Multi-speed setting (high speed)

03

83

0

04

84

0

Multi-speed setting (middle speed)

05

85

0

Multi-speed setting (low speed)

06

86

0

Acceleration time

07

87

0

Deceleration time

08

88

0

Electronic thermal O/L relay
DC injection brake operation frequency

09

89

0

0A

8A

0

0

DC injection brake operation time

0B

8B

0

DC injection brake operation voltage

0C

8C

0

Starting frequency

0D

8D

0

Load pattern selection

0E

8E

0

Jog frequency
Jog acceleration/deceleration time

0F

8F

0

10

90

0

MRS input selection

11

91

0

High speed maximum frequency

12

92

0

Base frequency voltage
Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency
Acceleration/deceleration time
increments
Stall prevention operation level
(Torque limit level )
Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed
Multi-speed setting (speed 4)

13

93

0

14

94

0

15

95

0

16

96

0

17

97

0

18

98

0

Multi-speed setting (speed 5)

19

99

0

Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

1A

9A

0

Multi-speed setting (speed 7)

1B

9B

0

Multi-speed input compensation selection
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection
Regenerative function selection

1C

9C

0

1D

9D

0

1E

9E

0

Frequency jump 1A
Frequency jump 1B

1F

9F

0

20

A0

0

Frequency jump 2A

21

A1

0

Frequency jump 2B

22

A2

0

Frequency jump 3A

23

A3

0

Frequency jump 3B

24

A4

0

Speed display

25

A5

0

Up-to-frequency sensitivity
Output frequency detection
Output frequency detection for reverse
rotation

29

A9

0

2A

AA

0

2B

AB

0

Parameter
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
65

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

Second acceleration/deceleration time

2C

AC

0

Second deceleration time

2D

AD

0

Second torque boost

2E

AE

0

Second V/F (base frequency)

2F

AF

0

Second stall prevention operation current
Second stall prevention operation
frequency
Second output frequency detection

30

B0

0

31

B1

0

32

B2

0

Second electronic thermal O/L relay

33

B3

0

DU/PU main display data selection

34

B4

0

CA terminal function selection

36

B6

0

Frequency monitoring reference

37

B7

0

Current monitoring reference
Restart coasting time

38

B8

0

39

B9

0

Restart cushion time

3A

BA

0

Remote function selection

3B

BB

0

Energy saving control selection

3C

BC

0

Retry selection
Stall prevention operation reduction
starting frequency

41

C1

0

42

C2

0

67

Number of retries at fault occurrence

43

C3

0

68

Retry waiting time

44

C4

0

69

Retry count display erase

45

C5

0

70

Special regenerative brake duty

46

C6

0

71

Applied motor

47

C7

0

72

PWM frequency selection

48

C8

0

73

Analog input selection

49

C9

0

74

Input filter time constant

4A

CA

0

75

Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection

4B

CB

0

76

Fault code output selection

4C

CC

0

77 *

Parameter write selection

4D

CD

0

CE

0

CF

0

66

78

Reverse rotation prevention selection

4E

79 *

Operation mode selection

4F

80

Motor capacity

50

D0

0

90

Motor constant (R1)

5A

DA

0

100

V/F1(first frequency)

00

80

1

101

V/F1(first frequency voltage)

01

81

1

×

×

×

* Read and write from communication with PU connector only is enabled.

391

Parameter

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

102

V/F2(second frequency)

02

82

1

103

V/F2(second frequency voltage)

03

83

1

104

V/F3(third frequency)

04

84

1

105

V/F3(third frequency voltage)

05

85

1

106

V/F4(fourth frequency)

06

86

1

107

V/F4(fourth frequency voltage)

07

87

1

108

V/F5(fifth frequency)

08

88

1

109
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124

V/F5(fifth frequency voltage)

09

89

1

PU communication station number

11

91

1

*3

*3

PU communication speed

12

92

1

*3

*3

PU communication stop bit length

13

93

1

*3

*3

PU communication parity check
Number of PU communication retries

14

94

1

*3

*3

15

95

1

*3

*3

PU communication check time interval

16

96

1

*3

*3

PU communication waiting time setting

17

97

1

*3

*3

PU communication CR/LF selection
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency
PID control automatic switchover
frequency
PID action selection

18

98

1

*3

*3

19

99

1

×

1A

9A

1

×

1B

9B

1

1C

9C

1

PID proportional band

1D

9D

1

PID integral time

1E

9E

1

PID upper limit

1F

9F

1

PID lower limit
PID action set point

20

A0

1

21

A1

1

PID differential time

22

A2

1

Electronic bypass sequence selection

23

A3

1

MC switchover interlock time

24

A4

1

Start waiting time

25

A5

1

Bypass selection at a fault
Automatic switchover frequency from
inverter to bypass operation
Backlash acceleration stopping
frequency
Backlash acceleration stopping time
Backlash deceleration stopping
frequency
Backlash deceleration stopping time

26

A6

1

27

A7

1

28

A8

1

29

A9

1

2A

AA

1

125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157

392

2B

AB

1

Speed setting switchover
PU display language selection
Acceleration/deceleration time switching
frequency
Stall prevention level at 0V input

2C

AC

1

2D

AD

1

2F

AF

1

30

B0

1

Stall prevention level at 10V input

31

B1

1

Output current detection level

32

B2

1

Output current detection signal delay time

33

B3

1

Zero current detection level

34

B4

1

Zero current detection time
Voltage reduction selection during stall
prevention operation
RT signal function validity condition
selection
Stall prevention operation selection

35

B5

1

36

B6

1

37

B7

1

38

B8

1

OL signal output timer

39

B9

1

×

×

Parameter
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

AM terminal function selection
Automatic switchover frequency range
from bypass to inverter operation
User group read selection
Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection
Automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure selection
First cushion time for restart

3A

BA

1

3B

BB

1

00

80

2

01

81

2

02

82

2

03

83

2

First cushion voltage for restart

04

84

2

Stall prevention operation level for restart
Output current detection signal retention
time
Output current detection operation
selection

05

85

2

06

86

2

07

87

2

×

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

RUN terminal function selection

1E

9E

2

×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

191

SU terminal function selection

1F

9F

2

×

192

IPF terminal function selection

20

A0

2

×

193

OL terminal function selection

21

A1

2

×

194

FU terminal function selection

22

A2

2

×

195
196
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241

ABC1 terminal function selection

23

A3

2

ABC2 terminal function selection

24

A4

2

×
×

Multi-speed setting (speed 8)
Multi-speed setting (speed 9)

28

A8

2

29

A9

2

Multi-speed setting (speed 10)

2A

AA

2

Multi-speed setting (speed 11)

2B

AB

2

Multi-speed setting (speed 12)

2C

AC

2

Multi-speed setting (speed 13)

2D

AD

2

Multi-speed setting (speed 14)
Multi-speed setting (speed 15)

2E

AE

2

2F

AF

2

Soft-PWM operation selection

30

B0

2

Analog input display unit switchover
Terminal 1 added compensation amount
(terminal 2)
Terminal 1 added compensation amount
(terminal 4)
Cooling fan operation selection

31

B1

2

32

B2

2

33

B3

2

34

B4

2

242
243
244

Watt-hour meter clear

0A

8A

2

Operation hour meter clear

0B

8B

2

User group registered display/batch clear
User group registration

0C

8C

2

0D

8D

2

User group clear

0E

8E

2

STF terminal function selection

12

92

2

STR terminal function selection

13

93

2

RL terminal function selection

14

94

2

RM terminal function selection
RH terminal function selection

15

95

2

16

96

2

RT terminal function selection

17

97

2

AU terminal function selection

18

98

2

JOG terminal function selection

19

99

2

CS terminal function selection

1A

9A

2

MRS terminal function selection
STOP terminal function selection

1B

9B

2

1C

9C

2

RES terminal function selection

1D

9D

2

×
×
×

×
×
×
×

393

Parameter
245
246
247
250
251
252
253
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
296
297
299

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

Rated slip

35

B5

2

Slip compensation time constant
Constant-power range slip compensation
selection
Stop selection

36

B6

2

37

B7

2

3A

BA

2

Output phase loss protection selection

3B

BB

2

Override bias
Override gain

3C

BC

2

3D

BD

2

Life alarm status display

3F

BF

2

Inrush current limit circuit life display

40

C0

2

Control circuit capacitor life display

41

C1

2

Main circuit capacitor life display

42

C2

2

Main circuit capacitor life measuring
PWM frequency automatic switchover

43

C3

2

44

C4

2

Power failure stop selection
Subtracted frequency at deceleration
start
Subtraction starting frequency

45

C5

2

46

C6

2

47

C7

2

Power-failure deceleration time 1

48

C8

2

Power-failure deceleration time 2
Power failure deceleration time
switchover frequency
Terminal 4 input selection

49

C9

2

4A

CA

2

4B

CB

2

Monitor decimal digits selection

4C

CC

2

68

E8

2

69

E9

2

6B

EB

2

Password lock level
Password lock/unlock
Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting
BCD input bias

00

80

3

301

BCD input gain

01

81

3

302

BIN input bias

02

82

3

303

BIN input gain
Digital input and analog input
compensation enable/disable
selection

03

83

3

04

84

3

305

Read timing operation selection

05

85

3

306

Analog output signal selection

06

86

3

307

Setting for zero analog output
Setting for maximum analog
output
Analog output signal voltage/current
switchover
Analog meter voltage output
selection
Setting for zero analog meter voltage
output
Setting for maximum analog meter
voltage output

07

87

3

08

88

3

09

89

3

0A

8A

3

0B

8B

3

0C

8C

3

308
309
310
311
312
313

DO0 output selection

0D

8D

3

314

DO1 output selection

0E

8E

3

315

DO2 output selection

0F

8F

3

316

DO3 output selection

10

90

3

317

DO4 output selection

11

91

3

318

DO5 output selection

12

92

3

394

×
×
×
×

×

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

300

304

×
×
×
×

×
*4

×
×
×
×

Parameter

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

319

DO6 output selection

13

320

RA1 output selection

14

94

3

321

RA2 output selection

15

95

3

322

93

3

RA3 output selection

16

96

3

323

AM0 0V adjustment

17

97

3

×

324

AM1 0mA adjustment

18

98

3

×

325

Terminal 40 input selection

19

99

3

329
331
332
333

Digital input unit selection
RS-485 communication station

1D

9D

3

1F

9F

3

*3

*3

RS-485 communication speed

20

A0

3

*3

*3

RS-485 communication stop bit length
RS-485 communication parity check
selection
RS-485 communication retry count
RS-485 communication check time
interval
RS-485 communication waiting time
setting
Communication operation command
source
Communication speed command source

21

A1

3

*3

*3

22

A2

3

*3

*3

23

A3

3

*3

*3

24

A4

3

*3

*3

25

A5

3

*3

*3

26

A6

3

*3

*3

27

A7

3

*3

*3

Communication startup mode selection

28

A8

3

*3

*3

RS-485 communication CR/LF selection

29

A9

3

*3

*3

Communication EEPROM write selection
Communication error count

2A

AA

3

2B

AB

3

DeviceNet address

2D

AD

3

*3

*3

DeviceNet baud rate
Communication reset
selection

2E

AE

3

*3

*3

31

B1

3

*3

*3

387

Initial communication delay time

57

D7

3

388

Send time interval at heart beat

58

D8

3

389
390
391

Minimum sending time at heart beat
% setting reference frequency

59

D9

3

5A

DA

3

Receive time interval at heart beat

5B

DB

3

392
414
415
495
496
497
498

Event driven detection width
PLC function operation selection
Inverter operation lock mode setting

5C

DC

3

0E

8E

4

0F

8F

4

Remote output selection

5F

DF

4

Remote output data 1

60

E0

4

Remote output data 2

61

E1

4

PLC function flash memory clear
Communication error execution waiting
time
Communication error occurrence count
display
Stop mode selection at communication
error
Maintenance timer

62

E2

4

00

80

5

01

81

5

02

82

5

03

83

5

Maintenance timer alarm output set time

04

84

5

Speed setting reference

05

85

5

Parameter 1 for user
Parameter 2 for user

06

86

5

07

87

5

Parameter 3 for user

08

88

5

Parameter 4 for user

09

89

5

Parameter 5 for user

0A

8A

5

334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
345
346
349

500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510

×

×

×
×
×

×

×

×

×

×
×
×

×
×
×

*3

*3

*3

*3

×

×

×
×

×

395

Parameter
511
512
513
514
515
522
539
542
543
544
549
550
551
553
554
555
556
557
563
564
570
571
573
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
611
653
654
665
726
727
728
729
753

396

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

Parameter 6 for user

0B

8B

5

Parameter 7 for user

0C

8C

5

Parameter 8 for user

0D

8D

5

Parameter 9 for user

0E

8E

5

Parameter 10 for user

0F

8F

5

Output stop frequency
Modbus-RTU communication check time
interval
Communication station number (CCLink)

16

96

5

27

A7

5

*3

*3

2A

AA

5

*3

*3

Baud rate selection (CC-Link)

2B

AB

5

*3

*3

CC-Link extended setting
Protocol selection
NET mode operation command source
selection
PU mode operation command source
selection
PID deviation limit

2C

AC

5

*3

*3

31

B1

5

*3

*3

32

B2

5

*3

*3

33

B3

5

*3

*3

35

B5

5

PID signal operation selection

36

B6

5

Current average time

37

B7

5

Data output mask time
Current average value monitor signal
output reference current
Energization time carrying-over times

38

B8

5

39

B9

5

3F

BF

5

Operating time carrying-over times

40

C0

5

Multiple rating setting
Holding time at a start

46

C6

5

47

C7

5

4mA input check selection

49

C9

5

Output interruption detection time

4B

CB

5

Output interruption detection level

4C

CC

5

Output interruption cancel level

4D

CD

5

Auxiliary motor operation selection
Motor connection function selection

4E

CE

5

4F

CF

5

MC switching interlock time

50

D0

5

Start waiting time
Auxiliary motor connection-time
deceleration time
Auxiliary motor disconnection-time
acceleration time
Auxiliary motor 1 starting frequency

51

D1

5

52

D2

5

53

D3

5

54

D4

5

Auxiliary motor 2 starting frequency

55

D5

5

Auxiliary motor 3 starting frequency

56

D6

5

Auxiliary motor 1 stopping frequency

57

D7

5

Auxiliary motor 2 stopping frequency
Auxiliary motor 3 stopping frequency

58

D8

5

59

D9

5

Auxiliary motor start detection time

5A

DA

5

Auxiliary motor stop detection time

5B

DB

5

Acceleration time at a restart

0B

8B

6

Speed smoothing control

35

B5

6

Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
Regeneration avoidance frequency gain

36

B6

6

41

C1

6

Auto Baudrate/Max Master

1A

9A

7

Max Info Frames

1B

9B

7

Device instance number (Upper 3 digit)

1C

9C

7

Device instance number (Lower 4 digit)

1D

9D

7

Second PID action selection

35

B5

7

×
×

×
×
×

×
×
×

Parameter
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
774
775
776
777
778
779
799
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856

Name
Second PID control automatic switchover
frequency
Second PID action set point
Second PID proportional band

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2
36

B6

7

37

B7

7

38

B8

7

Second PID integral time

39

B9

7

Second PID differential time

3A

BA

7

PID unit selection
Pre-charge fault selection

3B

BB

7

3C

BC

7

Pre-charge ending level

3D

BD

7

Pre-charge ending time

3E

BE

7

Pre-charge upper detection level

3F

BF

7

Pre-charge time limit

40

C0

7

Second pre-charge fault selection
Second pre-charge ending level

41

C1

7

42

C2

7

Second pre-charge ending time

43

C3

7

Second pre-charge upper detection level

44

C4

7

Second pre-charge time limit

45

C5

7

PU/DU monitor selection 1

4A

CA

7

PU/DU monitor selection 2

4B

CB

7

PU/DU monitor selection 3
4mA input fault operation frequency

4C

CC

7

4D

CD

7

Current input check filter
Operation frequency during
communication error
Pulse increment setting for output power

4E

CE

7

4F

CF

7

63

E3

7

Parameter 11 for user

1A

9A

8

Parameter 12 for user

1B

9B

8

Parameter 13 for user

1C

9C

8

Parameter 14 for user
Parameter 15 for user

1D

9D

8

1E

9E

8

Parameter 16 for user

1F

9F

8

Parameter 17 for user

20

A0

8

Parameter 18 for user

21

A1

8

Parameter 19 for user

22

A2

8

Parameter 20 for user
Parameter 21 for user

23

A3

8

24

A4

8

Parameter 22 for user

25

A5

8

Parameter 23 for user

26

A6

8

Parameter 24 for user

27

A7

8

Parameter 25 for user

28

A8

8

Parameter 26 for user
Parameter 27 for user

29

A9

8

2A

AA

8

Parameter 28 for user

2B

AB

8

Parameter 29 for user

2C

AC

8

Parameter 30 for user

2D

AD

8

Parameter 31 for user

2E

AE

8

Parameter 32 for user
Parameter 33 for user

2F

AF

8

30

B0

8

Parameter 34 for user

31

B1

8

Parameter 35 for user

32

B2

8

Parameter 36 for user

33

B3

8

Parameter 37 for user

34

B4

8

Parameter 38 for user
Parameter 39 for user

35

B5

8

36

B6

8

Parameter 40 for user

37

B7

8

Parameter 41 for user

38

B8

8

397

Parameter
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
867
869
870
872
882
883
884
885
886
888
889
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
C0
(900)
C1
(901)
C2
(902)
C3
(902)
125
(903)
C4
(903)
C5
(904)
C6
(904)
126
(905)
C7
(905)
C8
(930)

398

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

Parameter 42 for user

39

B9

Parameter 43 for user

3A

BA

8

Parameter 44 for user

3B

BB

8

Parameter 45 for user

3C

BC

8

Parameter 46 for user

3D

BD

8

Parameter 47 for user

3E

BE

8

Parameter 48 for user

3F

BF

8

Parameter 49 for user

40

C0

8

Parameter 50 for user

41

C1

8

AM output filter
Current output filter

43

C3

8

45

C5

8

Speed detection hysteresis

46

C6

8

Input phase loss protection selection
Regeneration avoidance operation
selection
Regeneration avoidance operation level
Regeneration avoidance at deceleration
detection sensitivity
Regeneration avoidance compensation
frequency limit value
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain

48

C8

8

52

D2

8

53

D3

8

54

D4

8

55

D5

8

56

D6

8

Free parameter 1

58

D8

8

Free parameter 2
Cumulative power monitor digit shifted
times
Load factor
Energy saving monitor reference (motor
capacity)
Control selection during commercial
power-supply operation
Power saving rate reference value

59

D9

8

5B

DB

8

5C

DC

8

5D

DD

8

5E

DE

8

8

×
×

5F

DF

8

Power unit cost

60

E0

8

Power saving monitor average time

61

E1

8

Power saving cumulative monitor clear

62

E2

8

Operation time rate (estimated value)

63

E3

8

CA terminal calibration

5C

DC

1

×

AM terminal calibration

5D

DD

1

×

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
frequency

5E

DE

1

×

Terminal 2 frequency setting bias

5E

DE

1

×

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
frequency

5F

DF

1

×

Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

5F

DF

1

×

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias
frequency

60

E0

1

×

Terminal 4 frequency setting bias

60

E0

1

×

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency

61

E1

1

×

Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

61

E1

1

×

Current output bias signal

1E

9E

9

×

×
×

Parameter
C9
(930)
C10
(931)
C11
(931)
C42
(934)
C43
(934)
C44
(935)
C45
(935)
989
990
991
997
999

Name

Instruction Code *1
Parameter Parameter All Parameter
Clear *2
Clear *2
Read
Write Extended Copy *2

Current output bias current

1E

9E

9

Current output gain signal

1F

9F

9

Current output gain current

1F

9F

9

PID display bias coefficient

22

A2

9

×

PID display bias analog value

22

A2

9

×

PID display gain coefficient

23

A3

9

×

PID display gain analog value

23

A3

9

×

Parameter copy alarm release

59

D9

9

×

PU buzzer control

5A

DA

9

PU contrast adjustment

5B

DB

9

Fault initiation
Automatic parameter setting

61

E1

9

63

E3

9

×
×

×

×

399

Appendix 3 Specification change
Appendix 3-1 SERIAL number check
Refer to page 2 for the location of the rating plate.
Label on the product package

Rating plate example
Symbol

7
Year

Inverter Model

Month

TC

A

Control number
G

Identification Symbol

SERIAL (Serial No.)
TC number

The SERIAL consists of 1 version symbol, 2 numeric characters or 1 numeric character and 1
alphabet letter indicating year and month, and 6 numeric characters indicating control number.
Last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9, X
(October), Y (November), and Z (December).

7

Bar code

Input rating

SERIAL (Serial No.)
The SERIAL (Serial No.) indicated on the label of the
product package consists of six digits including the first
three digits of the control number and a symbol.

Appendix 3-2 Changed functions
(1) Settings "10" and "11" of Pr.495 are valid for the inverter assembled after the following SERIAL.
The inverters whose communication parameters (Pr.345 and Pr.346) are not cleared when parameter clear/all clear
is executed using Class 0x2A instance1 Attribute ID105 and 106 are assembled after the following SERIAL.
Refer to the table below to check the SERIAL indicated on the inverter rating plate or package.
200V class
Inverter Model
FR-F720-00046-NA
FR-F720-00077-NA
FR-F720-00105/00167-NA
FR-F720-00250-NA
FR-F720-00340/00490-NA
FR-F720-00630-NA
FR-F720-00770 to 01250-NA
FR-F720-01540 to 02330-NA
FR-F720-03160 to 04750-NA

400

Label on Product Package
Identification Symbol

10th and 11th Digits of TC
Number on Rating Plate

SERIAL (First 2 Digits of
SERIAL)

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5

C7
C7
D7
C7
D7
C7
E7
C7
X7
C7
Z7
D7
E7
F7
A7


Without


G7
G5
G7

C7
Q7
B7

400V class
Inverter Model

Label on Product Package
Identification Symbol

Lower Third and
Second Number of TC
Number on Rating Plate

SERIAL (Upper Second
Numbers of SERIAL)

Without


G5
G7

A7
D7

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without

Without


G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7
G5
G7

B7
D7
W7
E7
Y7
H7
Z7
H7
U7
E7
P7
C7
P7
D7
Q7
D7
P7
D7
K7
D7
L7
D7
K7
D7
M7
B7
L7
B7

FR-F740-00023-NA
FR-F740-00038 to 00126-NA
FR-F740-00170 to 00380-NA
FR-F740-00470-NA
FR-F740-00620-NA
FR-F740-00770 to 01160-NA
FR-F740-01800-NA
FR-F740-02160/02600-NA
FR-F740-03250/03610-NA
FR-F740-04320/04810-NA
FR-F740-05470-NA
FR-F740-06100-NA
FR-F740-06830-NA
FR-F740-07700/08660-NA
FR-F740-09620 to 12120-NA

(2) The following functions can be used with the inverter produced in June 2009 or later.
Check the serial number printed on the rating plate or on package.
Item

Added parameter setting values

Added parameters

Changed parameter setting ranges

Changed Functions
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection setting value "6"
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection setting value "10", "11", "20", "21"
Pr. 59 Remote function selection setting value "11", "12", "13"
Pr.128 PID action selection setting value "110", "111", "120", "121"
Pr.167 Output current detection operation selection setting value "10", "11"
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 Input terminal function selection setting value "70", "71", "72"
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 Input terminal function selection setting value "48", "79", "85", "148",
"179", "185"
Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection setting value "21", "22"
Pr.522 Output stop frequency
Pr.553 PID deviation limit
Pr.554 PID signal operation selection
Pr.653 Speed smoothing control
Pr.654 Speed smoothing cutoff frequency
Pr.799 Pulse increment setting for output power
C42 (Pr.934) PID display bias coefficient
C43 (Pr.934) PID display bias analog value
C44 (Pr.935) PID display gain coefficient
C45 (Pr.935) PID display gain analog value
Pr.153 Zero current detection time setting range "0 to 1s" → "0 to 10s"

401

(3) The following functions and two plug-in options can be used with the inverter produced in June 2010 or later.
Check the serial number printed on the rating plate or on package.
Item

Added parameter setting values

Added parameters

Changed parameter setting ranges

Mitsubishi inverter protocol
(computer link communication)
Modbus-RTU communication

Error message

Changed Functions
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection setting value "100, 101, 120, 121"
Pr. 54 CA terminal function selection and 158 AM terminal function selection setting value
"70"
Pr. 128 PID action selection setting value "70 to 101"
Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 (input terminal function selection) setting value "50, 51, 77 and 78"
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) setting value "49 to 54, 67, 149 to 154,
167"
Pr.573 4mA input check selection setting range "2, 3, 4"
Pr. 147, Pr. 296, Pr. 297, Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498, Pr. 502, Pr. 505 to Pr. 515 , Pr. 665, Pr. 753
to Pr. 769, Pr. 774 to Pr. 779, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865, Pr. 870, Pr. 997, Pr. 999, Pr.CH, AUTO,
Pr. 263 Subtraction starting frequency setting range "0 to 120Hz, 9999" to "0 to 400Hz,
9999"
Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance compensation frequency limit value setting range "0 to
10Hz, 9999" to "0 to 30Hz, 9999"
⋅ Multi-command
⋅ Model information monitor
⋅ Cumulative power (32-bit) for a special monitor
⋅ Model information monitor
⋅ Cumulative power (32-bit) for a real time monitor
⋅ LOCd Password locked
⋅ E.2
Option fault
⋅ E.OP2 Communication option fault
⋅ E.PCH Pre-charge stop
⋅ E.LCI 4mA input fault

(4) BACnet MS/TP protocol and the following functions can be used with the inverter produced in August 2010 or
later. Check the serial number printed on the rating plate or on package.
Item

Added parameter setting values

Added parameters

402

Changed Functions
Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection setting value "67, 81 to 86"
Pr. 54 CA terminal function selection setting value "67, 85"
Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection setting value "67, 86"
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 (output terminal function selection) setting value "82 and 182"
Pr. 331 RS-485 communication station number setting range "0 to 127"
Pr. 332 RS-485 communication speed setting range "768"
Pr. 549 Protocol selection setting range "2"
Pr. 774 to Pr. 776 PU/DU monitor selection 1 to 3 setting range "67, 81 to 86"
Pr. 390, Pr. 726 to Pr. 729

MEMO

403

REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date
Sep. 2004
Dec. 2004

May 2006

*Manual Number
IB(NA)-0600217ENG-A
IB(NA)-0600217ENG-B

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-C

Revision
First edition

Addition
⋅ FR-F720 - 03160 to 04750 - NA
⋅ FR-F740 - 04320 to 12120 - NA
⋅ Partial modification

Addition
⋅ Panel cut dimension of heatsink protrusion
⋅ Pr. 539
⋅ Voltage/current input switch
Aug. 2008

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-D

Addition
⋅ Additional explanation to "Causes and corrective actions"
⋅ Addition of setting values "10" and 11" to Pr. 495

Sep. 2009

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-E

Addition
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

Pr. 59 setting value "11 ", "12 ", "13 "
Pr. 29 setting value "6"
Pr. 30 setting value "10", "11", "20", "21"
Pr.128 setting value "110", "111", "120", "121"
Pr.167 setting value "10", "11"
Pr. 261 setting value "21", "22"
Pr.522, Pr.653 , Pr.654, Pr.553, Pr.554, C42 (Pr.934), C43 (Pr.934), C44 (Pr.935),
C45 (Pr.935), Pr.799
⋅ DC feeding operation permission signal (X70), DC feeding cancel signal (X71),
PID integral value reset signal (X72)
⋅ PID deviation limit signal (Y48), Pulse output of output power signal (Y79), DC
feeding signal (Y85)

Partial modification
⋅ Pr. 153 setting range "0 to 10s"
⋅ 5.5 Check first when you have a trouble
May 2010

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-F

Addition
⋅ Two plug-in options available
⋅ Pr. 147, Pr. 296, Pr. 297, Pr. 414, Pr. 415, Pr. 498, Pr. 502, Pr. 505 to Pr. 515, Pr. 665,
Pr. 753 to Pr. 769, Pr. 774 to Pr. 779, Pr. 826 to Pr. 865, Pr. 870, Pr. 997, Pr. 999,
Pr. CH, AUTO
⋅ Pr. 30 setting value "100, 101, 120, 121"
⋅ Pr. 54 and Pr.158 setting value "70"
⋅ Pr. 128 setting value "70 to 101"
⋅ Pr. 178 to Pr. 189 setting value "50, 51, 77, 78"
⋅ Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 setting value "49 to 54, 67, 149 to 154, 167"
⋅ Pr. 573 setting value "2, 3, 4"
⋅ Error message
⋅ LOCd Password locked
⋅ E.2 Option fault
⋅ E.OP2 Communication option fault
⋅ E.PCH Pre-charge fault
⋅ E.LCI 4mA input fault

Partial modification
⋅ Pr. 263 setting range "0 to 120Hz, 9999" to "0 to 400Hz, 9999"
⋅ Pr. 885 setting range "0 to 10Hz, 9999" to "0 to 30Hz, 9999"
Jul. 2010

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-G

Addition
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅
⋅

Pr. 390, Pr. 726 to Pr. 729
Pr. 52 setting value "67, 81 to 86"
Pr. 54 setting value "67, 85"
Pr. 158 setting value "67, 86"
Pr. 190 to Pr. 196 setting value "82 and 182"
Pr. 331 setting range "0 to 127"
Pr. 332 setting range "768"
Pr. 549 setting range "2"
Pr. 774 to Pr. 776 setting value "67, 81 to 86"

Partial modification
⋅ Data of 32-bit cumulative power monitor

404

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-G

F700_ouyouhen_NA_COVER.fm

1 ページ

２０１０年６月２４日　木曜日　午後２時３８分

INVERTER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

INVERTER

IB(NA)-0600217ENG-G (1007)MEE Printed in Japan

Specifications subject to change without notice.

FR-F700-NA INSTRUCTION MANUAL

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

G

FR-F720-00046 to 04750-NA
FR-F740-00023 to 12120-NA
OUTLINE

1

WIRING

2

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
OF THE INVERTER

3

PARAMETERS

4

PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

5

PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

6

SPECIFICATIONS

7



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.2
Modify Date                     : 2011:12:27 10:23:30-07:00
Create Date                     : 2010:07:22 18:41:37Z
Metadata Date                   : 2011:12:27 10:23:30-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : FR-F700-NA INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Creator                         : 
Description                     : IB-0600217ENG-G
Document ID                     : uuid:cbcbac82-a991-47d0-8caf-371ee09fb1f7
Instance ID                     : uuid:0fa9897f-e782-44f9-9795-25354ca2e9f7
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 416
Subject                         : IB-0600217ENG-G

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools